Home

This user manual describes all items concerning the operation of the

1. B XP Al BI XD C308 Al Bl PGSV 5VGND ZP CI St ZD m C B2__SVGND AQ B2 YP Q o piosy R300 Mat R319 svGND YD B B3 AP T as B3 posvy R301 p R320 svGND XALM M S B4__5VGND A4 B4 ZAM CH Oy posvy R302 Ma R30 svGND YALM AS B5__AALM AS BS XORG Cale posvy R303 vp R305 svGND ZORG AG B6 _5VGND A6 B6 YORG Co ce MA PGA C30 SVGND AURG AT A p7 B7__XSON MB PGB C305 SON G1 to _ a ZSON A8 ag pg __B8_SVGND PGB C307 ASON CG og RM XO A9 B9 YOI A9 B9 ZO T oy U300 AO AIO kio gio _B 0_SWGND PISV 16 yoce Fy b 12__SVGND SEA C10 Cio 5VGND_8 4__ PIOSV SEZ All B11 SB GND EN All BII cw no 2 VOND PGA cH en u ou no 0Y PGB A k2 yy B 2 5V0 NC I PO PGZ 2 ie PGA 5 6e PON POD ALB 5 B13 PGI OUr Net is VoD POR ele P 13 oum ng PIS POB Al4 kig ppg __BI4_SVGND na PG PGH Ce oy PGB 3 oura na 2 PGBe PG AIS kis gps B15 PG PGI c5 gjs PONM AIG 557 pie _BI6_SVGND U500 NMI Clo Cig 1 ia y2 R 2 AT gt py Oi DIS zo 2 Run 2 T i7 X 7 I4 Ry _ZD AIS B18 2A 4Y S RM et AIS B18 XD 9 B RG D CIS 3A 4Z RSG c18 PIOSV__16 6 XI AIS B19 7 vec 2Y m cg A19 B19 cso T 225 oN mo C B20 a 3y L S in A20 B20 S5VGND _ 8 TI XD C20 GND 3Z B 4 C20 MI B21 A21 B21 C21 Gy U501 aa ay cp B AD 1 fis iy 2 Rmo AD 22 o s P5 aa zoo Rw _AD a3 in p3 B2 APT Jo gy ERa YPt C23 63 YD 9 __B YP
2. uo ULN2803 1024y ons al A Ji Ny os OUTS Do nipe a 1 oD SVG Cl_ fy D a Y pE 3 Sve C_ Cs our Di Mabe poB 5 op10 wD a D MiG p 1 SVG CH OUTO DB HT ge gp BS D ODI wo A Di0 K p _B6 1l ai SoD O6_ Fy L D2 Mo eS 13 oD12 wD CT_ ey Di Mo ppm 15 SVG C8 ouri2 A D pB oDi oD13 VOW Oy OD AIO 5 po BO uo nRa aem o i f ULN2803 UT D4 All 1 5 oury R20 10K Lo e w opl4 5VGND CII a oe va D6 ALD 2 oO our R201 10K 2 1 M8 SVOD CI a B12 t gt OUTI D AIS 3 p B3 5 ont SE C3 ODIO A py Bid SVN CIE_ 0 ours ODI2 AS is gis B5 3 oD16 SVON CIS 2 D AIG p BIG 5 SVGN __CI6_ AP ouris D6 ATi g 21 17 oD17 SVG CIT_ DIS AIS S pig _BIS 19 SVG CIE cig ouri7 DO AID i pig BID 21 0 104V o0 SoD D Oy D AQ p B 23 SVN 0 Cy R23 02 OUTO Di MI o py A 25 2K2 oDi SO OO D g EA 27 Sia SO 5 outi DW OOO a o p B 29 on wo o a D30 Ad 4 31 D0 A 9g pag BS on SVGND 024 yy our ODI6 A5 aye ps _ B25 17 0D3 SVEN OS Ds AN6 26 9 as Bu B26 ODI 8 VOD C26 o6 OUI 0020 AQT o py B27 MI o SOD OT A 2 M8 23 03 n a Bg ono 5VGND C 28 Ours Da og B2 5 ops SVEN O29 Oy 6 A30 300027 26 8 30 B39 BSD on0s VGN G0 639 ons SiG GI e 30 AR 32 31 sven G A B32 0206 OUI C32 oD JE an oun SVOD 347 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Interface circuit method layout 3
3. Tool Number Tool code T04 T01 Decimal Corresponding parameter No 1 0010 2 P541 No 2 1000 8 P542 No 3 0001 1 P543 No 4 0100 4 P544 No 5 0111 7 P545 No 6 1101 13 P546 No 7 1011 11 P547 No 8 1110 14 P548 Parameter setting as follows Parameter Parameter Remark setting value P318 3 Tool change mode 3 P319 8 8 tool post P320 4 4 lines P408_d7 1 Bit parameter is set to table look up mode P541 tool 1 check signal 2 T01 tool P542 tool 2 check signal 8 T02 tool P543 tool 3 check signal 1 T03 tool P544 tool 4 check signal 4 T04 tool P545 tool 5 check signal 7 T05 tool P546 tool 6 check signal 13 TO6 tool P547 tool 7 check signal 11 T07 tool P548 tool 8 check signal 14 T08 tool 327 CGSR r Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 5 X3 Motor Interface The system can be matched with the drive units of the reaction stepper motor the compound stepper motor and AC servo motor by the motor drive unit interface X3 3 5 1 Signal definition Pin Standard Standard signal name Signal direction signal name explanation 1 XALM X drive unit alarm input Drive unit CNC terminal 1 XALM 9 ZALM 2 24V X Z drive power supply 2 24 10 OV pees eee a 3 XP X pulse positive terminal CNC Drive unit 3 XP 11 XP 4 ZP Z pulse positive terminal CNC Drive unit 4 ZP 12 7P 5 XD X positi
4. automatically creates the first block number N0000 and after each block is input to press ENTER the system automatically creates the next block number The program number increment is defined by P333 content The system automatically creates block number for increment according to 1 4 integer of P333 content Note 1 When the system finds that current row has no line number it will automatically create N1000 2 When the commands M98 M97 M91 M92 M93 M94 related to block number are executed there are no repetitive block number otherwise the system will alarm A block number can be repetitive without executing the above commands 2 4 Block A block with line number is composed of block number and many words a block without line number has no block number One block can contain 255 characters at most including space between words It is necessary to have the block number generated automatically by the system and can be modified in EDIT working mode A block can have or no many words When a block has many words one or more blank space must be input between words A complete block is as follows N0120 G1 X130 W 40 F50 N0120 block number G1 ready function X130 W 40 motion data F50 motion speed 141 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Enter end of block displayed in the screen But each program ends after pressing ENTER Notes 1 Each word
5. CNC device 1 RS232 CNC device 2 RS232 RXD TXD GND T The communication cable length must be less than 15m otherwise which will cause the skipping data distortion 310 Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection 3 2 X1 X2 Interface The CNC system X1 X2 interface have 23 channel switching input 18 channel switching output which use the photoelectric isolation 3 2 1 X1 interface signal definition ESP COn 16 24VGND 2 DecZ O 6 17 LI 3 Deck Oal 18 Lt 4 Decl Ool 19 AVD 5 MXZ2 4 O 20 RMLO 6 MXZ1 ae 21 MII 7 24VGND yw 22 2A4VGND 8 24V Ia 23 2 9 SOL Ton A 20 10 S02 25 M78 11 S03 5 26 M79 12 S04 o 27 24V 13 MH Ol 28 U0 14 M10 29 U02 15 SVC 30 AGD i RON FE S ST SP TCP gt PRES gt SHL 24VGND gt 24V X1 input output pin 44 D female In the table when the interface is not used to the standard signal it can be used to the general input output interface at the moment the interface parameter can be defined to the general input output interface Example when the interface pin31 is not used to the standard signal ST setting it parameter P412_d7 0 at the moment the interface pin31 is used to the general UI26 input interface 26 and can be used to other interfaces P511 is set to 26 i e the defined pin31 is the safety door check interface the user can see the position display SAGT of th
6. Fig 1 1 X Z plane rectangular coordinate system 1 front toolpost coordinate system X It is defined to be perpendicular with the rotary centerline of spindle X positive direction is the one that the tool leaves from the rotary center of spindle Z It is defined to be coincident with the rotary centerline of spindle and Z positive direction is the one that the tool leaves from the headstock X O Z Fig 1 2 X Z plane rectangular coordinate system 2 rear tool post coordinate system The coordinate system in the manual defines X Z based on Fig 1 1 front tool post coordinate system Some commands of G codes must be converse when Fig 1 2 rear tool post coordinate system defines X Z 135 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 1 When G02 programming based on Fig 1 1 Fig 1 2 uses G03 programming when G03 programming based on Fig 1 1 Fig 1 2 uses G02 programming 2 When G41 programming based on Fig 1 1 Fig 1 2 uses G42 programming when G42 programming based on Fig 1 1 Fig 1 2 uses G41 programming 1 2 Machine Coordinate System Machine Zero Machine coordinate system is reference for the system to count coordinates and is fixed on the machine Machine zero or machine reference point is a fixed point on the machine Generally it is set at the position of X Z max stroke with the machine zero check device and do not use the machine zero return function or set bit parameters P406_d7 P406_d6 P4
7. Check the spindle relative part resolve 358 Spindle running The spindle rotate speed is checked ie error or TSi parameter P402_d6 to is abnormal to be zero after the spindle is started forbid its function E359 Alarm pressure The system has checked MEOW Check the hydraulic pressure equipment pressure and lasted the parameter resolve the error is low P332 specified time E360 Alarm protecting door The safety door don t close in AUTO Close the safety door isn t closed E361 Material convey The system has checked it s out of Change the rod then go on the machining alarm rod in M20 automatism stop alarm E362 Lubricating The system executes the M32 M33 Set the parameter P506 to be the doesn t start command without lubricating function corresponding lubricating control interface E363 363 Tool NO he target tool number exceeds the Modify tool number or modify P319 to be age parameter P319 specified value in ihe maxima system tool number exceeds limit changing tool y E364 Tool post The tool pose champing signal IS Check the tool pose champing signal and effective always in tool changing and release overtime releasing tool post resolve error E365 The spinde and Y axis allow Y axis is speed ee ee but the system Execute M47 first change the spindle to ont allow to control the Y axis i control mode moving in current spindle lo ation ontrol mode non position control mode E366 Clamp When the following chuck respo
8. Power supply 24V 24V 308 Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection 3 1 Front Cover Communication Interface The CNC system can connect with the external PC RS232 interface or another CNC system by the serial to perform the data exchange or transmission also perform the data exchange or transmission by USB interface and external U disk The front cover communication position layout is as follows RS232 USB o o e i bd e e e e Explanation 1 Serial communication interface RS232 communication pin 9 D male to connect with PC RS232 interface 2 USB interface connect with U disk 3 1 1 USB interface USB interface is used to connect the CNC system and U disk The system not only sends the data to the U disk and also receives the data in the U disk by the USB interface The U disk is directly inserted into the USB interface on the system panel and the system automatically identifies and opens the content of the U disk when the U disk creates the file and file name in the root catalog according to the file catalog requirements of the system Note 1 The system USB interface must be covered without being used and without being exposed for long time otherwise which causes the surface metal being oxidated and reduces the interface sensitivity 2 Do not keeping the U disk in the system USB interface for long time otherwise which causes the
9. press ENTER and the system executes the operation 1 immediate execution the tool change is executed immediately in JOG working mode d4_ tool setting record check 0 close the system does not display the program comprehensive check prompt alarm which is not consistent with the toolsetting record 1 open the tool offset number has been set and the toolsetting exist when other tool number still uses the tool offset number the system displays program comprehensive check prompt alarm Example T0205 is not consistent with the toolsetting record T0105 d2__M function output in pressing reset key 0 close after the reset key is pressed the system closes M03 M04 M08 M32 output signal 1 donot close after the reset key is pressed the system does not close M03 M04 M08 M32 output signal d1__M function alarm 0 terminating program program terminates when M10 M11 M78 M79 Txx alarm 1 prompt selection the system prompts whether the operator tries again when M10 M11 M78 M79 Txx functions alarm When the system meets P401_d3 0 substep execution for many commands in one block and P403_d1 1 prompt in M function alarm the trial again function is valid The system alarms and terminates the machining programs when the relative commands have not been 110 Operation Chapter Four System Operation completed The trail again commands include T chuck control M10 M11 and tail
10. Cutting feedrate F In Auto mode 30mm min In JOG mode Keep last power on state Keep till being changed Conversion spindle speed S Keep last power on state Keep till being changed Spindle gear MANUAL slow feed rapid feed state Shifting gear spindle gear SO Conversion spindle gear M41 Slow feed Keep till being changed Keep till being changed Feedrate override Keep last power on state Keep till being changed Rapid override Keep last power on state Keep till being changed Spindle state Cooling state M05 spindle stop M09 cooling OFF Keep till being changed Keep till being changed Chuck state M11 chuck release Keep till being changed Lubricating state M33 lubricating OFF Keep till being changed T number state Keep last power on state Keep till being changed Tailstock state M79 tailstock run out state Keep till being changed Set spindle speed position mode M48 Keep till being changed 4 1 3 2 The initial mode is the automatic initialization setting state before the system executes the machining Initial mode and modal of program program i e the initial default state of the default programming word and speed word Program initialization state of the system G command G00 G40 G97 G98 Cutting speed 30mm min Miscellaneous function current state System coordinates current coordinates are
11. or G01 X U ZW D G02 G03 G05 X U Z W IL K Command function insert one circular between linear and circular the inserted circular is tangent to the linear and the circular and the radius is the data behind the command address D D S a e 3 Circular to circular Command format G02 G03 X U Z W R D G02 G03 X U Z W R Or 167 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual G02 G03 X U zZz W R D G02 G03 G05 X U Z W lL K Or G02 G03 G05 X U Z W IL K D G02 G03 G05 X U Z WL lL K_ Or G02 G03 G05 X U Z W lL K D G02 G03 X U Z WL R Command function insert one circular between two circular blocks the inserted circular is tangent to the two circular blocks and the radius is the data behind the command address D gt 4 Circular to linear Command format G02 G03 X U Z W R D G01 X U Z W Or G02 G03 G05 X U Z WL IL K D G01 X U Z W Command function insert one circular block between the circular and the linear the inserted circular block is tangent to the circular and the linear and the radius is the data behind the command address D D S _ 4 4 3 Special cases The chamfering function is invalid or the system alarms as follows 1 Linear chamfering A The chamfering function is invalid when two interpolation straight lines are in the same linear 168 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions oe ks B Li
12. pitch compensation au value um starting point value in radius mode when gt A ompensation is valid gt is invalid mm X moves to each point A 0 0 000 000 0 40 80 80000 19994 3 B 80 160 160000 159988 6 145 290 290000 289982 9 225 450 450000 449975 12 5 260 520 520000 519972 14 C 290 580 580000 579970 15 D 450 900 900000 899940 30 E 520 1040 1040000 1039952 24 Note When the system parameter and programming setting are in the radius mode and X coordinate movement is equal to the input deviation data the system compensates fully the deviation value of the point when it is in the diameter mode and X coordinate movement is the double of the input deviation point data the system compensates fully the deviation value because the actual movement is only the half of the displayed coordinate value 249 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 7 1 Chapter Seven General Programming Rules and Examples General Programming Rules The command compiling must meet the rules in one block which can be convenient to the system identifying them it is suggested that the command character should be in the fore and the data field should be in the later The system executes the Programming Rule Check and the program meeting the programming rules can be compiled the system alarms and prompts Not Meet Programming Rule when there is wrong 250 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 Th
13. Command Meaning number keyboard scan once 1 When the key is pressed the r5001 equals to the input value when there is no key pressed r5001 equals to zero 2 waiting for the keyboard input a character waiting until the key is pressed and record it to r5001 3 waiting for the keyboard to input a character with cursor and character display the key isn t released the cursor clue the key is released the value is recorded to r5001 4 Waiting for the keyboard input a character and releasing press key 5 Waiting for the keyboard input a character and releasing press key with cursor and character display 6 Waiting for the keyboard input a numerical value and finished by ENTER giving up by press ESC then the input value will be zero Note When the assignment is outside 1 6 it will be ineffective Explanation R5001 assignment is the working mode for setting keyboard register the input value which is get after executed the command is stored in register r5001 it can be read or use for the conditional judge For example r5001 4 the system is waiting for the keyboard input a character it will be executed until the key is released when r5001 51 then P1500 When press 3 it turn to P1500 the ASCII value of 3 is 51 Explanation 1 When the keyboard scan command 3 or 5 is chosen the key will be displayed in the window when the display is open but when the display don t open the key won t be displa
14. F pitch parameter __ pitch compensation parameter P1000 P1905 The pitch compensation parameters are divided into variable and constant interval according to the setting of P411_d6 The detailed is referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter 6 Pitch Error Compensation 4 6 4 5 Parameters related to spindle cooling __ P300 P317 P326 P329 P410 Spindle configuration __bit parameter P410 password level 1 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 Reserved reserved d7__ spindle controlling output 0 level the system level output controls the spindle M03 M04 M05 cooling M08 M09 1 pulse the system level output controls the spindle M03 M04 MO05 cooling M08 MO9 P326 is the pulse width d6__spindle S control 0 gear shifting the spindle is the gear shifting spindle and the system uses S to execute the gear shifting forbid M41 M44 1 frequency the spindle is the frequency S is the spindle speed M41 M44 gear d5_S gear shifting output 0 direct the control signal of spindle gear is to directly output SO1 S04 forbid SO5 S15 99 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 1 encoder the control signal of spindle gear is the encode output SOO S15 the parameter and P310 spindle gear control covered lines are used together When the setting is the direct output each control line controls one gear and the all gear quantity and P310 quantity are consistent when the encode outpu
15. S display character string Example when the character string 00 want to display 1 9 please press the key to choose the need repeated working procedure the block content is as following N5000 00S 1 9 please press the key to choose the needed repeated working procedure N5010 15002 1000 display the set 0 character string r5010 1 ASCII code decimal expression Format serial number blank D character code blank character code blank character code Example when the 04 character string displays 1 9 GongXu the block content is as following N5000 04D 49 95 57 32 71 111 110 103 88 117 58 N5010 1r5002 1004 display the fourth character string Explanation 1 the serial number must be two digit figure the range is from 00 to 99 total 100 set character string and the lowered two digit command must correspond with the serial number then it can display the content of this character string 2 Behind the S blank the system treats the content as character string it can t add the note behind the character string 3 Each set of character string won t exceed 40 characters 20 Chinese characters 4 The character string can written before or behind the program it generally is written in the end and won t impact the program execution speed Program Example It mainly demonstrate the explanation of keyboard scan register display window register in the following program Suppose there are t
16. ot eos D The circular chamfering function is invalid when one circular and another one are tangential The circular chamfering function is valid when the circular tangency is as follows 4 4 4 Chamfer supplementary explanation 1 The chamfer function is invalid when D L is less than 0 01 2 The system continuously executes the chamfer 3 the system does not execute the chamfer function when the next block is not G01 G02 G03 G05 4 Do not use the chamfer command in the compound command G71 G72 5 The chamfer function is invalid in G41 G42 6 The chamfer function is invalid when P401_d5 0 7 The chamfer function is valid in Z X plane and is not related to Y 4 5 Thread Cutting Command The CNC system can execute many kinds of thread cutting function including machining inch metric single multi thread variable pitch thread and tapping cycle the thread run out length and the angle can be changed the cycle thread cutting executes the unilateral cutting which can protect the tool and improve the surface finish The thread function includes continuous thread cutting command G33 170 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions variable pitch thread cutting command G34 tapping cycle cutting command G32 thread cycle cutting command G92 The machine with the thread cutting function must be installed with the spindle encoder which lines is set by P209 In thread cutting X or Z moves to execute the thread mac
17. system overcuts one tool nose radius value in starting tool Program 110 T0101 tool change G00 X100 Z50 tool center moves to Z50 0 X100 0 G00 X0 Z3 tool center offsets actually moves to Z3 0 X0 G42 create the tool nose radius compensation 233 CGSN I His i GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual G01 Z0 F300 start cutting and actual move to Z0 X 4 0 X16 move to Z 2 0 X16 0 Z 14 F200 move to Z 16 0 X16 0 G02 X28 W 6 R6 move to Z 22 0 X28 0 G01 W 7 move to Z 27 0 X28 0 X32 move to Z 29 0 X32 0 Z 35 move to Z 37 0 X32 0 G40 cancel tool nose radius compensation G00 X90 move to Z 35 0 X90 0 G00 X100 Z50 M02 move to Z50 0 X100 0 Because there is the tool nose radius the imaginary tool nose does not stop at the coordinates ob the block after one block is executed which is caused by that the system uses the best tool center motion path calculation instead of the program execution error In OFFSET working mode the setting between the tool radius R and imaginary tool nose direction Tool number offset Z X R T S 001 2 0 3 002 006 007 Fig 5 4 machining example 5 1 6 Toolsetting and tool nose number of ball tool For the ball tool the displayed by the system is the coordinates of the imaginary tool nose But in fact the system cannot move the tool nose radius center t
18. 2 3 4 Start the spindle again traverse the tool to cut a end face of the workpiece Z does not move the operator presses A and the system automatically memorizes the tool nose position and displays the toolsetting icon q flashing and then Z moves out the safe position and the spindle stops rotating Select one point as the reference point measure Z distance from the cut end face to the selected reference point Press K and the system display Toolsetting Z to input the measured data and press ENTER The system prompts Confirm tool offset number XX it automatically presets one offset number and the operator directly presses ENTER when the offset number is consistent with the input Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after inputting offset number The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it to the specified offset number Explanation 1 In toolsetting icon flashing the operator can execute the spindle start stop the coordinate moving in tool change the system automatically cancels the toolsetting icon and does not memorize the previous toolsetting point 59 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 2 Without the toolsetting icon the operator directly presses K or I and the system takes the current point as the toolsetting point Fixed point toolsetting mode Find one reference point on the machine or the workpiece First set the r
19. 5 Press ENTER to confirm the input save the input data to the current selected too offset number parameter area 125 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 6 The data which has been modified has before it which means the modification is successfully executed Relative input of tool offset data 1 Select the OFFSET working mode move the highlight to the required changing data 2 Press INPUT or directly input the required data 3 Input data by keyboard Press to cancel the mistaken input data and input the correct Press ALTER and the system operates the input data and the previous number value of the selected parameter When the input is positive the system adds the input data to the previous number value of the selected parameter to save the parameter area When the input is negative the system subtracts the input data to the previous number value of the selected parameter to save the tool offset parameter area corresponding to the current tool number 4 7 3 Offset value in each group clear Offset value in each group clears as follows 1 Select the tool OFFSET working mode 2 Move the highlight to S toolsetting record data which requires to clear 3 Press delete to clear Z offset value X offset value R tool radius T tool shape S toolsetting record 4 7 4 Tool offset hp6 function Press hp6 in OFFSET working mode and the display is as follows 4 7 4 1 Communication and standard for
20. P409_d6 1 the hydraulic chuck is inner P409_d5 1 the hydraulic chuck needs the respond check it is green when the respond signal is normal otherwise it is yellow P409_d5 0 the hydraulic chuck does not need the respond check P409_d3 0 the hydraulic chuck control signal is controlled by the level P409_d3 1 the hydraulic chuck control signal is pulse control the pulse width is defined by P327 time P409_d1 0 the hydraulic chuck pedal switch input is valid P409_d1 1 the hydraulic chuck pedal switch input is invalid Execution process of chuck command In outer chuck mode After M10 is executed the system outputs the chuck clamping signal from M10 pin the output pulse or the level signal is selected by the parameter and the chuck clamping operation ends without needing the respond check signal when needing the respond signal the system waits the chuck clamping in position after it has checked the chuck clamping in position signal interface pin RM10 0 and RM11 1 in the set time P329 M responds check time specifying otherwise the system prompts Alarm for chuck clamping respond check 99 overtime After M11 is executed the system outputs the chuck releasing signal from M11 pin the output pulse or the level signal is selected by the parameter and the chuck clamping operation ends without needing the respond check signal when needing the respond signal the system waits the chuck rele
21. SS Rapid feed Relative parameter It is the same that of G74 Note 1 In G75 the system is not relative to the tool width the end point Z should be the actual 203 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual subtracting or adding the tool width it is determined by the tool infeed direction 2 K E are no sign The system executes the operation according to K I when K is more than I 3 G75 is in the alone block without other commands 4 Inthe outer grooving cycle E cannot be 0 otherwise the system appears E269 alarm in the outer cutting cycle E can be 0 which is valid Example Fig 4 36 grooving cycle tool width 5 mm tool infeed once 6 mm retracting 2mm once offset 5mmonce F 150 mm min N0010 GO X125 Z100 position to the starting point N0020 G75 X80 Z35 l6 K2 E5 F150 grooving cycle The width of tool is added to the end point coordinates N0030 M30 i B x y Fig 4 36 grooving cycle 4 15 Compound Cycle To simply the programming and reduce the counting the compound cycle is applied Although the system only defines the path of finish machining in programming it can automatically specify the tool path in the course of roughing 4 15 1 G71 axial plane roughing compound cycle Using the command can realize the compound cycle cutting of one group of slope command collection The system firstly starts from the starting point to rough the blank along the axial and then c
22. USB device doesn t create the Create the valid catalogue and file in USB content or file specified catalogue and file device E005 USB save file fail USB saving failure Save again or check USB device No enough memory Change the bigger U disc or check U disc E006 in USB No enough U disc rest room iorelease more space E007 Create content fail U disc failure in creating the Check USB device and create the specified catalogue appointed catalogue again Create file fail F Check USB device or create the specified E008 Failure in creating file format file again E009 USB read file fail USB is failed in reading file Check the USB device or read file again E010 Fail to find dedicated USB is failed in reading catalogue Check the USB device or create this content or file list catalogue again E011 File is too big Too large file File is too large modify the file Fail to open file Can t open the file in specified Check the file name suffix if they can E012 catalogue or file is destroyed match the rule or check the USB equipment create the file again E013 No dedicated file The file in specified list does not Create the file in specified file exist or has been destroyed F Parameter number exceeds the Change the parameter number into the E014 Invalid para NO allowed range available parameter number range Invalid character in parameter Delete the invalid character in the E015 Para NO not standard number does not meet the parameter number st
23. When P is omitted the system orderly executes the next block when the state of the check input signal meets the command requirement and always waits when it does not meet P 0 the system skips to the block specified P when the input signal state meets the command requirement otherwise orderly executes the next block P is omitted M91 check the state of No 1 user When the state is valid the input terminal is connected with OV wait till the input is invalid M92 check the state of No 1 user When the state is invalid the input terminal is broken with OV wait till the input is valid M93 check the state of No 2 user When the state is valid the input terminal is connected with OV wait till the input is invalid 151 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual M94 check the state of No 2 user When the state is invalid the input terminal is broken with OV wait till the input is valid when P 0 M91 check the state of No 1 user When the state is valid input terminal connects with OV skip to the block specified by P otherwise the next block is executed M92 check the state of No 1 user when the state is invalid input terminal cuts off OV skip to the block specified by P otherwise the next block is executed M93 check the state of No 2 user when the state is valid input terminal connects with OV skip to the block specified by P otherwise the next block is executed M94 check the state of No
24. absolute relative coordinates of thread end point Z movement of axial thread cannot be 0 X movement of end face thread cannot be 0 K length from the starting point to the end point of thread run out in the thread machining axis K cannot be negative and must be less than the movement of thread machining axis movement of the run out axis direction in the thread run out there is no run out when it is omitted For the straight thread being positive means to execute the thread run out positively being 178 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions negative means to execute the thread run out negatively R pitch incremental or reducing value per revolution of the spindle The pitch decreases when R is negative the pitch increases when R is positive H command bit parameter H_d7 H_d2 reserved H_d0 0 the system defaults it to zero H_d0 1 thread run out when the long axis reduces speed and K is invalid H_d1 0 pitch skip increases or reduces after the spindle rotates one turn H_d1 1 the pitch even increases or reduce after the spindle rotates some angle Field X Z U W 9999 999mm 9999 999mm l 9999 999mm 9999 999mm K 0 9999 998mm P 0 001mm 500 000mm the negative sign is added to the front of the range When it is the positive it means the axial thread When it is the negative it means the end face thread E 0 060 25400 000 tooth inch Q 0 360 000 R 500 mm pitch
25. sssesseseeeseeseeeeseeesecceccoecoeccoccsecoososeecessoe 88 4 6 3 2 Parameter draw and solidifying eeeeeeereeeereeeereeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeseeeesseeeeeeeeereneeseeeeseeeeseee 91 4 6 3 3 System software upgrade and memory update eeseeccossosceccosoosecccooooscecossosscecossosseccossosseeooso 92 4 6 3 4 Functional command privilegeeeeeeeeeeeereeeereeeereeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeereeesreeeereeeereeeereeeseeoresereesene 93 4 6 4 Parameter explanation eeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeesereesereesereeseeeesereeseeeessreesereesereesereessereeesreeereeeeneesenesereesene 93 4 6 4 1 Reference point software limit parameter bit parameter __ POOO POZO eseese 93 4 6 4 2 Parameters related to zero return function __P021 P026 P109 P111 P406 PAQT oeeeeesesesssecsoessoecscoscseseseoeseoeseoescoessoessoessoecsoecsoecsseesoscssseoeseosseoeseosscoessoessoessoessoecsoecsoeessoessoessoessosessses 94 4 6 4 3 Traverse speed acceleration time parameter __P100 P108 P112 P118 eee 96 4 6 4 4 Parameters related to transmission and compensation __P200 P209 P411 P1000 P1905 ssssseessessseesseessecscsecsesesescocseoeseoossoessoessooscscsoseoeseoeseoseseoessoessoessoessoessoecsoesssesssscssscossesssssssses 97 4 6 4 5 Parameters related to spindle cooling P300 P317 P326 P329 P4105 99 4 6 4 6 Parameters related to tool post __P318 P325 P408 eeeeeeseeereeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee 102 4 6 4 7 Parameters related to chuck tailstock __ P327 P328 P409 seerereereererereereseesesee
26. 1200 i spindle encoder lines the fist is esaa which is taken a Imiscellaneous function the parameter following the first P300 1000 max speed of M41 gear serens 0 the parameter content is necessary P342 254 no privilege color PXXX parameter number and colon bit control parameter which cannot be separated P400 00000000 running setting BN ee ee S means other parameters and the linterface parameter table does not list all parameter The P512 O feed device alarm check Dalm parameter receiving can be some of all parameters lvariable initial value P600 O variable r01 pitch compensation parameter P1000 0 0 0 0 0 O O0 0 0 O P1905 O IY pitch compensation interval 4 6 3 2 Parameter draw and solidifying The parameter seen in the window are saved to the system SRAM storage which has the power down protection function when the main board battery has problem the parameter loses The system has the parameter initialization function according to the differences of the matched motor drive unit the system can execute the different initialization operation the system matched with DA98 series drive unit should execute the servo initialization the system matched with DY3 series drive unit should execute the stepper initialization The main differences of the initial parameter of the servo and the stepper are X motion parameter and others are the same The differences of servo s
27. 30 i Fig 4 46 Cutting shape is as Fig 4 46 N0010 T11 N0020 GOO X200 Z30 M03 S500 position to starting point start the spindle 216 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions N0030 G73 U0 5 WO 5 X0 5mm Z 0 5mm finishing allowance N0040 G73 X80 Z0 P50 Q100 114 K14 L5 F300 X tool retraction 14mm Z 14mm in roughing N0050 G01 2 20 F100 N0070 X120 Z 30 N0080 Z 50 blocks for workpiece shape N0090 G02 X160 Z 70 R20 N0100 G01 X180 Z 80 N0110 T22 N0120 G00 X200 2Z30 N0130 G730 finishing with finishing tool M30 4 15 4 G76 multi thread cutting cycle command group G76 thread cycle cutting path is the same that of G92 The difference is that G92 completes the cutting depth by the consecutive command but G76 informs the last cutting face and the gradual cutting depth information in advance and is arranged by the system to execute the gradual cutting depth and to machine the qualified thread G76 command group includes 2 commands 676 D L Q P L R G76 cycle information G76 X U _ ZW _ PCE _ L K R L_ H_ G76 thread cutting The followings are introduced separately G76 multi thread cutting cycle command G76 is called the multi thread cutting cycle command to realize the multi thread cutting When the thread angle is 0 each thread cycle is from the starting point to the cut in point the thread axis does not move and the single axis of the non thread axis moves to the cut in point and the
28. 4 Ww WY state value of input interface variable 0 LOW or 1 HIGH the external signal valid and the pin is connected with OV in LOW it is invalid in HIGH The out interface variable state when the system output O the external forms the conductive loop when the system output 1 the system is in high resistance and the external cannot form the conductive loop r1001 r1025 are the input interface states r2001 r2025 are the output interface states 8 groups to display the first line displays the first group r1008 r1007 r1006 r1005 r1004 r1003 r1002 r1001 and others is in order reason by analogy Others search the executed block quantity the spindle wave range in the thread machining program nested call layers and program cycle in executing subprogram Before the system does not start the machining program macro variable can be modified manually the modification method is to select the required modification macro variable the operator presses ENTER to input the value to change presses ENTER again and the modification is completed 4 5 9 Program reference point return in AUTO working mode The function is valid in_initial state of AUTO working mode After the system sets the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point it starts the machining program when the machine slider stops any position At the moment the first movement command of the machining program must be in GOO must execute X Z
29. 4 G22 G80 can embed G90 G92 G94 G71 G72 and other cycle command Example Machining the workpiece as Fig 4 42a cycle programming with G22 G80 as follows NO000 G50 X100 Z100 Define a coordinate system N0010 M3 S01 Start the spindle set to the low speed N0020 M8 Cooling ON 222 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions N0030 G00 X10 2Z30 Rapidly position to the starting point of the cycle N0040 G22 L3 Program cycles three times N0050 G01 W 5 F50 Znegatively cuts 5mm F 50mm min N0060 U5 W 5 X positively cuts 5mm Z negatively cuts 5mm N0070 G80 End of cycle body N0080 G26 X Z rapidly retracts to program reference point NOO90 M5 Stop the spindle N0100 M9 Cooling OFF N0110 M2 End of program 10 20 30 Z 10 N50 Starting point z N60 7 7 _ N50 j N60 20 N50 Neo 7 7 25 28 5 End point R m g3 a b Fig 4 42 Machining the arc as Fig 4 42b the cycle programming with G22 G80 as follows NO000 GOO X36 Z 5 Rapidly position to the starting point of arc N0010 G22 L3 Program cycle three times N0020 G01 U 2 F50 X executes the tool infeed 1mm N0030 G03 W 14 28 R10 X Z executes the tool infeed cutting concave arc N0040 G01 W14 28 F500 Z executes the tool retraction to starting point of arc N0050 G80 End of cycle body N0060 M30 The above two examples are programmed according to the actual shape Fig 4 42a its programming can be used to the roughing including smithing and
30. Alarm for tailstock forward in position respond check overtime After M79 is executed the system outputs the tailstock backward signal from M79 pin the output pulse or the level signal is selected by the parameter and the tailstock backward operation ends without needing the respond check signal when needing the respond signal the system waits the tailstock backward in position after it has checked the tailstock backward in position signal interface pin RM78 0 and RM79 1 in the set time P329 M responds check time specifying otherwise the system prompts Alarm for tailstock backward in position respond check overtime Besides using commands the external pedal switch also can control the hydraulic tailstock The system switches the forward backward by M78 M79 when the pedal switch is stepped once Tailstock pedal switch releases before the system is switched from other working mode to JOG or AUTO working mode otherwise the system alarms normally 1 M78 M79 output time sequence in pulse control mode Executing M78 Executing M79 Executing M78 Input signal M78 pin M79 pin t1 M78 M79 output hold time is set by P328 in pulse control mode 63 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 2 M78 M79 output time sequence in level control mode Executing M78 Executing M79 Executing M78 M78 pin M79 pin Note 1 When the hydraulic tailstock control is valid the sy
31. RESET key when the system enters the press key test window at the moment 4 1 2 Power off The system is turned off as follows CGSN I HSZ GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 1 The power switch of the CNC is turned off 2 The power switch of the machine is turned off Check before the system is turned off 1 X Z Y are in the stop state 2 Miscellaneous function spindle cooling OFF 3 Turn off the power supply Note 1 The system should be checked itself and initialized when it is turned on firstly it is completed by the machine manufacturer and the operator cannot execute the operation otherwise the parameter set by the machine manufacture will lose 2 Operations related to turn off the machine power supply are referred to the operator manual machine manufacturer 4 1 3 System program initial and modal 4 1 3 1 Initial and modal The initial mode of the system is defined to be a special initial state of all functions set by itself when the system is turned on all auxiliary functions do not execute the actual output The modal of the system is defined to be their kept states after the system executes all functions Initial mode and modal of the system System state Initial mode Modal Machine coordinate system of the system Tool nose coordinate system of the system Keep last power on state Keep last power on state Keep till being changed Keep till being changed
32. S02 the system releases S04 S03 as other use P310 1 actual output controlled point are S01 the system releases S04 S03 S02 as other use P310 0 actual all point doe not output the system releases S04 S03 S02 S01 as other use 3 The initial gear state of the system ON is M41 Execution process and signal output time sequence of spindle M gear shifting When the CNC is turn on it states is controlled by P400_d6 spindle gear memory to whether it memories the spindle gear or not 1 When P400_d6 is 0 the system is turned on after it is turned off the spindle gear is not memorized and the system default the 1 gear of the spindle and M41 M44 do not output 2 When is P400_d6 the system is turned on after it is turned off the spindle gear is memorized The system does not execute the gear shifting when the specified gear is consistent with the current gear If not the system executes the gear shifting as follows Execute one of M41 M42 M43 M44 the value unit millivolt set by P314 output voltage in the spindle gear shifting is output to the analog voltage to the spindle servo or the converter The system closes the previous gear output signal after it delays P311 frequency spindle gear shifting time 1 3 The system outputs the new gear signal after it delays P313 frequency spindle gear shifting interval time When the system is connected with the checking gear shifting in position input signal M411 52
33. d6__ pitch compensation value expression method 0 variable interval called the inflection point description method each axis can be input 150 groups of inflection point 98 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 1 constant interval called the constant description method each axis can be input 300 compensation points the interval between two points is equal Because the compensation data formats of the inflection point description method and the constant interval description method are different the system prompts whether it confirms the modification in modifying the bit parameter When it confirms the modification the previous compensation data is cleared the data is input according to the new format d5_ tool nose radius compensation function 0 invalid tool nose radius compensation command G41 G42 are invalid 1 valid tool nose radius compensation command G41 G42 are valid d4_ tool radius compensation mode 0 linearity transition the system executing the closed angle mode is the linearity transition in executing the tool nose radius compensation 1 arc transition the system executing the closed angle mode is the arc transition in executing the tool nose radius compensation d1__ backlash compensation mode 0 low speed II ZIXIY executes the backlash at the low speed the low speed value is P103 P104 P105 1 fast II ZIXIY executes the backlash at the fast the fast value is P100 P101 P102
34. doesn t exist in this program i e the system has not found the line number for the call or the transfer E216 Line number repeat Repeated program line number in There is repeated program line program makes the block number in modifying program Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number G71 G72 M96 M97 M98 not be identified i e the program has more than two call or transfer needed line number E217 Program stock data System EMS memory error or program Need the professional to check has err error the system all sided E218 Errors in variable The variable number exceeds the set Using the usable variable NO range number E219 Edit area is System battery is shortage Need to clear out program unusable Edit the program again E220 Sentences In the statement operation the divisor is Modify the divisor in macro calculate divisor is 0 Zero command not to be zero E221 Not assign a value Input interface variable is read only Modify source program to variable can t evaluate it i e input E222 Prog executes The data has problem in program Power on again information lost translate and edit process E224 Buffer area file too The editing single program is too big Modify source program big E225 Orbit data can t Edit error can t make the tool nose Modify source program compensate radius compensation E226 Coordinate
35. koa oo set the judgement condition to the Modify program put right not initalize process monitor before startup E401 In macro divisor The divisor is zero in statement Modify the divisor in macro command let it is 0 operation don t be zero E402 The process monitor assignment Modify program put right not support statement has assignment monitor operation which is not supported by calculation the system i e square root sine operation E403 r5008 data error all the variable r5008 illegal Modify program put right E404 Variable data r6xxx Illegally used the undefined r6xxx Modify program put right error series variable E405 Variable data r4xxx Illegally used the undefined r4xxx Modify program put right error series variable E406 r4003 can t be The illegal written operation is Modify program put right made to variable r4003 spindle written real time speed E407 r4007 can t be The illegal written operation is Modify program put right j made to variable r4007 spindle written real time speed 274 Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E408 r4008 can t be The illegal written operation is Modify program put right made to variable r4008 spindle written real time speed E409 Not assign a The condition statement in process Modify program put right value to r6xxx in m
36. parameters related to G33 172 Before the system enters raising speed it firstly checks whether the thread cutting speed exceeds P113 if it does the system alarms to terminate the thread machining Raising speed phrase Z raises speed at P103 initial speed Acceleration time of raising speed phase is P116 When the system executes the thread run out X executes rapidly the thread run out at P101 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions speed Z decelerates to the initial speed P103 When the system executes the thread run out its acceleration time is P117 The boundary of thread two machining modes is P306 In the thread machining the system checks the spindle speed by the spindle encoder lines P209 when the spindle speed wave is more than P307 the system pauses and alarm after the thread machining ends P403_d0 0 the system does not check whether the spindle speed is stable in the thread machining P403_d0 1 the system checks whether the spindle speed is stable in the thread machining G33 execution process G33 execution process is as follows taking example of axial thread cutting Fig 4 8a G33 path 1 l 0 the end of thread without run out Check the spindle speed count the reference speed of thread machining according to the speed and the lead P When the counted result exceeds P113 max cutting feedrate the system alarms Before it the user must confirm the
37. spindle analog voltage according to the current gear setting value and the gear shifting ends When the spindle configuration setting is the gear shifting SOO S15 execute the gear shifting S gear shifting encoder output execute 2 3 4 bit encode according to the spindle gear controlling the covered line quantity max speed of M41 M42 M43 M44 __ miscellaneous parameter P300 P301 P302 P303 The parameter is max spindle speed of M41 M42 M43 M44 When the system uses the converter controlling the spindle and the spindle gear is M41 M42 M43 M44 and the system outputs 10V analog voltage it corresponds to the max speed of the machine P300 P301 P302 P303 are invalid when the spindle multi gear switching controls the spindle unit r min Lowest speed of spindle with constant surface __ miscellaneous parameter P304 The parameter defines the lowest speed in the constant surface cutting the calculation formula according to the constant surface cutting speed Surface speed spindle speed X 11 1000 X unit mm spindle speed unit r min When X is less than some value and the calculated spindle speed is less than P304 value the 100 Operation Chapter Four System Operation spindle speed keeps P304 speed to execute the machining Max spindle speed with constant surface speed __ miscellaneous parameter P305 The parameter defines the max speed in the constant surface cutting the calculation formula according to the consta
38. system interface to be aged and damages the U disk 3 After the U disk is used the user must press ESC to close the U disk before pulling out it at the moment the USB icon displayed on the system window disappears and it can be pulled out from the system USB interface otherwise which damages the system hardware and the U disk 3 1 2 Serial RS232 technical specifications e Level standard RS232 level e Communication baud 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400bps are selected by the parameters 309 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 1 3 Serial RS232 signal definition Pin Signal Signal Signal name explanation direction e s 2 RXD 2 RXD Receiving PC CNC e 3 TD data 7 RTS 2 e 3 TXD Sending CNC PC 8 CIS data 7 RTS Unused 8 CTS unused 3 1 4 Connecting with external PC by RS232 Cable length lt 15m CNC device Covers of PC and CNC are connected and then are earthed T When the system performs the data with the external PC the user must use our developed communication software T The communication cable length cannot exceed 15m otherwise which causes the data be distortion Y For protecting RS232 interface circuit from being damaged by the static electricity the coats of the CNC and PC should be earthed 3 1 5 Connecting with another CNC system by RS232 communication interface communication connections between GSK928TEa Cable length lt 15m
39. to X1 X2 interface method connection 3 4 3 Function description The tool change mode is set by P318 The tool change mode and the control time sequence are as follows 3 4 3 1 Tool change mode 0 P318 0 tool change mode 0 optional to the line up tool post 3 4 3 2 Tool change mode 1 P318 1 tool post type 1 tool change mode 1 is applied to the general 4 tool electromotive turn tool post tool change CW and the clamped CCW Example P318 5 6 7 8 the system executes the tool change in the tool change mode 1 Execution steps as follows 1 After the tool change is executed the system judges whether the target tool number is the current tool if itis the system does not the tool change output control till the tool offset value is modified otherwise the system executes the next step 2 According to the new tool offset number the system counts the new tool nose coordinates and displays it 3 The system outputs the tool post CW signal TL checks the tool signal of the target tool and close TL output after it checks the signal when P325 the time upper of tool change shifting is in the set time and has not checked the tool signal it closes the TLt toutput and alarms Check tool signal overtime 4 The system output tool post CCW signal TL after the time set by the delay data parameter P321 t1 5 The followings are executed based on whether P408_d6 has the locking signal TCP e Delay P324 tool post
40. um Compensation value um 1000 1000 X 17 compensation position 0 9999 999 P1300 point mm Compensation value um 1000 1000 x point compensation value 1000 1000 P1301 uni Compensation value um 1000 1000 Y 1 compensation position 0 9999 999 feos point mm Compensation value um 1000 1000 Y1 point compensation value 1000 1000 P1601 cum Z pitch measured starting point It is same as the P1900 position in machine coordinate 9999 999 9999 999 sala Goethe let palemete left parameter system range X pitch starting point position in P1901 machine coordinate system mm 9999 999 9999 999 Y pitch starting point position in P1902 machine coordinate system mm 9999 999 9999 999 Z pitch compensation interval 0O 999 999 P1903 rina 120 Operation Chapter Four System Operation P1904 X pitch compensation interval 0 999 999 mm Y pitch compensation interval O 999 999 P1905 fear Notes 1 Pitch compensation parameter is 1 level 2 P1903 P1905 pitch compensation interval range 0 999 999 but the interval should not be less than 0 256mm 4 6 5 8 Interface parameter list oe fowet pame Landon hate Pserbock ser backup No level name and function value 1 M210 User command output Oo 0 tes O 1 M230 User command output o lo i i 1 LMP3 Program run signal Applied to three color O 0 po ind
41. 0 24V ground 24VGND 1 0 24V 24V 170 24 ground 24VGND Hydraulic tailstock pedal switchinput point TPS 4 N 1 0 24 ground 24VGND Feed hold signal M XZ 1 Hydraulic tailstock pedal switch input point SHL Chuck release in posi tion check RM 11 S pindle feed hold signal M XZ 2 Pressure low check PRES Chuck clamp in posi tion check RM 10 Y deceleration signal DecY T ool post lock in position si gnal C TCP 1 0 24 ground 24VGND X deceleration signal Decx External pause SP ZIXIY positive li mit LT Z deceleration signal DecZ E xternal cycle start ST Unused ZIXIY positive li mit LT Emergency stop ESP 1 0 24 ground 24VGND X4 spindle fem ale Fa Spindle analog voltage XSVC Spindle analog voltage ground AGND Encoder 5V ground 5VGND Speed position state output check AP1 Drive unit 5V ground 5VGND Encoder 5V SE5V Y zero PCY Y drive unit5V P5V Encoder C pulse PC Y alam YALM Y negative di rection YD Encoder C pulse PC Unused Y positive direction Y D Encoder B pulse PB Unused Y pulse YP Encoder B pulse PB S peed position switchcontrol APO Y pulse YP Encoder A pulse PA Y enabling YEN 24V ground 24VGND Encoder A pulse PA
42. 00100 Fig 4 8 graph display data definition In graph display the horizontal scale graduation line means Z coordinate dimension the vertical scale graduation line means X coordinate dimension firstly confirm the display graph area the customized graph display area is as follow Z Zoffset Z offset display proportion x14 X X offset X offset display proportion x5x2 Example X 300 600 Z 200 220 1 Intersection coordinates between Z scale graduation line and X scale graduation line are called Z offset and X offset unit mm 2 Zscale graduation line is divided into 14 5 grids X scale graduation line is divided into 5 grids and each grid is divided into two small grids 3 Each grid length is called the display proportion the display proportion is to confirm the displayed workpice shape proportion which is not related to the actual machining proportion 4 When the workpiece dimension is too big the system selects the proportion zoom in when it is too small the system selects the proportion zoom out to get the excellent display effect After the system enters the part contour graph the machining workpiece blank lengths of Z scale graduation line and X scale graduation line are Z length and X length unit mm Z display proportion x Z grids of workpiece contour graph X display proportion x X grids of workpiece contour graph x 2 The graph area is created by the customizing and the program When the
43. 15 2 G72 End face roughing cycle seeeeeeereeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesseneeseneeseneeseneeseneee 209 4 15 3 G73 closed cutting cycle command group sssssesseesseessessseeesneensecsseessecsnnessneesseesseees 212 4 15 4 G76 multi thread cutting cycle command group sss sseseesserssenseeseenseensesssenscsnsenscens 217 4 16 G22 G80 Program Part Cycle srssssssesssssseesseesneesnsessnesssecsseessessnnessneennecsscsnessanesanesnsessesseees 222 417 G98 Feed per Minute feed m G99 Feed per Rev feed r sreeeeeereeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeee 223 4 18 G31 Skipteeeeeereeeereeeerreeeereeeseeeeeeeeesreeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesereesereereereeeeneeeeseeeereeeeseseeneeeeeeeesseeees 224 4 19 G52 rotary axis coordinate clearing integer eeseeeccsoossecccsooosoocoooooseccooosossecosososecccossossecososossesoso 225 4 20 Additional Axis Y Functjon eeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeereeereeeeeereceseeeseeesreeseeeeeeeeeereeerereseeeseeoeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeseeese 226 4 20 1 Additional axis Y starteeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeereeeesereeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeseeeessereeseneeseneeseneeseneeseneeseeeeeeeees 226 4 20 2 Additional axis Y realizing motion eeeeeeeeeeereeeerereeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeseeeeseeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeneeess 226 4 21 Appendix G function and its Explanation Table ssseessseeseeeeeecceeeecoseecoccecoccecoocececcoscecoseecoseccsoseeo 227 4 22 Appendix G and its Relative Parameter Explanation cecccecccecccccccccccoc
44. 200 03 0003 333 0003 333 0000 300 04 0004 444 0004 444 0000 000 05 0000 000 0000 000 0000 000 06 0000 000 0000 000 0000 000 07 0000 000 0000 000 0000 000 Fig 4 11 OFFSET working mode 4 7 1 Tool offset value search The tool offset value search i e search the required tool offset value as follows Method 1 scan The operator can search the concrete content of each tool offset value in OFFSET working mode G Press tt v to search the previous or the next tool offset value Press i to search the offset value on the previous page or the next page and there are 7 lines in each page Method 2 search P offset number ENTER 4 7 2 Input tool offset data by keyboard key X Z field range 8000 000 mm 8000 000mm R field range 0 8000 000mm T field range integer 0 8 S field range integer O 15 Input tool offset data method by the keyboard absolute input and relative input as follows Absolute input of tool offset data 1 Select OFFSET working mode EE iE 2 Press tt y to move the highlight to the required tool offset number or use gt the search method to find out the required tool offset number press to move the highlight to the required Z offset value X_ offset value R tool radius T tool shape S toolsetting record 3 Press INPUT or directly input the required data 4 Input the required data by keyboard Press to cancel the mistaken input and input the correct again
45. A LL he Travel switch Dog installed on the machine slider to 24V GND to deceleration signal Fig 3 1 deceleration signal to the travel switch Machine zero return direction Metal reactor installed on machine slider HPH HO proximity switch To 24 To deceleration signal To OV Fig 3 2 deceleration signal to NPN proximity switch 2 When the bit parameter P407_d7 P407_d6 P407_d5 P407_d4 P407_d3 P407_d2 is set to 0 the machine zero return is positive the deceleration signal LOW is valid The following is the connection example of the deceleration signal and zero signal the one turn signal of servo motor is taken as the zero signal when the system is connected with the servo motor 318 Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection Deceleration signal 24VGND DecX DecZ DecY CNC side Machine side Normally open contact Fig 3 3 deceleration signal connection 24VGND Zero signal PCX PCZ PCY CNC side Machine side Dis Normally open contact Fig 3 4 zero signal connection 3 4 Tool Exchange Control Function and Connection 3 4 1 Tool exchange control signal definition Relative interface signals of too change control k Servo motor One turn signal of servo motor x2 General Standard Standard signal function Remark interface signal name signal name Pin 8 UI08 T08 No 8 tool
46. CCW locking time setting time when the locking signal TCP P408_d6 0 is not checked the next step is executed after the time ends e The system checks TCP in the time set by P324 when the system checks the locking signal TCP P408_d6 1 the system closes TL output and alarms Check locking signal overtime when it has not received TCP the system delays the time set by P322 t2 to execute the next step 320 Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection 6 Close the tool post CCW signal TL and the tool change ends 7 Confirm the signal i e check whether the current tool input signal is consistent with the current tool number if it is CNC alarms Tool number alarms TL TL Tl Ts Tie TE Paz ti TL TL P zd ICP TCP check TCP locking signal do not check TCP locking signal 3 4 3 3 Tool change mode 2 P318 2 tool post type 2 tool change mode 2 is applied to the general 4 tool electromotive turn tool post tool change CW and the clamped CCW The tool definition of tool change mode 2 is the same that of the tool change mode 1 and its tool change process is the same that of the tool change mode 1 it only reduces the last step i e the system does not whether the current tool signal is consistent with the target tool in the tool change mode 2 Execution steps as follows 1 Modify the tool offset value 2 The system outputs the tool post CW signal TL checks the tool signal of the target t
47. Chapter 4 5 2 G34 Variable Pitch Thread Cutting No the function Thread repair function Thread repair function No the function Manual tapping function Manual tapping function OPERATION Chapter 4 4 12 Spindle Rotation Function No the function Spindle position control Switch position control and speed control OPERATION Chapter 4 4 3 4 Setting Spindle Working State No the function External MPG control Support external MPG control function OPERATION Chapter 4 4 9 4 External MPG Operation not support the function Statement programming function Statement programming function OPERATION Chapter 9 Statement Programming No the function Program solid with big capacity No 253 program solid with big capacity OPERATION Chapter 4 3 4 9 No 253 Program Operation No the function Graph analog function of program run path graph zoom out function Program movement path graph analog function graph zoom out function OPERATION Chapter 4 3 6 2 hp3 Analog Graph No the function M miscellaneous function Set Y permitted forbidding working state M47 M48 OPERATION Chapter 4 4 3 4 Setting Spindle Working State not support the function Operation Chapter Two __ Technical Specifications Support M60 M 4 customize to realize special function control PROGRAMMING Chapter 10 not support the function Customize Command Program
48. Chapter Four System Operation Standard Function General Variable Note the parameter defines the release to be the signal I O name name variable name LT ZIXIY positive limit UI32 11032 P404_d6 1 shield hardware limit alarm LT ZIX Y negative limit UI31 r1031 P404_d6 1 shield hardware limit alarm DecY Y deceleration signal UI30 r1030 P405_d1 0 without Y P406_d5 0 without Y machine deceleration switch DecxX X deceleration signal UI29 r1029 P406_d6 0 without X machine deceleration switch DecZ Z deceleration signal UI28 r1028 P406_d7 0 without Z machine deceleration switch SP External pause signal UI27 11027 P412_d7 0 without external start pause signal ST External cycle start Ul26 r1026 P412_d7 0 without external start pause signal signal MXZ1 Feed hold signal UI16 r1016 P412_d6 0 without external feed hold knob MXZ2 Spindle feed hold signal UI15 r1015 P412_d6 0 without external feed hold knob RM10 Chuck clamping Ul14 r1014 P409_d7 1 chuck control function is invalid in position check P409_d5 0 do not need the chuck respond check RM11 Chuck releasing UI13 r1013 P409_d7 1 chuck control function is invalid in position check P409_d5 0 do not need the chuck respond check TPS Tailstock pedal switch UI12 r1012 P409_d4 1 tailstock control function is invalid input P409_d0 1 hydraulic tailstock pedal switch inputs SHL Chuck pedal switch UI11 r1011 P40
49. E this user manual describes all items concerning the operation of the system in detail as much as possible However it is impractical to give particular descriptions of all unnecessary and or unavailable operations of the system due to the manual content limit product specific operations and other causes Therefore the operations not specified herein shall be considered impossible or unallowable ae This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd All rights are reserved It is against the law for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual without the express written permission of GSK and the latter reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability CGSR I HIS GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Foreword Dear user We are really grateful for your patronage and purchase of this GSK928TEa Turning CNC system made by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd The manual describes the relative content and notes of the system Warning This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel as improper operations may cause accidents Please carefully read this user manual before use Notes before operating the system Connect the emergency stop button of the system firmly and correctly otherwise an emergency stop alarm will occur when the system is switched on so that the system cannot work properly it is not the system failure Set the program reference point of the system accord
50. Field Specified content Meaning G02 Arc rotation direction CCW arc in front tool post coordinate system CW arc in rear tool post coordinate system G03 Arc rotation direction CW arc in front tool post coordinate system CCW arc in rear tool post coordinate system X Z Absolute coordinate Absolute coordinates of arc end point U W Relative coordinate Distance between starting point and end point of arc I K G02 G03 Circle center Distance between circle center and starting point of coordinates arc in G02 G03 R Arc radius Distance between any point and circle center F Feedrate Speed along the arc LK G05 One point on arc One point on arc three points consists of one circle The tool traverses at the set speed in the specified arc path in G02 G03 G02 G03 arc direction definition is referred to the circle center their directions are reverse in the front rear tool post coordinate system as follows X G02 G02 Front tool post A Rear tool post coordinate system G03 coordinate system P 603 X Z X A Az see G03 ay A z n7 G03 3 SAP A J G02 B Z i 602 A C 4 Fa 1 X ZA G03 Fig 4 3 G02 G03 arc direction definition X Z or U W specify the end point of arc The end point is presented with absolute or relative coordinates The relative coordinate is the distance from the starting point to the end point of arc G02 G03 I K specify the circle center coordinates of arc lI K sepa
51. GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual In the machining process when the pulse monitoring is started the right of process status bar will display P n it also can check the state of system current used pulse monitoring Such as P 1 expresses one pulse monitoring is started The explanation of pulse monitoring 1 At first make the description to pulse monitoring variable all assignment statement for r7100 are description Such as r7100 r1001 17100 adds 1 for the pulse signal of interface UI01 2 Then make the description to pulse monitoring condition Such as when r7100 gt 50 then P1500 when the r7100 count value is greater than fifty then turn P1500 3 And then start the monitor through the assignment of pulse monitoring manager Through the assignment of pulse monitoring management register r7110 r7113 can open or close the monitor Among them when the assignment 0 1 2 are same to process monitor When the assignment is 5 the pulse monitor counter is cleared to 0 When the assignment is 6 or 7 the operator should set the pulse monitor count mode assignment The process method of matter 0 Close the opened monitor just the same to process monitor 1 Open the monitor the process method is absolutely same to process monitor 2 Open the monitor the process method is absolutely same to process monitor 5 When the assignment is 5 the pulse monitor counter is cleared to 0 Set the counter mo
52. K_ R_ E_ F_ Deep Hole Machining Cycle on End Face Field X U Z W coordinates of hole bottom It is the deep hole drilling cycle when X coordinate is omitted Z tool infeed once Z axis K Z tool retraction once Z axis R pecking cycle or deep hole cycle When R is omitted or R 0 the distance of retraction is only K i e pecking cycle When R 1 retract to the starting point of the first drilling hole once i e deep hole drilling cycle E X offset value once diameter value F federate Field range X Z U W 9999 999mm 9999 999mm l K 0 9999 999mm 200 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions E deep hole drilling cycle is 0 9999 999 mm end face deep hold machining cycle is 0 001 9999 999 mm R Oor1 F 0 001mm min 15000mm min Explanation ON DOO FWD R 0 G74 cycle process as follows i Speed feed a Rapid feed Fig 4 33 G74 cycle deep hole drilling cycle R 1 Z feeds at F speed from A to B Z returns to A at the rapid traverse speed Z feeds to C at the rapid traverse speed Z feeds at F speed from C to D Z returns to A at rapid traverse speed Z feeds to E at the rapid traverse speed Z feeds at F speed from E to F Z returns to A at the rapid traverse speed 9 Z feeds to G at the rapid traverse speed 10 Z feeds at F speed from G to H 11 Z returns to A at the rapid traverse speed Omitting R or
53. MOO can be written to MO MO and MOO are valid 2 Bit parameter P403_d2 setting whether M function output is closed when the reset key is pressed P403_d2 0 indicates that the system does not close M03 M04 M08 M32 output signals after the reset key is pressed 3 Mcommands are not in the same block with other commands as follows MOO M02 M20 M30 M96 M97 M98 M99 M21 M22 M23 M24 M91 M92 M93 M94 M47 M48 M60 M 74 3 1 1 M00 Pause Command format M00 program pause Explanation MOO pauses not to execute the program and the system prompts PAUSE in flash and program continuously runs after CYCLE START is pressed Press ESC to escape from program running MOO functions are different from that of CYCLE START key MOO is used to pause before some block which is specified in advance and CYCLE START is used to pause at random 3 1 2 M02 End of Program Command format M02 end of program Explanation M02 indicates that program ends and the system returns to the first block to wait 3 1 3 M20 End of Program Cycle Machine Command format M20 L return to the first block to execute the cycle machine L is the cycle machine times range 145 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Explanation L is the cycle machine times when L is equal to 3 the actual machined workpiece is 4PCS The system defaults the limitless cycle machine when L is omitted M20 indicates
54. Max speed limit in cutting feed mm min 1 15000 Linear acceleration ms 1 8000 deceleration time in cutting feed ms Exponential acceleration 1 8000 deceleration time in cutting feed ms Parameter level ms 200 1 8000 ms 200 1 8000 acceleration deceleration time 1 8000 in thread cutting ms acceleration deceleration time 1 8000 in thread run out ms G99 initial lines 0 30000 Parameter name inal Range User backup Z backlash X backlash i 0 10 000 Y backlash Z command pulse multiplication ratio Z command pulse division coefficient X command pulse multiplication ratio X command pulse division coefficient Y command pulse multiplication ratio Y command pulse division coefficient Spindle encoder lines 100 5000 Undefined reserved 1 000 1 000 1 99999 118 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 4 6 5 4 Miscellaneous parameter list Max speed of spindle M41 Max speed of spindle M42 Max speed of spindle M43 Max speed of spindle M44 0 99999 Lowest speed limit of constant surface speed Max speed limit of constant surface speed Thread smooth speed 1 9999 borderline Thread spindle wave alarm 1 99999 Spindle JOG time 1 ms 1 99999 Speed in spindle JOG 0 99999 Covered line of spindle gear 0 4 control Frequency
55. Motion pause Moo Program pause Connection Chapter One Interface CONNECTION Chapter One Interface 1 1 Rear Cover Interface Position Layout Explanation e X1 TOOL POSE Fig 1 1 rear cover interface layout input output pin4d4 D socket CNC receives machine signal CNC signal outputs to machine interface e X2 e X3 e X4 X5 e XG tool pose pin15 D socket input output interface motor pin15 D socket interface of X Z drive unit spindle pin26 D socket spindle coder spindle inverter and Y drive unit interface MPG pin 9 D socket connect with MPG input power supply green pin4 socket the power supply box has been connected to the system X6 interface the user only connects with 220V power supply e power supply box use GSK PB power supply with 5V 24V GND power supply 305 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 1 2 Total Frame Fig 1 2 total connection drawing 306 Connection Chapter Two Interface Graph Chapter Two Interface Graph 2 1 1 Interface layout 1 Front cover RS232 communication male _ Data receiving RXD RTS data sending TXD CTS e a GND X5 MPG female 5V ov MPG B pulse MB MPG B pulse MB MPG A pulse MA MPG A pulse MA X2 tool post male Tool post CW signal TL Tool post CCW signal TL _ Tool p
56. Point Return eeeeeeeerrereerreererreereereereereercereeereseeeeeereereereereerrereeseeeeeeeeeee 182 4 10 G28 Return to Machine Zero Machine Reference Point eeeeeeeeeeeererereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 183 4 11 G30 2 3 Program Reference Point Return eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeereeeeeeeee 184 4 12 G04 D E E E E E 185 4 13 G96 Constant Surface Speed Control G97 Constant Surface Speed Cancel seese 185 4 14 Single Canned Cycleseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeee 188 4 14 1 G90 outer cylinder face turning cycle axial cutting cycle seeeeseerreereereereeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeee 188 4 14 2 G92 Thread cutting cycleseeeeeeereeeereeeerereeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeesreeeseeeeneeeeseeeeereeesseeeeseeensreeeeeeeeseeess 191 4 14 3 G94 Inner outer end face taper turning cycle eeseecccssosccccosoooseccosoosseccossosseccosooseeooossosseoo 198 4 14 4 G74 Deep hole machining cycle on end facereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesseeeee 200 4 14 5 G75 Grooving cycle seeeeereeereeeeeeereeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeeseeeesereeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeesereeseeeesseeeee 202 4 15 Compound Cycle seeeeeeeereeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesereesereesereesereesereesenneeeeneeeereeeeseeeereeeeeeeeeseeeee 204 4 15 1 G71 axial plane roughing compound cycle ssssssssesseesseesseesseesneesneesnneessneesneesseesseees 204 4
57. Press DELETE to start the drive unit So the machine coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system are corrected simultaneously 4 4 2 4 Setting program reference point In the machine coordinate system the operator should confirm one position where the tool change can be executed safely when the tool post stops here and where the workpiece is installed 47 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual conveniently The program reference point can be set when the tool post stops at the position which is called the program reference point Program zero The program reference point coordinates are relative to the machine coordinate system Format Press INPUT and the system displays SETTING press 0 and the system displays Setting program reference point at the moment press ENTER the system confirms Z X Y to be the program reference point When the operator sets again the workpiece coordinates after setting the program reference point the previous reference point coordinates do not change in the new workpiece coordinate system at the moment the operator should set again the program reference point The initial value of the program reference point is X 150 Z 150 After the operator sets the program reference point the program reference point return command G26 and the program zero return operation by the system panel return to the point no matter what the machine slide stops anyw
58. Table in JOG OR AUTO Working Mode i e E300 E499 seerseeeeereeeerereeeeeeeeseeeeeee 270 8 5 1 Alarm in Executing Relative Operations i e E300 E399 erereeeerererereererereseeeeeeeereseeeeeeeeseee 271 8 5 2 Relative alarm in executing statement i e E400 E499 serrerererererererereeeeseserererererereeeeeeee 274 CHAPTER NINE STATEMENT PROGRAMMINGe eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecececccecececececececccecccecececcceceeccecccececececeeececeeececeeee 276 9 1 Variabl lesseseeeseseesesesseseseeseesesesecseeceseecsseecesesesoeseecesescsoeecesesesosseeceseseseeccesesesoseeecssesesseessesosseecssesesessesse 276 9 1 1 Variable expression method eeeeeeseeseseseeeeeeeeeecececeeececeeceeeecececeeeceeeeeceeecececeeecececeeecececeeccscscscceeeee 276 9 1 2 Classification of Variable sseessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececececccccccccccceccecccececeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeseeee 276 9 1 2 1 Command variable sesssseeeeseeeeeeecccecceeeeeececccceeceecccoscecccceccecocsssecececccsscececccccoseeccecososseseeeeessoe 276 9 1 2 2 Pointer variabl essseseseseeeeseeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeecesescesescecesesceseccssescssesoccesososseecesescesescseesesesseeeesescsseee 278 9 1 2 3 Interface variable seeesssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeceseeececcccccececcccccceececcccccsceccecccccssececccecssecececccessseccecececeosse 279 9 1 2 4 Keyboard scan register PE E 281 9 1 2 5 Display window register r5 eeeereeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeesccccceeeeeccccecceeeecccccceeeeeecccocceeceecsoceeecsocseeeeee 282 9 1 2 6 r5003 display
59. There are three positions of feed hold knob and its function as follows Note see the specific symbol specification of feed hold knob from the machine manufacture Feed hold knob Position 1 permit the spindle to rotate and the slider to traverse Position 2 permit the spindle to rotate and forbid the slider to traverse Position 3 forbid the spindle to rotate and the slider to traverse feed hold knob use Before program running Press the correspond key to control the spindle starting stopping when the feed hold knob is placed to the position 1 and 2 but the spindle cannot be started when it is placed to the position 3 In SINGLE working mode When the knob is placed to the position 1 all commands run normally when it is placed to the position 2 the control commands for spindle run but the motion commands of X Z do not run until the knob is placed to the position 1 when it is placed to the position 3 no blocks run In CONTINUOUS run mode After the system starts programs the feed hold knob can be rotated any time to control the spindle and the slider When the knob is placed to the position 1 programs run normally When the knob is rotated from 1 to 2 the slider stops and the spindle still keeps the previous state When the knob is rotated from 2 to 3 the spindle stops When the knob is rotated from 3 to 2 the spindle recovers the previous state When the knob is rotated from 2 to 1 the slider starts to run The
60. User Manual P E is positive axial thread Z is the thread axis 1 U lt 0 W lt 0 R lt 0 2 U gt 0 W lt 0 R gt 0 3 U lt 0 W gt 0 R lt 0 4 U gt 0 W gt 0 R gt 0 a E Pac one n eg eee ee sce a b C i 2 we AR I oN wal f EEEE oe B EE sue D Am 5 U lt 0 W lt 0 R gt 0 6 U gt 0 W lt 0 R lt 0 7 U lt 0 W gt 0 R gt O0 8 U gt 0 W gt 0 R lt 0 Fig 4 22 G92 thread cutting tool path P E is negative end face thread X is the thread axis 1 U lt 0 W gt 0 R gt 0 2 U lt 0 W lt 0 R lt 0 3 U gt 0 W gt 0 R gt O 4 U gt 0 W lt 0 R lt 0 g2 ok z E in E a 7 i A A 5 U lt 0 W gt 0 R lt 0 6 U lt 0 W lt 0 R gt O 7 U gt 0 W gt 0 R lt 0 pit Fig 4 23 G92 thread cutting tool path G92 thread cutting programming forms diameter programming 1 G92 axial straight thread P is positive R 0 U lt 0 The thread run out is in the positive direction when is positive there is no thread run out when there is no the end position does not change 194 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Example 2 G92 axial straight thread P is positive R 0 U lt 0 The thread run out is in the negative direction when is negative there is no thread run out when there is no the end position does not change 3 G92 axial taper thread P is positive The thread run out is in the positive direction when R is neg
61. X starting point of machine coordinate P1902 0 Y starting point of machine coordinate P1903 O Z pitch compensation interval P1904 O X pitch compensation interval P1905 O IY pitch compensation interval variable pitch compensation parameter format II Pitch compensation parameter starts with P2000 in TXT file P2000 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 O P2010 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 O P2880 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 O P2890 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 0 00000 000 O P2900 00000 000 Z starting point of machine coordinate P2901 00000 000 X starting point of machine coordinate Operation Chapter Four System Operation P2902 00000 000 Y starting point of machine coordinate P2903 00000 000 Z pitch compensation interval P2904 00000 000 X pitch compensation interval P2905 00000 000 Y pitch compensation interval 7 Standard format of parameter file communication on PC TXT file format Remark Mark for checking parameter is CNC_GSK928TEA necessary reference coordinate POOO 00200 000 Z program reference point I following the annotation content is maces necessary P026 0 IY zero offset Imotion parameter PXXX parameter number P000 the first P100 6000 I Z max traverse speed parameter is necessary ESA PXXX the parameter number followin P209
62. alarm function is valid 1 invalid the mechanical software limit alarm function is invalid d3__ tool nose software limit alarm 0 valid the tool nose software limit alarm function is valid 1 invalid the tool nose software limit alarm function is invalid d2__M61 command limit 0 forbidding motion command M60 M74 blocks forbid all G command except for G04 1 permitting I M60 M74 are the user customized commands The block permits G commands according to the program format to compile programs d1__ hardware limit alarm level 0 LOW the hardware limit alarm LOW is valid 1 HIGH the hardware limit alarm HIGH is valid d0__ 254 program solidifying limit 0 forbidding forbid modifying and solidifying No 254 program i e forbid modifying the customized command 1 permitting permit modifying and solidifying No 254 program i e permit modifying the customized command Whether the system permits modifying the solidified program and then solidifies is determined by the machine manufacturer 4 6 4 11 Motor drive bit parameter __ P405 Motor drive __bit parameter P405 password level 2 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 do The parameter sets whether the motor working state is controlled by Y d7__Z motor direction d6__X motor direction d5__Y motor direction 0 positive 1 negative setting the motor direction parameter can change the motor rotation direction without chang
63. any working modes except for PARAMETER working mode 3 Press PARAMETER to enter the parameter password input window 4 Directly input the operation privilege password 5 Press ENTER after the input is completed and the system enters the operation level corresponding to the password Parameter save The successfully modified parameters are automatically saved to the system and all parameters are saved when the system escapes from the parameter window entering the window in the other working mode by press key When the system is turned on every time it reads the saved parameter data When the saved data in read exceeds the range it is rewritten to the minimum in the range and the system prompts it The read parameter in disorder in power on the system prompts whether the previous solidified parameter is read when the parameters have not been solidified the system prompts to select the stepper servo parameter to execute the parameter initialization and to save them to the system The main differences between the stepper and servo parameter are the different 86 Operation Chapter Four System Operation of the motion parameter values 4 6 2 Parameter modification The system parameter has been initialized before the factory delivery The operator can modify and regulate correspondingly the parameters according to the actual conditions of the machine The system displays the selected parameter number in highlight after the parameter
64. backlash and the machining path transits to the next quadrant raises speed and reduces speed before the machining is completed And the system executes the post acceleration deceleration processing P400_ d2 1 the system executes the arc precision process when the arc crosses the high point The arc command has the front acceleration deceleration function when the backlash is 0 the machining does not decelerate across the quadrant 4 6 4 10 Safety and debugging bit parameter __ P402 P 404 Safety setting 1 __bit parameter P402 password level 3 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 d7__hardware limit alarm 108 the parameter specifies its using mode when the system has checked the hardware limit alarm signal in the axis motion process 0 deceleration when it is set 0 it meets the hardware limit alarm the motion axis Operation Chapter Four System Operation decelerates to stop and the coordinates are consistent with the actual position 1 emergency stop when it is set 1 it meets the hardware limit alarm the motion axis decelerates to stop and the coordinates are not consistent with the actual position d6__ spindle abnormal stop rotation check 0 check the system stops the feed closes the spindle and alarms in cutting 1 donot check In JOG AUTO working mode after the spindle starts the system automatically check the spindle speed it prompts spindle rotation abnorma
65. be Y axis Modify P405_d1 1 or change the program command E630 Cut NO exceed In the program the tool number is Modify P319 or change the over the setting range program command E631 Illegal use G96 When the spindle S control is set to Modify P410_d6 1 or change be gear shifting mode the constant the program command line speed cutting E632 No define G31I input Don t set the G amp 311 interface Set the P532 to be effective or interface invalid parameter or the setting is wrong change the program command 8 5 Alarm Table in JOG OR AUTO Working Mode i e E300 E499 The Alarm type in JOG and AUTO is divided to Alarm in executing relative operation and The relative Alarm in executing statement two kinds 270 Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message 8 5 1 Alarm in Executing Relative Operations i e E300 E399 Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E302 Z driver unit Check Z axis drive unit resolve the failure Z drive unit alarm alarm to power on again E303 X driver unit l f Check t X axis drive unit resolve the X drive unit alarm 5 alarm failure to power on again E304 i Y driver unit F Check Y axis drive unit resolve the failure Y drive unit alarm alarm to power on again E Positiv RaW X limit X or Z positive limit switch is closed 0 Z negatively moves in JOG working a ale P mode til
66. compensation file according to E038 sending tool compensatidri file the correct tool compensation file format failure or be manually cancelled and operation method Receive OFT fail Fail in receiving tool Receive the tool compensation file E039 compensation file or delete according the correct tool compensation manual file format and operation mode File is too big The length of received file is out of Modify the file according the file format E040 the maximal length of buffer zone correct the received file according the requirement E041 ZIXIY pitch Known from system internal Change the pitch compensation value of ms compensation value arithmetic in the 0 254mm length pitch compensation parameter to small of Z X Y axis the calculated E049 out of range departure value is out of 7um 263 CGSN I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting No E044 Ratio of magnify amp Ratio between multiplication and Modify parameter multiplication or division coefficient exceed division is out of 1 128 128 E046 1 128 128 range Para set conflict The corresponding pin in Release the occupied input pin in interface E047 input port was used function is occupied parameter or set other free input pin Para set conflict The corresponding pin in inputting Release the occupied output pin in E048 output port was used function is occupied interface
67. connect with the socket shell The connection between the system and the spindle encoder must use the doublet cord When the spindle encoder output signal is not the difference output mode PA PB PC cannot be connected at the moment the anti interference ability of the encoder output signal reduces It is suggested that the system should use the spindle encoder with the difference output mode 339 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 6 7 Connection between CNC system Y and AC servo drive unit Connection layout between CNC system Y and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit Less than 15m shield cable GSK928TEa GSKDA98 drive 2 Yput PULS Iq L Single phase J N 9 Ypu APULS l 3 Ydirt SIGN Encode feedback signal AC220V 4 19 5 odir SIGN pe Yen SON 9 21 v g LN COY g y Motor power supply 7 F ih go AM 46 bp _ com g m R servo motor OV COM J Cea E RSTP i x 1 Metal shell gt DG d 4 p6 17 FSTP 22 Metal shell 24 YO Zero 49 Connection table between CNC system Y and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit GSK928TEa Y DA98 drive unit Signal interface Y direction 12 Ypu a Se l ve S H e oa ER pu a pte Metal shell Metal shell Note When the spindle and Y are switched P410___d4 1 Y is connected with the drive unit the connec
68. connected with MB 342 Connection Chapter 4_ User and Maintenance Chapter 4 User and Maintenance 4 1 Environmental Condition System storage transportation and working environmental condition as follows Item Working climate condition Storage transportation climate condition Environmental temperature 0 C 45 C 40 C 55 C Relative humidity lt 90 RH no dewing lt 95 40 C 4 2 Earthing The correct earthing in the electricity device is important and its aims are as follows 1 Protect the operator from being hurt because of the abnormal conditions 2 Protect the electric devices from interference by the machine and its near electric devices which cause the abnormal working of the control device 3 The machine must be earthed stably the neutral wiring in the charged barded wire net must not be the earthing line otherwise which causes the injury of persons or the device to be damaged 4 3 Power Supply Requirements The system can normally run in the following AC input power supply Voltage wave AC220V 15 10 Frequency wave 50Hz 2 The machine electric cabinet provides the power supply not only for the machine but also for the system and the machine power supply is referred to machine installation explanation introduction 4 4 Guard The guard grade is not less than IP20 4 5 Use after Long Time Unuse After the CNC system is not used for long time the user must firstly cl
69. cut path is the completely same with that of G92 Command format G76 X U _ ZCW _ PCE _ L K R L_ H_ G76 thread cutting Command definition explanations Field definitions data range are the same those of G92 as Fig 4 47 Starting point end point position before the block runs and after the run stops is expressed with A Thread end point the thread cutting end point defined by XCU __ Z W _ is expressed with C Thread starting point Z absolute coordinate is same that of A the difference between X absolute coordinate and that of C is the thread taper expressed with E When the defined thread angle is not 0 the tool cannot reach E in cutting Tool retraction end point after the thread cutting is completed in each thread roughing cycle 217 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual and finishing cycle the end point of the radial X tool retraction is expressed with D G76 multi thread cutting cycle command G76 can inform some thread cutting information in advance Command format and definition G76 D L Q P_L_ R_ G76 cycle information D tooth depth total depth range 0 001 9999 999 mm do not default D cannot be negative the first cut depth in roughing range 0 001 9999 999 mm do not default cannot be negative Q least cutting value in roughing range 0 99 999 mm default correspond to P339 P tool angle range 0 99 000 degree default corresp
70. delay power on control signal and keeps at the moment all press key operations are invalid 4 4 9 4 External MPG operation When the system needs the function the operator should define its output pin in the interface parameter and correctly connects with wiring the system output the signal in the corresponding pin Relative parameter when P400_d1 is set to 1 the external MPG control knob is valid Y Z axis option key step width regulation key are invalid In JOG working mode press MPG to switch to MPG mode the indicator lights and the system displays the external MPG control knob axis option knob and movement knob state The coordinates of selected coordinate axis is displayed in highlight Simultaneously display the external MPG icon on the screen 1 Axis option knob of MPG WsZ external MPG axis option Z select Z when it is connected WsX external MPG axis option X select X when it is connected WsY external MPG axis option Y select Y when it is connected When WsZ WsX WsY are not connected the system cancels the coordinate axis in the highlight state the MPG is invalid 2 Each movement knob of MPG graduation Wbk2 external MPG override 2 when it is connected the system selects 0 100 gear when the parameter setting the gear is invalid it is 0 001 gear Wbk1 external MPG override 1 when it is connected the system selects 0 010 gear Wbk2 and Wbk1 are not connected the system selects 0 001 gear 3 MGP emergency sto
71. e eeeeeeeeereeeereeeeeeeeereeeereeeereesereesereeeereeereeeereesereeeereeeereeeeseeeereeeereeeeneeeeseeeeeeeess 165 4 4 1 Linear chamfering eeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeereeeereeeereeeereeeereesereeeereeeereeeereeenreeeereesereeseneeseneeseneesereeseneeeeneee 165 4 4 2 Circular chamfering eeeeeeeeeeeeeeerereerereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeresreesereeereeeereesereeseneeseneeseneeeereeseneeseneee 167 4 4 3 Specjal cases ssssseerseeessseeseesseessessneesssessnecssecsseesseesanecansessnecsnecssecsanesanecssecsnecssecsanecaneesseesseesseess 168 4 4 4 Chamfer supplementary explanation eeeeeeeeeeerrreeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeesesssssssesssseeeee 170 4 5 Thread Cutting Command eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeessessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 170 4 5 1 G33 thread cutting eececcecoecoccecoccoccecoecoecocoocoecoccocoecoccocoecoecocoocecocoecoecoccocoecoecocoecoecoccecoecoesecoecooe 171 4 5 2 G34 variable pitch thread cutting eeeeeeeeeeeerereerereeeereeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeerseneesereesereeseseeseneee 178 4 6 G32 Tapping Cycle seeseeeeeeereeeereeeereeeereesereeeereesereesereesereesereeesreesereeseseeeeeereeseeeeseneesereeseneesereesereeseee 180 4 7 G50 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System eeseecccscoseeccoooossoccooooseeccosoossecosssosseccossosseccossosseeooo 181 4 8 G51 Recovering Workpice Coordinate System Settingeeeeeereereereereereereeseereereeeeeseeseseeeeeseeseeeee 182 4 9 G26 X Z Y Reference
72. exceeds 0 Machining time record machining program execution time When CYCLE START is pressed and the system executes the program the timing does not end till the program ends In running the system pauses and at the same time the timing stops In SINGLE working mode the system only records the run time of each block The system displays max machining time range 99 hours 60 minutes and 60 seconds When the machining time reaches the max value it automatically becomes Zero and continuously runs program and executes the timing again Workpiece count and machining time clearing in initial state continuously press E twice and the workpiece count clears continuously press twice and the machining time clears 4 5 4 Manual operation of miscellaneous function In AUTO working mode press function keys to execute some miscellaneous function operation of the machine and the other functions are the same in JOG working mode 1 Cooling ON OFF is valid in any states 75 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 2 When P400_d5 is set to 0 spindle CW CCW stop key are valid invalid in run state 3 In initial state the spindle gear shifting key speed change key is valid 4 In initial state when the hydraulic chuck control function is valid the external button or pedal switch controls the hydraulic chuck clamping releasing which interlocks with the spindle 5 In initial state when the hydraulic tailstock cont
73. fields Coordinate field repeat Delete one field of them repeat data E227 Data format wrong F value format range error it must match Modify source program the G98 G99 command E228 Program hasn t end The program don t have the ending Modify source program add the command command M02 or M20 or M30 ending command E232 Errors in command The followed command data don t meet Modify source program data after G92 the format E233 No user defined At first make program for the needed Write M60 program then harden command user defined command M60 then harden it it E234 Data field repeat The same field in block is input repeatedly Delete the repeat data field E235 G71 G72 not inc amp The coordinate data in block which is Modify source program dec relations followed command G71 G72 doesn t meet the condition of increase or decrease by degrees E236 Forbid com exist The block followed G71 G72 command Modify source program ead ee doesn t include the motion command commands exist IN z beside G01 G02 G03 G71 G72 E237 Chord is longer than Arc uses R program the distance from Modify source program diameter starting point to end point is longer than diameter E238 Dis cen to 2 points When the arc command G02 and G03 Modify source program not equal use K I program the data can t form the distances from correct arc section center to 2 points aren t equa
74. in English the option is invalid presently d6__system parameter and programming 0 diameter II X command value is input in diameter and X coordinate is displayed in diameter 1 radius X command value is input in radius and X coordinate is displayed in radius II X coordinate value is expressed in radius and diameter When the bit parameter is modified the system prompts whether it changes the parameter if done it changes the reference coordinate parameters P001 P004 P007 P011 P012 P017 P018 P022 P025 After the bit parameter is modified the system executes toolsetting and programming again otherwise X data is not correct d5__ coordinate system setting 0 front tool post the front tool post coordinate system definition as PROGRAMMING Chapter One Fig 1 1 1 rear tool post the rear tool post coordinate system definition as PROGRAMMING Chapter One Fig 1 1 the parameter is used to displaying the imaginary tool nose number icon in manual toolsetting in the manual toolsetting the system uses the parameter to judge whether the operator uses the front or rear tool post coordinate system to correctly display the position relationship between the tool nose center and imaginary tool nose d3__least command unit 0 metric the command value unit is mm 1 inch the command value unit is inch the option is invalid presently Display window __bit parameter P415 password level 3 d7 reser
75. in the general signal names Input output pin serial number in the diagnosis window increase from the number 1 from top to bottom from left to right Standard definition and function of interface parameter are referred to OPERATION Appendix 4 6 5 8 Interface Parameter List Example When P511 SAGT is set to 1 SAGT covers the input interface UI01 UI01 pin inputs the safety door check function When P506 M320 is set to 18 M320 covers the output interface UO18 UO18 pin outputs the lubricating control function 4 6 4 15 Variable initial value _ P600 P639 The initial value of variable parameter PG600 P639 correspond to the variable initial value r001 r040 the concrete variable explanation is referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter 9 Statement Programming 116 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 4 6 4 16 Related parameter of G76 __P336 P339 When G76 is executed the related parameters of G76 can get the relative information of the thread machining in advance and the system automatically arrange the thread cutting and finally machines the qualified thread G76 tool angle P __ miscellaneous parameter P336 The parameter determines the angle of the neighboring two teeth The actual angle is determined by the tool angle and so P336 angle should be same that of the tool Unit degree G76 finishing times L __ miscellaneous parameter P337 The parameter determines the thread finishing times G76 finishing cutting amount R __ miscel
76. input Multi function definition key value list st nd Td st nd rd Panel display 1 ney 2 ney 2 key panel display 1 ney e Rey key value value value value value value G F G r F N r NES M M H P ike P X x J gt K K Blank J u space Z D Z Q lt D V d Q lt V ana an S R if 2 if Yo R Y or 26 Operation Chapter Four System Operation T tees T L then k U Fees U E else ii W 4 3 4 1 Inputting program content Note P333 is set to 10 the system automatically creates the block number and the following is the same In program edit window inputting the part program content is as follows create a new program according to the operations of creating new part program input one line content after the block N0000 is displayed press ENTER key after inputting one line programs to end the line input the system automatically creates the next block number and continuously input the program content press ESC to complete the program content input after the last line programs are input Note 1 The first row of every line only displays the blank space 2 3 4 3 4 2 Each block only displays 60 characters and only the first 60 characters are displayed when there are more than 60 characters the operator can press to left move one character The serial number of the first row bl
77. is negative value X U Z W absolute relative coordinates of thread end point For the axis thread Z movement is not 0 it is the axial straight thread when X is omitted For the end face thread X movement is not 0 it is the end face thread when Z is omitted K it is the length from the thread run out starting point to the end point in the thread machining axis K cannot be negative and must be less than the movement of thread machining axis movement of thread run out axis direction when the thread runs out there is no thread run out when it is omitted For straight thread the thread runs out positively when is positive the thread runs out negatively when it is negative For taper thread the thread run out direction is same that of the taper symbol does not have effect 171 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual For axial taper thread the thread runs out positively when U is positive the thread runs out negatively when U is negative For end face thread the thread runs out positively when W is positive the thread runs out negatively when it is negative Q initial angle It is used to thread part when it is specified to 0 H H_d7 H _d2 reserved it is used to selecting the thread run out point H_d0 0 the system default is zero H_dO0 1 thread run out when the long axis reduces speed which is not controlled b K value H_d1 it is continuous thread machining ra
78. is selected 4 6 2 1 Parameter search The parameter search is to search the required parameter as follows Method 1 Selected the required parameter in the parameter window M reference parameter X motion parameter Z transmission parameter S miscellaneous parameter T bit parameter U interface parameter W variable initial value F pitch parameter Example select M reference parameter press M to enter the reference parameter window y E Z Press or to move the highlight display to the parameter number which needs to search the bit parameter press f to left or right move the cursor to select the different bit and the bit definition of the selected bit changes Method 2 Directly position to the required parameter as follows Press P and input the required parameter number which needs to search and then press ENTER The system displays the parameter in highlight Example for searching P208 firstly input P and theninput2 0 8 press ENTER and the parameter P208 has been found 4 6 2 2 Parameter modification Modifying the parameter as follows Search the parameter to modify it according to the above parameter search method Press INPUT and input the parameter data or directly input the parameter data Press lt a to delete the mistaken data and input again the correct data Press ENTER to confirm the operation Notes 1 When the input data exceeds the parameter limit range the input data is valid an
79. is valid and the system outputs the signal of chuck clamping 2 When it is the interlock protection between the chuck and the spindle in the spindle running the system forbids operating the chuck otherwise it alarms in the chuck releasing the system forbids starting the spindle otherwise it alarms 3 In automatic continuous run the pedal switch operation is invalid no matter what the spindle rotates 4 When the chuck operation is failure or interrupted reset emergency stop the system takes the chuck is in the unconfirmed position prompts the chuck flashing in red M10 or M11 at the moment the system cannot start the machining programs the system recovers the normal state when the chuck operation is executed once again or the system is turned on again 5 The chuck respond signal consecutive check is to continuously check whether the chuck abnormally releases in the normal or machining state If the above is set the alarm P402_d4 1 the system stops the program machining and closes the spindle when the chuck releases in machining 6 When the chuck signal cancels M12 the chuck state M10 or M11 is displayed with the underline i e M10 M11 4 4 8 Hydraulic tailstock control function Tailstock operation In JOG working mode input M78 M79 to control the tailstock forward backward Input M 7 8 ENTER the tailstock goes forward 62 Operation Chapter Four System Operation Input M ENTER the tailstock goes b
80. line between the linear and circular interpolation blocks Pa 1 4 2 gt 3 Circular to circular Command format G02 G03 X U Z W R_L G02 G03 X U _ Z W R orG02 G03 G05 X U ZCW _ L K_ Or G02 G03 G05 X CU Z WL lI K L G02 G03 G05 X U Z W IL K_ Cor G02 G03 X CU Z W R_ Command function insert one straight line between two circular interpolation blocks LJAN A 4 Circular to linear Command format G02 G03 X U Z W R_ L G01 X CU Z W Or G02 G03 G05 X U Z WL L K L G01 X U Z W Command function insert one straight line block between circular and linear interpolation block 166 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions as 4 4 2 Circular chamfering Circular chamfering insert one circular between linear contours circular contours linear contour and circular contour the circular and the contour line are transited by the tangent The command of circular chamfering is D and the data behind the command is the radius of chamfering circular The circular chamfering must be used in G01 G02 G03 or G05 1 Linear to linear Command format G01 X U Zz W D G01 X CU Z W Command function insert one circular between two straight lines the inserted circular block and two straight lines are tangent the radius is the data behind the command address D D N gt 2 Linear to circular Command format G01 X U Z W D G02 G03 X U Z WL R
81. motion speed is determined by the spindle speed and the pitch the axis motion direction is determined by the pitch sign as follows When P is positive and the spindle turns CCW the coordinate axis moves negatively When the spindle turns CW the coordinate axis moves positively When P is negative and the spindle turns CCW the coordinate axis moves positively When the spindle turns CW the coordinate axis moves negatively Note 1 When the speed in tapping is too fast or there is the limit alarm the system automatically escapes the tapping and alarms 2 The pitch P is expressed with the metric range 0 001mm 500 000mm the negative sign is added to the front of the range i e dextrorotaion or levorotation tapping 4 5 AUTO Working Mode In AUTO working mode the relative setting or input format and example descriptions are as follows the required input letter key or digit key are expressed with the underline the system prompts the message is expressed with the frame In AUTO working mode the system displays at the top right Press it and the system pops up the operation key catalog in AUTO working mode press it and the window closes directly press other function keys and the window automatically closes e Press 4U10 and the system enter AUTO Working mode The system completes the part machining of the specified machining program in AUTO Working mode the system runs from the firs
82. nose radius The tool center path can be opposite to program path when the sidestep is less than tool nose radius and is an circular in program At the moment the system automatically ignores the first vector and directly moves end point of second vector linearly The program stops at the end point in single block and otherwise the cycle machining is continuously executed If the sidestep is a linear compensation is executed correctly and the system does not alarm but the not cutting is still reserved 4 End point of programming circular out of circular The tool stops and the system alarms and displays End point of circular is not on circular when the end point of circular is not on circular in programs 5 2 7 Radius compensation of compound cycle command The tool radius compensation can be executed in the internal of G90 G94 G71 G72 G73 These commands should be in the same block with G41 G42 which means G41 G42 executes the tool radius compensation in the internal of the compound cycle G41 G42 is invalid when the compound cycle ends 1 Compensation methods of G90 G94 executing the tool nose radius compensation A For all paths of the cycle the tool nose center path is parallel with the program path B The offset directions in G41 G42 are the same as the following figures 242 Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation G41 G42 C The system executes the compensation based on the imaginary tool nose directi
83. not support DBC double byte character case 2 6 Program Structure A block consists of commands arraying of one or several technology operations in the course of machining A part program consists of some blocks according to the machining technology orderly A block number line number is used for identifying blocks A program name is used for identifying programs Each part program consists of one program number and blocks A program contains 9999 blocks at most A block number is composed of N and the following 4 digit integer A program name is comprised of and program number 3 digit integer General structure of program is as follows Fig 2 1 142 Programming Program name 020 Edit Blank space before bloc Skip symbol of block N0020 G1 N0010 G50 N0040 GO X0 ZO N0050 X100 Z100 Block numbe N0060 T0202 toolchange block comment symbol and comment N0070 G1 Chapter Two Program Structure Column 15 Line8 Total lines 10 Length 1KB hp2 2008 12 12 EDIT LSL Program comment X0 Z0 X100 Z100 ord N0030 G2 U100 W50 R50 F250 Block X50 Z30 Cursor Omit block number GO X0 ZO N0080 M30 End of block Fig 2 1 Program structure A program consists of program comments blocks each block begins with block number it can be omitted follows characters words a block has block skip symbol and comments Example Program program name 012 Remark NO000 G50 X200 Z300
84. of block is separated with a blank space generated automatically by the system but it is necessary to input the blank space manually by user when this system cannot distinguish words 2 A word can be placed on any position in a block 2 5 Block Skip Symbol and Comment CE Insert skip symbol or comment symbol before a block which is not executed which is not deleted The system skips not to execute the block in program being executed When each block adds comment symbol it can adds comments which are edit by only English letters and digitals on CNC which can be edit by Chinese on PC and CNC displays Chinese comments after programs are downloaded to CNC The system skips the block with at the row beginning to execute the next one The system skips the block with at the row beginning or block beginning to execute the next one Input at the end of row and then input simple comments Notes 1 Press W to insert or P 2 3 4 Blocks following or will become green Besides the above first condition the block at which the cursor becomes light green and becomes orange in other condition oy Chinese comments following are input by only serial or USB instead of the system keyboard but the system can display Chinese 5 must be input in SBC single byte character case when Chinese comments are input by serial or USB and the system does
85. offset value G73 X U Z W I K F P QL G73 closed roughing cycle G730 X U Z W PQ F G730 finishing 212 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions The followings are separately introduced G73 closed roughing cycle G73 is called the closed roughing cycle command to realize the compound cycle roughing of one group of close command group The system firstly executes from the starting point to gradually cut the blank called step roughing and cuts along the command group path called contour first turning and returns to the initial point and the roughing is completed The chapter describes the execution process of G73 roughing imagine the command roughing offset value is W 0 U 0 Command format G73 X U Z W _ IL K_ L P_ Q_ F_ closed roughing cycle Field definition X U X coordinate value of starting point B of contour in roughing Z W gt Z coordinate value of starting point B of contour in roughing P line number of initial block in roughing contour Q line number of the last block in roughing contour F cutting feedrate in roughing X tool retraction A in the first roughing with sign K Z tool retraction A in the first roughing with sign L cutting times i e gradual cutting layer quantity X U gt Z W P Q describe ABCA closed path i e the tool rapidly positions from A to B and then C when the system executes PQ block and rapidly returns to A ABCA is the
86. parameter or set other free output 33 pin E049 Abnormal ESC In reading the USB process it is Operate the USB device over again disordered E050 Not support USB file The system only reads FAT16 or Check or change USB device formula FAT32 file format E051 USB memory is too The system only supports the Change the USB device big maximal 8G USB device E053 USB fails to transmit Failure in USB data transmission Press system reset key and try again or reset process operate the USB device again 8 3 General Chart of Alarm in Working Mode i e E100 E199 Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E100 Prog which will delete The program list hasnt the wrong operation doesn t exist program to be deleted E101 Block is too long in There are blocks exceeded the Modify the program to be sent received prog length in the program of system sent E102 Prog which will send The program catalogue hasn t the Rebuilt the program to be sent doesn t exist program to be sent E103 No specified program Don t choose program in program Choose the needed program in catalogue program catalogue E110 RS232 fail to send RS232 failure in communication Check the command control unit program sending serial system tool or hardware interface E111 Received prog NO is The program number range Check the receiving program s wrong doesn t in 0 254 number E112 Received pr
87. position and the operator must correct the machine coordinates In JOG working mode the system prohibits all axes moving when there is the alarm In AUTO working mode the system prohibits the program starting run when there is the alarm Relative parameters The drive unit alarm checks when P404_d5 is set to 0 P405_d4 P405_d3 P405_d2 separately sets alarm level of Z X Y drive unit 4 1 4 5 Other alarms When the system appears other alarms Chinese characters prompts at the moment the operator can perform the troubleshooting based on PROGRAMMING Chapter 8 Alarm Message 4 1 4 6 Switching off power supply The machine power supply is switched off immediately to avoid the accidence in the danger or other emergency cases when the machine is running Note When the coordinate axis is moving and the power supply is switched off after the machine is switched on again there may be great deviation between the displayed coordinates and the actual position and so the operator must execute the machine zero return or other ways to regulate the machine coordinates to ensure that the displayed coordinates are the same those of the actual Operation Chapter Four System Operation 4 1 4 7 Reset operation When the system outputs abnormally and the coordinate axis moves abnormally the operator should press pe to make the system be the reset state as follows 1 All axis motions decelerate to stop 2 S function output is invalid 3
88. position to r1 r9000 gt r9000 1 In the first calling the pointer 1 points to r2 r9000 r6005 In the first calling store the Z coordinate in this position to r2 r9000 gt r9000 1 In the first calling the pointer 1 points to r3 G00 W 25 G00 U 15 M99 r9000 gt r9000 1 In the first calling the pointer 1 points to r20 r190 r9000 In the first calling take out the reciprocal second X coordinate from r20 and store it to r190 r9000 gt r9000 1 In the first calling the pointer 1 points to r19 r191 r9000 In the first calling take out the reciprocal second Z coordinate from r20 and store it to r191 G01 Xr190 F1000 G01 Zr191 M99 9 1 2 3 Interface variable This variable is correspond to input and output pin specially is used to check and control the input output pin signal of the system The interface variable is divided into input interface variable and output interface variable 279 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Input interface variable read The system has 32 input interface variable each variable is correspond to a input signal pin the variable number r1001 r1032 is correspond to the signal pin number U1001 U1032 in ranking Attention the variable number r1000 is the integer state of 32 input interface corresponding signal pin U1001 U1032 from low to high The second state value of interface variable is O low level or 1 high level The low level mea
89. program for the calculation statement which executes assignment after meet the requirement it may be executed for time after time this variable result is uncertainly suggest to don t use it like this Pay attention in the common part program this variable must be used carefully For example when r7000 100 then r3 r3 1 when meet the condition r3 pluses 1 at this time pay much attention the value of r3 is very uncertainly the accumulation frequency is very high when the call or transfer of subprogram in the program uses r3 it will induce the program execution uncertainly suggest that the uncertainly variable like r3 can t be used for the real function of all command in this instance 10 In the common program read the monitor register monitor management register it s value is zero or uncertain such as r5 r7000 then the value of r5 is uncertain 293 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 11 When one monitor is open it can check the signal change above 3ms width when ten monitor are open they can check the signal change above 30ms width 9 3 3 Monitor program example 294 Program example 1 The following program introduce the explanation of process monitor In the batch machining when the rough bar uneven length it s hard to confirm the machining start point Suppose a sensor is installed in the tool then the system can use the sensor to confirm the machining start point In the following p
90. r1 gt 100 then M61 expression will alarm 10 2 3 Customized command machining example Program example The following is the program of coming true the change tool operation by written customization command M61 changes the first too M62 changes the second tool M63 changes the third tool M64 changes the fourth tool 301 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 302 254 N0000 N0010 N0020 N0030 N0040 N0050 N0060 N0070 N0080 N0090 N0100 N0110 N0120 N0130 N0132 N0134 N0140 N0150 N0160 N0170 N0172 N0174 N0180 N0190 N0200 N0210 N0220 N0230 N0240 N0250 N0260 N0270 N0280 N0282 M98 P50 Call M61 change the T11 tool number M98 P200 Call M62 change the T22 tool number M98 P350 Call M63 change the T33 tool number M98 P500 Call M64 change the T44 tool number M30 Program end M61 Start to call M61 start to change tool T11 Target tool number when r1001 0 then P 190 else P80 Jude the current tool is consistent to target tool or not r2011 1 Close the tool post CCW rotation r2012 0 Tool post CW rotation r4010 r39 Changing tool time is set to be 30 seconds when r4010 lt 5 then P650 else P120 Judge the tool changing time is too long or not when r1001 0 then P130 else P110 Judge the tool position signal 12012 1 Close the tool post CW rotation r4011 50 Set to delay 50ms when r4011 lt 2 then P140 else P134 Delay 50ms r2011 0 The
91. rules in P Q are the same those of G71 6 When the system executes the roughing G71 it automatically memorizes X U P Q data of last G71 and directly refers the data of the internal memory So the field following G710 can be omitted when the system executes the finishing to the last roughing G71 path 7 When the system executes G710 finishing it performs the cutting along the command group path and at last returns to the initial point so the finishing is completed 8 The tool nose position before executing G710 finishing should be the consistent with that before G71 roughing 9 G710 is the same with G71 and their internal can execute the tool nose radius compensation and its programming rules and format are same those of G71 10 Coordinate offset direction in left roughing allowance U W in expresses the coordinate offset and cut in direction in finishing U W sign compound is as Fig 4 40 B gt C is finishing path B C is roughing contour A is the start up point U lt 0 W gt 0 U lt 0 W lt 0 E E C A A C C C a X B X B 208 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions U gt 0 W gt 0 U gt 0 W lt 0 4 15 2 G72 End face roughing cycle Using the command can realize the compound cycle cutting of one group of slope comman collection The system firstly starts from the starting point to rough the blank along the axial and then cut along the command group path and at last
92. set to 1200 when the coder lines are 1024 P209 is set to 1024 If P209 setting is wrong the pitch will be mistake when the thread is machined For the thread with the thread run out the spindle speed the pitch the acceleration time of the thread run out axis the initial speed and value affect the thread run out The higher the speed is the bigger the pitch is the lower the initial speed is the smaller value is worse the thread run out effect is When the previous block and the current one are the thread cutting command the system does not detect the thread head signal only one per revolution but directly starts the cutting feed Example G33 W 20 P3 the system detects 1 turn signal when the thread cutting is executed G33 W 30 P2 the system does not detect 1 turn signal when the thread cutting is executed The command must not be other command in the same block G33 thread cutting programming forms diameter programming 1 G33 axial straight thread P is positive sign decides the direction of the thread run out there is no the thread run out when is omitted Example G00 Z100 X100 G33 W 40 K1 I5 P2 M30 End point Z60 X105 2 G33 axial straight thread P is positive sign decides the direction of the thread run out there is no the thread run out when is omitted Example G00 Z100 X100 G33 W 40 K1 Il 5 P2 M30 End point Z60 X95 3 G33 axial taper thread P is positive U sign decides the directio
93. software upgrade and memory update The system software upgrade is to replace the new system software i e the old software version is replaced by the new the main aim is to perfect the system function The system upgrade is to update the system software and to get the more stable But the mistaken operations cause the system upgrade failure The direct result of the upgrade failure cannot turn on the system and the system cannot be used The system memory whole update is to replace the memory including the system software covering memory The result of the memory whole update failure is more serious It is suggested that the operator cannot use personally and that our personnel provides the service There are two methods to perform the system upgrade and the memory whole update USB and RS232 only the program designer has the privilege to operate the two 1 System software upgrade by USB After U disc is inserted the system automatically performs the software upgrade according to the system prompt to execute the operation When the system software uses USB mode to upgrade U disc root needs creates one file C928DATA the command sending and receiving must be in the file The file name format DATA file number 3 digit TXT file name range 0 254 2 System software upgrade by RS232 The system performs the upgrade by the communication software GSK928_COM EXE The system using RS232 transmission communication software i
94. spindle speed is stable otherwise there may be confused machining tooth Check one turn signal of coder from the initial angle Z raises speed from the current position A G33 starting point which makes the traverse speed reach the reference speed at the moment Z moves to B the lead of AB section maybe be not standard in the actual machining the front of AB section must reserve a empty block which does not touch the workpiece the higher the reference speed is the longer AB section is The system follows the spindle speed from B to execute the cutting to C the cutting speed changes when the spindle speed changes the lead of BC section is standard Z reduces speed from C till D position Z W CD lead maybe be not standard CD length is equal to AB when the reference speed is lower than the initial speed the system does not execute raising reducing speed the lengths of CD and AB are 0 so X should execute the thread run out in advance when the end of thread has no the thread run out groove 1 0 thread end with thread run out Z movement is the same with the above X executes the thread run out in advance according to the different position of H X thread run out speed is based on GOO speed with the raising speed constant speed and reducing speed the bigger X distance is the better the result is The speed should be more than 40mm when the conditions are permitted When H 1 and Z moves to the reducing speed point C
95. switch and zero switch installed on the machine or by the one turn signal of servo motor as the zero signal only with the deceleration switch The deceleration switch is generally installed near to the max travel of positive Z X Y coordinate axis Machine zero return operations X Press 0 and X execute the machine zero return ZN Press o and Z execute the machine zero return Z Y switch indicator lighting means Y is being executed ZN Press 0 in JOG Working mode Z moves to Z machine zero at the selected rapid traverse speed in the zero return direction Zero return process as follows Zero return mode 1 when there is the deceleration signal and zero signal the system executes the zero return mode 1 the zero return process is as follow Step 1 the coordinate axis moves to the specified direction at the rapid speed till the block presses down the deceleration switch and the system has checked the starting point of the deceleration signal to decelerate to stop moving Step 2 the coordinate axis reversely moves at the set zero return speed till the system has checked the starting point of deceleration signal to decelerate and to stop moving 44 Operation Chapter Four System Operation Step 3 when the set zero offset is not zero the system continuously moves one zero offset value Step 4 the coordinate axis continuously moves at the set zero return speed and starts checking the zero signal till the sys
96. than 15m shield cable 332 GSK928TEa 4 Zpu cP 12 Zpu CP 6 zdirt DIR 14 Zdir DIR 8 5V FREE 15 Zen FREE 9 Zalm Alm 10 OV CO Metal shell DF3 drive E 1 2 3 PE J K V 8 W 5 p T D 3 R Metal shell DF3 drive L i N 2 3 PE y W 5 P Ki D i R Metal shell T Single phase AC220V Motor power supply Reaction steppet motor Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection Connection layout between CNC and GSK DF3 GSK928TEa X DF3 drive unit Signal interface mpe e e ee ie H oo rom gt p em a 9 CoM ea shell GSK928TEa Z DF3 drive unit Signal interface Z pulse 4 ae J e pe Ma ee tte trs Peps e Note T When the stepper motor is used it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405 d 7 d 0 X motion parameter P100 P116 and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation Parameter Working Mode The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system otherwise cause that the motor steps out owing to the external interference T CNC system the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing to avoid the motor stepping out because of the external interference 333 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 5 6 Connection layou
97. that the program ends and the system returns to the first block to execute repetitively and is used when the system or machine is checked 3 1 4 M30 End of Program Spindle OFF Cooling OFF Command format M30 Endo of program spindle OFF cooling OFF Explanation M30 indicates the program ends spindle is OFF and cooling is OFF and the system returns to the first block to wait 3 1 5 M03 M04 M05 Spindle Control Command format M03 spindle CW M04 spindle CCW M05 spindle stop Explanation M05 output is valid when the system is turned on When M05 output is valid MO3 or M04 is executed its output is valid and kept and M05 output is closed when MO3 or M04 output is valid MO5 is executed its output is valid and kept MO3 or M04 output is closed When the system appears emergency stop M03 or M04 signal output is closed M05 signal is output In JOG AUTO or DIAGNOSIS working mode CW CCW STOP key on the operation panel can control spindle rotating clockwise counterclockwise and stopping When the spindle is in JOG working mode M03 M04 M05 controlled by MDI command input is invalid in JOG working mode See OPERATION 4 4 JOG Working Mode 3 1 6 M08 M09 Cooling control Command format M08 Cooling ON M09 Cooling OFF Explanation MO9 valid and M08 output is invalid when the system is turned on When MO8 is executed its output is valid and the cooling is ON MO9 is executed M08 outp
98. the browse and forbids executing the selected block 4 5 3 Displaying in a part program running When the part program is running this system displays the running state the dynamic run coordinate the workpiece planar solid graph and the path of tool nose in the course of program running which is very convenient to monitor the running state of the machine and the program The display as follows The dynamic coordinates or the dynamic tool nose movement path graph or workpiece contour graph Current block content Spindle cooling lubricating tool speed chuck tailstock and machine miscellaneous function state Feedrate override rapid override Machining time Workpiece count 72 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 4 5 3 1 Graphic display data definition Because the display area of this system is limited the different scale is employed to display the whole graph of part The length the diameter of blank the initial offset of tool and the display scale are defined by the system Press to define the above mentioned data when the system is in initial state as Fig 4 8 AUTO Auto Run 001 Pieces 1 Process 00 00 00 E ZSize XSize 260 mm Z Offset 74 mm T 0100 X Offset 0 mm Scale 30 mm grid M11 M78 100 Custom i Z 0273 595 Looe 30mm grid X9 300 Z74 494 X 0166 523 S01 50500 S01 S0200r N0000 GOO Z300 X100 G98 F30 N0010 G01 W 50 000 U20 000 F100 F
99. the following four shapes as Fig 4 45 the tool cuts from G71 starting point A and the tool parallels with Z to rough the blank till B Generally X of BCD section should be in the range between B and A when D exceeds A the system does not rough the exceeding Do not use the chamfer command in the compound cycle command G71 G72 otherwise the system alarms 13 There are four shaper in G71 Fig 4 38 Ais G71 starting point B is the finishing starting point D Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions is finishing end point BCD section is the finishing path Example As Fig 4 39 rod 82 tool infeed 4 mm once tool retraction 2 5 mm once F 60mm min NOOOO GOO X115 Z155 position to the starting point N0010 M3 S02 start the spindle set to the high speed N0020 M8 cooling ON N0030 G00 X83 X tool infeed approaches workpiece N0040 G71 XO l4 K2 5 F100 P0090 Q0160 define roughing cycle parameter N0050 GOO X115 Z155 return to tool starting point N0060 M5 stop the spindle N0070 M9 cooling OFF N0080 M2 end of program NO090 G01 Z145 F60 N0100 X15 N0110 W 30 N0120 G03 X55 W 20 10 K 20 N0130 G01 W 25 N0140 G01 X80 W 20 N0150 W 50 N0160 X81 Define the final path Fig 4 39 G71 cutting example G71 roughing offset command and G710 finishing command G71 includes 3 commands When using sets the roughing offset value roughing allowance before the roughing comma
100. the lower limit of the spindle speed in constant surface control When the spindle speed counted by the surface speed and X coordinate value is lower than P304 value the lower limit of the spindle speed is the actual spindle speed the limit Example as Fig 4 17 surface speed is 300m min which can count the spindle speed annotated in Table 4 2 Fig 4 17 Table 4 2 N0010 M3 G96 300 Spindle rotates clockwise the constant surface speed control is valid and the surface speed is 300 m min N0020 GO X100 Z100 Rapidly traverse to A point with spindle speed 955 r min N0030 GO X50 ZO Rapidly traverse to B point with spindle speed 1910 r min N0040 G1 W 30 F200 Cut from B to C with spindle speed 1910 r min N0050 X80 W 20 F150 Cut from C to D with spindle speed 1910 r min and surface speed 1194 r min N0060 GO X100 Z100 Rapidly retract to A point with spindle speed 955 r min N0110 M30 End of program spindle stopping and coolant OFF 4 14 Single Canned Cycle It is necessary to cut repeatedly the same machining path in the course of some special roughing To simplify the programming improve the programming and the machining efficiency the canned cycle is set The tool will automatically return to the coordinate position before execution when executing the canned cycle once If the cycle is executed again do not alter the cycle commands but execute the programming of feeding data aga
101. the system returns to the starting point and then executes the block following Q In P Q there are only G command G00 G01 G02 G03 G05 G04 G96 G97 G98 G99 the system permits the general input output to control M command instead of other commands T transfer call command The system only uses Z X programming The path quantity in P Q cannot exceed 1000 F S in P Q are invalid when it executes the roughing and they are valid in the final path so F speed should be specified in advance or F is programmed with G71 in the same block In P Q X Z dimension data must change monotonously in the slope always increasing or reducing X starts from the finishing contour starting point B to monotonously change to G71 starting point A The address K have no sign the tool infeed direction is automatically determined by the system the smaller is the more the roughing layer is range is related to X U U range meets that U I must be less than 10000 When the system executes the single it pauses after it runs the end point of the current step path When G41 G42 is compiled with G71 in the same block the system executes the tool nose radius compensation in roughing the blank and cutting the final path the system automatically compensates according to the motion path which is referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter Tool Nose Radius Compensation Besides G41 G42 the command is in an alone block without other commands G71 cutting has
102. the system will input the tool offset number r4006 to this variable automatically in executing T command Read write Ostool offset numbers64 The current tool position number recorder after the tool changing finished every r4007 A ss Read time the system will input the tool position number to this variable automatically The current tool offset number recorder after the tool changing finished every time 14008 the system will input the tool position number to this variable automatically Read Ostool offset numbers64 Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming instantaneous interference recorder In the AUTO working mode when the system has checked the recently press key G or M it will input the corresponding ASCII value 71 77 to r4009 and display Read r4009 the character on the top left corner of the screen Write random number except the 71 77 or press X key or enter the AUTO working mode the variable value will be write cleared to zero Using r4009 it can increase the function of two program branch transfer used in the temporally specified man interference of machining process timer Read r4010 In the AUTO working mode when the variable value isn t zero each ms will reduce z A i write one automatically until the zero it can be the time for conditional judge timer r4011 In the AUTO working mode when the variable value isn t zero each ms will reduce Read
103. the tool to the safety position change No 3 tool with its width 3mm position to the cut point cut X Z returns to the starting point of machining cooling OFF close the spindle end of program Example 3 Cut the multiple threads with M98 M99 subprogram call and its return instruction Fig 7 4a metric multiple thread Fig 7 4b inch multiple thread Example the thread heads is 3 as follows a Metric multiple threads X100 Z50 N0010 N0020 N0030 N0040 N0050 N0060 256 G00 M03 T44 G00 G92 X19 S600 X25 X19 5 Z 30 P4 5 L3 Z5 set a workpiece coordinate system Spindle rotates CW with 600 r min change No 4 tool and execute its offset rapidly approach the workpiece execute No 1 thread cycle P thread lead tool infeed 0 5mm execute the 2nd thread machining Programming Chapter Seven General Programming Rules and Examples N0070 X18 5 tool feed 0 5mm execute the 3rd thread machining N0080 X18 35 tool feed 0 15mm and execute the 4th thread machining NO090 GOO X100 Z50 rapidly return to program origin N0100 M05 stop the spindle N0110 M02 end of program G1 2 X3 T Z me S Fig 7 4 multi head thread cutting example b Inch multiple threads N0010 GOO X100 Z50 set a workpiece coordinate system N0020 M03 S600 spindle rotates CW with 600n min NO030 T44 change No 4 tool and execute its offset N0040 GOO X25 Z5 rapid approach the workpiece N0050 G92 X19
104. value register 15003 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceecccecccceccccceccccccccceceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeese 284 9 1 2 7 Graph update register Se 285 9 1 2 8 Program control register T5OOS TTT 285 9 1 2 9 System special Variable Set 1 sssseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeceeccecceecececcccseecceccccsseececccccssecccccccssesececsocssscsseee 286 9 1 2 10 System special Variable Set 2 sseeesseeeseeeeseeeeececceeeececccccseccecccccosecececcccsseccccccccssccececccsssseceese 286 9 2 Statement crrrrrrrrrrrrereecceccccccncccccccccccccecccnccccececcesccnccccescccesccncccnesccececcescceccneseceesceasccnescceseceesccnecceesceeeees 287 9 2 1 Assignment statement e essseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeecccccseecccccccssececcccccscecccccccosssececccecsseeccecccosssececscesseesse 287 9 2 2 Conditional statement sssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeccccccceccecccocceccccccosseccccccccoscecceccccsseecceccessscosseseeecessoe 288 9 2 3 Statement program example a E E A a A E A TEA 289 9 3 Process Monitoring and Executijop eeeeseeeeeeeeeerereseeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeceeeccceoeceeeceococeceeeecoceceeeeeecscceeeeeeecseeeee 290 9 3 1 Process monitor description 177000 oeererrereeeerreeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceseeeeeeoseeeeseoeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeoseeeeseee 291 XVI Contents 9 3 2 The start and close of process monitor sseeseeeeeseeeeseeeseecescoecceccoecoeccoscoeccescoccoecooesoeccoseoseseseoe 292 9 3 3 Monitor program example ssssssssssssesssseesseseessssseessnseesssseesssseesssnesssnsesssnsessaneesssssesssssees 294 9 3 4 P
105. which can be in the same block are divided into many groups as follows Group 1 G00 G01 G02 G03 G05 G02 G03 G05 cannot be in the same block with T command Group 2 G40 G41 G42 they cannot be in the same block with T command Group 3 G96 G97 Group 4 G98 G99 Note 1 The commands which can be in the alone block cannot be in the same block with other commands otherwise the system alarms E205 there are not compatible commands and they do not meet the rules for the commands in the same block 2 The commands in the same group cannot be in the same block otherwise the system alarms E205 there are not compatible commands 251 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 T command cannot be in the same block with G02 G03 G05 G40 G41 G42 otherwise the system alarms E205 there are not compatible commands and they do not meet the rules for the commands in the same block 4 T command automatically calls M60 when the tool type is 9 so T command is only in the alone block otherwise the system alarms 5 G41 G42 can be in the same block with G90 G94 G71 G72 the detailed is referred to Programming Chapter 5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation 7 3 Command Execution Sequence Relative parameters P401 efficiency setting 3 level P401_d3 execution sequence of many commands in the same block O sublevel 1 synchronism P401_d2 O close 1 open rapid skip execution function su
106. with G71 G72 the tool nose radius compensation command G41 G42 cannot be compiled with G73 in the same block the system can create cancel or use them together in P Q blocks the system alarms when it cancels the tool nose radius compensation in other blocks except for P Q 4 After the tool nose radius compensation is created in P Q the roughing and finishing are valid 214 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions in G73 5 Other explanations are referred to G71 G72 G73 roughing offset command and G730 finishing command G71 includes 3 commands When using sets the roughing offset value roughing allowance before the roughing command is executed the coordinate axis firstly offsets automatically one offset value to execute the roughing path i e the roughing path creates the whole offset to leave the allowance for the next finishing When is ignored the roughing offset value is WO UO After the roughing the finishing tool can be changed and the command is executed to the finishing Command format G73 U W_ specify the roughing offset value U X offset value U range 9999 999mm 9999 999mm W Z offset value W range 9999 999mm 9999 999mm Command field definition U X offset value roughing allowance means X coordinate offset of the last roughing path relative to the finishing path W Zoffset value roughing allowance means X coordinate offset of the last roughing path relati
107. write one automatically until the zero spindle coder Read the spindle coder and it s value range among O four times of real coder Read 4012 LINE when the coder LINE parameter P209 is set to be 1200 the value range will be 0 4800 Explanation For the written variable the assignment is a command to modify the parameter in the same time the variable has kept its assignment and it can be read or condition judgement Example When r4008 1 then P0060 When the current is No 1 tool offset it turns to P0060 When r4001 1000 then P1500 When the process number equals to 1000 it turns P1500000 When r4009 71 then P0050 When the current special transfer function key is G it turns P0050 to execute Explanation 1 The workpiece recorder can be read and written 2 When the program has used r4009 in instantaneous interference function then the G or M character or blank in the top left corner of display screen to show which program branch transfer function is in current display G expresses r4009 71 M expresses r4009 77 the blank expresses r4009 0 Here the G or M has no relationship with command M it only is the sign of instantaneous interference function key Evaluating r4009 the 71 or 77 equals to press the key G or M the branch transfer is effective in same 3 The r4010 and r4011 can t evaluate negative the zero assignment is insigni
108. 0 N0020 M03 S01 N0020 M03 S01 N0030 GO X50 Z15 F500 N0030 GO X50 Z15 F500 N0040 M98 P0060 L5 Call subprogram N0040 M98 P0080 L5 Call subprogram N0050 M97 P0130 Transfer program N0050 GO X100 Z50 NO060 GO U 4 N0060 M05 N0070 G01 Z 10 F80 N0070 M02 End of main program N0080 U20 Z 25 N0080 GO U 4 Insert the subprogram in N0090 Z 35 the main program N0090 G01 Z 10 F80 N0100 GO U2 Z1 N0100 U20 Z 25 Subprogram follows the N0110 U 22 N0110 Z 35 main program N0120 M99 N0120 GO U2 Z1 N0130 GO X100 Z50 N0130 U 22 N0140 M05 N0140 M99 N0140 M02 End of main program Transfer the program with M97 otherwise the program The subprogram must follow the main program without does not meet the actual machining M97 Method 1 When the system executes N0040 calls the subprogram and executes NOO6 0 N0120 five times and then executes N0050 the program skips to N0130 at the moment and executes the following blocks Method 2 When the system executes N0040 it calls subprogram and executes N006 0 N0120 five times and then executes blocks from N0050 to NO07 and so the program ends 3 1 14 M21 M22 M23 M24 User Output Control Command format M21 D output of No 1 user output signal is valid output LOW M22 D output of No 1 user output signal is invalid output OFF M23 D output of No 2 user output signal is valid output LOW M24 D output of No 2 user output signal is invalid
109. 0 and immediately executes G33 the system immediately executes the program for check speed being stable at the moment the system judges by mistake in S1000 stable state it is having been stability because there is the time difference between the system command and the spindle speed It should suggest that the operator should delay 0 3s between S200 and G33 When the spindle with the low speed below 10r min executes the thread cutting the system cannot have checked the spindle speed stability for a long time at the moment the parameter should be set to 0 to cancel the function Debugging setting __ bit parameter P404 password level 2 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 do The parameter is set for being convenient to the system being debugging must be set to the valid state in power on otherwise it cannot play a role in protection d7__ emergency stop alarm 0 check the external emergency stop signal function is valid 1 shield the external emergency stop signal function is invalid d6_ hardware limit alarm 0 check the hardware limit alarm function is valid 1 shield the hardware limit alarm function is invalid d5_ drive unit alarm 0 check the drive unit alarm function is valid 111 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 1 shield the drive unit alarm function is invalid d4__ mechanical software limit alarm 0 valid the mechanical software limit
110. 000 00000 000 00000 000 0 00 too number range 01 64 exceeds which is taken as the mistake Offset number format T number 01 64 they are necessary The offset data for each line must be separated by the comma There are only 5 offset data in each line exceeding 5 means there is the illegal character in the offset data When some line has not enough offset data it is not composed of Z offset value X offset value R tool radius T tool shape S toolsetting record the offset processing arranges the offset data from left to right Z offset value X offset value R tool radius T tool shape S toolsetting record the data before each line must be correct when the system updates the data following each line Z X R values do not excess its separate range Example CNC_GSK928TEa ftool number Z tool offset X tool offset tool nose radius imaginary tool nose locking tool number T01 T02 TO3 T04 TO5 TOG TO7 4 7 4 2 00000 000 00000 000 00002 000 0 00 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 0 00 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 0 00 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 0 00 0 0 0 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 O 00 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 0 00 Offset data clear P416_d5 0 the system permits to clear all offset value in OFFSET working mode and the operators first p
111. 000 the leading zero can be omitted unit mm min Move field format Z W _ F_ Zmoves its speed is determined by the rapid feed state when F is omitted Y V _ F_ Y feeds Z W _ X U _ F_ Z X feed simultaneously X U _ Y V _ F_ X Y feed simultaneously Z W _ Y V _ F__ Z Y feed simultaneously Note 1 In JOG working mode most 2 axes move simultaneously at the currently selected manual traverse speed 2 input Y V when Y set by the system parameter is valid Example 1 Input W MOVE W 5 2 ENTER RUN START or ESC cancel it means Z negatively 5 2mm Input X MOVE X 40 ENTER RUN START or ESC cancel it means X negatively 40mm Example 2 Input Z200 U50 Z moves to 200 X positively moves 50 its speed is not specified and determined by RAPID FEED state Input U20 W 50 F80 X positively moves 20 Z negatively moves to 50 the feedrate is 80 and is influenced by the feedrate override Input F200 the set federate is 200 the system is switched into feed state Input F0 the set federate is 0 the system is switched into feed state and uses the embedded speed traverse speed explanation 1 Without inputting F when the speed indicator is ON the system is the rapid traverse influenced by the rapid override when it is OFF the system is the low speed traverse influenced by the federate override 2 With the input F when the system automatically
112. 0030 GOO X165 Z5 tool infeed approaches workpiece N0040 G72 Z 125 I5 K3 F80 P0100 Q0150 define roughing cycle parameter N0050 G00 Z50 Z returns to the starting point of machining NO060 X180 X returns to the starting point of machining N0070 M5 stop the spindle N0080 M9 cooling OFF N0090 M2 end of program N0100 G01 X160 N0110 Z 55 NO120 nee Z739 Define the final path N0130 Z 20 N0140 X30 ZO N0150 XO G72 roughing offset command and G720 finishing command G72 includes 3 commands When using sets the roughing offset value roughing allowance before the roughing command is executed the coordinate axis firstly offsets automatically one offset value to execute the roughing path i e the roughing path creates the whole offset to leave the allowance for the next finishing When is ignored the roughing offset value is WO UO After the roughing the finishing tool can be changed and the command is executed to the finishing Command format and meaning G72 U W_ specify roughing offset valu U X offset value U range 9999 999mm 9999 999mm W Z offset value W range 9999 999mm 9999 999mm Command format and meaning G720 Z W _ P_ Q_ F G720finishing 211 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Or G720 consecutive word being ignored means to be consistent with the roughing command Z W gt Z coordinate value of starting point of finishing contour P
113. 02 Note Ensure the tool is placed on the safe position to avoid the tools shocking each other when GOO is executed Example Fig 4 1 G00 rapidly positioning As Fig 4 1 the tool traverses from A to B Absolute programming N0010 GOO X18 ZO Relative programming N0100 G00 U 52 W 30 4 2 G01 Linear Interpolation Command format G01 ZCW _ X CU Y V _ F_ Z X Y feeds simultaneously G01 Z CW X CU F_ Z X feeds simultaneously or Z X Z Y X Y do 159 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual G01 Z W _ F_ Z feeds or Z or X or Y does G01 Y V F_ Y feeds The tool traverses at the set feedrate in G01 from the current point to connection line of the specified point X U Z W or Y V Field X Z Y absolute coordinates of end point U W V relative movement from starting point to end point F cutting federate F value is modal and can be omitted when it is not changed At the same time it is controlled by the feedrate override Field range X Z Y U W V 9999 999 9999 999 mm F 0 001mm min 15000mm min Explanation Z X Y can execute single axis two axis or three axis feed simultaneously G01 traverse speed is specified by F and controlled by the feedrate override Actual feedrate F x _ feedrate override G01 is the modal command and can be omitted in the next block G01 can be omitted to G1 and G1 and G01 are equivalent Relative parameters Parameters related to G01 P
114. 045 N0110 GOO X50 rapidly traverse to X50 safety position N0111 G26 X100 Z50 rapidly return to reference point program starting point X100 Z50 N0120 T22 change No 2 and execute its offset N0130 G00 X51 Z 20 rapidly traverse N0140 M98 P0160 L3 call subprogram N0150 M97 P0200 program skips to N0200 N0160 G01 U 2 F40 X feeds 2 approaches to workpiece N0170 G02 U0 W 15 R7 5 F35 Turn R7 5 arc N0180 G01 W15 F500 Return to arc starting point N0190 M99 End of subprogram N0200 G26 X100 X rapidly returns to program reference point i e X100 N0210 G26 Z50 Z rapidly returns to program reference point i e Z50 N0220 T33 Use No 3 grooving tool and execute its tool offset N0230 GOO X50 Z 43 Rapidly position to cycle starting point tool width 3mm N0240 G75 X30 Z 50 I5 K2 E3 F50 Execute the grooving cycle command N0250 G01 X45 Z 42 F50 Chamfer N0260 X43 Z 43 Chamfer N0270 X30 Move to X30 outer to execute finishing N0280 Z 50 Turn 30 outer N0290 GOO X45 Position to the chamfer position 260 Programming N0300 G01 Z 51 F50 N0310 X43 Z 50 N0320 G00 X46 N0330 Z 62 N0340 G01 X42 Z 63 F50 N0350 XO N0360 G26 X100 N0370 G26 250 N0380 T10 N0390 M5 N0400 M9 N0400 M2 Chapter Seven General Programming Rules and Examples Chamfer Position the cut down point Chamfer Return to X reference point Return to Z reference point Use the reference tool T10 Spindle OFF Coo
115. 060 3 1 13 M98 M99 Subprogram call and subprogram return Command format M98 P xxxx Lxx M99 Field P block which is in subprogram Leading zero of the block number can be omitted L call times of subprogram Omit L or it is called one time when L is 1 L is 1 9999 Explanation Some fixed sequence which appears repetitively in the program is taken as a subprogram so it can be called instead of being compiled when it needs again When M98 calls the subprogram and there is M99 in the execution of the subprogram the subprogram call ends and the program returns to the main program to call the next block The subprogram generally follows M02 of the main program and the last block of the subprogram must be the subprogram return command M99 When the subprogram does not follow the main program it must command M97 to transfer the program Notes 1 M98 is used together with M99 and the subprogram call one time instead of L L gt 1 times is executed when M98 is used alone 149 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 2 When the program has M99 without M98 the program does not end till M99 3 M98 M99 is executed in the subprogram call i e they can be embedded the embedding can up to 18 layer Example A i i 5 Fig 3 1 M98 M99 subprogram call cutting example Two programming methods as Fig 3 1 Method 1 Method 2 N0010 GOO X100 Z50 N0010 GOO X100 Z5
116. 06_d5 P406_d4 P406_d3 P406_d2 to 0 i e no machine zero when the machine zero check device is not installed 1 3 Program Reference Point In machine coordinate system the operator should set a position where the tool post stops the tool changed is executed safely and installing workpiece is convenient Program reference point is set when the tool post stops at the position which is called program reference point or program zero Program reference point coordinate is relative to machine coordinate system Once the reference point is defined the tool can return to the reference point by executing the reference point return function in JOG working mode or AUTO working mode Even if the system is switched off the reference point still exists If the stepper motor is employed there is slight error caused by the motor vibrating after the system is switched on again Execute the reference point return again to avoid the error The program reference point is automatically set to X 150 Z 150 without setting the program reference point after the system is switched on firstly 1 4 Machine 2nd 3rd Program Reference Point In the machine coordinate system the operator can also set the 2nd 3rd program reference point Their functions are similar to the program reference point and the system has corresponding commands to move the worktable to the 2nd 3rd program reference point 1 5 Workpiece Coordinate System The workpiece coordina
117. 1 O input output pin Wg pin collision Release this I O or use other I O pin used 33 E027 ee i T Z X Y thread invalid Z XIY axis pitch setting value is Check the pitch compensation position and E029 wrong doesn t meet the standard modify Fail to read para Failure in SRAM saving E030 initialization parameter can t read Save again Illegal character OFT Illegal character in offset number Delete the illegal character E031 of tool compensation transmission file Tool compensation There is no tool compensation Completing the number behind the T sign in E032 NO not standard number behind the T of tool file or add the sign of offset number compensation transmission file or the offset number lack T sign OFT NO exceed The tool offset number in tool Modify or delete the exceeded tool E034 ar compensation transmission file compensation number change them to 1 64 exceeds 1 64 range the specified range Illegal data Tool compensation data in tool Delete the illegal character E035 compensation transmission file has illegal character in Input data error The tool compensation input data Check data according the tool E036 in tool compensation transmission compensation communication file format file has mistake and correct it File symbol error File type mark in tool P E037 compensation transition file is Modify the file type according 167 the tel wrong compensation file format Send OFT fail F A Sending tool
118. 1005 pulse signal N0020 when r7100 gt 10 then P2000 When the monitor pulse number is greater than 10 then turn to P2000 running N0030 r1 0 N0040 r7110 6 Set the count mode when it is changed from zero to non zero the inner counter will plus 1 N0050 r7110 2 Choosing the monitor working mode 2 to open N1000 G00 Z300 X200 Orientating to initial point N1010 GOO X180 N1020 G01 Z90 F500 Cut outer circle N1030 G01 X0 Cut off N1050 GOO Z300 X200 Back to the initial point N1060 M97 P1000 N2000 M02 9 3 6 Variable transfer register r7900 Variable transfer register r7900 the system forbid to use this variable in the process monitor description statement Explanation example r7900 1 Write any number to this register it expresses all common variable in monitor backup area are copied to common variable storage the following will explain this register function In an ordinary way in order to avoid the collision when some common variable is used in the monitor this common variable must be avoided using in the common block Because the system has a common variable storage and a backup storage of monitor variable the two section variable value change maybe aren t synchronous Example as common variable 3 explain the change of r3 1 When r3 assignment statement is executed r3 is modified in the common program then the r3 in monitor will be modified immediately too 2 When the r3 assignment statement is ex
119. 112 P113 P114 P401_d5 P401_d4 Interpolation traverse execution as follows Raising speed stage raises speed at the initial speed of P112 The acceleration time of raising speed stage is P114 at the same time the system checks whether the federate Fx feedrate override exceeds P113 limit if it does the feedrate is P113 P401_d5 P401_d4 set in the cutting machining the system uses high speed connection mode continuous smooth transition or reducing speed to zero Example m ent L a lt 1 Fig 4 2 G01 linear interpolation The tool traverses from A to B in G01 at the speed 150 mm min as Fig 4 2 160 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Absolute programming N0100 G01 X45 2Z 35 F150 Relative programming N0100 G01 U25 W 35 F150 Note F cutting feed is executed with feed per minute G98 except for special explanations it is 0 when the system uses F programming at the moment the system alarms in running programs feedrate is zero 4 3 G02 G03 G05 Circular interpolation Command format G02 Z CW X CU I K_ F _ circle center coordinates programming CCW arc G02 Z W X U R_ F_ arc radius program CCW arc G03 Z CW X CU I K_ F_ circle center coordinates programming CW arc G03 Z CW X U R_ F_ arc radius program CW arc G05 Z CW X CU IL K_ F_ any point l K on arc programming The tool traverses from the current point X U Z W to the specified arc in
120. 1905 compensation interval is 0 256 mm 999 999mm in the constant interval description method otherwise the input is invalid 3 Max compensation length cannot be more than 10m 4 The detailed parameter setting method is referred to OPERATION Parameter Working Mode Inflection Point Description Method The constant interval description method inputs too much data but cannot describe the inflection point information of leading screw error curve and so it is suggested that the inflection point description point should be used Each axis can input 150 groups of inflection point information in the inflection point description method Each group inflection point information includes the distance from the point to the measured starting point and the deviation value of the point parameter definitions in the pitch compensation table P1000_P1299 Z 150 groups of inflection point information P1300_P1599 X 150 groups of inflection point information P1600_P1899 Y150 groups of inflection point information Even number parameter is the distance to the measured starting point and the odd number parameter is the deviation value Example 246 Taking example of Z the valid leading screw length is 1000mm P1000 80 000 deviation value from B to the measured starting point 80mm is Gum the first point which is the nearest to the measured starting point P1001 6 P1002 290 000 P1003 15 P1004 450 000 P100
121. 1mm 9999 999mm K 0 9999 999mm P Q 1 9999 209 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual F 0 001mm min 15000mm min Relative parameter It is the same that of G71 Explanation 1 G72 is to cut the blank according to the tool parallel to X 2 Other explanations are the same those of G71 Command execution process G72 cycle execution process as Fig 4 40 Start from G72 starting point A Z rapidly feeds the distance I X cuts feed and its end point being defined automatically by the system Z retracts the distance K at F speed rapidly retracts to the starting point Z rapidly feeds the distance I K 000008 repeat the above steps till Z reaches the starting point B of finishing contour specified by Z Execute the final path to machine the shape described by the final path at the specified speed Last X rapidly returns to the stating point and then Z rapidly returns to the starting point Cutting feed ease ees Rapid feed ant Starting point A pl tivl el elt lg K ZW Fig 4 41 G72 end face roughing compound cycle Example 210 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Blank shape Fig 4 42 G72 cutting example As Fig 4 42 rod 163 tool infeed 5mm once tool retraction 3 mm once F 80mm m N0000 GOO X180 Z50 position to the starting point N0010 M3 S02 start the spindle set to the spindle speed 2 N0020 M8 cooling ON N
122. 2 P013 P014 93 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual The parameter is used to limiting the motion range of tool nose coordinates It confirms the max positive negative travel of tool post in Z X Y In JOG AUTO working mode the tool nose coordinates of Z X Y are more than or equal to the positive tool nose software limit value the axes only executes the negative instead of the positive motion Otherwise the system alarms positive tool nose software limit alarm The negative motion is also so Positive negative machine software limit of Z X Y __reference coordinate parameter P015 P016 P017 P018 P019 P020 The parameter is used to limiting the motion range of tool nose coordinates It confirms the max negative travel of tool post in Z X Y In JOG AUTO working mode the machine coordinates of Z X Y are more than or equal to the positive mechanical software limit value the axes only executes the negative instead of the positive motion Otherwise the system alarms positive mechanical software limit alarm The negative motion is also so 4 6 4 2 Parameters related to zero return function __ P021 P026 P109 P111 P406 P407 Machine zero coordinates of Z X Y __ reference coordinate parameter P021 P022 P023 The parameter confirms the coordinates of machine zero position When the machine installs the machine zero check device after the operator executes the Machine zero return or G28 in JOG AUTO wo
123. 2 user when the state is invalid input terminal cuts off OV skip to the block specified by P otherwise the next block is executed 3 1 16 M47 M48 Setting spindle working state Command format M47 M48 Explanation See OPERATION 4 4 JOG Working Mode 3 1 17 M60 M74 Customized commands Command format M60 M74 Explanation See PROGRAMMING Chapter 10 Customized Command Programming 3 2 S function Spindle Function S and the following data are used to controlling the spindle speed and there are two modes as follows 1 Spindle speed switch value control mode Sx or Sxx the system outputs the gear signal to the machine to realize the gear change of spindle speed 2 Spindle speed analog voltage control mode Sxxxx specifies the actual speed and outputs 0 10V analog voltage signal to spindle servo device or converter to realize the spindle speed change According to the machine s configuration with P410_d6 setting the spindle function is used to controlled multi speed or conversion motor 152 Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions 3 2 1 Gear shifting controlling spindle motor Command format S01 S04 4 gear directly outputs leading zero can be omitted S00 S15 16 gear BCD code outputs leading zero can be omitted Explanation P410_d6 0 S function controls multi speed spindle motor when it controls the multi speed spindle motor it selects the dire
124. 20 R20 W 20 X130 W 5 W 25 X150 XO Z178 Z176 F50 X14 W 1 outer compound cycle approach the face of workpiece turn the end face turn outer 016 turn the end face turn outer 040 turn convex arc turn concave arc turn outer 0120 turn taper turn outer 0130 return to the starting point after roughing change No 2 tool to finish the outer set to the spindle to high speed rapidly approach the workpiece approach the end face of workpiece turn the end face to the chamfer chamfer 1x45 finish outer 016 finish the end face 640 Programming N0260 N0270 N0280 N0290 N0300 N0310 N0320 N0325 N0330 N0340 N0350 N0360 N0370 N0380 N0390 N0400 N0410 N0414 N0418 N0420 N0425 N0430 N0440 N0460 N0470 N0480 N0485 N0490 N0500 N0510 N0520 N0530 X40 W 1 5 W 61 5 G02 G03 X120 W 20 G01 X80 W 20 W 20 X130 W 5 W 25 G00 G26 T33 G00 G01 G01 G01 X37 X41 G00 G01 X10 G00 G26 T44 G00 G92 X38 2 X37 7 G00 G26 T11 M05 Mog M02 X150 X42 Z120 X30 F50 X40 Z121 5 Z121 5 Z153 X20 F200 F50 X100 S01 X42 Z155 X39 W 34 X100 10 K 20 140 KO P3 Chapter Seven General Programming Rules and Examples chamfer 1x45 finish outer 40 finish convex circle finish concave circle turn outer 0120 turn taper finish outer 130 X rapidly retracts the tool return to the starti
125. 28 the axis rapidly moves to the machine zero from the starting point and does not go through the middle point i e the above machine zero return is the same that of Jog working mode 3 The machine zero return in G28 is referred to PROGRAMMING 4 4 Machine Zero Return in JOG working mode 4 G28 is non modal G command its execution is the same that of GOO other relative parameters are referred to GOO 5 After the corresponding axes execute the machine zero return the fronts of their machine coordinates have the blue icons as the prompts 6 The command and other commands cannot in the same block 7 ZIXIY only executes the single axis machine zero return Example G28 UO X rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move G28 WO Z rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move G28 VO Y rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move 4 11 G30 2 3 Program Reference Point Return Command format G30 P2 Z W _ X U _ Z X rapidly moves to execute the 2 program reference point return through the middle point G30 P3 Z W _ X U _ ZIX rapidly moves to execute the 3 program reference point return through the middle point G30 P2 Z W _ Z rapidly moves to execute the 2 program reference point return and other axes do not move G30 P2 YC V _ Y rapidly moves to execute the 2 program reference point return and other axe
126. 28TEa the CNC system to send the data is the sender and the one to receive the data is the receiver as follows exc gt ac Sender receiver Ready operations before communication 1 Connect the communication cable when the two CNC systems are OFF insert DB9 socket into the front cover RS232 communication interface of the CNC and insert another DB9 socket into PC pin 9 serial interface COM1 or COM2 2 PC selects the port and baud rate for communication The communication baud rate is determined by the sender setting The CNC system sets P414_d7 P414 d6 communication baud rate the concrete parameter setting method is referred to OPERATION 4 6 PARAMETER Working Mode Data transmission notes between two CNC systems 1 The sender and the receiver must be in the same working mode EDIT PARAMETER OFFSET 2 The sender and the receiver must enter the corresponding operation privilege when the system sends or receives the parameter 3 The operation steps are the same those of data sending and data receiving of communication software Notes 1 Press Cancel button when the system stops the transmission press RESET or ESC on the CNC system 2 Must not execute the power off when the system executes the data transmission 3 The communication cable between CNC and PC is the same that of the one between two CNC systems 5 2 USB Communication The system supports USB communication mode exchange the data be
127. 3 pulse signal monitor management r7110 r7113 variable variable transfer register variable r7900 9 1 2 1 Command variable The variable number range of common variable is from 001 to 199 the total is 199 pieces The common variable is used to store a data which can participate in operation and also be quoted by data field of G command etc 276 Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming The data value range of command variable 32 digit number common variable reference In the workpiece program the system uses the variable to change the data field value Format lt address gt ri means to treat the variable value as field value For example Fr003 when r003 equals 15000 its function is same to F15 command Zr010 when r010 equals 2500 its function is same to Z 2 5 command Kr 010 when r010 equals 2500 its function is same to K2 5 command S r 003 when r003 equals 2000000 its function is same to Sr003 command For example N0010 r001 3700 N0010 r001 3700 N0020 r002 150000 N0020 r002 150000 N0030 GOO Z100 X80 N0030 GOO Z100 X80 N0040 G01 Ur001 Fr002 same to U 3 700 F150 000 command function N0050 G01 Wr001 N0050 G01 Wr001 N0060 M02 N0060 M02 Explanation 1 The variable value doesn t include decimal point the variable value is get from representative value riding 1000 when it is replaced to the coordinate etc field with decimal point the variable value divides 100 then the coord
128. 4 5 6 1 Press key interference in program execution Interference operations in program execution EMERGENCY STOP immediately stops not continuously start the execution PAUSE press to continuously execute SINGLE BLOCK STOP press CYCLE START to continuously execute the program after the block is completed and the system stops 77 CGSN I HSZ oP GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual CYCLE STOP press CYCLE START to continuously execute the program after the cycle is completed and the system pauses ause 1 Press CYCLE START and the system pauses in executing the command After the system responds each motion axis decelerates to stop which Pause is displayed on the bottom left 2 Inpause state press CYCLE START and the system recovers the program to continuously execute the left press ESC the program escapes and the system returns to the auto Initial state and the pointer points to the first block of the current program Notes s 1 After the pause the system can control the spindle the chuck and the tailstock before CYCLE START is pressed ensure the spindle is started the chuck and the tailstock have been ready otherwise which maybe damage the machine and hurt the persons 2 When the system follows the blocks for the spindle machining thread in executing G32 G33 G34 G92 the press key is invalid ingle block stop 1 In continuously executing the program press SINGL
129. 4V VDDSV 7 A4 0116 R116 5 so c i E R117 5 SP ft Ib26 R118 pez RUS D27 7 L 2 Re my LB D1 R119 0119 cl R pex RB D28 e plie D3 c2 J n B3 LBB D5 R120 rer DECY D29 i pe D7 c4 lt ps LBS D9 R121 c5 LE cae ae D30 Ae Re Du 7 c6 vA S pB DR RID y C7 m Ra D31 CI pe E D15 c8 ao E oDi R123 c9 ESP PGNMI aa ip Bio D3 c10 All pi BH 005 R100 Cll m C IDO Al2 Big 2 07 c12 R101 C13 Tr O DI aa pi E4 1 c14 ote pi B6 OD13 R102 C15 B D2 cle re E1 ODI5 C16 A7 BI7 BZ DPI R103 c17 T Xl als Big B8 Dio C18 1OGND_1s j ae po Bi D21 T5 R1 D4 LE m e cB B20 D23 tO A20 B20 DECZ 2 e LT 13 B21 D25 DE 3 a nas ns R105 T6 D5 GND 19 i Ds fog P2 D27 becy 4 Jo C22 RMO 20 B23 D29 nma sn es R106 gt _ gt ty 3 z T D6 RMI a oa g B2 D31 MxzI_ 6 jo OGND 22 Cat B25 oD17 ot _ 2 o A25 B25 83 D17 R107 OGND 7 to c25 TS Sua D7 024V 23 oe pe Bi OD19 D24v Q oe vA Dav 24 aie TS 5 BT oD21 R108 f 0108 lo c27 5 Top __p gt 4 a Li E 2 o A28 B23 88 0D23 seo Jo C28 M79 26 a mo pj B oD25 RIO C29 PRES D9 o pag B0 oD27 c30 or gr Bai 0D29 R110 C31 mo Ro D10 Meo pa Bs OD31 c32 JE RII olll mm Du R112 5 RMI 1 D12 R113 rMo RUO D13 f 7 aK R114 0114 M2 D14 Vid R115 f 0115 MXZI D15 346 Connection Appendix Interface circuit method layout 2 output
130. 5 30 P1014 1000 000 P1015 12 P1016 0 000 P1900 20 0 deviation value from C to the measured starting point 290mm is 15um deviation value from D to the measured starting point 450mm is 30um deviation value from B to the measured starting point 1000mm is 12um end mark the distance from the compensation point which is not the first being 0 means the end of pitch compensation point setting the concrete position of Z measured starting point in the machine Programming Chapter Six Pitch Error Compensation coordinate system is 20 000 mm Explanation 1 P1900 P1902must be set in the inflection point description method and P1903 P1905 does not the are invalid and valid in the constant interval description method 2 The pitch compensation interval between the neigboring two points in the inflection point description method is 0 256 mm 999 999mm otherwise the system prompts the alarm The interval is too long and it is divided into many small block to describe 3 WY The distance from the pitch compensation point to the measured starting point cannot be less than the one from last pitch compensation to the measured starting point when they are the same their deviation values must be the same one otherwise the system prompts E027 the axis pitch compensation is invalid 4 Nat Except the distance from the pitch compensation point of the first pitch compensation point parameter to the measured startin
131. 5 Z 30 E4 667 L3 execute the 1 thread cycle NO060 X19 tool infeed 0 5mm execute the 2nd thread machining N0070 X18 5 tool infeed 0 5mm execute the 3 thread machining NO080 X18 35 tool infeed 0 15mm execute the 4 thread machining N0090 GOO X100 Z50 rapidly return to program reference point N0100 M05 stop the spindle N0110 M02 end of program 7 4 3 Compound machining example Example 4 Compound machining as Fig 7 5 G71 G92 Rod 135x178 mm use 4 tools No 1 is outer roughing tool No 2 is outer finishing tool No 3 for grooving with 3mm width No 4 is 60 threading tool The machining allowance in finish machining is defined by the offset parameter T8 257 CGSN I His i N0000 N0010 N0020 N0030 N0040 N0050 N0060 N0070 N0080 N0090 N0100 N0110 N0120 N0130 N0140 N0150 N0155 N0160 N0180 N0190 N0200 N0210 N0220 N0230 N0240 N0250 258 G00 X150 Z250 M3 S01 M8 T08 G00 G71 G01 X16 W 23 X40 W 63 G02 G03 G01 G01 G01 G00 G26 T22 S02 G00 G01 G01 X16 W 22 X37 X136 Z180 185 GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual eri 1 amp qt 1X 45 1x 45 Blank appearance Reference point Fi g 7 5 machining example seta workpice coordinate system Start the spindle and set its speed to gear 1 cooling ON execute the tool compensation with machining allowance approach the workpiece XO 14 K2 5 L10 F80 W 4 X80 W 20 R20 X120 W
132. 500 00 mm pitch metric thread 0 060 tooth inch 25400 000 tooth inch Cinch thread H 00000000 11111111 Explanation Difference between G34 and G33 1 When the previous block is G34 and the current is also G34 the two need to check the thread head signal one per rev 2 Bit parameter H definitions in G34 and G33 are different 3 G33 is used to machining the constant pitch thread and G34 to machining variable pitch thread others are the same and the user can refer to G33 In G34 R is the pitch incremental value or reducing value per revolution of the spindle R P2 P1 R with the direction P1 gt P2 the pitch decreases when R is negative P1 lt P2 the pitch increases when R is positive as Fig 4 14 R range metric thread 0 000 mm pitch 500 000 mm pitch inch thread 0 060 tooth inch 25400 000 tooth inch 25400 000 tooth inch 0 060 tooth inch R 0 the pitch is not changed The system alarms when R exceeds the above range value the pitch exceeds the permitted value or the pitch is negative count the increasing decreasing final path in advance when the system runs because of R increasing or reducing 179 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Starting point of machining Fig 4 14 variable pitch thread 4 6 G32 Tapping Cycle Command format G32 Z W _ PCE _ H_ Ztapping G32 Y V _ PCE _ H_ Y tapping only single axis feeds Field Z W Y CV end point coordinates of tapping or tappin
133. 5001 48 then P600 When the character 0 is input executes P1000 ending N0550 M97 P500 N0600 M02 N1000 r5002 r5001 display the keyboard input character 1 N1020 G01 Z50 X10 F2000 N1030 G00 Z100 X100 N1040 M97 P200 N2000 r5002 r5001 display the keyboard input character 2 N2020 G01 Z120 X50 F2000 N2030 G00 Z100 X100 N2040 M97 P200 N3000 r5002 r5001 display the keyboard input character 3 N3010 G01 Z160 X90 F2000 N3020 G00 Z100 X100 N3040 M97 P200 N4000 the note can t be added behind the character string N4000 the character string can be written finally it won t impact the execution speed N5000 04 D 49 95 51 32 71 111 110 103 88 117 58 N5010 05 SINPUT N5030 06 S total three working procedure 9 1 2 6 15003 display value register r5003 284 Display value register r5003 in the description of process monitor statement this variable is forbidden to use Explanation The r5003 assignment is a command to display this value it can be seen when the display window is open the data is uncertainty when read the register it can t be used for the conditional judge Example r5003 r032 display the value in r032 r5003 r03 r01 display the value of r03 adding r01 Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming 9 1 2 7 Graph update register r5004 Graph update register r5004 in the description of process monitor statement this variable is forbidden to use Explanation T
134. 72 S value can t be 0 in Used the G50 command it doesn t meet Modify the S value G50 the program regulation E273 Macro value is The variable value is negative but the Modify program negative command need it be positive number E275 Center of cycle isn t When the arc interpolation uses R Modify program in coordinate program the circle center doesn t in the stated range 8 4 2 Alarm in program command i e E600 699 Alarm in program check means in the workpiece program the explanation of the command which is collided with system parameter When the workpiece program is treated isolated there is no problem It needs to analyse the program from the whole auxiliary parameter and the setting of interface parameter then to modify the program and parameter setting to eliminate the alarm List of alarm in program check Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E601 Illegal use Sxxxx Sxxxx The Sxxxx command is over the Modify it to the gear position out of gear range parameter assured gear position value in correct range or modify range the P410 parameter E602 Illegal use M21 The M21 interface parameter Set the interface parameter No define M21 pin para doesn t specify the exact chip pin P500 is effective or change the program command E603 Illegal use M22 The M22 interface parameter Set the interface parameter No define M22 pin para
135. 72 huck foot i isn 3 e a OOt The chuck foot switch always isn t Check the chuck foot switch signal and switch signal released when the system changes resolve the error abnormal to JOG or AUTO working mode E373 Tail foot switch The tailstock foot switch always isn t Check the tailstock foot switch signal and l l released when the system changes resolve the error signal abnorma to JOG or AUTO working mode E374 ee montor The parameter P532 is Define the P532 to be G31 checking input ndefihed undefined G31 input checking pin E375 When the system is in the tapping in i Pee Spindle doesn t JOG working mode the spindle lts allowed to enter the tapping in JOG working mode when the spindle has stop doesn t stop or the rotate speed isn t ee stopped and the rotate speed is zero E376 Manual tapping The manual tapping rotate speed is Reduce the tapping rotate speed in speed is too high too fast properly E377 mman 3 a a Used the undefined command an ee een M60 M74 Modify the program unaetine 8 5 2 Relative alarm in executing statement i e E400 E499 Alarm in statement program means in the program by statement the alarm is made by the wrong statement command in executing the workpiece program the alarm can be resolved by inputting the correct command Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E400 The system doesn t evaluate and
136. 90 cutting example Example 1 Fig 4 20a outer cylindrical face the first cutting feed 5 mm the second cutting feed 2 mm F 100 mm min N0010 GOO X47 Z62 rapidly position to A N0020 G90 X40 Z30 F100 cycleonceABCDA N0030 X35 the first tool infeed to cycle once A B1 C1 DA N0040 X33 the second tool infeed to cycle once A B2 C2 DA N0050 M30 The tool is still on A after executing the above mentioned blocks Example 2 Fig 20b taper surface the cutting feed R 5 mm once F 100 mm min N0010 GOO X55 Z5 rapidly position to A N0020 G90 X50 Z 20 R 5 F100 cycleAB1CDA N0030 G90 X50 Z 20 R 10 cycle AB2 CDA N0040 G90 X50 Z 20 R 15 cycle AB3 C DA N0050 G90 X50 Z 20 R 20 cycleAB4 CDA NO060 G90 X50 Z 20 R 25 cycleABCDA The tool is still on A after executing the above blocks 4 14 2 G92 Thread cutting cycle G92 executes the thread cycle cutting The system executes the thread cycle cutting from the starting point and finally returns to the starting point Command format G92 X U _ ZC W _ PCE _ K_ IL R L H thread cutting cycle Field P metric thread lead E inch thread lead When P E is positive the system executes the axial thread and Z is the thread axis it is negative the system executes the end face thread and X is the thread axis 191 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual X U Z W absolute relative coordinate of thread end point Z movement of axial thread
137. 9_d7 1 chuck function control function is invalid input P409_d1 1 hydraulic chuck pedal switch input PRES Pressure low check UI10 r1010 P412_d5 0 without pressure low check TCP Tool post locking UI09 r1009 P318 0 line up tool post in position signal P318 9 M60 customizes the command tool change P408_d6 0 without tool post lock in position signal T8 Tool selection signal T8 Ul08 11008 P318 0 or 9 P320 0 release T7 Tool selection signal T7 Ul07 r1007 P318 0 or 9 P320 lt 2 release T6 Tool selection signal T6 Ul06 r1006 P318 0 or 9 P320 lt 3 release T5 Tool selection signal T5 UI05 r1005 P318 0 or 9 P320 lt 4 release T4 Tool selection signal T4 Ul04 r1004 P318 0 or 9 P320 lt 5 release T3 Tool selection signal T3 UI0O3 r1003 P318 0 or 9 P320 lt 6 release T2 Tool selection signal T2 UI02 r1002 P318 0 or 9 P320 lt 7 release T1 Tool selection signal T1 UI01 r1001 P318 0 or 9 P320 lt 8 release 4 6 5 11 Parameter list related to output interface release The parameter setting can ensure the interfaces are not used for the standard signals at the moment the interface release can be used for the general output interface the interface parameters can be defined to the released output interface Parameters related to output interface release are as follows 123 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Standard signal Function General Variab
138. COMI 7 sabi P 1 Xalm AI 37 OV CCWL 10 2 R AC servo motor cWL Se Metal shell 41 FG FG 29 s 50 L y Metal shell 2 5 x0 CZ 19 Z connection layout Less than 15m shield cable GSK928TEa MINAS V Single phase 4 A Zput PULSI 3 e 12 n ZPU PULS2 4 Encoder feedback signal AC220V 6 Zdirt SIGNI 5 14 2dira SIGN2 6 E 15 Qen a 39 iM Motor power supply 24V COM 2 f p 9 Zalm Al 37 10 40V CCWL R AC servo motor CWL i INH 33 Metal shell L Al FG FN 25 a 50 Metal shell j CZ eo oe 19 336 Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection 3 5 8 Connection layout between CNC system and Japanese Yaskawa drive unit X connection layout Less than 15m shield cable GSK928TEa Yaskawa drive z ust PULS Lic Single phase 3 7 L2C o 11 La PULS 8 Encoder feedback signal AC220V 5 Xdir SIGN ti Xdir SIGN PE 13 0 12 U 7 Xen S ON L 40 T Motor power supply 2 24V 24V L 47 A Xalm AlM 31 E AC servo motor 10 OV P OT 42 L3 N OT i ALM a Metal shell gt 32 P CON 4l HE Metal shell Z connection layout Less than 15m shield cable GSK928TEa Yaskawa drive Zput PULS LIC Single phase 4 q o Zpu PULS Lee 12 oo O 8 Encoder feedback signal AC220V Zdirt SIGN 6 O 11 Zdir SIGN PE 14 12 U 15 oen SON 5 40 v Motor pow
139. E and the system is switched to the single block execution mode and when the current block is executed the system displays Single block stop 2 After the single block stops press CYCLE START and the program continuously runs Press ESC and the system returns to the auto initial state and the pointer points to the first block of the current program Note 1 In executing the fixed cycle command the single block stop is valid after each step of the fixed cy c cle is completed ycle end stop 1 In continuously executing the program press hp6 and the system displays ON and the system displays CYCLE STOP 4 5 6 2 External feed hold knob The external feed hold knob is valid in AUTO working mode Whether the external feed hold knob is valid is controlled by P412_d6 P412_d6 1 the system external feed hold knob is valid the input signal is received by MXZ1 MXZ2 othe after M20 is executed CYCLE STOP P412_d6 0 the system external feed hold knob is invalid the pin of input signal can be used as rs feed hold knob introduction The system has an external interface of feed spindle hold knob Move or stop the spindle and the 78 Operation Chapter Four System Operation slider when the knob is placed on the different position Use the knob to control conveniently the starting stopping of spindle and the slide in debugging the program
140. ELETE the system prompts Enter delete all programs _Esc escape the deletion Press ENTER to delete all part programs press ESC not to execute the deletion operation and return EDIT working mode Note The system creates a program number 000 as the current program after all part programs are deleted 20 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 4 3 2 4 Renaming a part program The program name of the current program is renamed as another new one The new is taken as the current program is as follows Press INPUT key Input the program number which is not in the program list press ALTER and the current program number is rewritten to the input program number Note When the input program exists the system prompts E166 required renaming program has existed Example Example the current program 000 is renamed to 005 as follows Press key input INPUT 5 RENAME And the renaming is completed 4 3 2 5 Copying a part program Copy the current program content to another one new and the new becomes the current program as follows Press INPUT key Inputting the program name which is not in the program list press INPUT key and the current program content is copied to the new program The new program is taken the current one Note When the input program name exists the system prompts E161 copying program exists and waits the prompt losing to in
141. Earthing cecocscccocococococococococococococococococococococococococococococscocococococococococococococococococococsoocsescoscocooocoosooooosooooo 343 4 3 Power Supply Requirements a E A T T A E T a E A E EE 343 4 4 Guard cecscococococococcocococococococococococococsoocococococococococococococococococococococococooscococococococoooooososocosooeocoooooososososooo 343 4 5 Use after Long Time Unuse teeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeececccecseececcccccsecececcccceeccecccccsscceccceccseccceccccscecssececececsseeceeceesse 343 APPENDIX teeeeeeeeecseecesceececcecceceececceccececceccececcecceceececcescececcecceseccecoescececceccececcecceccececcesceseccecoescececoeccececcecceseesecoese 344 APPENDIX 1 CNC SYSTEM ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SYMBOL EXPLANATIONS teeeeeeeeeereeseeseeseeseeseeseeee 344 APPENDIX 2 CNC SYSTEM TOOL POST CONTROLLER CIRCUIT METHOD LAYOUT s tss esssesseesseesseeseessee 345 APPENDIX 3 INTERFACE CIRCUIT METHOD LAYOUT ttseeeeeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeecccccseececcecoseecceccccsseeccececsceeececceessseee 346 APPENDIX 4 EXTERNAL CONTROL CONNECTION LAYOUT tteeerereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 349 APPENDIX 5 CNC SYSTEM APPEARANCE INSTALLATION DIMENSION tseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeccseeeccccccsceccccceosseeeeeoe 350 XVII Operation Chapter One Overview Operation Chapter One Overview With 480x234 lattice TFT color graphic LCD GSK 928TEa CNC system takes as key control the high speed CPU and the complex programmable logic device of super large s
142. G00 X200 Z200 N0020 T11 NO030 GOO X100 Z100 N0040 G02 X150 Z150 R50 NO030 G01 X100 Z100 N0050 M30 2008 Having N is the block with line number no having N is the block without line number Home of each row is blank space There is a blank space between line number and code for the program with line number block skip the followings are comments 143 CGSN I HSZ GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions This chapter introduces in detailed all MSTF functions and explanations of GSK928TEa 3 1 M Miscellaneous Function Command List M function is used to control some operations ON OFF of machine and run sequence of machine program and consists of address symbol M and its following two digit integer The used M functions in the system are as follows Command Function Programming Explanation format Moo Pause to wait for starting Moo Press CYCLE START M02 End of program M02 Return to No 1 block M20 End of program M20 L Return to No 1 block to execute cycle machine L being cycle machine times M30 End of program for spindle OFF and M30 cooling OFF M03 Spindle CW M03 M04 Spindle CCW M04 M05 Spindle OFF M05 M08 Spindle ON M08 M09 Cooling OFF Mog M10 Workpiece clamped M10 M11 Workpiece released M11 M12 Chuck output signal cancel M12 M32 Lubric
143. G02 G03 G05 at the set speed the arc radius is R or the distance from the circle center to starting point is I K G02 G03 or any point K G05 on the arc Field X Z absolute coordinates of end point U W relative movement from starting point to end point F cutting feedrate R arc radius K itis Z different value between circle center and starting point of arc in GO2 G03 It is Z different value of any point and starting point of arc in G05 l it is X different value between circle center and starting point of arc in GO2 GO3 It is X different value of any point and starting point of arc in G05 Field range X Z U W 9999 999 mm 9999 999mm I K 1000000 000 mm 1000000 000mm in G02 G03 9999 999 mm 9999 999mm in G05 F 0 001 mm min 15000mm min R 0 lt Rs1000000 000mm Explanation 161 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual ZIX programming in G02 G03 G05 the traverse speed is set by F and controlled by the feedrate override F value is modal and can be omitted when it is not changed At the same time it is controlled by the feedrate override Actual feedrate Fx feedrate override G02 G03 G05 are modal and can be omitted when there are the same in the next block G02 can be written to G2 and they are equivalent G03 can be written to G3 and they are equivalent G05 can be written to G5 and they are equivalent The fields are explained as follows Table 4 1
144. ICE X alarm oe ami GSK928TEa Z DY3 drive unit Signal interface 4 Z pulse O o e ee H A e aa ee C S a a E When other stepper drive unit is connected with the CNC system the system can uses the corresponding control switching and its detailed connection method is referred to the corresponding drive device user manual Note T When the stepper motor is used it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405 d 7 d 0 X motion parameter P100 P116 and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation Parameter Working Mode The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system otherwise cause that the motor steps out owing to the external interference T CNC system the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing to avoid the motor stepping out because of the external interference 331 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 5 5 Connecting between CNC and drive unit of reaction stepper motor Connection layout between CNC and GSK DF3 X connection layout Less than 15m shield cable GSK928TEa 3 d Xput CP d pu sop 5 Xdirt DIR 3 Xdir DIR g tv FREE 7 Xen FREE Xalm AIM 10 OV CoM Metal shell Z connection layout Single phase AC220V Motor power supply Reaction stepper motor Less
145. II character ASCII character ASCII character ASCII character ASCII character ASCII code code code code code code Space 32 0 48 64 P 80 96 p 112 33 1 49 A 65 81 a 97 q 113 ip 34 2 50 B 66 R 82 b 98 r 114 35 3 51 Cc 67 S 83 c 99 s 115 36 4 52 D 68 T 84 d 100 t 116 37 5 53 E 69 U 85 e 101 u 117 amp 38 6 54 F 70 Vv 86 f 102 v 118 39 7 55 G 71 Ww 87 g 103 w 119 40 8 56 H 72 X 88 h 104 x 120 41 9 57 l 73 Y 89 i 105 y 121 i 42 58 J 74 Z 90 j 106 z 122 43 59 K 75 91 K 107 123 p 44 lt 60 L 76 92 l 108 124 45 61 M 77 93 m 109 125 46 gt 62 N 78 os 94 n 110 126 47 63 0 79 95 o 111 9 4 2 Often used color and code value corresponding list name code name code name code name code name code name code black 0 cyan 41 purple 85 red 168 yellow 245 grey 251 Light light z blue 6 Bite 54 green 105 pink 172 golden 248 hoar 253 gean silvery green 35 yellow 80 brown 126 orange 231 lie 250 white 255 298 Programming Chapter Ten Customized Command Programming Chapter Ten Customization Command Program 10 1 Customization Command They system has a set of customization command except the offered standard M command The machine manufacturer can set some commands to come true the control of additive equipment however the operator can operate the additive equipment by input the command expediently The sys
146. In G01 G02 G03 cutting feed when bit parameter P401_d4 0 the system uses the post acceleration deceleration processing and forms an arc transition at the path intersection point of the neighboring two cutting feed blocks which cannot exactly position the intersection of the two paths and there is the contour error between the actual path and the programmed path To avoid the contour error the operator can insert G04 between two blocks or set P401_d4 to 1 At the moment when the previous block moves to the end point of the block it decelerates to zero and exactly positions to the end point of the block and then executes the next cutting feed block in the mode because each block accelerates from the initial speed decelerates to zero in the end point to execute the next the program run time increases and the machining efficiency reduces d3__ multi command execution sequence in the same block 0 Substep 1 Synchronism there is many commands in one block called the multi command in one block These commands are almost executed and the system executes the next block till all are completed I P401_d3 0 the commands are executed in substep the execution sequence after one functional command is executed the system executes the next one till all are completed P401_d3 1 synchronous execution in the mode the command which are not relative each other are almost executed do not follow the substep execution sequence till each is comple
147. M20 5 block skip 6 the following is the annotation 4 3 4 Part program content input and edit Each input part program consists of many block and each block is composed of block number command and data The program format must meet the general programming rules and there is no prompt in program compiling and the alarm prompts are referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter 8 Alarm Message The qualified parts can be machined only according to the technology requirements and orderly input correct program contents The edit mode of the system is full screen The program edit window is displayed as Fig 4 4 24 001 RW8 Ln3 Linesll SIZE IKB hp2 GO X100 x0 X100 X0 G1 X100 F80 X0 X100 X0 X100 X0 Current editing program is compiled successfully Pop up window G1 Z100 M20 Fig 4 4 program edit Operation Chapter Four System Operation Display content in window area Upper top program number program capacity program length and program line quantity of current program edit cursor line and row prompt symbol of current editable character position and the system function operation prompt key hp2 Middle program edit window Pop up window display operation prompt message Note 1 Press_hp2 the system prompts Program edit help message prompt introducing all help key explanation 2 When P416_d0 is set to 1 the system forbids pressing key to edit and modify programs and
148. M24 B24 3A 4z o gt Un A24 B24 PIO V _16 6 7 APE C24 vce 2Y o BiB A C24 4 Gp zo BSB AP A25 J 495 p25 B cso T jo jy Oru _YDt C25_ o j 2 j 7 SVGND s Gx 3z o aR YD 226 126 B26 B26 PWM AQT i 307 B21 24VGND 1024V VDDSV SVQND OT O54 DAD A28 ag pog B28 DARST D500 DA SYNC C28 Gog XSON XEN DAAK A9 59 pg B29 DADI DA SDO C29 O59 1N4148 TXDO COM A30 k30 p3o B30 TXO RXDO COM C30 e39 SVGND ASI o pi __B3L_SVGND D501 SND GI 3 VDDSV A32 k32 p3 B32 VDDSV vwy o ea 1N4148 JE ASON D502 1N4148 D503 YO 1N4148 D504 1N4148 D505 Y03 348 1N4148 x ro uOT OBUUOD TOTJUOD TeULE X9O OND Cc x poou i dy Supo paysouU0D oq UVI IWLIJ Udyog ay UL P qMIS P UUO 3J0N UOISSIWY uoisgiugunag odho yosloyrap E ite 4010u ajouids JO ASTREA 40704 H dund varo vosy 3x2 paad LF soy 50 paas sow 5X9 paa H Jd Is a4 avjogvaqu a4 Ja4ul 5 cosy Odi 4P4ON OW ro L_ L Bs gt amp ou G O Ja v ant i p
149. NC CNC 1 Set communication software baud rate and communication terminal the detailed one 2 Input the external parameter value to the system or send the parameter value between two CNC systems 1 In power off connect the communication cable between the CNC system and PC or between two systems 2 The system is turned on and the parameter setting working mode is set The operator sets the corresponding privilege the receiving parameter only modifies the corresponding privilege parameter when the operator does not input the password CNC forbids receiving the parameter note the sending between two systems only sends the parameters with the same level password 3 Press R 4 Press 1 to receive the parameter 5 The system prompts the receiving done successfully after the operation is completed RS232 parameter sending CNC PC CNC CNC 1 RS232 baud rate setting Set P414_d7 and P414_d6 communication baud rate before file transmission The communication baud rate is determined by the sender setting Setting range 9600 19200 38400 Cunit bps The standard setting in delivery 9600 bps 2 Input the external parameter value to the CNC system or send the parameter value between two CNC systems 1 In power off connect the communication cable between the CNC system and PC or between two systems 2 The CNC system enters the parameter window after the system is turned on 3 Press R 4 Press 2 to send the par
150. NS Spindle gear shifting Select the speed of each gear when the machine is equipped with multi gear up to 16 gears spindle motor and control loops as TCHANGE Tool change Select the next tool number neighboring to the current one CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 3 7 Edit keys Press key Name Function explanation lt ENTER key Press it after the corresponding operation is performed INPUT key Input the required content Switch character insert alter state in EDIT working mode ALTER key Special definition in other working modes p Delete digit letter block or whole program in EDIT working A DELETE key mode DELETE Special definition in other working modes Cancel the current input data or escape from the working ESCAPE ESC state key escape from the current operation or setting e5 DRY RUN in AUTO working mode HOME key o eng Cursor moving the end of the line in EDIT working mode DA y STEP in JOG working mode END key ae f SIE Cursor moving the end of the line in EDIT working mode SINGLE CONTINUOUS executing programs in AUTO working mode Ja S SINGLE l l SINGLE CONTINUOUS analog executing programs in BLOCK key AUTO working mode hp function in other working modes fi g Control cursor movement in EDIT PARAMETER OFFSET ursor working mode hpo hp movement f rr ao p o gt i Hp function or other special definitions in other working e mode
151. Operation Chapter Four System Operation M421 M431 M44l and the gear shifting is not in position it always waits the gear shifting in position signal to execute the next step when the system is not connected with the checking gear shifting in position input signal and directly executes the next step M41 M44l input signals are defined by the interface parameters The system delays P312 frequency spindle gear shifting time 2 and outputs the spindle analog voltage according to the current gear based on P300 P303 corresponding to gear 1 4 and the gear shifting ends Speed control of frequency spindle When the machine uses the frequency spindle S controls the speed The spindle standard format consists of S 4 digit digital 2 digit means the spindle gear number There are 2 methods to input the spindle speed input 1 S sets the fixed speed of the spindle r min when S is not changed the spindle speed is not changed which is called Constant speed control 2 S sets the tangent speed m min of the tool relative to the workpiece outer which is called constant surface speed control In the constant surface control the spindle speed changes as X tool nose coordinate value changing in cutting feed The detailed is referred to PROGRAMMING Constant Surface Control G96 Constant Surface Speed Control Cancel G97 Command format G96 set the constant surface speed cutting state G96 S___ __ setthe constant surface speed cutting st
152. P output time sequence Executing M03 Executing M04 Executing M05 B l l M03 pin tl i M04 pin M05 pin MSP brake pi Executing M03 Executing M04 ee M05 M03 pin M04 pin MSP brake pi t1 In pulse control mode the hold time output by M3 M4 M5 is set by P326 t2 The spindle stop brake delay time is set by P315 t3 The durable time output by the spindle brake signal MSP is set by P316 4 4 3 2 Spindle S command _gear shifting control Prompt it is not necessary to read the chapter for the operator using the frequency spindle When the spindle does not use the frequency spindle P410_d6 is set to 0 and S function executes the spindle gear shifting S standard format consists of S 2 bit digit 2 bit digit means the spindle gear number S format Sx Sxx Operation example Select No 2 gear spindle speed Input S 0 2 ENTER the system outputs S02 and the system displays the gear state S02 Explanation 1 When P410_d5 is set to 0 the gear control signal directly outputs by the bit S range is SOO S04 One gear signal corresponds to one gear signal SO means all output is invalid 2 When P410_d5 is set to 1 the gear control signal outputs in code S range is SOO S15 The detailed code output is as follows 50 Operation Chapter Four System Operation Code Output point ISOOISO1 S02 SO3 S04 SO05 SO06 S07 S08 S09 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S01 S02 K
153. Q line number of block from finishing contour initial to final path F finishing cutting speed Explanation 1 G720 gradually cuts the workpiece according to the tool being parallel with X 2 G720 other explanations are same those of G71 and G710 3 Coordinate offset direction in left roughing allowance U W in expresses the coordinate offset and cut in direction in finishing U W sign compound is as Fig 4 43 B gt C is finishing path B gt C is roughing contour A is the start up point U gt 0 Wo U gt 0 W lt 0 A B xX a B U lt 0 W gt 0 U lt 0 W lt 0 7 B A A B B H A C 5 G X G h Fig 4 43 4 15 3 G73 closed cutting cycle command group Using the command can realize the closed compound cycle roughing and finishing The system gradually cuts the blank and cuts along the command group path and at last returns to the starting point and the roughing is completed When the roughing offset value roughing allowance is set in advance before executing the roughing command the system automatically offsets one offset to execute the roughing The finishing tool can be used before executing the roughing command Use G730 to execute the finishing G73 starting point is the same with the end point and the command is applied to the roughing of formed blank G73 is non modal and its path is as Fig 4 44 G73 command group includes 3 commands G73 U W U W specify the roughing
154. R 0 G74 end face deep hole machining cycle execution process as follow I kK B reo a e e m f 1 r y t r n Rapid feed a Sy i wA Te e ae E lut ting feed ee U 2 t r gape t 2 a E oai e E a E i r C Broken line means to transmit to the next step Fig 4 32 G74 end face deep hole machining cycle Z feeds the distance at F speed Z retracts the distance K 3 Z feeds the distance I K at F speed Zrepeats the above mentioned steps 2 3 until feeding to B 201 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Z rapidly retracts to A X 0 X rapidly offsets the distance E X feeds to C and Z to B by repeating the step 1 4 Z rapidly returns to C and X toA The tool still stops the starting point of the cycle when G74 cycle ends Relative parameter In G74 the relative parameter of rapid traverse is referred to GOO the cutting feed is referred to GO1 Note 1 In G74 the system is not relative to the tool width the end point X should be the actual subtracting or adding the tool width it is determined by the tool infeed direction 2 l K Eare no sign The system executes the operation according to K I when K is more than I 3 G74 is in the alone block without other commands 4 In the end face deep hole machining cycle E cannot be 0 otherwise the system appears E269 alarm in the deep hole drilling cycle E can be 0 which is valid Example The e
155. System User Manual om tb 2 The operator of assignment description statement only can be one of or and otherwise alarm 3 the conditional judge statement is allowed to make the assignment description such as when r5004 3 then r7000 r1001 r1002 itis the legal statement 4 system rule when the r7000 r7009 appears in the left conditional expression of when conditional statement it is to say that s the conditional description to 0 9 monitor The call can t be used in then else only assignment or transfer 5 The assignment description and when conditional description must appear in pair when there is no assignment description or evaluated the cannot monitor variable then r7000 0 when there is no when conditional description it s allowed but with little signification and without monitor function 6 In the when condition description the system can t execute the description statement immediately but wait for the corresponding serial number monitor function opened then starts the monitor 7 when the assignment meets the requirement it s not the conditional transfer behind but the common variable evaluated such as when r7000 100 then r3 r3 1 the monitor won t close 9 3 2 The start and close of process monitor After making the process monitor rule description evaluate the monitor management register r7010 r701 the monitor 9 then can open or close the mon
156. USB device program E130 Stop sending prog Manual operation press Manual operation escape the emergency or reset key sending E131 No specified content The USB device doesn t have the Create this catalogue in USB C928PRO specified catalogue C928PRO E132 USB fails to transmit amp The USB device communication Press reset key and then insert the to send now error USB device again E133 Stop receiving files Manual operation press Manual operation escape the emergency or reset key receiving E134 Fail to read prog in The USB is failed in reading Check the USB device or create this USB program program E136 Prog is too big The communication program The program is too large modify the capacity is too large program E137 Fail to open prog Can t open program maybe it s Check the USB device or create this destroyed program E142 Prog is too long Program error Check the program error again delete extra part E143 Prog is too long Check the program error again delete it Program error E144 Current prog is void The current program is empty and Edit the program first so can t rename can t change the name E145 USB prog to receive The USB receiving program does No this program in the USB doesn t exist not exist equipment create this program again E147 Not support file The U disc isn t FAT16 or FAT32 Suggest using FAT32 file system system in USB use file system FAT32 E160 Prog NO is wrong Only 000 254 program can b
157. X executes the thread run out in 173 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual advance which is not limited by K it finally moves to E H 0 and Z move the distance which leaves the distance K K point to the end point D X executes the thread run out in advance When K is big the system executes the thread run out in the middle of BC section The path is as Fig 4 8b when K is small the system executes the thread run out in the middle of CD section Fig 4 8b G33 execution path 2 Explanation 1 2 3 4 5 6 G33 can machine metric inch constant straight taper and outer thread In the spindle rotating clockwise the positive cutting is right hand thread and the negative is the left hand thread and the spindle rotates counterclockwise they are reverse Generally the machining repeats the thread cutting many times in the same path from the roughing to the finish turning when the thread is machined The thread cutting starts after receiving 1 turn signal from the spindle coder and so the cutting points on the circle of machining workpiece are the same when repeating the thread cutting many times the spindle speed must not be changed at the same time otherwise there is the error of thread cutting The thread machining cutting speed is controlled by P113 max cutting feedrate when the above speed exceeds the max feederate the system alarms It is suggested that the thread machining cutting spe
158. ZP ZP are pulse signals XD XD ZD ZD are direction signals The signals in the two groups are difference output the external should use 26LS32 and the circuit method layout is as follows 26LS31 300 2 26LS32 CNC side Drive unit side 329 CGSN I HSZ GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 5 4 Connection between CNC system and drive unit of compound stepper motor Connection layout between CNC and GSK DY3 X connection layout Less than 15m shield cable GSK928TEa DY3 drive 3d Xput CP i ul Xpu CP 9 5 Xdirt Dirt 9 13 Xdir Dir 10 5V EN 3 Xen EN ll 1 Xalm RDY1 6 10 oV RDY2 14 Metal shell Metal shell el ies os a S 5 Z connection layout Less than 15m shield cable GSK928TEa DY3 drive 3 Xpu CP 5 I Xpu cr 9 5 Xdir Dirt 2 PE Xdir Dir 3 ir ir 0 4 8 5V EN 3 7 Xen EN 1 p Xalm RDY1 6 0 oV RDY2 4 Metal shell Metal shell Single phase AC220V AC220V 330 Compound stepper motor Compound stepper motor Single phase Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection Connection layout between CNC and GSK DY3 GSK928TEa X DY3 drive unit Signal interface X pulse a Te ee O o aia cr Ee I fom ae fet ie
159. absolute coordinate positioning In the condition press program zero return or G command and the system can return the set program reference point After G is executed the machining is continuously executed the system must use GOO two axis absolute coordinate to position simultaneously to get the correct machining After the system returns to the program zero by manual press key it automatically points to the first 82 Operation Chapter Four System Operation block of the program At the moment press CYCLE START and the system starts running the fist block 4 5 10 System reset and emergence stop signal processing in AUTO working mode 1 Pressing reset key 1 The motion of all axes decelerates to stop 2 Whether M function output is hold by the parameter setting is controlled by P403_d2 after the automatic run ends the modal function and the state keep 2 Pressing emergency stop button Press the emergency stop button in the danger or emergency stop condition in the machining running and the CNC immediately enters the emergency stop state at the moment the machine movement immediately stops all output spindle rotation cooling closes Notes 1 Confirm the fault has been resolved before the emergency stop alarm is released 2 Press the emergency stop button to reduce the impact on the device before power on and power off 3 After the emergency stop alarm is released the system again executes the machine zero return to
160. ackward Input M loo IN lo IO ENTER cancel the tailstock control signal use M80 for the special tailstock device Relative parameters P409_d4 is set to 0 the system has the hydraulic tailstock control function P402_d3 0 interlock between the hydraulic tailstock control and the spindle control P402_d2 0 the consecutive check of the hydraulic tailstock respond signal is close P402_d2 1 the consecutive check of the hydraulic tailstock respond signal is open P409_d2 0 the hydraulic tailstock control signal is the level P409_d2 1 the hydraulic tailstock control signal is pulse control the pulse width is defined by P328 time P409_d0 0 the hydraulic tailstock pedal switch input is valid P409_d0 1 the hydraulic tailstock pedal switch input is invalid Time sequence of execution process and signal output of tailstock command Define RM78 or RM79 in P519 P520 when the tailstock in position signal is needed to check After M78 is executed the system outputs the tailstock forward signal from M78 pin the output pulse or the level signal is selected by the parameter and the tailstock forward operation ends without needing the respond check signal when needing the respond signal the system waits the tailstock forward in position after it has checked the tailstock forward in position signal interface pin RM78 0 and RM79 1 in the set time P329 M responds check time specifying otherwise the system prompts
161. aginary tool nose rear tool post X rear tool post coordinate system O Tool nose number 1 The tool nose center in X Z negative direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 2 The tool nose center in X negative direction and Z positive direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 3 The tool nose center in X Z positive direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 4 The tool nose center in X positive direction and Z negative direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 5 The tool nose center coincides with X and is in Z negative direction of the imaginary tool nose P Tool nose number 6 The tool nose center coincides with Z and is in X negative direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 7 The tool nose center coincides with X and is in Z positive direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 8 The tool nose center coincides with Z and is in X positive direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool Nose Radius Compensation Offset Path Explanation Inner and outer side Inside is defined that an angle at intersection of two motion blocks is more than or equal to 180 Outside is 0 180 236 Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation G41 G42 Programmed path Outer t gt Workpiece side U 0 lt a lt 180 gt Fig 5 5 inner outer side definition 5 2 2 Tool movement in star
162. ain after P413_d6 is modified otherwise X data is not correct 1 8 Interpolation Function Interpolation is defined as a planar or three dimensional contour formed by path of 2 or multiple axes moving at the same time also called Contour control The controlled moving axis is called link axis when the interpolation is executed The moving distance direction and speed of it are controlled synchronously in the course of running to form the required Composite motion path Positioning control is defined that motion end point of one axis or multiple axes instead of the motion path in the course of running is controlled X and Z are link axes Y moves alone and so GSK928TEa belongs 2 axes link CNC system The system includes linear circular and thread interpolation function Linear interpolation Composite motion path of X Z axis is a straight line from starting point to end point Circular interpolation Composite motion path of X Z axis is arc radius defined by R or the circle center I K from starting point to end point 138 Programming Chapter One Programming Fundamental Thread interpolation Movement of X or Z or X and Z is defined by rotation angle of spindle to form spiral cutting path on the workpiece surface to realize the thread cutting For thread interpolation the feed axis rotates along with the spindle the long axis moves one pitch when the spindle rotates one rev and the short axis and the long axis directly interpo
163. aken digit and input it again when the mistaken digit is input in the course of inputting letter or digit ESC ae Press to escape the current operation before the confirmation when the operator sets some operation or executes the input or man machine dialog process In JOG working mode the system displays in the top right Press it and the system pops up one window displaying the operation key catalog in JOG working mode press it again and the window is closed directly press other functions and the window automatically closes Press to enter JOG working mode For the CNC machine its electricity part installation debugging motion performance debugging coordinate system creation and tool preparation are completed in JOG working mode In JOG working window the system must combine the operator parameter list offset value to perform the analysis and precheck When the system finds out the manual operation to cause the serious result it closes the manual operation function and pops up the window display alarm message the operator firstly modifies the parameter and then executes the manual operation according to the alarm message The system provides many part program execution mode The operator can execute many necessary settings in JOG working mode before run to get the safe machining process Main function in JOG working mode including yx Coordinate axis moves in JOG mode STEP mode and MPG mode yx Coord
164. am reference point POOO it is the parameter number its format is P number which is the parameter number The three parts are indivisible to consist of the parameter the parameter number is not correct when it lacks one 00000 000 is the parameter content is the parameter annotation The file content can be some of all parameters 6 The pitch compensation parameter is divided into the constant pitch compensation parameter and invariable pitch compensation parameter Select the proper pitch compensation parameter format according to the pitch compensation parameter type which needs to update The pitch compensation parameter format selection is related to P411_d6 P411_d6 0 means the pitch compensation is not constant variable P411_d6 1 means the pitch compensation is constant Updating the pitch compensation parameter must select the pitch compensation parameter format corresponding to P411_d6 When the selected pitch compensation parameter does not match with P411_d6 the new pitch compensation parameter cannot be successfully updated Its format is as follows Constant pitch compensation parameter format II pitch compensation parameter start with P1000 in TXT file P1000 0 0 O 0 0 0O O0 0 0 O P1010 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 O P1020 0 0 0 0 0 O 0O 0 0 O P1880 0 0 0 0 0 0 O0 0 0 O P1890 0 0 0O 0 0 0 0O 0 0 O P1900 O Z starting point of machine coordinate P1901 O
165. ameter 5 The system prompts the sending is successfully completed after the operation is completed USB operation USB CNC CNC USB Press_U to transmit the data by USB communication mode The operator selects the transmission direction according to the requirements When the parameter transmission is executed by U disc the U disc root catalog needs to create one file C928PAR the parameter sending and receiving are executed in the file The file name format PAR file number 3 bit TXT Standard format of TXT parameter file on PC In PC the operator can use TXT LST text to edit the parameter file but the file name and file content must be compiled according to the required standard format to correctly send to the system Refer to the parameter file format of the system outputting as follows 1 In PC the operator should rename the parameter file name to TXT or LST suffix such as PARO99 TXT it is suggested the operator should use the TXT suffix to conveniently 89 90 2 3 4 5 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual operate the parameter file on PC The home of TXT file content must be the parameter mark CNC_GSK928TEA the item must exist The second line is the annotation the front must have the item must exist The third line is the parameter content The parameter content must meet its standard format requirement Example P000 00000 000 Z progr
166. ance of tool as Fig 1 4 Fig 1 4 incremental coordinate values Tool traversing from A to B uses the incremental coordinates as follows U 30 W 40 X with diameter programming 137 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 1 6 3 Compound Coordinate Values The incremental coordinates and the absolute coordinates can be applied at the same time but one coordinate axis in one block can only be defined by one method i e X Wor U Z can be applied but the X U or Z W cannot be applied Tool traversing from A to B as Fig 1 4 X is applied with the absolute coordinate and Z with the incremental coordinate as X50 W 40 1 7 Diameter Programming and Radius Programming X coordinate value is input with diameter or radius in programming diameter programming radius programming Diameter programming when P413_d6 bit is set to 0 X value is input with diameter and X coordinate is with diameter and its traverse speed is with radius in the system program parameter tool offset coordinates Radius programming when P413_d6 bit is set to 1 X value is input with radius and X coordinate is with radius and its traverse speed is with radius in the system program parameter tool offset coordinates Notes 1 Diameter programming rules in the manual are described except for special explanations 2 Arc radius is unrelated to diameter programming or radius programming 3 Execute the toolsetting and programming ag
167. and machining result For example there is difference between G33 G34 G92 analog drawing display path and the actual thread cutting path 4 3 6 3 Program compiling result analysis In program edit window the program compiling error creates two types of alarm Program alarm and Program compound check alarm The program compiling is completed successfully there is no the above alarm Program alarm there are mistaken commands in programming to cause the alarm and the correct command is input to clear the alarm which is not related to the parameter setting Program compound check alarm program command check causes the alarm which is resolved by the setting of all miscellaneous parameters and interface parameters to analyse the program and then by modifying program and parameters to clear the alarm 34 Operation Chapter Four System Operation Example Program alarm example In compiling program press hp3 and the alarm display is as follow Program compound check alarm example Press hp3 and the current edit program compiling is completed successfully when the system is switched from EDIT working mode to AUTO working mode the alarm display is as follows 4 3 6 4 Program compound check prompt After the program is compiled the program is executed in AUTO working mode when there is no error The system displays the program compound check prompt as follows 1 tool nose coordinate software limit machine coordina
168. andard Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting No E016 Specify para NO Must have parameter number in Add the parameter number of the first before data the first parameter parameter E017 Error in para data Parameter data exceeds the Modify the parameter data system specified range E018 Repeatedly input para Parameter number can t be input Check and delete the repeat parameter NO repeatedly number E019 Invalid characters in Can t have illegal character in file Delete the illegal character the data Wrong para file Parameter file format can t meet Create the parameter file according to the E020 formula the requirement parameter file format or add the parameter file sign E021 S upgrade code proof Software promoting command Contact the supplier error checking error Stop communication Delete manual stop transmission Check the command control unit serial E022 RS232 communication is failed in software tool or hardware connection sending and receiving Interface parameter setting E023 TA o port set pin exceeds the maximal I O pin Modify the I O to the specified range out of range Auber Illegal I O port set f E024 input pin NO which Parameter setting and uO anput Release this I O or use other I O pin ised pin collision lll rt t E025 pa O ic bi Parameter setting and
169. ank is O the last is 251 and the system only displays the cursor instead of the character there are up to 250 characters in the edit line i e the first blank bit 250 characters the last cursor bit character 252 Inserting program line Insert one or many program line between two program lines or in the front of the current block as follows Mowe the cursor to the first block end or the last block home of the two blocks Press ENTER and the system automatically creates a new block number between the current block and the next the serial number increment is P333 parameter 1 4 integer the next block number can be modified when the above the increment is not enough and remains a blank line Input the required block content After all content is input and many line are required to insert ENTER is pressed which is not done when one line is required to insert Example Example insert a new block M3_ between N0020 and N0030 as follows 27 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 3 4 3 Deleting a block Delete all content in one line as follows move the cursor the hone of the required line press DELETE 8 delete all content of the selected line 4 3 4 4 Inserting a character in a block Insert a character in one block as follows Press ALTER switch the input mode to insert mode i e the cursor is displayed to the down horizontal line M
170. anual rapid and GOO the actual rapid traverse speed in Z X Y is controlled by the rapid override Z actual rapid speed P100x rapid override unit mm min X actual rapid speed P101x rapid override unit mm min Y actual rapid speed P102x rapid override unit mm min Lowest initial speed of Z X Y __ motion parameter P103 P104 P105 P103 P104 P105 define the lowest initial soeed of Z X Y in GOO or JOG working mode When Z X Y speed are less than P103 P104 P105 values they does not execute raising reducing speed process Regulate the parameter to the proper value according to the actual machine load unit mm min Rapid feed acceleration deceleration time of Z X Y ms __ motion parameter P106 P107 P108 P106 P107 P108 define the lowest initial soeed of Z X Y in GOO or JOG working mode raise speed from the lowest initial speed 0 to 15mm min in linear movement The bigger P106 P107 P108 values are the longest the acceleration processes of Z X Y are The operator should reduce P106 P107 P108 values to improve the machining efficiency based on meeting the load characteristics In X radius programming the time spent is from Om min to 15m min unit ms Cutting feed initial speed __ motion parameter P112 P112 feed initial speed P112 defines the initial speed of G01 G02 G03 G05 in automatic machining process There is no raising reducing speed process when the F speed specified by the program is less than P112 value M
171. arameter and is correctly connected the system checks the signal on the corresponding pin P512 Dalm feed device alarm check signal Functional description 1 When the system checks the signal in M20 it automatically stops and alarms 2 Use M02 MO3 instead of M20 to terminate the program the feed device alarm function is invalid 4 5 7 Modifying offset in program run The system pops up the window to modify the offset value in machining and the operator must be careful 4 5 7 1 Modifying offset method in program run Modifying offset method 1 In automatic running press OFFSET and the system pop up the window to display the modifying offset press it again and the system closes the window Q S B 2 Press or to select the required modification tool offset number press and to select the required modification tool offset and the detailed operations are referred to OPERATION 4 7 OFFSET Working Mode 3 Press INPUT to input the data Press ENTER when the input data directly replaces the previous Press ALTER when the operator modifies the previous data Press ESC to cancel the input data 4 Press OFFSET or press ESC to escape the offset display window after the input is completed 80 Operation Chapter Four System Operation Notes 1 In inputting the data the system can be switched to the display window in AUTO working mode and switched to the offset display window the previous input data r
172. asing in position after it has checked the chuck releasing in position signal interface pin RM11 0 and RM10 1 in the set time P329 M responds check time specifying otherwise the system prompts Alarm for chuck releasing respond check 99 overtime In inner chuck mode after M10 is executed the system outputs the chuck clamping signal from M11 pin after M11 is executed the system outputs the chuck releasing signal from M10 pin which is opposite to the output pin in the outer chuck mode and others are the same Besides using commands the external pedal switch also can control the hydraulic chuck The system switches the clamping releasing by M10 M11 when the pedal switch is stepped once Chuck pedal switch releases before the system is switched from other working mode to JOG or AUTO working mode otherwise the system alarms Time sequence of hydraulic chuck control signal output 61 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 1 M10 M11 output time sequence in pulse control mode Executing M10 Executing M11 Executing M10 Input signal M10 pin M11 pin t1 M10 M11 signal output hold time is set by P327 in pulse control mode 2 M10 M11 output time sequence in level control mode Executing M10 Executing M11 Executing M10 Note 1 When the hydraulic chuck control is valid the system defaults the chuck releasing after power on the first control input of chuck
173. assignment is a command to modify the parameter in the same time it has kept the assignment and can be used for the read or conditional judge In the common situation don t use the system inner special variable The system inner special variable must be used carefully Example r6001 150000 modify the current Z axis machine coordinate to 150 000 when r6005 gt 3000 then P1500 when the current X tool nose coordinate is over 3 000 then turn to P1500 r6201 r6201 20 add 0 020 to the X tool compensation of the first set tool offset number The system inner special variable value range 32 digit with symbol 9 1 2 10 System special variable set 2 286 System special variable set 2 used for the monitor description ye Meaning Property Workpiece counter the displayed workpiece on screen Read r4001 In et ial execution the counter will add 1 in auto when it meet a M02 or M30 write or r4002 Time counter workpiece processing time unit ms Read r4003 Spindle rotate speed recorder the system checked current rotate speed unit r min Read r4004 Spindle program rotate speed recorder in execute the S command the system will read input the variable for automatism program rotate speed at first Target tool position number recorder the system will input the tool position number Read r4005 z i to this variable automatically in executing T command write The target tool offset number recorder
174. ate and specify the surface value range 0 9999 m min G97 cancel the constant surface state G97 is modal G97 S___ _ cancel the constant surface state and specify the speed value range 0 9999 r min S Itis determined by the current state it can be speed value or surface speed value cutting Operation example Input S 2 0 0 ENTER the system switches the speed into 0 10V analog voltage to output the converter Explanation 1 In executing S the system takes the max spindle speed value of the current spindle gear as the reference counts the analog voltage value corresponding to the specified speed and then outputs to the spindle servo or the converter 2 To make the spindle actual speed be consistent with the speed set by S P300 P303 should set the actual max spindle speed value output analog voltage is 10V of each gear the setting method input S_ according to the setting value of P300 P303 and modify P300 P303 setting according to the actual displayed spindle speed value 53 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 When the system is turned on the analogy voltage output is Ov the system outputs corresponding analog voltage value after it executes S it always keeps later except for the cutting feed state in the constant surface speed control and X coordinate value is not changed After SO is executed the analog voltage output is OV CNC resets in the emergency stop the analog volta
175. ate check 26 Unused Unused e The connection cable between the system and the converter should use the shield cable and the shield is connected with X4 socket metal shell 3 6 3 Encoder technical specifications e The system can connect externally the spindle encoder by the spindle interface X4 which is used to the thread machining and tapping e Can use the encoder with many e Voltage 5V 338 Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection 3 6 4 Connection layout of converter analog voltage Analog spindle interface SVC can output 0O 10V and the circuit is as follow E 5 ge S E 5 T as baby al IIAU 18 AGND NC si CNC side Machine side T The connection cable between the system and the converter should use the shield cable 3 6 5 Encoder interface method Signal explanation PA PA PB PB PC PC are the separate difference input signal of encoder A B C phase which are received by 26LS32 PA PA PB PB PC PC are quadrature square wave of the difference 90 max signal frequency lt 1MHz the CNC uses the encoder lines is set by P209 in the range 100 5000 Encoder 3 6 6 Encode interface connection layout ow peindiecencoder Less than 15m shield cable ay side A pat I 0V V dlg sa 2 b7 Ta 6 4 Tor ae A g a 2 i 03 The connection cable between the system and the spindle encoder must use the shield cable which must
176. ating ON M32 M33 Lubricating OFF M33 M41 Spindle gearing No 1 M41 M42 Spindle gearing No 2 M42 M43 Spindle gearing No 3 M43 M44 Spindle gearing No 4 M44 M78 Tailstock forward M78 M79 Tailstock backward M79 M80 Tailstock output signal cancel M80 M96 Call cycle execution M96 PQAL M97 Program transfer M97 P Transfer entry block specified by P M98 Subprogram call M98 PL Transfer entry block number specified by P M99 Subprogram return M99 M98 M99 specify the call times M21 Set No 1 user output to be valid M21 D Output signal keeping for the time specified by D M22 Set No user output to be invalid M22 D Signal cancel after the time arrival M23 Set No 2 user output to be valid M23 D M24 Set No 2 user output to be invalid M24 D M91 No 1 user input is invalid until input is M91 P Transfer entry block number specified invalid by P M92 Wait till No 1 user input is valid M92 P Transfer entry block number specified by P M93 Wait till No 2 user input is valid M93 P Transfer entry block number specified by P 144 Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions M94 Wait till No 2 user input is valid M94 P Transfer entry block number specified by P M47 Set permissive operation state of Y M47 M48 Set inhibited operation state of Y M48 M60 M74 Customized commands Refer to PROGRAMMING Chapter 10 Customized Command Programming Note 1 Leading zero of M can be omitted Example
177. ation may injure the operator and damage the system Warning Improper operation may result in damage to the machine as well its products T Important information IV Suggestions for safety II Notes 1 Check before acceptance H Warning e The damaged or defect product must not be used 2 Delivery and storage eMoistureproof measures are needed while the system is delivered and stored Warning Never climb the packing box neither stand on it nor place heavy items on it Do not put over five packing boxes in piles Take particular care of the front panel and the display of the system 3 Installation eProtect the system from sunlight and raindrops The shell of the system is not e Warning waterproof H Warning ePrevent dust corrosive air liquid conductors and inflammable substances from entering the system eKeep the system away from inflammable and explosive substances Avoid places where there is powerful electromagnetic interference elnstall the system firmly without vibration 4 Wiring H Caution eOnly qualified persons can connect the system or check the connection The connecting wires cannot be damaged Do not press or open the cover of the system with power on H Caution eThe voltage and the polarity of connecting plugs must accord with the user manual eWet hands are dangerous to grasp the plug or the switch H Warning eThe connection must be proper and firm eThe system must be earthed CGSR I H
178. ative U lt 0 Example G00 Z100 X100 G92 W 60 U 50 R 10 K3 I6 P2 U 51 M30 4 G92 end face taper thread P is negative R is positive There is no the thread run out when there is no l Example G00 Z100 X10 G92 W 10 U60 R10 K3 11 5 P 2 W 10 5 W 11 M30 5 G92 end face thread P is negative R 0 The thread run out is in the positive direction when is positive Example G00 Z100 X10 G92 W 30 U80 K5 12 5 P 2 W 31 5 W 32 M30 1 G92 axial straight thread as Fig 4 24 Cutting end point id Cutting starting point P Rapid return to the starting point to execute the cycle cutting Fig 4 24 195 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual P is positive sign determines the direction of thread run out there is no the thread run out when is omitted 2 G92 axial taper thread as Fig 4 25 P is positive R sign determines the direction of the thread run out sign is invalid Example G00 Z100 X100 G92 W 60 U 50 R 10 K3 l6 P2 U 50 5 U 51 M30 Cutting starting point Cutting end point Fig 4 25 3 G92 end face taper thread as Fig 4 26 P is negative R sign determines the direction of the thread run out sign is invalid Example G00 Z100 X10 G92 W 10 U60 R10 K3 11 5 P 2 W 10 5 W 11 M30 Cutting starting point Z Cutting end point H Hw Fig 4 26 4 G92 end face thread as Fig 4 27 is negative sign determines the direction of the thread run out t
179. ax speed limit of cutting feed __ motion parameter P113 P113 max speed of cutting speed P113 defines the max speed of G01 G02 G03 G05 in automatic machining process There is no raising reducing speed process when the F speed specified by the program is more than P113 value unit mm min Linear exponential acceleration deceleration of cutting feed ms __ motion parameter P114 P115 P114 feed linear acceleration deceleration time P115 feed exponential acceleration deceleration time P114 P115 define the time spent from 0 speed to 10m min of G01 G02 G03 G05 in automatic machining 96 Operation Chapter Four System Operation Acceleration deceleration time of thread cutting ms __ motion parameter P116 P116 defines the time spent from 0 speed to 10m min of thread cutting axis the smaller P116 value is the shorter the inconstant is When P116 is too small the stepper motor maybe cause the step out unit ms Acceleration deceleration time of thread run out ms __ motion parameter P117 P11 defines the acceleration deceleration time in thread run out the time spent from 0 speed to 15m min The smaller P117 value is the steeper the thread run out is which causes the step out of the stepper motor G99 initial lines __ motion parameter P118 When the parameter is not 0 and the system executes G99 every time it checks the spindle encode lines till the lines reaches the value set by P118 i e the spindle rotates some angle
180. ayers and program cycle in executing subprogram operation method as follows 1 In automatic running press and the system pops up the window to display the variable I O variable and others press ESC again and the system closes the window 4 2 Press j to select the required searching items and the selected item is displayed in black 3 When there are many variables are searched press to select the variable it is pointed by the pointer at the moment the macro variable cannot be changed press or 81 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual to search the front or the latter one macro variable press or to search the variable in the page up or page down with 7 lines in each page press to escape at the moment the macro variable is displayed in black 4 In auto initial state press ENTER and the common variable pointed by the pointer can be modified 5 Press ESC to escape the display window Explanation 1 Macro variable display the running common variable edited to the program including variable number variable name variable value and state The variable value is displayed in the dynamic along the program changing in running the number and variable name are sorted from the small to the big Variable rO01 r040 are displayed in brown r041 r99 in orange r100 r199 in green 2 I O variable display in dynamic the interface state of current running program Two kinds of 3
181. bstep execution for many commands in the same block P401_d3 0 sublevel at the moment P401_d2 is not active When many commands in the same block are executed their execution sequences are as follows after one functional command is executed the system executes the next one till all are performed Table 7 1 Command execution sequence table Command execution sequence from top to down Function M32 Cooling ON M10 Clamping workpiece M78 Tailstock going forward M41 M42 M43 M44 Spindle gear shifting 1 27 3 4 gear S function Spindle gear shifting or rotating speed M03 M04 Spindle ON M08 Cooling ON G98 G99 F function G96 G97 S function T function Tool change G40 G41 G42 G00 G01 G02 G03 G05 Motion command M05 Spindle OFF Mog Cooling OFF M33 Lubricating OFF M79 Tailstock going backward M11 Releasing workpiece M12 M80 252 Programming Chapter Seven General Programming Rules and Examples Example N1000 T11 M03 M10 GOO X50 M08 Sublevel execution sequence M10 M03 M08 T11 GOO All used time for executing the whole block is equal to the sum of single command execution time Synchronous execution for many commands in the same block P401_d3 1 synchronism P401_d2 0 forbid rapidly jumping block to execution In the synchronous execution M S T before the motion command must be executed with the motion command M command a
182. cale integrated circuit CPLD ISO CNC code is used to write part programs The system is characterized by a full screen editing Chinese operation interface real time demonstration of the machining process simple operation the system can be matched with stepper motors or AC servo drive unit to machine outer cylinders end faces grooves tapers circular arcs and threads with high cost performance Technical Specifications v X Z link to realize the short linear high speed smooth interpolation 0 001mm interpolation precision max rapid traverse speed 30m min Kx Optional to Y set by the parameter Y not only realizes the rapid traverse feed JOG STEP MPG feed motion alone tapping motion but also sets the coordinate system program zero return manual machine zero return and other operations Control servo spindle Flexible and convenient programming with statement programming function USB interface communication to get the convenient and fast operation Least command unit 0 001mm command electronic gear ratio 1 99999 1 99999 Control all kinds of automatic tool post spindle automatic shifting gear ih amp AA Pitch error compensation backlash compensation tool length compensation tool radius C compensation function Kx Exponential acceleration deceleration control used to high speed high precise machining Automatic chamfering function Tapping function Course monitoring function Lark R Cutting metric i
183. cannot be 0 X movement of end face thread cannot be 0 R For the axial thread it is the different value radius value of X absolute coordinate between end point and start point of cutting it is the straight thread when R is omitted For the end face thread it is Z coordinate difference between the starting point and the end point of the thread For taper thread R determines the direction of the thread run out i e the direction is positive when R is negative the direction is negative when it is positive K lt is the length from the starting point of the thread run out to the thread end point in thread machining axis K cannot be negative and must less than the movement of thread machining axis Itis the movement of the thread run out in thread run out there is no thread run out when it is omitted For the straight thread the thread run out is positive when is positive the thread run out is negative when is negative For taper thread the direction of thread run out is the same that of the taper sign is invalid L thread head quantity of multi thread it is single thread when L is omitted H It commands the bit parameter H_d7 H_d2 reserved the system defaults it to be zero when it is omitted H_d0 1 thread run out when the long axis reduces speed which is not limited by K value H_d0 1 the system executes the thread run out according to the proportional between K and one of K is 0 the bit is i
184. cator lights M8 corresponding bit in the output interface is displayed to 0 when the cooling is OFF LED indicator is OFF and M8 corresponding bit in the output interface is displayed to 1 Press SiN the spindle motor circularly executes SO1 S04 or S00 S15 specified according to P410_d5 setting as Press THANGE the tool post rotates to next tool selection and the system displays the tool selection state in the corresponding position of the input interface T1 T4 Note Press a sm6 to circularly execute the spindle motor SO1 S04 or SO0 S15 Firstly the spindle must be the gear shifting spindle i e P410_d6 is set to O 131 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Chapter Five RS232 and USB System Communication The system transmits part programs system parameters system software offset and so on by RS232 and USB interface the concrete operation methods of the system and the part program transmission are referred to OPERATION 4 3 3 EDIT Working mode the concrete operations of tool offset transmission is referred to OPERATION 4 7 4 OFFSET Working mode 5 1 RS232 Communication RS232 communication is the serial interface communication mode and the system realizes the data exchange between CNC and PC CNC and CNC by the serial communication cables 5 1 1 Communication between CNC and PC Sending and receiving file between CNC and PC can be realized by the communication software GSK928_COM EX which is si
185. cccccecsseeoesse 38 4 4 1 1 JOG movyement ssssessseseeeceseeecceceeccceecosececoceecccsecoseeccocccosccecosecccseccosecccoseccsssecossecsscesosesesossesso 38 4 4 1 2 Step movement ss s sssssssssesesesseessessessssseesssneesssneeesssnsesssnecsssnecsssnsesssnscsssssecsssnessssnssssnssssneeees 39 4 4 1 3 MPG f control sesseseseeeseeeeeeeccsesecosceccceecosecccoccecoccecosecccocecoseeecosceccssesosecccoseccsssecoseeceseecosesesossesso 39 4 4 1 4 Rapid traverse speed A an ccc 40 4 4 1 5 Low speed feed speed selection sseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeececcccccsececececcsseececccccseecccccecssesecececsssessssee 41 4 4 1 6 Inputting field moving setting feedrate s sssessessersesseessensenscnsensesssensensensensesscensensensenes 41 4 4 1 7 Drive unit enabling CONtrO tteeeeseeeeseeceeeccseeccocecccseecoseececosecccoccccsseccosecccocecosecesoseecessecosecessceeo 43 4 4 1 8 Coordinate axis motion alarm prompteeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee 43 4 4 2 Creating coordinate system A T a E T E E A Eerie 44 4 4 2 1 Creating machine coordinate system machine zero return machine reference point KEtUrN eeeeeeteeeeeeerreeeereeeeereeereeeereeeereeeeeeeeereeeereeeereeeereeeeeereeeereeereeeeereeenreeeereeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeereeeereeeereeeeeeeeeeee 44 4 4 2 2 Creating machine coordinate system without machine zero no machine reference pOint eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeseeeeoreeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeerereeeeee
186. ccocccoeccoocccoccooccoeccoosoeecooe 229 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual CHAPTER FIVE TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION G41 G42 eeeeereeeerreeeeeeereeeeeeeeseeeeeecseeeeeeoeeeeeseeeeesee 230 5 1 Application sssrsrssrssessessensessersesscssssnssnscnssnsesscsnsensenscnscnsscnssnscsscensensenscasenscesscsseuscasenssnssnscessenseneneess 230 5 1 1 Overviewessrstssesseseesscescescsecsscescescssscescensesscsacecencensseacessenssnscsacensenseesseacessensesaceasensensssaceasensenssees 230 5 1 2 Command format eeeeobeteeeasbeseesesbeteusesteteusestsceusesteseusecbsteusesteteusecbsteuseststeusectsceusecsesteteuseotscouseousss 231 5 1 3 Compensation direction sssseeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeecececeeececcccccsecececocosesccecccccssecececccsssecceccccsssececceccsscessseee 231 5 1 4 Programming rules sssersessessessensenssensensesscsssensenscnsenscsncensenscnscnsenscescessensenscnscnsensceneessensenees 232 5 1 5 Application example WaeebeesSacceceseaecscvsbeccecesescceceecaccdcusSecceceebecescuseedeeccscessaccsceseesesceeeascocesecessessoete 233 5 1 6 Toolsetting and tool nose number of ball tool seeeseeeeeseeseereeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeereeeeereeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 234 5 2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Offset Path Explanation ssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 236 5 2 1 Inner and outer Siderserrssssssereeseeeeeccecceccesccnccccecccccsccnsccncccceccccesccnsccesccceccesccnccccescccesccsccoeescceeees 236 5 2 2 Tool movement in start up P ecec
187. ce speed spindle speed x X x Tr 1000 m min Spindle speed r min X absolute value of X absolute coordinate value mm T 3 14 In G96 the spindle speed is changed along with the absolute value of X absolute coordinates value of programming path in cutting feed interpolation but it is not changed in GOO because there is no actual cutting and is counted based on the surface speed of end point in the program block In G96 constant surface speed control Z coordinate axis of workpiece system must consist with the axes of spindle rotary axis of workpiece otherwise there is different between the actual surface speed and the defined one In G96 G50 S_ can limit max spindle speed r min The spindle actual speed is the limit value of max speed when the spindle speed counted by the surface speed and X coordinates value is more than the max spindle speed set by G50 S_ After the system is switched on max spindle speed limit value is P305 max spindle speed of constant surface speed Max spindle speed limit value defined by G50 S_ is reserved before it is defined again and its function is valid in G96 Max spindle speed defined by G50 S_ is invalid in G97 but its limit value is reserved 186 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Relative parameters Main parameters related to G96 G97 P410_d6 P304 P305 P410_d6 setting determines whether the system executes the constant surface speed control in G96 Min a
188. chining and cutting are determined automatically by the position of the cycle start and X Z coordinates 2 The tool stops the cycle starting point after the cycle ends U sign is determined by X from A to B when the system uses the relative coordinates W sign is determined by Z from B to C In taper cutting cycle R is determined by X from C to B 3 In programming AB C D must consist orderly of one quadrangle or a triangle i e B C must be the same side of the linearity AB otherwise the system alarms Fig 4 18b When C coincides with D A coincides with B they consist of a triangle 4 G90 can be followed by the cycle consecutive commands which sets again X end point 189 190 X X from A to B is negative so U lt 0 Z from B to C is negative so W lt 0 X from C to B is negative so R lt 0 5 6 7 8 9 10 CGSR I H15 GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual coordinate and the system executes the cycle once based on G90 contour U in the consecutive command is relative to the cycle starting point For example when the system only defines again X end point coordinate X U it executes the above cycle according to the new X U coordinates The cycle contour of the consecutive command must be consistent with the direction in G90 otherwise the system alarm There is only the single X U field with F command in the cycle consecutive command the next block of the consecutive command can follow the consecutive co
189. cified by F the system divides the cutting feedrate specified by F according to the programming path into X Z direction also controls X Z instantaneous speed to contribute that the combined speed of X Z vector is equal to F command value d ef F is the combined speed of vector of X Y instantaneous speed ld d dx is the X instantaneous d increment fxis the X instantaneous speed in X direction d dz is the Z instantaneous d increment i gt ao of fz is the Z instantaneous speed Vd d The command determines the cutting feedrate of the tool Feedrate function in feed per minute G98 is expressed with Fx x x x x x x x range 0 15000 000 unit mm min Feedrate function in feed per rev G99 is expressed with Fx gt x x x x x x range O 15000 000 unit mm r F is modal It cannot be rewritten once it is specified It is the feed per minute G98 and the tool actual traverse speed is controlled by F and feedrate override Tool actual cutting speed Fx feedrate override mm min Tool actual cutting speed Fx spindle speed x feedrate override mm r Reduction formula of feed between per rev and per min Fm F xS Fm feed per min mm min F feed per rev mm r S spindle speed r min After the system is switched on the feedrate is 0 and F value is reserved after F is commanded The feedrate is 0 after FO is executed F value is reserved when the system resets and emergently stops The system
190. ck To avoid the above mentioned ones the system uses C tool compensation method namely tool nose radius compensation The system will read the next block instead of executing it immediately after reading a block in C tool compensation method and count corresponding motion path according to intersection of blocks Contour can be compensated precisely because reading two blocks are pretreated as Fig 5 2 G40 a on Front tool post coordinate system 0 Z a Of ff Z Wi Lif p bFGF Fo ap by ALIN 1x SAAN a Ar 4 tS Lf fo ff FS Thick unbroken line is the tool center path Workkpiece 7 Vea Las oe LAI AD Vf Af f 2 oS Oh fof S a Z J LS eA a Yi fe Thin unbroken line is programmed path a I Oo ZKS A uf vt Z P A 4 Ty r LA A KEA J DS al F 4 Aw f x Arc is tool nose a ris tool nose radius Fig 5 2 compensation contour 230 Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation G41 G42 Explanation 1 Whether the tool nose radius compensation function is valid is set by P411_d5 0 it is invalid 1 it is valid 2 The tool nose transition mode is set by P413_d4 0 linear transmission 1 arc transition 3 The front t rear tool pose coordinate system is set by P413_d5 position relationship between tool nose center and imaginary tool nose 4 The system uses C tool radius compensation mode 5 For the ball tool using tool nose radius compensation the displayed is the imaginary tool nose coordinates
191. command is GOO Z X absolute coordinate positioning the tool directly traverses to GOO positioning point 2 When the consecutive command is GOO W U relative coordinate movement the tool directly traverses one relative amount 3 When the consecutive command is GOO single axis positioning the other axis does not move Notes 1 Correct programming method after the system executes the tool change uses G00 to execute Z X positioning again or uses GOO single axis to orderly complete the positioning again 2 To improve the machining efficiency T command and GO must be in the same block For example O X100 Z200 T0202 3 Adding the tool compensation to program command value is executed when G0 G1 and the tool compensation command are in the same block 155 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 G0 G1 in the compound cycle there is no T in one block 3 4 F function Feedrate Function It defines the feedrate of tool function i e the feedrate function G98 G99 F command Command format G98 Fxxxxx x xxx Feedrate per minute G99 Fxxxxex k xxx Feedrate per rev Explanation Cutting feed The system can control X Z motion contributed that the motion path of tool and the defined path by commands straight line arc is consistent and also instantaneous speed on the tangent of motion path and F word is consistent which motion control is called cutting feed or interpolation The cutting feedrate is spe
192. contour starting and final path block line F roughing cutting speed Field range X U 9999 999mm 9999 999mm l 0 001mm 9999 999mm K 0 9999 999mm P Q 1 9999 F 0 001mm min 15000mm min Command execution process anes Cutting feed ERE Rapid feed Starting point A Fig 4 37 Inner outer roughing compound cycle G71 execution process X feeds distance from starting point A in G71 Z executes the cutting feed at F speed to the end point counted by the system X at F speed retracts K distance Z rapidly returns to the starting point X feeds I K distance again 205 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Repeat the above step and gradually cut till X reaches the specified finishing contour starting point X Z executes the cutting at the separately specified speed according to the final path and machine the shape described by the final path Last Z rapidly returns to starting point and X rapidly returns to the starting point Relative parameters In G71 the relative parameter of rapid traverse is referred to GOO the cutting feed is referred to G01 Explanation 206 1 2 ya 3 WY 4 5 WY 6 7 8 WY 9 10 11 12 When the system executes G71 it can automatically searches and executes P Q blocks after executing them it executes the next program following G71 But when P Q are complied following G71
193. cosine rN rA tan rB tangent rN rA atan rB rC arc tangent In the above table rN express the variable name of storing operation result rA rB rC express the variable for running the operation they can be constant too Explanation 1 The value variable value operation result don t have decimal point the unit is 0 001 For example the assignment of Angle 45 must be rB 45000 2 In the Angle assignment operation statement the rA can t be omitted otherwise alarm it can be written rN 1 sine rB 3 In the PROGRAM EDITION working mode all the special expressions can be get by pressing the HP6 key in the faceplate 4 Each assignment statement only can has one operator except the multiply operation first dividing operation later Wrong example r001 r002 r003 r004 The right writing is r001 r002 r003 r001 r001 r004 Example r3 r2 r41 the result of r2 multiplying r41 gives to r3 r2 sqr 100 the date of 100 draw gives to r2 r1 0 the initialization r1 is Angle 0 r51 1000 sin r1 the sine value of Angle r1 multiplying 1000 gives to r51 r1 r1 1000 the Angle adds 1 9 2 2 Conditional statement The conditional statement can form the branch structure It makes judgement according to the given condition in order that it decide to execute which branch block 288 Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming the basic format of when condition is When relationship exp
194. csceccceeeeeees 82 4 5 10 System reset and emergence stop signal processing in AUTO working mode 83 4 5 11 Regulating LCD brightness in AUTO JOG working mode seeeseeeerereeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeee 3 4 6 Parameter Working Mode vsssssssssssssessseeseessesssessnsecssecssecssecsnessnscsnnecanecsscenseesnsesanecanecnsecsseesnessnes 84 4 6 1 Parameter overviewssssesssessscssssscssssscsssssssssssesssssssssessnsesessssssssessnsesessesssssssssssssssesessssonsasenes 84 4 6 1 1 Parameter privilege ssssssssssssssssssssssseesseesseesssssnecnnecnsecssecsnsesnsessnecsnecssecsasssanecnsenscssessanessnes 85 4 6 1 2 Entering operation leye eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeessssssssssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeseeeessesssesesesse 85 4 6 1 3 Parameter managementeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseessesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseseses 85 4 6 2 Parameter modification sssesseesseesseesseesseeseeeeseeeseeeseceseseseesseesseesoeesoeesoeesoeesoessoecsecsosesessoeesoeesesesee 87 4 6 2 1 Parameter seareh seeeeseseseerereseseeeeeeseseseoececseseseeseoececeeseseeececseseoececseseseoececeesesecaceesesesececssececses 87 4 6 2 2 Parameter modification sssesseeeseesseeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseceseeeseeesessoessoeesoeesoessoessoeesoessoesseeesesesesesesee 87 4 6 3 Parameter hp6 function eeeeeeeeeeeeereeeereeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesereesereesereesereesereesseeesereeeeeeeeereeseee 88 4 6 3 1 Parameter communication and standard format
195. ct 4 gear control signal or outputs 16 gear BCD code signal P410_d5 0 spindle control is the 4 gear direct controlling output S01 S04 each gear corresponds one output signal P410_d5 1 spindle control is 16 gear BCD code output S00 S15 3 2 2 Spindle controlling conversion motor P410_d6 1 S function controls the conversion motor The system outputs 0 10V DC analog voltage signal controlling inverter to realize the stepless speed regulating of the spindle motor Gear control of conversion spindle Command format M41 corresponding output signal S01 M42 corresponding output signal S02 M43 corresponding output signal S03 M44 corresponding output signal S04 Command format G96 setting constant surface cutting state G96 S___ setting constant surface cutting state and specifying the surface speed value G97 cancelling constant surface speed state G97 S __ cancelling constant surface speed state specifying speed value S according to the current state speed value or surface cutting Explanation 1 In JOG and AUTO working mode the system displays the actual spindle speed S_ 2 In JOG and AUTO working mode the system displays the cutting constant surface control G96 S__ mM or constant speed control G97 S__ r 3 Parameters are related to the spindle speed analog voltage control as follows Data parameter P305 max spindle speed of constant surface speed Data parameter P304 lowest spindle speed of con
196. ction Relative interface signal of machine zero return is as the following table X1 X2 X4 interfaces 1 X1 interface Pin 2 DECZ Z deceleration signal Pin 3 DECX X deceleration signal Pin 4 DECY Y deceleration signal 2 X2 interface Pin 5 PCX X zero signal Pin 13 PCZ Z zero signal 317 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 X4 interface Pin 24 PCY Y zero signal Bit parameter P406_d7 P406_d6 P406_d5 P406_d4 P406 d3 P406_d2 set the machine zero return mode Bit parameter setting 0 means there is no deceleration signal or zero signal bit parameter setting 1 means there is the deceleration signal or zero signal There are four zero return methods and their detailed parameter setting methods are referred to Operation Parameter Working Mode the detailed zero return execution process is referred to Operation JOG Working Mode Connection example 1 The followings are the two kinds of connection examples of deceleration signal travel switch NPN proximity switch it is suggested that the user should use the travel switch the concrete connection example is as follows Machine zero return direction 7 A I T i IR AZ ZSP AZ J F F 77 F COLLIE SEMEL ESAE ETO SELESSESESE SLLSLSLLAL ELLA PLLA AL A Af f SELES SOM LLL SEEI EELS pt thts bf ht pbb ft pt Ip 4S Ph LLt th hi ftp hI bP IIAD AA SA ft APS PALES PAE y SA A PII AA OLLIE IL f PS IAI J LLLLLLA
197. d 9 1 Variable 9 1 1 Variable expression method The variable value can be set by the program command assignment or by key directly Multi variable can be used in a program and they an be distinguished by variable number The variable expression method Using small letter r variable number four digit integer to express the precursor zero can be omitted Such as r5 named number 5 variable r1003 named number 1003 variable 9 1 2 Classification of variable The variable in this system can be divided by function and purpose as common variable pointer variable input output interface variable special variable in system inner register variable of key scan command register variable of showing command register variable of command process monitor process monitor management variable pulse signal pulse signal monitor management variable etc Different variable has different function and purpose its explanation and value range are different too Following is the instruction in classify Variable type Variable range Remark Common variable r0001 r0199 pointer variable r9000 r9049 input interface variable 11001 r1032 output interface variable 12001 r2032 register variable r5001 r5004 r5008 system variable r4001 r4011 r6001 r6006 r6101 r6164 r6201 r6204 process monitor variable r7000 r7009 process monitor management r7010 r7019 variable pulse signal monitor variable r7100 r710
198. d O is displayed in highlight E Press or to display the input output interface alternately 4 8 2 Interface signal name display explanations The system has 23 channel switching input signals 18 channel switching output signals each signal has one name which means to be the signal definition 128 Operation Chapter Four System Operation General signal name the input signal names are Ul01 UI32 the output signal names are UO01 UO32 each signal corresponds to one pin UI17 UI25 are not exported and UO19 UO32 are not exported in interfaces Standard signal name is called exclusive signal name For a special machine once some signal is covered by some special function it has special name used for memory The system set the standard exclusive signal name for the used signal of all functions In the diagnosis display window the signals used by the special functions are expressed with the standard signal name it means the set function is valid in the parameter The initial parameter has used most miscellaneous functions so the displayed most pin signal number is the standard signal name the displayed unused signal are the general signal name Detailed explanation and connection method of general signal name and standard signal name are referred to CONNECTION 4 8 3 Input interface diagnosis explanation In input interface diagnosis display when one external signal is valid the corresponding bit display is 0 when it is in
199. d block In some special conditions it is necessary to start to run from some block in a part program This system allows starting any one block of current part program it is valid in initial state 1 Press INPUT and the system pops up the program browse window displays the current program and the pointer points to the first block of program 4 4 B 2 Pressing f f and the system displays the content of the top down block or up down page Press ESC and the system escapes from the selected and displays the previous block 3 When the pointer points to the required block ENTER is pressed and the system prompts Run to wait the next execution 4 Atthe moment press CYCLE START and the system executes the program from the block pointed by the pointer press ESC and the system escapes the selection and the pointer points to the first block Notes 1 The specified block cannot be in canned cycles compound cycle bodies or subprograms otherwise there is the unexpected run The system selects G00 or the tool change command before GOO 2 When the system runs the program from the specified block the selected block should be the linear movement or S M T When the system selects G02 G03 G05 the coordinates of the tool and the system must be placed on the starting point of arc otherwise the machined arc may be not qualified 3 In the course of program execution press INPUT and the system pops up
200. d ces nsseccncccesccncacccscncecesccdcccscdsecscucdcscecacesscccecdsasccncccecscncdcssssceseces 237 5 2 3 Tool movement in OFFSET mode cvrrrrrrrrreeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesesccccccccccccccccsccssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseees 238 5 2 4 Tool movement in OFFSET canceling sssssssssssesserssesessessensensenscsnscessensensensensensenscescensensenses 239 5 2 5 Tool interference check eeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeecccccceecccceccccccccecececccoseecccccccsssececccsccseeccecsessseeceosessse 241 5 2 6 Particulars ce sssesesessssescesccsccscescesccsscsacescencessceacensensssscsacensensessseacensensseaseacensensesasensensenseacensenssees 242 5 2 7 Radius compensation of compound cycle command tseeseseeseseeseeeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 242 CHAPTER SIX PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION lt eeesssssessesseeeeeeeececececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccececeees 244 6 1 Leading Screw Error Curve seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecececcececcececcccccccccccecccccececccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 244 6 2 Constant Interval Description Method seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeccecceeeeeccccecceeeecccocceeeeeccocoeeeeeeccsoceeecsocseeeese 245 6 3 Inflection Point Description Method eeeeeeeeeeereeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeececeeecececeeecececcecccccccceecccecececcceeceeceeeeessese 246 6 4 Pitch Compensation Execution Method seeesseseeeeeeeeeresceeeeceeeecocceeeeeeesoocceceeeeccocoecececececeeeecocoeeeeeeesse 247 CHAPTER SEVEN GENERAL PROGRAMMING RULES AND EXAMPLES te
201. d override X actual traverse speed P101 x rapid override Y actual traverse speed P102 x rapid override Manual operations influenced by rapid override and feed override are as followed JOG MOVEMENT operation when the speed indicator is NO it is influenced by the rapid override when it is OFF it is influenced by the feedrate override STEP MOVEMENT operation when the speed indicator is NO it is influenced by the rapid override When it is OFF it is influenced by the feedrate override INPUT FIELD MOVEMENT operation when the speed indicator is NO it is influenced by the rapid 40 Operation Chapter Four System Operation override when it is OFF it is influenced by the feedrate override Program reference point return operation it is influenced by the rapid override machine zero return operation it is influenced by the rapid override Note 1 Firstly select the rapid override and press the coordinate axis movement key in JOG working mode 2 select the rapid override in STEP working mode and regulate the rapid override in the course of movement and the traverse speed changes 4 4 1 5 Low speed feed speed selection UW Press awr and the speed indicator is OFF which is the selected low speed feed state System embedding feedrate When the input field F is 0 the system uses the embedding speed feed The manual feedrate override has 16 gear 0 150 the corresponding embed
202. d the parameter content does not change 2 After the data is input ESC is pressed and the input data is invalid 3 Bit parameter input is as follows After the required parameter which needs to modify is selected the operator can modify the parameter bit by the left right direction key prompt the current bit explanation at the bottom screen 87 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Single bit modification directly input the data which needs to modify 0 or 1 pressing other keys to input are invalid Modifying all bit it is the same that of general parameter manual setting from left to right to input For example input 11 the parameter after the operator presses ENTER is modified into 00000011 input 11000000 the parameter after the operator presses ENTER is modified into 11000000 Bit parameter P411_d6 when it is changed the pitch compensation parameter P1000 P1900 is initialized to 0 and it covers the previous pitch compensation parameter value 4 6 3 Parameter hp6 function Press hp6 in parameter window and the display is as follows The operator can perform the communication draw solidifying upgrade the system software and update the whole memory according to the password level select I parameter to perform the draw select K to solidify the parameter select F to upgrade the software or by USB or RS232 to upgrade the software select D to u
203. d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 reserved reserved d7__tool selection signal check mode 0 default the bit parameter is set 0 when P319SP320 1 search table the bit parameter is set 0 when P319 gt P320 d6__tool post lock in position signal 0 none no tool post lock in position signal release input interface 9 1 have tool post lock in position signal cover input interface 9 d5_ tool post lock signal level 0 LOW tool post lock signal LOW is valid 1 HIGH tool post lock signal HIGH is valid d4__tool post overheat check level 0 LOW tool post temperature control switch TGR signal LOW is valid 102 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 1 HIGH tool post temperature control switch TGR signal HIGH is valid d3__ strobe signal level 0 LOW I encoder strobe signal LOW of tool post is valid 1 HIGH encoder strobe signal HIGH of tool post is valid d2__ pre graduation in position check level 0 LOW Il pregraduation switch LOW of tool post is valid 1 HIGH pregraduation switch HIGH of tool post is valid Tool post type _ miscellaneous parameter P318 max value is 9 The parameter is defined by the tool post type installed on the machine and the system executes the tool change mode according to the parameter P318 0 the line up tool post installed on the machine does not cover any input output terminal of the system P318 1 or 2 the general electronic turret tool pos
204. dden functions are displayed in grey Prompt message display The parameter value range can be opened or closed when the operator input the parameter other display When the input exceeds the modification parameter the system prompts No modification privilege in the parameter setting area tk In the parameter window when the successfully modified parameter has a remark before it parameter number the system prompts the modification is completed successfully After the system executes some operations in hp6 the system displays the operation results and kI the successfully modified parameter has a remark before it parameter number to prompt the modification having been completed successfully Parameter privilege For the different privilege the parameter which can be modified is displayed in yellow the forbidden is displayed in white The parameter update using the serial USB to transmit the parameters is to modify the parameter data in the current privilege Privilege modification The privilege modification is controlled by the password and the password input is executed when the system enters the parameter password input window Whether the password can be memorized is controlled by P416_d7 P416_d7 0 it is not memorized and the system enters the parameter window in other working modes and the parameter password input window is displayed as follows 1 Modify P416_d7 0 2 Press the menu key in
205. dden to execute Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E348 The program is not Program error execution is forbidden ready Modify the program resolve error E349 Use return When the machine is back to zero function the modifying manual is Using MACHINE ZERO RETURN key machine zero forbidden ours key E350 The Sxxx value exceeds the gear S exceed limit shifting range in the non frequency Modify Abe S value to Cie correct gear ae value spindle gear shifting E351 Spindle is When the spindle is controlled by Y j controlled by Y axis the start and stop of the spindle Execute M48 to get back the spindle axi can t be controlled in JOG function E352 Spindle Y levels The spindle can t execute the gear i ah be shifting command when it is Execute M48 to get back the spindle changed controlled by Y axis function E353 M47 M48 The M47 M48 function forbidden is set in parameter when there is no Y function doesn t axis P405 d1 or Y axis can t be Modify parameter P405_d1 and P410_d4 work changed P410 _d4 E354 indle nt oe a aca The M47 M48 is forbidden to execute Stop the spindle then execute M47 M48 when the spindle don t stop M47 M48 E355 254 program error 254 program error the machining Modify 254 program resolve error Foar Da ding override The override is zero in feedrate Adjusted to feedrate override nonzero E
206. de when the operation result is changed from zero to non zero the inner counter will plus 1 Set the counting mode when the operation result is changed from zero to non zero the inner counter will plus 1 How to count about the pulse monitoring 1 When the pulse monitoring is opened it can t execute the assignment description statement repeatedly when the last operation result compared with this time it matches the following skip the inner counter will add 1 If set 6 the last operation result is 0 however this time operation result is non zero the inner counter will plus 1 If set 7 the last operation result is non zero however this time operation result is zero the inner counter will plus 1 2 In the initial that the pulse monitoring is opened the counter is automatically cleared to zero 3 When only one pulse monitoring is opened it can check the above 3ms width signal change when four pulse monitoring are opened it can check the above 12ms width signal change 9 3 5 Pulse monitoring program example Program example The following programs introduce the explanation of pulse monitoring 296 Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming In the following program suppose to check the UI05 pin which is quoted to system by signal in the machining when the times of UI05 changing from 0 to 1 is greater than ten end the program 108 N0010 r7100 r1005 Making the plus 1 count to r
207. de be zero The program continuously runs when the federate override is not zero 4 5 5 2 MPG speed control In AUTO working mode using MPG controls rapid federate override P402_d1 1 MPG controlling rapid federate override is valid and the actual federate and the rapid speed are as follows Actual federate F x federate override x MPG override Z actual federate P100 x rapid override x MPG override X actual federate P101 x rapid override x MPG override Y actual federate P102 x rapid override x MPG override MPG override range 0 100 76 Operation Chapter Four System Operation MPG controlling rapid feedrate override method 1 P402_d0 0 the system enters MPG controlling rapid federate override based on the method 1 the system sets the current position of MPG to MPG override 0 position counts 100 graduation clockwise MPG clockwise rotates one graduation and the MPG override increases 1 MPG counterclockwise rotates one graduation and the MPG override reduces 1 When MPG rotates CW one circle from A point and MPG override is always 100 MPG rotates CCW B point at the moment B is set MPG100 position the system counts CCW from B MPG CW rotating one graduation increases MPG override 1 MPG CCW rotating one graduation reduces MPG override 1 When MPG rotates CCW one circle from B point and MPG override is always 0 till MPG rotates CW across A point MPG override sets A to 0 and increases When MPG rotates CW in incr
208. de ssseseeeeeeseseesescseccescoseoeccoscocecescoecoeccosesecossessesessoee 76 4 5 5 1 Speed override tunereeeeeeereeeerreeeeeeeeereeesreeeereeeeeeeeeseeesseeeereeeeseeeereeesreeeereeereeseneesereeeereeseneee 76 4 5 5 2 MPG speed control seeeeeeeeeereeeerreeeereeesreeeeseeeeseeesseeeeseeeereeeereeenreeeereessneeereesereeseneesereesereeseneee 76 4 5 6 Interference operation in program execution processeereeseeereeereereeereseereeereeeeeeeeeereseeeeeeseeeeseee 77 4 5 6 1 Press key interference in program EXeCUtion Rice 77 4 5 6 2 External feed hold Knob srsssssrsssssseessssscessscsscscsscscsesssescsssssscessssescsssnssscssssssssssssssssssseeosens 78 4 5 6 3 External start and pause signal seeeeeeeeereeeerreeereeeeeseeeereeeereeeereeeerereesereeseeeeseeeesseeeseeeeseeeeseee 79 4 5 6 4 Feed device alarm funcetiop ssseesseesseeeseesseesseeeseeeseeeseeeseesseesoeesoeesoeesoecsoeesoeesoeeseeeseseseseseseseseo 80 4 5 7 Modifying offset in program rum eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseessssseseeeeee 80 4 5 7 1 Modifying offset method in program runeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeese 80 4 5 7 2 Modifying tool compensation validity in program runningsesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 81 4 5 8 Searching run message in AUTO working Mode seeeeeeeeeeeeccseeceseccccccccoceecocccccsceccoceccoseecoscesosee 81 4 5 9 Program reference point return in AUTO working mode ooeeeerreeeeseeeeccccccecccccccccccc
209. ding feedrate of each gear is as follows Feedrate feedrate mm min Feedrate feedrate mm min override override 0 0 80 240 10 7 5 90 300 20 22 100 420 30 38 110 525 40 60 120 675 50 82 130 850 60 110 140 1000 70 180 150 1260 Note 1 There is 2 error in the above table 2 When the feedrate override is 0 the system prompts Feedrate override being 0 which indicates the machine is in the motion state and the motion is immediately executed after the feedrate override is non zero Feedrate override MWt The feedrate override has 16 gears 0 150 press oro and the feedrate override increase WW one gear till 150 press FoverRIDE and the feedrate override reduces one gear till 0 4 4 1 6 Inputting field moving setting feedrate In JOG working mode the coordinate axis moves according to the input length and direction or directly moves from the current position to the input coordinate position instead of the set step width as follows 41 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Relative field of movement Corresponding operation of each coordinate axis X move_X field X position or U field X relative movement Y move_Y field X position or V field Y relative movement Z move_Z field X position or W field Z relative movement X Z Y U W V range 99999 999mm 99999 999mm Feedrate_F field F0000 F15
210. dius R 20 Input the above data and the system automatically counts the following data CW circle center 1 Z 40 X 10 Z X CW circle 1 coordinates CCW circle center 2 Z 60 X 30 Z X CCW circle 2 coordinates Starting point gt circle center 1 Z 20 X 0 Z X Z X vector of starting point A pointing to circle center 1 Starting point gt circle center 1 Z 20 X 0 Z X Z X vector of starting point A pointing to circle center 1 End point gt circle center 1 Z 0 X 20 Z X Z X vector of end point B pointing to circle center 1 Starting point gt circle center 1 Z 0 X 20 Z X Z X vector of starting point A pointing to circle center 2 End point gt circle center 1 Z 20 X O0 Z X Z X vector of end point B pointing to circle center 2 4 3 5 3 Line number sort Press hp5 3_ in the program edit window and the system sort again the programs and the sorted block number increases in 10 times P333 value is set to 10 Note 1 After sorting the block number again the program skip error appears when the program skip command is used in programming 2 Program sorting function is invalid when P333 is set to 0 4 3 5 4 Replacing character string Press hp5 R in the program edit window and the system prompts Character string replacing window the operator can execute the operation according to the system prompts All characters which need to be replaced are replaced from the character where the cu
211. doesn t specify the exact chip pin P500 is effective or change the program command E604 Illegal use M23 The M23 interface parameter Set the interface parameter No define M23 pin para doesn t specify the exact chip pin P501 is effective or change the program command E605 Illegal use M24 The M24 interface parameter Set the interface parameter No define M24 pin para doesn t specify the exact chip pin P501 is effective or change the program command E606 Illegal use M91 The M91 interface parameter Set the interface parameter No define M91 pin para doesn t specify the exact chip pin P517 is effective or change the program command E607 Illegal use M92 The M92 _ interface parameter Set the interface parameter No define M92 pin para doesn t specify the exact chip pin P517 is effective or change the program command E608 Illegal use M93 The M93 interface parameter Set the interface parameter No define M93 pin para doesn t specify the exact chip pin P518 is effective or change the program command E609 Illegal use M94 The M94 interface parameter Set the interface parameter No define M94 pin para doesn t specify the exact chip pin P518 is effective or change the program command E610 Illegal use M78 The function of M78 is set to be Set the interface parameter Command invalid invalid P409_d4 is effective or change the program command E611 Illegal use M79 The function of M79 is set to be Set the interface parameter Command in
212. dow 1 Open an empty display window 2 when the window is not opened call the display window which has opened last time 10 Set the cursor position the cursor points to the first line home 11 Set the cursor position the cursor points to the next line home 12 Erasure the content from the current cursor position to the line end the cursor position don t change 13 Erasure all the content in window the cursor points to the first line home 32 126 Sending an ASCII character to the display window see ASCII command table 201 209 The cursor is positioned to the specified line the range is from 1 to 9 210 230 The cursor is positioned to the specified line the range is from 10 to 30 send a set of character string to the display window 1000 1099 the mantissa 00 99 are character string number it at most can display 100 sets character string 2000 2999 Send a alarm number to the display window display alarm XXX the range of XXX is from 0 to 999 110001 110009 Set the line number of the display window line 1 to 9 the system windows default is 6 110010 110040 Set the displayed character number in each line 10 to 40 the system windows default is 30 120000 Set the window grounding or character grounding 0 to 255 can be chose the system defaults white 120255 the value is 255 130000 Set the character color 0 to 255 can be chosen the system defaults black the value is 0 130255 140000 Set the size of the charact
213. e tool change failure N3000 12012 1 stop tool post rotation after alarm N3010 OOS check tool selection signal overtime 325 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual N3020 r5002 110001 set the window width to be one line N3020 r5002 130168 font color to be red N3030 r5002 1 N3040 r5002 1000 display alarm message N3050 M97 P3050 tool change failure wait to manually stop the machining program N3060 M99 In the above No 254 program is written to the system FLASH and the detailed operation is referred to Program 10 2 Customizing Commands The detailed operation is referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter 10 2 Customized Commands and after the user sets the parameter related to the tool change mode 9 the system executes the T to realize the required tool change function in the manual tool change or the machining program 3 4 4 Tool signal check and parameter setting The tool signal check is controlled by P408_d7 P408_d7 0 the tool signal check is the default mode P408_d7 1 the tool signal check is table look up mode Note line up tool P318 0 is not influenced by P408_d7 3 4 4 1 Default mode P408_d7 0 In the default mode P319 must be equal to P320 otherwise the system prompts P319 is not equal to P320 in tool change Tool signal definition in the default mode as follows The tool signal circuit quantity defined by P320 separately corresponds the tool quantity defined by P319 each s
214. e Modify the input program number input E161 Copied prog exist The program to be copied has The program has existed this existed operation can t go on E162 Prog is void amp can t The current program is empty and Edit the program first copy can t be copied E163 Editing 253 prog The 4M program editing storage Can t go on the next edit except the exceed memory room is full editing program can release some storage room E164 Exceed prog memory Power off protection program Delete some programs in system fail to save storage area is full and can t protect any more E165 No deleting all The system parameter enactment Modify the enactment parameter programs can t delete all program according to the privilege E166 Renamed prog exist The program to be changed the name has been existed can t Please delete the old program firstly change the name E167 Fail to erase FLASH System hardware storage CMOS Contact the supplier change the chip has problem storage CMOS chip E168 Fail to write FLASH System hardware storage CMOS Contact the supplier change the chip has problem storage CMOS chip E169 Editing prog exceeds The storage room of 800k program Can t go on the next edit except the memory editing area is full editing program can release some storage room E171 No command in help Command input error or don t Check the command to be looking for support this command input the correct command again E172 Prog line too lo
215. e 9 pot in position using signal P508 corresponding interface signal not gerne E333 Tool post gating The system has not defined the tool Set the parameter P529 to be the P529 not define selection using strobe signal P529 corresponding interface signal E334 Tool post In tool post rotation CCW time in tool Check the tool post champing signal is in locking is change it can t inspect the tool post normal or not or delay the reversion overtime champing signal time P324 E335 Tool post NO After tool change completed the tool Check the target tool selection signal is in selection number isnt the target alarm rumber normal or not E336 The parameter set the tool changing Modify the forbidden tool changing No changing tool forbidden parameter P403_d7 E337 In tool post rotation CCW time in Check the target tool selection signal is in may tool post tool change it can t inspect the tool normal or not or delay the time for tool signal overtime selection number changing in properly E338 Chuck doesn t Forbid starting the spindle when the i clamp no chuck is released in spindle and Execute the chuck clamping operation to spindle chuck locking each other clamp the workpiece E339 When the spindle and chuck are sae na l locking each other don t operate the Stop the spindle then operate the chuck Stop No cnuc spindle without stopped the spindle E340 Forbid function The parameter has set to forbid of chuck control ch
216. e above confirm the Offset to the Offset number and confirm the content of Imaginary tool nose number in advance 2 For the same tool nose memorize Z offset value and X offset value to the same one offset number otherwise it causes the serious result 3 Generally it is better to use the sequence for No 1 Offset number with No 1 tool No 2 Offset number with No 2 tool which is convenient to memorize them 4 Firstly execute the Offset number and then toolsetting Example firstly execute the T49 57 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual command when the system memorizes the Offset in No 4 tool to No 9 Offset number 5 The system executes the toolsetting when the workpice coordinate system is normal otherwise the result is not correct The system has the trial cutting toolsetting and fixed point toolsetting as follows Trial toolsetting method method 1 Format Input MEASURED VALUE ENTER TOOL OFFSET NUMBER ENTER Modify the current X tool nose coordinate into the new one Input k MEASURED VALUE ENTER TOOL OFFSET NUMBER ENTER Modify the current Z tool nose coordinate into the new one Actual operation steps of toolsetting as follows Install the trial cutting workpiece on the machine execute the toolsettting operation of each tool through the above process till the toolsetting of all tools are performed The operation is fast and convenient when a tool is regulated 1 X tools
217. e memorized in JOG and AUTO working mode it is the previous gear before last power off after power on again d5__ spindle in AUTO working mode 0 controlled by the key I pressing the spindle CW spindle CCW spindle stop key is valid 1 not be controlled by the key pressing the spindle CW spindle CCW spindle stop key is invalid d4__ MPG 0 1mm step width 0 valid II select the big override xO 1mm gear to rotate the MPG in JOG working mode 105 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 1 invalid cannot select the big override x0 1mm gear to rotate the MPG in JOG working mode d3__rapid position mode 0 alonetraverse each axis rapidly positions separately in GOO 1 interpolation traverse rapidly position in the proportion mode in GOO d2__arc across high point processing mode 0 precise execute the precise processing the backlash in arc across the high point 1 smooth II execute the smooth processing the backlash in arc across the high point d1__ MPG axis selection 0 keyboard axis selection keyboard axis selection is valid 1 external axis selection the external MPG control knob is valid and the keyboard axis selection key is invalid In JOG working mode press MPG to switch MPG mode and the indicator lights and the system displays states of the external MPG control knob the axis selection knob and the movement knob The coordinates of the selected coordinate axis is displa
218. e pointer variable has special wrongly explanation it must be used carefully Modify program E264 Arc radius is too big The arc radius by I K program is over the Modify program range E265 No calling in monitor Call command H is used in process Using jumping P or other method macro monitor r7000 command to control E266 Pointer variable The pointer variable points to the Check the program then modify points invalid NO forbidden variable it E267 no compensate Tool nose radius compensation the Divide into two semi circles compensating to Program path has the whole circle full circle C program E268 Traverse is 0 retract When making the G90 and G94 command Modify program too big traverse Program the starting point and end point amount is 0O or don t meet the regulation retraction is too big 268 Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E269 Traverse amount but When making the G74 and G75 command Modify program no offset amount program it doesn t meet the regulation E270 Orbit amount When making G71 and G72 command Modify program bigger than Program the path exceeds the specified stipulated value date E271 Start amp orbit points When making the G71 and G72 command Modify program not meet the program it doesn t meet the regulation requirements E2
219. e previous UI26 in the system diagnosis input interface window 311 CGSN I HSZ GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Pin Standard General Variable Signal function Signal name signal name 1 ESP Emergency stop 2 DecZ UI28 r1028 Z deceleration signal 3 DecX UI29 r1029 X deceleration signal 4 DecY UI30 r1030 Y deceleration signal 5 MXZ2 Ul15 r1015 Spindle feed hold signal 6 MXZ1 UI16 r1016 Feed hold signal 7 24VGND 1024V earthing 8 24V 24V 9 S01 UO01 r2001 Spindle gear output 1 10 S02 UO02 r2002 Spindle gear output 2 11 S03 UO03 12003 Spindle gear output 3 12 S04 UO04 r2004 Spindle gear output 4 13 M11 UO13 12013 Chuck releasing 14 M10 UO14 r2014 Chuck clamping 15 SVC Spindle analog voltage 16 24VGND 1024V earthing 17 LT UI31 r1031 ZXY negative limit 18 LT UI32 11032 ZXY positive limit 19 24VGND 1024V earthing 20 RM10 Ul14 r1014 Chuck clamping in position check 21 RM11 UI13 r1013 Chuck releasing in position check 22 24VGND 1024V earthing 23 24V 24V 24 24V 24V 25 M78 UO15 12015 Tailstock going forward 26 M79 UO16 12016 Tailstock going backward 27 24V 24V 28 UO1 UO17 12017 Not be standard defined 1 29 UO2 UO18 12018 Not be standard defined 2 30 AGND Spindle analog voltage 31 ST UI26 11026 External cycle start 32 SP UI27 r1027 External pause 33 TCP UI09 r1009 Tool post locked in position sig
220. e software limit 8000 000 Y tool negative software limit 8000 000 Z positive mechanical software limit 8000 000 Z negative software limit 8000 000 X positive software limit 8000 000 X negative software limit 8000 000 Y positive software limit 8000 000 Y negative software limit 8000 000 Z zero coordinate 300 000 e NININININI NIW w www GO CO GO CG GO GO GO GO Go GO X zero coordinate mm 200 000 117 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual P023 1 Y zero coordinate mm 200 000 P024 2 Z zero offset value mm 0 0 10 P025 2 X zero offset value mm 0 0 10 P026 2 Y zero offset value mm 0 0 10 4 6 5 2 Motion parameter list Stepper Servo Parameter name Unit initial initial Range User backup value value 2 Z rapid traverse speed limit mm min 5000 7600 1 30000 X rapid traverse speed limit mm min 2500 3800 1 30000 Y rapid traverse speed limit mm min 5000 6000 1 30000 Z lowest initial speed mm min 300 600 1 10000 X lowest initial speed mm min 150 300 1 10000 Y lowest initial speed mm min 300 600 1 10000 Z rapid feed acceleration ms 400 200 1 8000 deceleration time ms X rapid feed acceleration deceleration time ms Y rapid feed acceleration deceleration time ms Z zero return low speed mm min 0 2000 X zero return low speed mm min 0 2000 Y zero return low speed mm min 0 2000 Initial speed in cutting feed mm min 1 9999
221. e start sign of M61 command N1010 r2031 0 Loader forward N1020 when r1005 1 then P1000 When it is checked when UI05 is 1 then start the cycle check N1030 M99 M61 command is end N2000 M62 The start sign of M62 command N2010 r2031 1 Loader backing N2020 when r1006 1 then P2000 When itis checked that UIO6 is 1 then start the cycle checking N1030 M99 M62 command is end 10 1 1 Customization command program format In No 254 program the system customization command program format is input a set program which starts from M60 to M99 in the program this block is formed M60 command The other 299 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual block which start by M61 M74 and end by M99 is formed M61 M74 command Format N1000 M61 The start sign of M61 command N1010 r2031 0 Loader forward N1020 when r1005 1 then P1000 When it is checked that UI05 is 1 then start the cycle checking N1030 M99 M61 command is end Explanation 1 The customization command is mainly formed by statement when G code want to be added in it the position parameter P404_d2 1 must be set it also is to say M61 command allows the G motion code otherwise the system alarms 10 2 Customization Command Store P254 The customization command harden is in No 254 program So No 254 program also is called the user defined command storeroom P254 mainly includes the M60 M74 co
222. e tool change Program example The following is the program to compile the customized command to realize the tool change mode 9 operation applied to the general electromotive turret tool post 254 M98 P1000 4 tools setting tool signal T4 T3 T2 T1 separately in r1004 r1001 M02 N1000 M60 N1010 r1 14 1 tool signal 1110 N1020 r2 13 2 tool signal 1101 N1030 r3 11 3 tool signal 1011 N1040 r4 7 4 tool signal 0111 N1050 if r4005 1 N1060 if r4005 2 then r5 r1 target tool number saved to r5 then r5 r2 WS S Da wa N1070 if r4005 3 then r5 r3 N1080 if r4005 4 then r5 r4 look for target tool number N1090 r2012 0 tool post CW searching for target tool position N1100 r4010 10000 set max time CW to be 10m N1110 r6 r1000 read 32 input signal to r6 N1120 r7 r6 and 15 read tool signal r1004 r1001 to r7 N1130 if r7 r5 then P2000 searching for tool number N1140 if r4010 0 then P3000 alarm for CW overtime N1150 M97 P1110 continuously check tool signal tool post lock N2000 r2012 1 stop tool post rotating after having found tool signal N2010 r4010 500 tool post CCW being locked after delaying 500ms N2020 if r4010 gt 0 then P2020 delaying wait N2030 r4010 1000 set the CCW locking time N2040 12011 0 CCW locking N2050 if r4010 gt 0 then P2050 wait the CCW locking N2060 r2011 1 stop CCW M99 complete the tool chang
223. e workpice coordinate system and the machine coordinate system is set again 2 Setting the workpice coordinate system o peration is executed once and is not set later after the system is initialized or the workpiece type is changed all offset values are cleared to zero Note The operator should set again the workpiece when the actual position of the tool is not consistent with the workpiece coordinate system position because of the step out caused by some reasons After the step out not only the workpiece coordinate system position changes but also the machine coordinate system position also changes In the case only correcting the workpiece coordinate system instead of modifying the machine coordinate system maybe bring the unexpected Machine coordinate software limit alarm Proper operations after motor stepping out as 1 Select the reference point the tool nose follows easily reaches and the operator can conveniently observe it for one couple of tool measure Z X coordinates of the point 2 Move the tool nose to some reference point the known reference point coordinates 3 Continuously press twice DELETE and close the drive unit when the tool nose coordinates are not consistent with the reference point coordinates 4 Input the field to move and make the tool nose coordinates be consistent with the reference point coordinates the coordinates change and the actual tool nose does not 5
224. ean the dust and dry up it and then check the wiring the earthing of the CNC system device keeps it power on in some time to ensure that the system runs without any failure 343 CGSR r Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Appendix Appendix 1 CNC system electrical component symbol explanations The following examples are some connection symbols of electrical components Name Symbol Graph Name Symbol Graph Relay K Travel switch S i Motor M Hall proximity B switch Semiconductor D Indicator E diode amp Capacitor Cc LED P RR Resistor R Normally open Roa Push button switch S Normally closed with lock H contact Push button S switch without lock O Shield layer al Protective earthing Exchange gt Wiring terminal 344 Appendix Connection Appendix 2 CNC system tool post controller circuit method layout AADE OS 2AOS Oy Aopow ysod Tooy on N aDEJAapIT 040w 450d Poor T 2 345 BOETABPUT Adds amod ysod ooy BIE Aap EXAOHOOT 42 1 Trs wa sAg EXAT OF AOES L a aa Ob IbHI ADEFAPUIT WSeuU 450d ToL T EF APZ 4 APz z aire aM DT FI FI zT ZL 21 TT TL TL E CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Appendix 3 Interface circuit method layout Interface circuit method layout 1 input 102
225. ececsesesececsesese 152 3 2 S function Spindle Function seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeereeeereeeereeeereeeereeesreeeereeereeereeereesessreeseeeeeereeeeeeesene 152 3 2 1 Gear shifting controlling spindle motor eeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeesssssssessseseeee 153 3 2 2 Spindle controlling conversion Motop eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesssssseeeeee 153 3 3 T function Tool Funcetiop seeseeseesseesseeeeeeseeeseeeseeesceesceescecseeesecesecsseseseesoeesoeesoessoessoessoeesosssesesesssssoe 154 3 3 1 Tool offset execution mode moving slide seeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeceecoecoeccoseocecesooecccecosooeccessosecescoseoeesosse 154 3 3 2 Tool offset execution mode modifying coordinatesg seesseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeccsecccoeeccoccecoscecooccecococeesoo 155 3 4 Ffunction Feedrate Function essesseeeseeeseesseeseeeeeeeeseeeseeesecesesssesseeesoesoessoeesosesosesesssessoessoessoe 156 CHAPTER FOUR G COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS sesseeeeeeeeeecccceccoceecoceccocecccoecccoscecoccecoscecosccccoceccoseccoscesosee 158 4 1 G00 Rapid Traverse Positioning eeeeeeeeereeeereeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeseeeeeeeeesereeseeeresereeene 158 4 2 G01 Linear Interpolation eeeeeeeeeeereeeereeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesereeseeeeseereeenreeeereeenreeeeneeeneesenseeeee 159 4 3 G02 G03 GOS Circular interpolation s s sssssesseesseessessneessneesnecsneesneessnesnnecsseesseesseesaneesnees 161 4 4 Chamfering Function
226. ecuted in the monitor it only has modified the r3 in backup monitor now the r3 in common program isn t modified 3 When the variable transfer statement i e r7900 1 has been executed the system will copy all common variable in backup monitor to common variable storage Program Example In the following program suppose to check the UI05 pin which is quoted to system by signal in the machining when the times of UI05 changing from 0 to 1 is greater than ten after the cycle execution is finished the program end 109 N0010 r7100 r1005 Making the plus 1 count to r1005 pulse signal N0020 when r7100 gt 10 then r1 1 When the pulse number is greater than ten r1 equals 297 CGSN r HSZ N0030 r1 0 N0040 r7110 6 N0050 r7110 2 N1000 G00 Z300 X200 N1010 G00 X180 N1020 G01 Z90 F500 N1030 G01 XO N1050 G00 Z300 X200 N0060 r7900 1 GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual to 1 in fact it has modified the r1 in backup monitor Set the initial value Set the count mode change from zero to non zero the inner counter will plus one Choose the monitor working mode 2 to open Oriented the initial point Cut outer circle Cut off Back to the initial point Read the common variable value of monitor N0020 when r1 1 then P2000 When r1 equals to 1 then turn to P2000 N1060 M97 P1000 N2000 M02 9 4 Attached List 9 4 1 ASCII list character ASC
227. ecution Note 1 Ivalue is expressed with the diameter The general drawing uses the radius value Multiplex 2 in programming 2 Max arc radius is not more than 1000000mm otherwise it may be wrong in the system 3 For the arc with very small R with great value of programming speed x feedrate the stepping angle in interpolation is not more than 1 5 degree otherwise the system automatically decelerates and there is the difference value between the actual feedrate and programmed speed 4 The system automatically decelerates with great programmed speed in machining small arc 5 Using K programming in G02 G03 the system checks the current coordinates starting 163 CGSN I His i GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual point end point coordinates and circle center coordinates when the end point is not on the circle and Z deviation is more than 0 005mm or X deviation is more than 0 01mm the system alarms Distances between E238 circle center to two point are not equal 6 the system checks the current coordinates starting point end point coordinates and circle center coordinates in using G05 programming the system alarms E239 three points are in bne line and cannot consist of one arc when the three points cannot consist of one triangle 7 The system alarms E237 chord length is more than the diameter when the diameter 2R is less than the distance between the current point
228. ed by P309 the manual rotation time is specified by P308 and the spindle stops and LED indicator is OFF when the manual time ends Interlock between the spindle starting stopping and chuck P402_d5 0 interlock relationship between the hydraulic chuck control and the spindle control 1 When the chuck clamps the system forbids starting the spindle otherwise the system alarms The chuck clamps and the system forbids starting the spindle 2 When the spindle rotates CW the system forbids the chuck operations otherwise the system alarms The spindle does not stop and the system forbids operating the chuck Interlock between the spindle starting stopping and tailstock P402_d3 0 Interlock between the tailstock control and the spindle control The system forbids operating the tailstock when the spindle is rotating otherwise the system alarms The spindle does not stop and the system forbids operating the tailstock Spindle starting stopping execution process and signal output time sequence Note Select the spindle control output signal by P410_d7 When P410_d7 is set to 0 the spindle controls the level output When P410_d7 is set to 1 the spindle controls the pulse output The time sequence 49 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual between the spindle brake signal MSP and the spindle starting stopping signal as follows 1 In pulse control mode M3 M4 M5 MS
229. ed should be less than 3000 mm min when the speed is too big the motor cannot response to cause the confused thread tooth Thread feedrate format is as follows inch thread speed Nx25 4 E metric thread speed NxP N speed unit r min max speed is less than 2000r min P thread lead unit mm it is switched into the metric unit to count when it is the inch thread In thread cutting start and end the lead is not correct because of raising reducing speed so the commanded thread length should be longer than the actual required length Generally the length in the raising speed gt 1 3 mm For axial taper thread the pitch P E is the pitch of the thread axis Z for the end face thread it is the pitch of the thread axis X Note 1 2 174 Start the spindle before machining the thread otherwise the system always waits and is not fault The feed hold key and the feedrate override are invalid the spindle stops and the feed also stops in the course of thread cutting Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions 3 4 5 6 7 When the spindle starts just now the system cannot machine the thread because of the unstable spindle speed otherwise it influences the thread machining precision The photoelectric coder with 1200 or 1024 lines must be installed to rotate with the spindle synchronously The selected coder lines are the same as the actual installed ones When the coder lines are 1200 P209 is
230. ed to GOO P100 P101 P102 P103 P104 P105 P106 P107 P108 P112 P114 P400_d3 Each axis separately rapidly moves or simultaneously rapidly moves according to the proportion 158 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions and their movement mode is defined by P400_d3 P400_d3 0 each axis rapidly positions alone movement mode in GOO in the separately rapid mode P400_d3 1 each axis rapidly positions interpolation movement mode simultaneously in GOO in the proportion mode P400_d3 0 the alone movement mode is executed as follows taking an example of Z Raising speed stage Z raises speed at the initial speed of P103 Raise speed to max speed set by P100 the acceleration time in the raising speed phase is P106 Z raises speed at the initial speed P103 to 15000 000mm min Each axis moves at the rapid speed the actual speed displayed by the system is the compound rapid traverse speed and the displayed actual rapid speed of two axes moving simultaneously is more than the value set by P100 P101 P102 P400_d3 1 interpolation movement mode is executed as follows Raising speed stage raises speed at the initial speed of P112 The acceleration time in the raising speed phase is P114 raise speed at the initial speed P112 to 15000 000 mm min 8 Compound speed of rapid interpolation is 10000 000 mm min the movement axes rapidly move according to the proportion and their actual speeds are controlled by P100 P101 P1
231. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 136 1 3 Program Reference Pojnt sseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceccceceecccccccccecccccccceccccccoccecececcccssesccececcssecceeceessseoseeceeeee 136 1 4 Machine 2nd 3rd Program Reference Pojnt eeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeecccccccceccccccccccceccccocseeccececcssceeeese 136 1 5 Workpiece Coordinate System pencnebeassbetececuenevoncaccceseeucncbsscasstececscusseatacsedcaeccsceueascedssesssssescacscanedcss 136 1 6 Programming Coordinate sseeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeececcsesecececccceccecccccssececececcssecccecceececcseseccccccsssececccecsseeececeesse 137 1 6 1 Absolute Coordinate Values sssseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeececeecseeececccecceecececcccseccceccccsseececccecssccssseceescsssseeceeoe 137 1 6 2 Incremental Relative Coordinate WValuesgeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeccceeeeeeeeccceeeeeeeecccceeeeeeeecoeoceeceeecocoseeeeeeese 137 1 6 3 Compound Coordinate Values eseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececececcccccceccceccceceeccececccecccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesee 138 1 7 Diameter Programming and Radius Programming eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeee 138 1 8 Interpolation Function sssesseseeeeeeseseeseeesecceccseececcoseseccescoecsecceseccescosesessosesescssessesescoscocesoseseecesssseseseose 138 CHAPTER TWO PROGRAM STRUCTURE eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecececeeceeceeececeeeeeeeceeececececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 140 2 1 Character ceccecccocococccosososososocososososososososososoocococsososososcoosososoococsososos
232. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 12 4 1 3 1 Initial and modal s eseeereeeersecsccsccersecsccsccersessncecceccrsasscssccersssecsasscsecessassnseceessarssseeseaes 12 4 1 3 2 Initial mode and modal of program eeeeeeeseeeereeeereeeereeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeereeesreeeeeeeeereeeneeeeesereesene 12 4 1 4 Safe protection eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeses 13 4 1 4 1 Hardware limit protection OMEA P EAIA ETAPEI PATNE EPEA AAA EOI E AIARA ENEA ATAATA 13 4 1 4 2 Software limit safe protectjoneeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesese 14 4 1 4 3 Emergency stop alarm emergently stopping the system seseeeeeereereeereeeeseseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 15 4 1 4 4 Drive unit alarm eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeececececeseeesesesesesescececececeoeeescoscecececeoeoeoeseseseseseseeceeeeeeeeeee 16 4 1 4 5 Other alarms sssesssesseesssessseeseeeseeessessoesscessoesseeeseesseessecesesoeesoessoessoesseeesosesosesesesesesessoeseesesesesee 16 4 1 4 6 Switching off power supplyeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeereeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeese 16 4 1 4 7 Reset operation eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeereeeereeeeeeeeereeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeereeesreeeereeereeeereeseneesseeeeeseeereeenees 17 4 2 CNC Working Mode Selection seeeeeeeeereeeereeeereeesreeeereeeereeeereeeereeeereeeereeeereeeereeeereeeeneneesen
233. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeesccceeeeeeecsccoceeeeeecoooeeeeee 250 7 1 General Programming Rule seesseeeeeeeeeeeecccecseecececccceecccccccccsseccccceccseseccceccccecssececececcsssecececessseseeceeesse 250 7 2 Programming Rules for Commands in One Block essseseeseesereereesereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesee 251 7 3 Command Execution Sequence A EE EE a E E EE EE ATE ER 252 7 4 Programming Example P AEAEE TTT TET TTT T A EAE 254 7 4 1 Outer machining example PEA E AEAEE E EET ATE E EE EAA A E E EE E E A P E E E TELE TT 254 7 4 2 Thread machining example ET AE AE E O E E E A E E EE 255 7 4 3 Compound machining example a E a E E E E E A 257 CHAPTER EIGHT ALARM MESSAGE sessseeeeeeeeeseeeeccceeeeeecccesosescecccsceeececcecssoseseececsosesceecesssescececessoeeseeesesseeeee 262 8 1 Emergency Alarm ssssessessesseessessensensensensesscessensenscnssnscsscessensenscnsenscnssenscuscasenscnscnnsensensenseasensensess 262 8 2 Alarm Table in PARAMETER OFFSET Working Mode i e E001 E009 s eeeeeeeseeee 262 8 3 General Chart of Alarm in Working Mode i e E100 E199 sererererererererereeeeeeseserererereeeeeeeeee 264 8 4 Emergency Alarm Program Alarm Table i e E200 E299 E600 E699 sereeeerererererererereeee 266 8 4 1 Alarm in program command i e E200 299 seseeeeseseesereesereeseseesesoreeseceeseeoeseseeeesoreeseroesesossese 266 8 4 2 Alarm in program command i e E600 699 sseerersereesereeeeesereeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesesees 269 8 5 Alarm
234. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 30 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 3 5 1 Part program command help REECE COPECO CRETE ECE TECEPELETTELTEEEETLETRETCOCECELEL E A TEC T ET 30 4 3 5 2 Relative parameter help for arCeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeccccccececceccocceececccoscecececcccsccececcccsseecceceeosseeee 30 4 3 5 3 Line number sort ssssssesseeesesseeeseeseessecseecseeseesesoseecessososesceesosesesoseeseesososeeseesosossososeesessoseseseesose 31 4 3 5 4 Replacing character string E E TEET 31 4 3 5 5 Cursor positiop eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeeesessesseeeeeeeeseseseseeeeeeeeessseseeeeeeeeesessssseeeeeeeeesse 32 4 3 5 6 MPG controlling cursor moving ERER AA a r a a a a a AT 32 4 3 6 Part program compiling a a T A A T a T E T E E AERE 32 4 3 6 1 hp3 compiling command seessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeccceecececcccsecececccsoccececccccsceecceccecssceccecocossecececeessseeeeeee 32 4 3 6 2 hp3 analog drawing IE E E E OE E EE E E O E E O A CE 33 4 3 6 3 Program compiling result analysis Scececacecteresccceveccsscusssecucscsctcscecccssscesscdscesccvsscesssevecesssesses 34 4 3 6 4 Program compound check prompt eeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeese 35 4 4 JOG Working Mode ss ss sssssseseeseeeeseeeesseessseessnessneesssecsenesssnecssnessnnecsanecsanessaneesssessanecsanessanecasecsanessane 36 4 4 1 Coordinate axis moyement eesssseeeeeeseseeeeeeceeeececccccseccecccccssecececcccsseccecccccsscosesececcccssse
235. eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 3 3 1 Character keyssssssssssssssssssssssssssnscssssnsessssnscsnscssssnscsnsensssnscsnssnscsascssscnscsnscnsccnscsnccnscenssasscascensennens 6 3 3 2 Working mode selection key s ssssssssssessssssessssssesnsensssnscsnssnscsnsensssnscssssnsssncsnsenscsnscnnssnscensennsens 7 3 3 3 Function keys srsssssssessssssesssensssnscnsssnscssssnscsnscnsssnscsnscnscsnscsnssnscsnscsscsnscsnscasseascsncenscenscnnsenscenenscens 7 3 3 4 Cycle start and cycle pause feed hold keyseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeee 8 3 3 5 Manual axis control keyseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeee 8 3 3 6 Manual auxiliary function key sssssssrssessesssesssessesssensssnsesnssnscsnssssssnscsnscnsccnscssssnnscsnsenscenscnsennsens 9 3 3 7 Edit keyseeeeeeeeereeeereeeesereeeereesereeseeeeseeeeseeeesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereeseeeesereeseee 10 CHAPTER FOUR SYSTEM OPERATION sesseeseeeeeeeseeccecceccoecsecceccocccecooecoeccoseoecccscocecescoeccecoosescesessoscoessseeseesesee 11 4 1 System ON OFF Initial State Modal and Safe Protection s ssssssssessessesseessensensesseescensensenenes 11 4 1 1 Power a E E T 11 4 1 2 Power off eeeseeeeeeeeeeeecececececececececececececocococccccococcececececececececececececococococococococoececececececcececececocococoeoeoee 11 4 1 3 System program initial and moda seeeeeeeee
236. eeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeroeeereserese 328 3 5 3 1 Drive unit alarm signal XALM ZALM YALMeesseeseeesereeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 328 3 5 3 2 Enabling signal XEN ZENeeeereeeeeeeereeeereeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeereeeeeeeeoeecoeeeeereeeresereeeeeeee 329 3 5 3 3 Pulse signal and direction signal eeeeseeeeeeeeereeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeecoeecoeeeoereeereeeeeese 329 3 5 4 Connection between CNC system and drive unit of compound stepper motor eseese 330 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 5 5 Connecting between CNC and drive unit of reaction stepper motor r rr rrrreereseeseseeeseeees 332 3 5 6 Connection layout between CNC and AC Servo drive unitsseeeeeeeeeseeereeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 334 3 5 7 Connection layout between CNC and Panasonic drive unit seeeeeeeeeeereeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 336 3 5 8 Connection layout between CNC system and Japanese Yaskawa drive unites 337 3 6 X4 Spindle Interface eeeeeeeeeeeerereereeeeeereeseeeesereeseeeesereesereesereesereeseneeseeeesrneeseeneeseneeseneesereeseeeeseneeseeeee 338 3 6 1 Signal definitionseeeseeeeeeeeerererererererereeeeeeeeeeeeeerererereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerererererererererererererereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 338 3 6 2 Converter technical specification accsecscsseacesssescccocecsaccseccecdesssceeccseccecddocesecccecssecscesesecccecscscedces 338 3 6 3 Encoder technical specifications supiavaKensiawenevaeweneusiavencueieusKavalensiensneuaKeusiawenavaKen
237. eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeoreeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 24 4 3 4 1 Inputting program content eseseeeereeeerereeeereeeereeeereeeereeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeereeeereeeerereeeereeeereeeee 27 4 3 4 2 Inserting program line eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeee 27 4 3 4 3 Deleting a block eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerereeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeese 28 4 3 4 4 Inserting a character in a blockseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeee 28 4 3 4 5 Deleting a character in a Dlock ss ssssssssesssessesssessssnsesnsenscenscssssnscsnscnssenscsnsenscenscsseensssans 28 4 3 4 6 Modifying a block content sssssseseeseeeeseseseeceecoecseccoesoecoesooecoesoososeccoscocccosooccoecoosesceseseosesesoeee 28 4 3 4 7 Inserting a macro character string seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeseeeeeeeeereeeereeessereesereesereesereeseeeesene 29 4 3 4 8 Program stored spaceseeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeereeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeeeereeeereeeereeeereeesreeeereeseseeseneesereeeereeeeneee 29 4 3 4 9 No 253 program operatjon eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeses 29 4 3 4 10 No 254 program operation ssssssssesssessesssessssnsesnssnsesnsssncsncsnsenscensssnssnsssnscsnsenscenscsnenes 30 4 3 5 hp5 function eeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeereeeeeereeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeereeeeeereeeseeeeeeeereeoeeesee
238. eeoeecoeeeeereeereeeerese 320 3 4 3 3 Tool change mode 2 seeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeoereeereeeeeseeeeecoeecoeeeeereeereseeeese 321 3 4 3 4 Tool change mode 3 seeeseeeeereeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeecoeecoeeeoeroereeereeeeoeeeoeecoeseeeresereeeerese 322 3 4 3 5 Tool change mode 4 seeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerosereeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeroeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeereeereeeerese 323 3 4 3 6 Tool change Qeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeecoeeoeeeecoereeereeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereerese 324 3 4 4 Tool signal check and parameter setting eeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeresereeeeeeeeeeecoeeeeeeeeereeereeereeeeeeee 326 3 4 4 1 Default mode P408_d7 0 seereeeereeeerereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeese 326 3 4 4 2 Table look up mode P408 _A7 1 rereeeeeereeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeese 327 3 5 X3 Motor Interfacerseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesoeeeesooeseooeeesooeeesoeeeeoooeeeooeeeeooeeeeooeeesoeeeeooeeeeooereeooeseeeeeseeeeee 328 3 5 1 Signal definitioneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeereeeeeeeceeecoeeeoereeeresereeereeeeeeeeoeeeeereereseeese 328 3 5 2 Technical specifications eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeoeeceeeeeereeeeeesereeereeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeereeeeese 328 3 5 3 Equivalent circuit eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeoeeceereeeresereeee
239. eeseneeseeeeneeees 17 4 3 EDIT Working Mode eeeeeeeeeeecceececececececececececececececococococococoeocceoecececececececececococococococcccececececseceecececececoe 17 4 3 1 Part program catalog search eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeese 18 4 3 2 Selecting creating deleting renaming and copying a part program seeseeseeeeeereesereeeeseeeeeeeee 19 4 3 2 1 Selecting and creating a part program RR 19 4 3 2 2 Delete a part program ssssssssssssssessesssesesnsessssnscsnsensssnscssscnscsnssssssnscsnssnnscnscsnsenscsnscsnscanseaes 20 4 3 2 3 Deleting all part programs eeesseeeeeeeereeeereeeesreeeeseeeeeeeeereeeereeeereeeereeenrereesereeseeeeseeeeesreesseeeneee 20 4 3 2 4 Renaming a part program eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 21 4 3 2 5 Copying a part program eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeese 21 4 3 3 Part program communication eeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeereereeeeeeeeesereesereesereeseeeesereesereesereeseeeesereesereesereeseee 21 4 3 3 1 Sending part programs CNC PC CNC gt USB CNC CNC seereeeeeeeererererereeeee 22 4 3 3 2 Receiving part programs PC CNC USB CNC CNC CNC seeeeeeeeeeerererereeeee 22 4 3 3 3 TXT part program standard format in PC esseseeeereseeseseececeececeecececceceececeeceoceceseecescesescesese 23 4 3 4 Part program content input and editseeeeeeeeeeeeeee
240. eesseesscssnessneessneesseessecsanessnes 125 4 7 3 Offset value in each group Clear s sssssssesseeesessessssneessecssessnsessnecnnecssecssncsnnesanecnnecssessanessseessees 126 4 7 4 Tool offset hp6 function s s ssssesseeseesseesseesseessnsessnecssecssecsseesssesssecssecssecsanecanecsncsnecssessanessnes 126 4 7 4 1 Communication and standard format of tool offset data sseeeesseeeseesseesseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 126 AT AD OU CE Data Cle diisreecosessstsasensscocscesacousesssssevecstersresssesasessusesnsusbsnsive T 127 4 8 Diagnosis Working Mode ssssssssssssssssssssseesssseessssesssseesssnsesssssessssseesssneesssneesssneesssneessasecsessecsnsnssess 128 4 8 1 Interface signal search esssssssssssssssssseesssseesseseesssseesssssesssssessssnessssneessssesssneesssnecsssnessssseesssssnesees 128 4 8 2 Interface signal name display explanations eoseeeccsosssoccsososoecsososssecosososeecoososssecososssecssseessssoseeee 128 4 8 3 Input interface diagnosis explanation essseccsssosoeecososssoecossosssecosososoccsososssecosssoseecsososssecosssoseeososo 129 4 8 4 Output interface diagnosis explanation s s s sssssssessesseesseesseesnessnessnecssecssessnesanecsnecsseesseees 129 4 8 5 Output interface operation function ssrssssssssesssesessseesseseesssseesssseesssnesssseesssnsesssssessssneessaee 129 4 8 6 Spindle encoder and spindle speed CHECK cereeseeeeececcccccccccccsccncccccccccccccecccscscceccccesccsccceescccecscoes 130 4 8 7 Diagnosis hp6 function ssssssssressseeese
241. eference point coordinates Z X Move all tool nose to the reference point to get the coordinates and the system automatically memorizes the tool Offset value The toolsetting method is called the fixed point toolsetting i e execute MDI reference point coordinates or Modify reference point coordinates to confirm the coordinates and then move the tool nose to the reference point and execute Fixed point toolsetting to complete the toolsetting Press hp1 to execute the fixed point toolsetting operation 1 Inputting reference point coordinates Input the current tool nose coordinates as the reference point coordinates use the method when the operator does not know the reference point coordinates and confirms the tool nose coordinates of the current tool Move the tool nose to the reference point execute Input reference point coordinates i e the MDI operation is completed and the system automatically saves the current tool nose point coordinates as the reference point coordinates When the tool is damaged or some tool is installed any one which has executed the toolsetting can be taken as the reference point 2 Modify reference point coordinates Input Z X reference point coordinates and press ENTER and the reference point coordinates are modified generally use the method when the operator knows the reference point coordinates 3 Fixed point toolsetting Move the tool which needs the toolsetting
242. el the tool nose radius compensation 7 In G90 G94 G71 G72 the system executes the tool radius compensation the compensation is compiled with G41 G42 in the same block 8 In radius compensation state G00 G01 permits Y programming the compensation axis is only ZIX 9 G40 G41 G42 must not be in the same block with T 10 In executing G41 G42 the system cannot directly switch G42 G41 when they are switched the system must use G40 to cancel the current compensation direction to execute the switch Programming format sample G00 Z X imaginary tool nose moves to Z X position G42 G41 specify the tool nose radius compensation mode left or right G01Z X __ create the tool nose radius compensation the tool center offsets the tool center does not move to the Z X of the command the side of the tool moves to the position G01 G02 G40 specify the tool nose radius compensation cancel G00Z X cancel the tool nose radius compensation G41 G71 before switching the compensation direction from G42 to G41 the system uses G40 to cancel the tool nose radius compensation M02 5 1 5 Application example Machine the workpiece as Fig 5 4 Use the tool number T0101 the tool nose radius R 2 imaginary tool nose number T 3 The toolsetting is completed in the offset cancel mode Z offsets one tool nose radius value and the tool direction is related to the toolsetting point based on the imaginary tool nose direction otherwise the
243. elease the alarm alarm E319 Output Reduce the moving speed or modify the frequenc too ZIXIY pulse output frequency pulse multiplication ratio division high y exceeds the system specified range coefficient P203 P204 to the proper value 271 CGSN I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E320 Thread spindle the value of spindle speed multiplying Reduce the feedrate or modify P113 value d too hich the thread pitch P is more than max totheenc ah Spee toog speed limit of cutting feed P113 9 E321 Cant execute The system cannot execute G32 in Deleted G32 then execute the program in G32 in DRY DRY RUN working mode DRY RUN working mode E322 G34 Screw In machining the thread the pitch is itch is out of grading it will exceed the system Modify the machining program p range specified range before the end point E330 The set tool post type need the Tool lock signal clamping signal but the parameter Set P408_d6 to be the using tool post does not use P408_d6 doesn t set it to be the clamping signal clamping signal E331 Chuck release The system has not defined the tool Set the parameter P507 to be the P507 not define post using releasing signal P507 corresponding interface signal E332 huck m z a ition P508 The system has not defined the tool Set the parameter P508 to be the api
244. em prompts the corresponding intellective prompt message for each operation At the same time the operator can press the prompt key hp2 at the right top and the detailed offset operation key The relative settings operation input formats and example descriptions are as follows all required function keys are expressed with icons all input letter keys or digit keys are expressed with underline the system prompting message is expressed with frame Press to cancel the mistaken input when the input letters or digits are wrong Press to escape the current operation before confirmation when the operator executes some setting or some operation or man machine dialog The system sets 64 groups of tool offset value T01 T64 each tool offset number corresponds to one group Each group separately records Z offset value X offset value R tool radius T tool shape S toolsetting record Main functions in OFFSET working mode include yx Select modify clear tool offset data yx Transmit tool offset data between U disc and CNC system by USB interface yxTransmit tool offset data between PC and CNC system by RS232 communication interface xx Transmit tool offset data between two CNC systems by RS232 communication interface Dim Press OFFSET to enter OFFSET working mode as Fig 4 11 124 Operation Chapter Four System Operation OFFSET OFFSET No Z X R 01 0001 111 0001 111 0000 100 02 0002 222 0002 222 0000
245. em uses the inflection point and executes the input according to the lead theory position and offset value in the pitch compensation parameter P1000 80 P1001 6 the previous data is the theory position value of the measured lead the 247 CGSN r HSU following data is the offset value between the actual and the theory value P1002 290 P1003 15 P1004 450 P1005 30 P1006 520 P1007 24 GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual When the pitch compensation is valid the system divides the data of each pitch compensation point in the linear mode The user can learn the pulse quantity change sent by the system through observing the data of servo drive unit pulse The coordinate axis separately moves to B C E from A and the system sends the actual pulse as follows Dutput pulse quantity Output pulse quantity Theory valu tonne Displayed machine when pitch when pitch Deviation leading screw coordinates when Z i F compensation function compensation function value um starting point mm moving to each point i is invalid is valid 0 0 000 000 0 40 40 40000 39997 3 80 80 80000 19994 6 145 145 145000 144991 9 225 225 225000 224987 13 260 260 260000 259986 14 290 290 290000 289985 15 450 450 450000 449970 30 520 520 520000 519976 24 E027 axis pitch compensation is invalid Example 2 mode P413_d6 0 X electronic gea
246. ement of 0 across A every time MPG override increases when Ais MPG zero MPG override separately corresponds to the number of MPG position Method 2 When P402_d0 1 the system enters MPG controlling rapid federate override according to method 2 when MPG override is set 0 MPG override changes along MPG CW rotation MPG CW rotation becomes gradually fast MPG override is regulated 0 100 To avoid machine to be impacted by uneven speed of MPG and the regulation range is less than 10 every time MPG stops after it CW rotates MPG override becomes 0 After MPG CW rotates and rotates CCW or CCW rotates and then stops MPG override keeps the CCW instant override till MPG CW rotates CW rotates and then stops MPG controlling rapid federate override explanation In AUTO working mode before the machine program is not executed or the program pauses single block stops the cycle stops or the feed holds including spindle feed hold MPG indicator lights after pressing it means the system is in MPG controlling rapid federate override At right top the yellow means MPG control mode and current MPG override The system automatically cancels MPG controlling rapid federate override mode after each program is executed Note In the thread machining commands G32 G33 G34 G92 the federate is determined by the spindle speed instead of F value and MPG override is invalid here 4 5 6 Interference operation in program execution process
247. ensation interval is set to 4mm 1000mm 300 points 3 33 valuing is the integer 4 the compensation interval is 4 each axis only uses 250 compensation points and other compensation point cannot be used temporarily Parameter definition in the pitch compensation table in the constant interval description method P1000 P1299 deviation value of Z 300 points P1300 P1599 deviation value of X 300 points P1600 P1899 deviation value of Y 300 points Example P1903 4 0 Taking example of z the valid length of leading screw is 1000mm and the compensation interval is set to 4mm P1000 1 deviation value to the measured starting point 4mm is 1um the first point which is the nearest to the measured starting point P1001 1 deviation value to the measured starting point 8mm is 1um P1002 1 deviation value to the measured starting point 16mm is 2um P1003 2 deviation value to the measured starting point 16mm is 2um P1072 15 deviation value to the measured starting point 292mm is 15um P1249 12 deviation value to the measured starting point 1000mm is 12um P1250 12 do not use the points P1250 P1299 which are the same values as the positive end point P1900 20 0 the concrete position of Z measured starting point in the machine coordinate system is 20 000 mm 245 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Explanation 6 3 1 P1900 P1905 must be set in the constant interval description method 2 P1903 P
248. er 16 16 140001 Set the size of the character 8 16 system widows default Note when the assignment exceed the range it is ineffective Explanation R5002 assignment is to set the display window register command the data is uncertainly when read the register it can t be used for the conditional judge Example r5002 1 r5002 49 r5002 49 r3 r5002 2001 Open an empty display window send the character 1 to display window send the character which has deflected r3 position with 1 to the display window the display window displays alarm 001 Explanation 1 Set the size and color of the window before opening the display window otherwise it s the system windows default 2 When the window is opened when the window size etc parameter is reinstalled the window content will be cleared automatism the new setting is effective 3 The reference of grounding and font color refers to the attached table in this chapter the 282 Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming corresponding table of usually used color and command value 4 In the AUTO running sect mode when there is display character window currently the key ENTER is pressed the window will be closed the program will escape the running Expression of character string In the block one of the below two expression can be used to input the character string 1 common expression Format serial number blank
249. er executing the above mentioned blocks 4 14 3 G94 Inner outer end face taper turning cycle Command format G94 Z W _ XCU _ R_ F_ end point coordinate The coordinates of two axes must be given and the incremental coordinates cannot be zero Z W F_ G94 recycle consecutive command expresses the system executes the recycle once according G94 contour Field X U Z W end point coordinate The coordinates of two axes must be given and the incremental coordinates cannot be zero R Z coordinate difference between the starting point and the end point It is the face cutting if R is omitted F cutting speed Field range X Z U W R 9999 999mm 9999 999mm F 0 001mm min 15000mm min Command execution process Cutting feed Ssaescoe Rapid feed Fig 4 29a G94 end face turning cycle Fig 4 29b the system alarms because of mistaken programmed contour G94 cycle execution process Fig 4 29a Z rapidly moves from A to B X Z move at F speed from B to C Z does not move without R 3 Z moves at F speed from C to D X rapidly moves from D to A Relative parameter In G94 the relative parameter of rapid traverse is referred to GOO the cutting feed is referred to 198 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions G01 Explanation 1 G94 follows the re cycle consecutive command to set again Z end point coordinate the system executes the cycle once according to G94 contour W in
250. er supply 24V 24V 2 lt O 4T 9 Zalm ALM 3 y 31l Llr_q ge Por L2 AC servo motor 10 D 42 L3 N OT 43 Metalshell ALM 6 39 P CON 41 ao Metal shell 337 CGSN r HSZ 3 6 X4 Spindle Interface GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual The CNC system controls the connection between the voltage SVC output signal and the spindle converter by the spindle X4 converter which realizes the stepless change speed within limits 3 6 1 Signal definitions SESV 5SVGND SVC 3 6 2 Converter technical specification e System output analog voltage is 0 V 10 V 24V 19 24VGND 20 lt P 2i iP 22 YDF 23 Y 2 4 POV 25 BVGND 26 AGND YEN unused unused YALM API unused iA Standard signal Pin function 1 PA Encoder A pulse 2 PA Encoder A pulse 3 PB Encoder B pulse 4 PB Encoder B pulse 5 PC Encoder C pulse 6 PC Encoder C pulse 7 SE5V Encoder 5V 8 5VGND Encoder 5V earthing 9 SVC Spindle analog voltage 10 24V 24V 11 24GND 24V earthing 12 YP Y pulse 13 YP Y pulse 14 YD Y direction 15 YD Y direction 16 P5V Y drive unit 5V 17 5VGND Y drive unit 5V earthing 18 AGND Spindle analog voltage 19 YEN Y enabling 20 APO Speed position switch control 21 Unused Unused 22 Unused Unused 23 YALM Y alarm 24 PCY Y zero 25 API Speed position st
251. ere is no repetitive command in one block otherwise the system alarms E202 Repetitive command Mistaken example N0200 G00 G00 Z30 The command character must be followed by the valid digital command otherwise the system alarms E201 Illegal command Mistaken example N0200 G23 Z30 no the command There must no be the repetitive data field in one block otherwise the system alarms E234 the data field is repetitive Mistaken example N0200 G00 Z20 Z30 There must no be the mutually contradictory data field otherwise the system alarms E210 the excessive fields Mistaken example N0200 G00 Z20 W30 The command character and field character must be followed by the valid digit without the blank space otherwise the system alarms E204 the command format error Mistaken example N0200 G00 Z 20 N0200 G 00 Z30 there is no blank space between G and 00 The required data in the block cannot be omitted otherwise the system alarms E206 leakage message Mistaken example N0200 G90 X100 There must no be the fields letters and digits unrelated to the command otherwise the system alarms E203 illegal message Mistaken example N0200 GOO XW100 surplus character W The number of the data field must be in the valid range otherwise the system alarms E211 the data exceeds the range Mistaken example N0200 GOO X100 Z99999 the data 9999 exceeds the range It can be omitted when the fi
252. erent executions are executed according to P408_d 6 e When the system does not check the locking signal TCP P408_d6 0 it delays the time set by P324 the system executes the next step after the setting time ends e When the system checks the locking signal TCP P408_d6 1 checks TCP in the time set by P324 when the system has not received TCP it closes the tool pot rotation signal and alarms Check locking signal overtime when it has received TCP it delays the time set by P322 t2 and executes the next step Close the tool pot rotation signal TL or TL close the tool pot locking control signal TFD Confirm the signal i e the system checks whether the current tool input signal is consistent with the current tool number if it is the tool change is completed it is not CNC alarms Tool number alarms 3 4 3 6 Tool change 9 P318 9 tool post type 9 too change mode 9 use M60 to execute the tool change 324 In co tool change mode 9 the system automatically calls M60 to execute the tool change when T mmand is executed T command execution process as follows 1 The system firstly modifies the tool number and the tool offset and counts the target tool nose coordinates Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection 2 Modify macro variable r4005 target tool number and r4006 target tool offset number 3 Call M60 to execute the tool change programs 4 Wait M60 to be completed 5 Complete th
253. ert one straight line or circular between two contours to make the tool smoothly transmit from one contour to another one The system uses the linear and circular chamfering functions but only uses Z X programming Two contours includes the linear to the linear the linear to the arc the arc to the linear the arc to the arc The linear to the linear is as the following figure Firstly two straight lines to be tangent with one circle the circle can be properly adjusted creates two tangent points which are connected by a straight line i e the linear chamfering and which are connected by a arc i e arc chamfering Point of tangency Point of tangency Big circle NO lt Small circle A Foint of tangency Point of tangency 4 4 1 Linear chamfering Linear chamfering insert one straight line in the linear contours arc contours linear contour and arc contour The command address of linear chamfering is L behind which data is the length of chamfering straight line The linear chamfering must be used in G01 G02 G03 or G05 command 1 Linear to linear Command format G01 X U Z W L_ G01 X U Z W Command function insert one straight line between two linear interpolation blocks 165 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 2 Linear to circular Command format G01 X U Z WL L G02 G03 X U Z W R Or G01 X U ZW L G02 G03 G05 X U Z WL lL K Command function insert one straight
254. es have 18 channel output interface and the output signal connection method is as the following figure 1 output signal connection e drive sensitive load Use ULN 2803 output to drive the sensitive load at the moment connect with fly wheel diode near to the coil to protect the output circuit and reduce the interference Q ULN2803 Output sig Q Q 7 Machine side e drive LED Use LUN2803 output to drive LED with a serial resistor to limit the current about 10Ma through LED Machine side NC sid CNC side 24V ULN2803 Output e Drive filament indicator Use ULN2803 output to drive the filament indicator connect externally one preheat resistor to reduce the current impact and the preheat resistor value is referred to the condition that the indicator does not light Machine side CNC side 24 ULN2803 output 316 Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection 2 3 2 OUTPUT STANDARD SIGNAL The output standard signal are driven by ULN2803 transistor max load instant current 200mA When the signal is valid the transistor is connected and public terminal is 24V The machine side is connected with the relay and other inductive load the spark suppressor which is near to 20cm must be used The serial current limiting resistance must be used when the machine side is connected with the capacitance load The output standard signal M8 M9 M3 M4 M5 M10 M11 M78 M79 can be set to the level control
255. es the tool nose radius compensation its motion path is directly related to T imaginary tool nose number only inputting the correct imaginary tool nose number can get the expected compensation result Position relationship between tool nose center and imaginary tool nose front tool post coordinate system front tool post coordinate system Tool nose number 1 The tool nose center in X Z negative direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 2 The tool nose center in X negative direction and Z positive direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 3 The tool nose center in X Z positive direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 4 The tool nose center in X positive direction and Z negative direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 5 The tool nose center coincides with X and is in Z negative direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 6 The tool nose center coincides with Z and is in X negative direction of the imaginary tool nose 235 CGSN I His i 5 2 5 2 1 GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Tool nose number 7 The tool nose center coincides with X and is in Z positive direction of the imaginary tool nose Tool nose number 8 The tool nose center coincides with Z and is in X positive direction of the imaginary tool nose coordinate system Position relationship between tool nose center and im
256. eseereeeereerereereseereeeeseeeeeeereereseeeeseereeeeseeeeseee 311 3 2 1 X1 interface signal definition eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeresereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 311 3 2 2 X2 interface signal definitioneeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeereeeeeeecoeecoeeeeereeereeeroeseeese 313 3 2 4 Connection method of output signal seeseeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeereeeeeseceeeeeeecoeecoeeeoeeeeereeereeeeesee 316 3 2 5 Input output signal technical specification seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeese 317 3 3 Machine Zero Return Function and Connection ssesseseeeseeseeeeseeeseecseccceccecccecoecocoeccesooscoeccossoeeseseoe 317 3 4 Tool Exchange Control Function and Connection sssesseseeesseeeseeeeeceecceccsecoecceccoecoeccososeecossoseoessoee 319 3 4 1 Tool exchange control signal definition eeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeecoeeeoeeeeeeeeeereseeese 319 3 4 2 Signal connectjon eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeessssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseeeeessssseeseseeeeee 320 3 4 3 Function descriptionseeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeecoeeeoereeeresereeeeeeeceeeceeeeeereeereeeereseeese 320 3 4 3 1 Tool change mode 0 seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeoeecoeeeeeroeereeeeeseeeeeeeeecoeeeeereeereseeeese 320 3 4 3 2 Tool change mode I seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeresereeeceeeeeeecoeecoeeeoeroeereeeeeeeeee
257. eserves and the system can continuously input 2 In offset display window pause modifying federate override operations are valid in AUTO working mode In pause the system can be switched to the offset display window to modify the offset 4 5 7 2 Modifying tool compensation validity in program running Notes The modified offset data is valid when the system executes the tool change When the modified is the offset data corresponding to the current tool offset number the modified value is valid in the next tool change When the modified is the tool compensation value corresponding to the unexecuted tool offset number the modified value is value in this execution When the program has no the tool exchange command but the system has modified the offset value current tool offset number after the system executes M02 M30 M20 RESET and stops the modified offset is valid 4 5 8 Searching run message in AUTO working mode The function is valid in any states in AUTO and JOG working mode In automatically machining part programs the system pops up the window to search the macro variable I O variable and others in running process as follows Variable search all common variable used in the program and modify the common variable value I O variable search the interface variable value i e the system interface state Others search the executed block quantity the spindle wave range in the thread machining program nested call l
258. ess 4 version message display the system version message the software CPLD version message software version load operation Notes 1 Itis suggested that the user does not use hp6 function key 2 For the safety the password level should be more than 2 to execute the software upgrade 4 8 8 Machine miscellaneous function control Operate the miscellaneous function keys on the operation panel instead of the input commands in DIAGNOSIS working mode to execute the machine miscellaneous function 130 Operation Chapter Four System Operation e H3 Press 86w the spindle rotates clockwise P410_d7 0 LED indicator lights M3 corresponding bit in the output interface is displayed to 0 P410_d7 1 LED indicator lights M3 output in the output interface is first value and after the pulse output is completed M3 corresponding bit is displayed to 1 sho Press 5s10P_ the spindle stops P410_d7 1 the diagnosis output interface window displays M5 Press ew the spindle rotates counterclockwise P410_d7 0 P410_d2 0 LED indicator lights M4 corresponding bit in the output interface is displayed to O P410_d7 0 P410_d2 0 LED indicator lights M4 output is first valid in the output interface value and after the pulse output is completed M4 corresponding bit is displayed to 1 P410_d2 1 the diagnosis output interface window does not display M4 H Press Coone switch cooling ON OFF once When the cooling is ON LED indi
259. eter is valid to G33 G92 G32 G34 Spindle JOG time 1 ms __ miscellaneous parameter P308 The time for starting the spindle and the spindle automatically stops in the time in the spindle JOG working mode unit ms Speed in spindle JOG __ miscellaneous parameter P309 The spindle speed after pressing the spindle start key when the spindle is in JOG state unit mm min P309 0 the JOG output speed is the same that of M30 M04 Used lines for the spindle gear control __ miscellaneous parameter P310 The parameter limits the used output controlled line quantity of spindle gear control up to 4 control lines When the control line quantity is less than 4 the system only uses the low bit control line and the used high big control line is used to others The used line quantity 0 the system does not output The used line quantity 1 only S01 outputs The used line quantity 2 only S02 S01 output The used line quantity 3 only S03 S02 S01 output The used line quantity 4 S04 S03 S02 S01 output Frequency spindle gear shifting time 1 2 ms __ miscellaneous parameter P311 P312 When the spindle is the frequency M41 M44 spindle gear shifting time unit ms Refer to 101 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual OPERATION 4 4 JOG working mode Spindle gear shifting interval time ms __ miscellaneous parameter P313 The parameter defines the pulse signal durable time interval in the spindle gear shifting u
260. etermined by P319 most tool number 1 16 Example P319 is 4 the tool number is 0 4 when the input tool number is O it is the current tool number 1 Tool offset number 0 64 the input tool offset number is O it is to cancel the tool compensation Explanation 1 The system can select 16 tools and P319 sets the most tool number 2 When the system executes the manual toolsetting operation it automatically matches the tool offset number to the tool number and save it to the tool compensation table When P403_d4 is set to 1 the system automatically identifies the toolsetting record the tool number of tool change and relationship of tool numbers when there is fault the system alarms to display the program check prompt but does not lock the program running 3 The system executes the toolsetting operation based on the trial cutting or fixed point toolsetting in Jog mode See OPERATION 4 4 JOG Working Mode 3 3 1 Tool offset execution mode moving slide When T command is executed the system executes the tool change to T tool and executes its tool compensation at the moment modifies the tool nose coordinates The system uses two methods 154 Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions P403_d6 0 after the system executes the tool compensation and modifies the tool nose coordinates it does not execute the slide movement i e the execution is completed P403_d6 1 after the system executes the tool compensat
261. etting 1 Install the trial workpiece reliably on the machine and select a tool usually select the first one used in machining 2 Select the proper spindle speed and then start the spindle Traverse the tool in JOG Working mode and cut a small sidestep of the workpiece 3 X does not move but Z does to the safe position and stop the spindle Measure the diameter of the cut sidestep 4 Press I and the system displays Toolsetting X input the measured diameter vale and press ENTER 5 The system prompts Confirm tool offset number XX it automatically presets one offset number and the operator directly presses ENTER when the offset number is consistent with the input Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after inputting offset number The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it to the specified offset number 2 Z toolsetting 1 Start the spindle again traverse the tool to cut a small sidestep of the workpiece 2 Z does not move but X does to the safe position and stop the spindle 3 Select one point as the reference point measure Z distance from the cut end face to the selected reference point 4 Press K and the system display Toolsetting Z to input the measured data and press ENTER 5 The system prompts Confirm tool offset number XX it automatically presets one offset number and the operator directly presses ENTER when the offset number is consi
262. ey are open and the system alarms in serial the negative limit switch X Y Z of each axis are normally closed contact are connected to X Z Y negative limit input interface LT it is off and the system alarms in serial it is suggested that the operator should select in prior the hardware limit to the normally closed contact of each axis as follows ti tz Y ctr LT ov x 7 Y When P404_d1 0 is low level alarm the positive limit switch X Y Z of each axis are normally open contact are connected to X Z Y positive limit input interface LT they are closed and the system alarms in serial the negative limit switch X Y Z of each axis are normally open contact are connected to X Z Y negative limit input interface LT it is off and the system alarms in serial it is suggested that the operator should select in prior the hardware limit to the normally closed contact of each axis as follows LT X oy oy E Y 4 1 4 2 Software limit safe protection 1 Mechanical software limit safe protection The mechanical software limit safe protection is to limit machine coordinate motion range to avoid slide to exceed the motion range The mechanical software limit alarms when the machine position machine coordinates exceeds the range Releasing overtravel alarm methods reversely movement in JOG working mode negatively moves for positive overtravel positively moves for negative overtravel 2 Tool nose software limit safe protec
263. ficance the most assignment range is 0 9999999 i e 9999 999s it can be used for read or conditional judge Such as r1 r4010 or when r4010 gt 1000 then P0020 4 In generally the r4005 r4008 is used for tool changing distinguishing Such as using in M60 user defined tool changing program parameter P318 9 9 2 Statement This system has assignment operation statement and conditional judge statement they will be introduced as following 9 2 1 Assignment statement This system offered assignment statement can come true the operation between two variable or value the detail expression and operation are as below table Gathered table of assignment operation statement 9 1 287 CGSN r HSZ GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Command format Function Definition _ assignment give the rA assignment to rN rA rN variable rN rA rB Decimal addition operation rN rA rB Decimal subtraction operation rN rA rB Decimal multiplication operation rN rA rB Decimal division operation rN rA or rB Binary or operation rN rA and rB Binary and operation rN rA xor rB Binary or operation rN sqr rA Decimal square root rN VrA rA don t support negative rN abs rA Decimal absolute value rN rA rN rA rB Decimal remainder i ey pene tN rA rB rC Decimal multiplying and dividing operation rN saqrf rA rB Compound square root rN VrA2 rB rN rA sin rB sine rN rA cos rB
264. finition as follows Tool post CNC signal Signal explanation signal SensorA T1 Input tool signal 1 SensorB T2 Input tool signal 2 SensorC T3 Input tool signal 3 SensorD T4 Input tool signal 4 SensorE TXT P529 Input tool inductive signal strobe signal SensorF TCP Input tool post locking signal Sol A1 TZD P507 Output tool pot releasing control signal tool post worktable brake SolA2 TFD P508 Output tool pot locking control signal tool post worktable graduation Sol B TL Output positive rotation control signal of tool pot Sol C TL Output negative rotation control signal of tool pot Tool change signal explanation as follows 1 SensorA B C Dis only used to check the tool is not the starting signal of any operations 2 Sensor E it senses once when a tool change is executed and it is the starting signal of the tool pot locking 3 Sensor F release the locking confirmation signal It is locked in HIGH is released in LOW Releasing means the tool pot is released to start the tool pot to rotate locking means the oil pressure motor stops the rotation 4 SolA1 Sol A2 two head electromagnetic valve When Sol A 1 is turned on and Sol A2 is turned off the tool pot is locked 5 Sol B Sol C two head electromagnetic valve It controls the oil pressure motor to rotate CW CCW confirms the electromagnetic valve in the middle after it is locked and the motor stops rota
265. fter the motion command cannot be executed till the motion command is executed and the system executes the next block after all are executed The commands which are not relative each other are almost executed simultaneously are not executed orderly The system automatically orderly executes M command which is interlock according to the parameters Example N1000 T11 M03 M10 GOO X50 M08 When the parameter is set to firstly and then start the spindle P402_d5 0 the system follows the interlock relationship and its execution process is as follows 1 Simultaneously start executing T11 GOO X50 M10 M08 2 Execute M03 after M10 is executed 3 Execute the next block after all are executed When the parameter is set to the spindle without firstly be clamped the execution process is as follows 1 Simultaneously start executing T11 G00 M10 M08 M03 2 Execute the next block after all are executed All used time for executing the whole block is equal to the longest single execution time Synchronous execution for many commands in the same block and rapidly jumping block to execution P401_d3 1 synchronism P401_d2 1 rapidly jumping block to execution In the mode the system rapidly skips to the next block after the axis motion commands of the current block are do not wait other M S T having been executed Note 1 The system follows the rule wait the others to be executed when other commands in the same group are executed 2 The system mee
266. fting function operations Besides the above method to execute the spindle gear shifting the operator can change the spindle gear by pressing the spindle gear shifting amp sme Press sm Once and the spindle speed circularly output according to SO01 S04 or SOO S15 in code output When there are two gear spindle speed the operator presses sm three times after S02 and the system is switched from S02 to S01 4 4 3 3 Spindle S_ speed control Prompt it is not necessary to read the chapter for the operator using the frequency spindle When the machine uses the frequency spindle P410_d6 is set to 1 To resolve the converter with 51 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual low torque the system should 4 gear automatic gear shifting output signal to match the converter working in the high frequency to make the machine get the low speed and big cutting torque The system uses M41 M42 M43 M44 to control the spindle gear control S controls the spindle speed Frequency spindle gear control Format M41 M42 M43 M44 Explanation 1 M41 M42 M43 M44 output gear control signal Each gear signal corresponds to one output point S01 S02 S03 S04 2 Actual output controlled lines of spindle gear are specified by P310 P310 4 actual output controlled point are S01 S02 S03 S04 P310 3 actual output controlled point are S01 S02 S03 the system releases S04 as other use P310 2 actual output controlled point are S01
267. g G50 Z X_ two axis workpiece coordinate system setting G50 X_ X workpiece coordinate system setting G50 S_ max spindle speed limit in constant surface speed refer to G96 G97 mode 181 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Field Z X Y are absolute coordinate values S is to limit max spindle speed r min refer to G96 G97 Field range X Z Y 9999 999mm 9999 999mm Explanation 1 Z X Y cannot be in the same block with S Z X Y can select single axis two axis or three axis to set the workpiece coordinate system 2 G50 is alone in one block and cannot be in one block with other commands 3 Because the system has created one workpiece coordinate system and one program reference point it uses the new workpiece coordinate system and the program reference point in Auto and Jog working mode till it is replaced after the system executes G50 Relative parameter Parameters related to G50 P000 P001 P002 Example G50 X100 z100 Y100 three axis creating workpiece coordinate system 4 8 G51 Recovering Workpice Coordinate System Setting Command format G51 Explanation G51 is alone in one block without other commands Set the workpiece coordinate system and the program reference point in recovering Jog working mode When the set workpiece coordinate and the program reference point in Jog working mode are replaced after G50 is executed the recovering can use G51 After recovering the syste
268. g length Z Y is separate Z Y absolute coordinate W V is separate Z Y relative coordinate the user only uses one of the relative and the absolute coordinate and the relative coordinate is relative to the movement of the current position P metric thread lead E inch thread lead H execution mode mark HO or H1 H_d7 H_dO reserved Cinvalid Field Y Z V W 9999 999mm 9999 999mm P 0 001mm 500 000mm E 0 060 tooth inch 25400 000 tooth inch H Oor1 reserved Cinvalid Relative parameters parameters related to G32 P100 P102 P103 P105 P106 P108 P112 P113 P114 Explanation G32 Z tapping cycle execution process Z tool infeed tapping Close the spindle Wait the spindle to exactly stop The spindle rotates counterclockwise reverse to the previous rotation direction Z tool retraction to the starting point of the cycle eOOAO The spindle stops Note 1 Determine the spindle direction according to the possible tapping direction before tapping The spindle will stop after the tapping ends Restart the spindle when continuously machining 180 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions 2 There is a deceleration time after the spindle is closed at the moment Z Y rotates along the spindle till the spindle stops completely Therefore the actual bottom hole of machining is deeper than the actual required The actual depth should be determined by the spindle speed in tapping and by whether the
269. g point can be 0 and being O from other pitch compensation point to the measured starting point is taken as the end of pitch compensation point input 5 ked Max compensable length cannot be more than 10m otherwise the system prompts the input is invalid and the pitch compensation data is invalid 6 4 Pitch Compensation Execution Method The constant interval or the inflection point description method executes the pitch compensation method after the system performs the sampling of some point in the measured leading screw error curve the difference of their calculation methods is whether their compensation intervals are equal the point intervals in the constant interval description method are equal and they may not be equal in the inflection point description method The system creates the error curve according to the input data and executes the super compact compensation in 0 256 interval unit according to the error curve trend in the actual pitch error compensation Example 1 Suppose that Z leading screw error curve is as Fig 6 1 Z electronic gear ratio setting is 1 1 Sampling point A B C D E as follows Sample point A B Cc D E Displayed machine 0 80 290 450 520 coordinates mm Leading screw theory 0 80 290 450 520 position mm Actual measured data mm 0 80 006 290 015 450 030 520 024 Deviation value um 0 6 15 30 24 When the pitch compensation function is valid the syst
270. ge output keeps 4 4 3 4 Setting spindle working state The system switches the spindle working mode when the spindle uses the GSK DAPO3 servo drive unit Relative parameter P405_d1 P405_d1 1 the function is valid when the controllable axis has Y P410_d4 relationship between the spindle and Y it is not switched when it is 0 which means the spindle operation is not related to Y it is switched when it is 1 which means the spindle operation is related to Y operation and is interlock but they cannot be operated simultaneously and the system selects their working mode by the command in advance When the spindle is switched into the position control mode P410_d4 1 the spindle speed is controlled by Y feedrate S is ignored in machining in AUTO working mode executing S prompts the execution is mistaken in JOG working mode M47 M48 is valid when P410_d4 is set to 1 working mode setting operations between the spindle and Y In JOG working mode the operator can input M47 M48 to set the working state between and the spindle and Y Input M 47 ENTER set Y permissive working mode It can be operated when the spindle is in stop state otherwise the system alarms Input M 48 ENTER set Y forbidden working mode It can be operated when the spindle is in stop state otherwise the system alarms When the system executes M47 it outputs APO level signal and checks API signal when API level is 0 the system set Y wor
271. ge thread cutting which can reduce the tool wear and improve the thread precision G76 command group can machine multi head thread end face thread When G76 machines the multi head thread and the tool executes one time the cut depth the tool cuts each thread with the same cut depth and it executes the next cut depth till the multi head thread cut is completed When the thread angle defined by G76 is not 0 X Z move simultaneously the thread axis reaches the cut in point and then the single axis for non thread axis moves to the cut in point in G76 thread cycle from the starting point to the cut in point other cut path is the same that of G92 as Fig 4 47 Example Example Fig 4 49 thread is M68x6 a Cutting point zoom out 1 3 68 Fig 4 49 Program G50 X100 Z50 M3 300 set workpiece coordinate system start the spindle and specify its speed GOO X80 210 rapidly move to the machine starting point G76 D7 36 13 6 Q0 3 P60 L2 RO 2 thread tooth height 7 36 the 1 thread cut depth 3 6 the least cut in depth 0 3 tool angle 60 repetitive finishing 2 times finishing cutting amount 0 2 G76 X60 64 Z 62 P6 10 5 L3 pitch 6 3 head thread GOO X100 Z50 return to program starting point 221 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual M30 end of program 4 16 G22 G80 Program Part Cycle In the course of actual machining for the part of workpiece or the formed parts the part cycle com
272. get the correct coordinate position when the machine has not installed the machine zero the system does not execute the machine zero return 4 The emergency stop is valid when P404_d is set to 0 4 5 11 Regulating LCD brightness in AUTO JOG working mode The function is valid in the initial state in AUTO working mode Operation method as follow 1 Press continuously 9 twice and the system pops up the brightness regulation window any key except for the brightness regulation is pressed and the system closes the window 2 The brightness regulation window has 0 10 grade 0 grade is the darkest 10 grade is the brightest press the brightness regulation key increases LCD brightness press to reduce LCD brightness Notes 1 When LCD is LED in poor the brightness regulation function is valid to LCD when LCD is CCFL in poor the brightness regulation function is valid to LCD 2 There is no operation in it when the brightness regulation window closes automatically in 10 seconds 83 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 LCD brightness can be regulated in JOG working mode and its regulation method is the same with that in AUTO working mode 4 6 Parameter Working Mode PARAMETER working mode function includes parameter input parameter draw parameter solidifying the system prompts intellectively each operation At the same time the operator can press hp2 at the top right to learn the parameter operation ke
273. gnal 7 T6 UI06 r1006 No 6 tool in position signal 8 T8 Ul08 r1008 No 8 tool in position signal 9 TL UO11 r2011 Tool post CCW output signal 10 OV 5V earthing 11 T2 UI02 r1002 No 2 tool in position signal 12 T4 UI04 r1004 No 4 tool in position signal 13 PCZ Z zero input signal 14 T5 UI05 r1005 No 5 tool in position signal 15 T7 UIO7 r1007 No 7 tool in position signal The input variable name is r1001 r10032 the output variable name is r2001 r2018 Note the variable name is referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter 9 Statement Programming 313 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 2 3 Connection method of input signal 314 The input signal includes UI01 UI16 UI26 UI32 and zero signal PCX PCZ PCY CNC checks the machine states by the input signal the signal direction machine to CNC The input signal is valid in LOW The external input of the input signal one uses the machine contact switch input by which the signal is from the machine side press key the limit switch and relay contact another uses the electronic proximity switch transistor input without the contact Note zero signal PCX PCZ PCY can connect with one turn signal of the servo motor connecting with the servo motor 1 The input signal can use the normally open contact input of the machine contact and also use the electronic proximity switch input without the contact proximity in the output LOW The interface connection met
274. gram operation in EDIT working mode 0 permit permit to delete all programs in EDIT working mode 1 forbid II forbid to delete all programs in EDIT working mode d5__clear all offset operations in OFFSET working mode 0 permit permit to delete all offset values in OFFSET working mode 1 forbid II forbid to delete all offset values in OFFSET working mode d4_close drive unit enabling in JOG working mode 0 forbid II press Delete in JOG working mode forbid closing the drive unit 1 permit II press Delete in JOG working mode permit closing the drive unit d0__ modify machining programs in EDIT working mode 0 permit program lock function is invalid permit modifying the machining program on the operation panel in EDIT working mode 1 forbid program lock function is valid forbid modifying the machining program on the 115 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual operation panel in EDIT working mode otherwise the system alarms Automatic interval of line number __ miscellaneous parameter P333 The parameter defines the incremental value of the block number before and after th system automatically creates the block number i e the different value between two line numbers in EDIT working mode 4 6 4 14 Interface parameter _P500 P556 The system has the main devices including the spindle the chuck the tailstock the tool post control and function and the additional device control and c
275. h 3 Max edit space of No 253 program is up to 4M and is only saved to the system FLASH 4 In saving programs the program capacity is big and saving the programs need long time and the operator needs to wait 4 3 4 9 No 253 program operation Because No 253 program is up to 4M its solidifying and read are special as follows 1 Only be saved to a fixed FLASH 2 Select No 253 program press hp5 and then 4 to save it to the FLASH in program edit window 3 Use USB or RS232 to complete the communication Note 1 No 253 program cannot automatically save compile and solidify FLASH it after compiling otherwise it cannot be saved 29 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 2 No 253 program cannot be copied and renamed 3 In saving No 253 program the program capacity is big and saving it needs long time and the operator needs to wait 4 3 4 10 No 254 program operation For No 254 program press _hp5 in program edit window the system prompts the help message prompt box how to compile solidify and read No 254 as follows 1 Press 5_ to compile and solidify No 254 program Edit No 254 program The system alarms when the edit is wrong the system saves it to the FLASH area when it is compiled successfully 2 Press 4 and read No 254 program Read No 254 program saved in FLASH area to the edit buffer zone and update it 3 Press ESC to escape the current state 4 3 5 hp5 function hp5 help ke
276. he coordinate axis is moving Pause state the current block has not executed completely in the course of executing the axis motion command to pause the system waits the operator presses the key to execute the operation Block stop state the current block has been executed and the next has not executed the system waits the operator presses the key to execute the operation 4 5 2 Function key operation in AUTO working mode 4 5 2 1 SINGLE execution and CONTINUOUS execution switch SINGLE execution and CONTINUOUS execution switch Dp Press SINGLE and the system switches SINGLE CONTINUOUS circularly it is valid in any states In continuous execution press the key and the system switches to SINGLE working mode after the current block is executed the system stops and continuously executes after_ CYCLE START is pressed In CONTINUOUS working mode press CYCLE START and the program is executed from the beginning to the end In SINGLE working mode press CYCLE START key once and the system executes one block for the cycle command the system only executes one operation press CYCLE START and the system executes one operation 4 5 2 2 Dry run and machining run switch Check all content of machining programs in dry run which can ensure the machining workpiece is not discarded because of some programming data error in the program Dry run machining run switch aps Press BRY and the system switches dry run automatic machining run m
277. he external spindle and the feed hold knob forbid the slider to traverse 5 When the bigger override X 100 is selected the motor will rapidly traverse if the MPG is rotated rapidly At the moment because the system automatically accelerates decelerate the motor will traverse not to stop although the MPG stops The actual moving distance is determined by max speed of motor the acceleration deceleration time the feedrate override and the MPG speed The rapider the speed is the longer the acceleration deceleration time is and the rapider the MPG speed is the longer the moving distance of motor decelerating is otherwise the shorter the moving distance of motor is 6 P400_d4 1 the step width 0 1 is valid P400_d4 1 the step width 0 1 is invalid 7 When P400_d1 is set to 1 the external MPG control button is valid Y Z selection axis and the step regulation key are invalid 4 4 1 4 Rapid traverse speed selection Manual rapid traverse and low feed state selection In JOG mode the negative positive movement speed of each axis can select rapid traverse and UW cutting feed low speed movement Press Pwr to switch the rapid traverse and low speed feed states The speed indicator ON is to select the rapid traverse state Rapid override Wu Rapid override is divided into the four gears 25 50 75 100 RoRo increases to one gear till UL 100 RoRo reduces one gear till 25 Z actual traverse speed P100 x rapi
278. he machine zero return function it does not check the zero signal and deceleration signal till it returns to the zero coordinate position of the axis Note 1 The machine zero return moves to the zero direction The coordinate axis should stop in the negative of machine zero before the system executing zero return 2 In the machine zero return the rapid traverse speed of the coordinate axis is controlled by the rapid override 3 In the machine zero return the coordinate axis motion is not limited by the software limit parameter 4 Parameter related to the machine zero return is referred to PROGRAMMING Parameter Setting Working Mode 5 Connection related to the machine zero return and zero return mode are referred to CONNECTION Machine Zero Function and Connection 6 After the system executes the machine zero return the blue icon of the machine zero 45 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual return before the corresponding machine coordinates are displayed as the prompt 4 4 2 2 Creating machine coordinate system_without machine zero no machine reference point Prompt the coordinate axis with the zero check device cannot execute the operation The coordinate axis without the zero check device without deceleration signal and zero signal can create the machine coordinate system as follows Format Input INPUT U NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER The current X machine coordinate is modified into the ne
279. he programs according the selected receiving mode display the receiving process till the receiving is completed select ESC to escape the U disc 1 When there is a program which name is the same the sent program the operator replaces the existed with the sent the sent program replaces the previous once the replacing is executed 4 3 3 3 TXT part program standard format in PC Use TXT LST text to edit part program in PC but the file name must be compiled based on the standard format required by the system to be sent to the system as follow 1 Name the file name of the part program to TXT or LST suffix such as CNC008 TXT it is S uggested that the operator uses TXT suffix to conveniently execute part programs on the PC 2 The first line of TXT file content must specify the program number its format is XXX i e percent sign follows the digit 1 2 or 3 its range is 0 254 and the first line cannot have other content Its range must be 0 254 because the program number created and stored by the S ystem is 0 254 otherwise the system cannot receive the programs and prompts the corresponding mistaken message The program numbers received by the CNC are determined by two methods USB and RS232 In RS232 communication the program names are taken the program number of the 23 CGSN I His i GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual first line as the standard i e the character string XXX digit
280. he r5004 assignment is a command to clear the process graph display region it can be seen when the graph display window is open Write the random number to r5004 clear the content of the system process graph display area Example Clear the display area content it also is the process graph path Note In the cycle process the last process graph isn t cleared in order to let the user observe the new process path and graph in conveniently in the ending of the process program execute the command the next process path and graph will be displayed again 9 1 2 8 Program control register r5008 Program control register r5008 the description in the process monitor The data is uncertainty when read the register it can t be used for the conditional judge The different value is written in the register has different meanings the system will execute the relative command according to the written value The r5008 execution command table gathered Command meaning number 1 Break off the motion command is stopped immediately same to press PAUSE key and can be resumed the running by pressing CYCLE START key again when it is used in the common program it will be break off in the next motion command 2 Running the single sect continuum execution working mode switch same to press SINGLE key it can be resumed running by pressing CYCLE START key again when it is used in the common program it may stop after the next mot
281. he radius compensation Z X should confirm the initial position otherwise which causes the identifying compensation direction of the system is abnormal 2 Creating the tool nose radius the motion command following G41 G42 or in the same block only uses GOO or G01 instead of G02 or G03 or G05 otherwise the system alarms E251 only use G00 G01 to create the radius compensation And GOO or G01 has enough movement to create the radius compensation the movement is more than or equal to the tool nose radius to avoid the system alarming 3 In radius compensation state only GOO G01 G02 G03 G05 can be permitted to execute otherwise the system alarms E248 does not cancel the tool nose radius compensation 4 In radius compensation state the system permits the call the transfer M S F command it does not execute T command otherwise the system alarms Forbidding the tool change in E249 tool nose radius compensation 5 After G40 cancelling compensation command or in the same block the system only uses GOO 232 Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation G41 G42 or G01 otherwise the system alarms E250 only uses G00 G01 to cancel the radius compensation GOO or G01 has enough movement to cancel the radius compensation to avoid the system alarming 6 Before executing M30 M02 M20 the system must firstly canc
282. he wirings The detailed interface parameter definitions are referred to OPERATION 4 6 Parameter Working mode the detailed wiring connection is referred to CONNECTION Chapter 3 CNC Device Connection Warning Pin definition must be performed by the machine manufacturer the improper definition maybe damage the system and the machine electricity 4 4 9 1 Three color indicator control When the system needs the function the operator should define its output pin in the interface 64 Operation Chapter Four System Operation parameter and correctly connects with wiring the system output the signal in the corresponding pin P502 LMP3 green program run signal indicator 3 P503 LMP2 yellow program run signal indicator 2 P504 LMP1 red alarm indicator program run signal 1 Functional description 1 Itis valid in JOG AUTO working mode in other working modes it is invalid 2 The green indicator light means the program normally runs 3 The green indicator closes and the red lights when the system alarms 4 The red and green indicators close and the yellow indicator lights when the program stops running without alarm 4 4 9 2 Lubricating control When the system needs the function the operator should define its output pin in the interface parameter and correctly connects with wiring the system output the signal in the corresponding pin P506 M320 lubricating controls the output signal Functional description 1 Non a
283. heck function The former has the fixed signal pin and the system does not set the fixed signal pin for the additional device determined by the manufacturer according to the actual condition of the machine When the unused signal of the main device has been released the system adds the signal required by the additional device by setting the interface parameter so the system can control and check the additional device The system judge whether the interface parameter covers the input and output interface P500 P510 are output interface parameter and P511 P540 are input interface parameter P541 P556 are used the tool selection signal encode When P408_d7 is set to 1 P319 gt P320 P541 P556 are used to setting tool selection check signal The interface parameter value is 0 i e covering the input or output interface the setting value is the serial number of general signal name i e pin corresponding to the covered input or output general signal name The interface initial value is 0 i e the system does not use the parameter function i e does not cover the pin When the input output pin has been used by other functions the interface parameter cannot be set to the covered pin number and the system prompts Parameter alarm illegal I O setting input lor output pin has been covered Search some pins have not been covered in DIAGNOSIS working mode which are displayed in white and which names are displayed
284. here 4 4 2 5 Program reference point return Must confirm the program reference point position before the operator executes the program reference point return otherwise the unexpected result brings In JOG working mode the operator directly press the function key to execute the operation After the key is pressed the corresponding coordinate axis rapidly returns to the program reference point When the axis change indicator lighting means Y operation is being executed X Press o and X rapidly returns the program reference point from the current point ZIV Press and Z or Y rapidly returns the program reference point from the current point Note 1 Generally each axis should stop at the program reference point in waiting for the machining 2 After the system executes the program reference point return the green icon of the program reference point return before the corresponding machine coordinates are displayed as the prompt 4 4 2 6 Recovering the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point In JOG working mode the workpiece coordinate system and the program reference point have been set In AUTO working mode when all executed blocks include G50 the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point have been changed The operator can use the following operations to recover the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point set in JOG working mode Format Input G 5 1 ENTER Recove
285. here is no the thread run out when is omitted 196 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Example G00 Z100 X10 G92 W 30 U80 K5 12 5 P 2 W 31 5 W 32 M30 Cutting starting point Z a end point Fig 4 27 5 Compound example as Fig 4 28 J i une c Au J i 1 s 1 AAE 1 C T E Le E D D A 45 5 I xtA a inch straight thread b taper outer thread Cutting feed Rapid feed Oo ad Fig 4 28 Example 1 Metric straight thread as Fig 4 28 a G14 11 teeth D 41 910 D2 40 431 D1 38 952 N0010 GOO X45 Z5 rapidly position A N0020 M03 S600 spindle CW 600 rev min N0030 G92 X41 Z 50 E11 the first tool infeed cutting 0 91 cm N0040 X40 2 the second cutting 0 8 cm N0050 X39 6 the third cutting 0 6 cm N0060 X39 2 the fourth cutting 0 4 cm N0070 X38 952 the fifth cutting to the required dimension N0080 M30 The tool is still on A after executing the above mentioned blocks Example 2 Outer taper thread as Fig 4 28 b R14 D 41 910 D2 40 431 D1 28 952 P 2 309 the valid length of thread is 19 1 N0010 GOO X45 Z5 rapidly position A N0020 M03 S600 spindle CW 600 rev min 197 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual N0030 G92 X40 Z 19 1 P2 309 R 22 6 the first tool infeed to cut N0040 X36 the second tool infeed to cut N0050 X32 the third tool infeed to cut NO060 X28 952 the fourth tool infeed to cut N0070 M30 The tool is still on A aft
286. high light square e 5 INPUT input key The program edit state is switched into the program catalog search state and the system 25 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual prompts Input program number gt Gj 7 ENER A 8 DELETE D 9 SINGLE Ae hp 10 a DA STEP e hs AXIS CHANGE B Page Up Page Down Paging to display the program content In hp5 the cursor directly moves the home the end window in hp4 the system can zoom out down the graph Enter key The cursor moves to the next block down delete key Delete all blocks or characters in the block hp2 key program edit help message prompt switch Single Continuous mode in motion path analog drawing hp3 key current program compiling and analog drawing current program graph hp4 key MPG controls the cursor moving hp5 key execute No 253 or No 254 program the system command help and part program character string search hp6 key prompt the displayed macro character string list Multi function definition key input must obey the following rules 1 When the first letter is capital in the line the first key value is prior when it is the lowercase the 3 or 2 key value is prior 2 The system automatically creates the blank space when the letter or character following the digit 0 9 is input 3 The cursor stays the position where the input is convenient after the character string is
287. hing 219 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual The thread finishing is executed after the tool rapidly moves to B thread cut depth is D the cut depth is R and the last the system returns to A to complete the thread finishing cycle When the finishing cycle times is L the system executes to complete the finishing cycle the thread cut depth is D the cut amount is 0 when the finishing cycle times is L G76 compound thread machining cycle is completed R Finishing amount _ J 1st thread cut depth _ Thread cutting s Rapid traverse A Starting point end point B Thread cut depth reference point meee ccceeceececccece A C Thread end point E Thread starting point Fig 4 47 The cut in method is as Fig 4 48 A Be ABE Finishing cut amount R OBn OB Fig 4 48 220 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Command explanation 1 Using G76 thread cycle cutting command group can complete the specified tooth height total cut depth of the thread cutting by multi thread roughing and finishing when the thread angle defined by the command is not 0 the cut in point of thread roughing moves to the thread tooth bottom from the thread tool top and the angle between neighboring two teeth is the defined thread angle G76 command group can machine the straight and taper thread with the thread run out to realize the one sided tool ed
288. hining when the system receives the one turn signal of the spindle encoder so the system can execute the roughing finishing for many times to complete the thread machining without changing the spindle speed The system has many kinds of thread cutting function used to machining the thread without the tool retraction groove there is great pitch error in the thread cutting start and end when the system executes X Z acceleration deceleration so the system leaves the thread lead length and the tool retraction distance in the actual starting point and the end When the thread pitch is confirmed X Z speed is determined by the spindle speed and is not related to the cutting federate override When the spindle override control in the thread cutting is valid and the spindle speed changes the pitch has the error because of X Z acceleration deceleration so the system does not execute the spindle speed regulation and does not stop the spindle otherwise which damages the tool and workpiece The thread cutting command are Z X programming 4 5 1 G33 thread cutting Command format G33 X U _ Z W _ PCE _ K IL Q_ H_ thread cutting G33 Z W _ PCE _ K L Q H_ axial straight thread cutting G33 X U _ PCE _ K_ L Q H end face straight thread cutting Field P metric thread lead E inch thread lead It is the axial thread and Z is the thread axis when P E is positive value it is the end face thread and X is the thread axis when it
289. hod is as follows NPN connection method without contact Machine side Connect it when the signal is valid Machine contact connection method Machine side The contact of the input signal at the machine side should meet the conditions Contact capacity more than DC28V 16mA leakage current among the contacts in open circuit below 1mA Voltage drop among contact in close circuit below 1V current 8 5mA including the voltage drop 2 The input signal UI26 UI27 SP ST are standard signals use the normally open contact of the machine contact switch ESP uses the normally closed contact of the machine contact switch with self lock Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection Circuit method layout Connection example Button switch without lock Button switch with lock ao CNC input interface 3 Standard signal name definition of input interface SP external pause operation key signal ST external cycle start key signal ESP emergency stop key signal the signal must be connected SHL chuck pedal switch pedal switch input signal of hydraulic chuck TPS tailstock pedal switch pedal switch input signal of hydraulic tailstock PRES pressure low check the hydraulic system pressure low check input signal DecxX X machine zero return deceleration signal DecZ Z machine zero return deceleration signal DecY Y machine zero return deceleration signal Note See DecX DecZ DecY A
290. hread repeat the above step 2 4 to execute the multi thread cutting Z mp Cutting feed R 2 Rapid feed Fig 4 21 G92 thread cutting cycle Relative parameter In G92 the relative parameter for rapid traverse is referred to GOO the one for thread cutting is referred to G33 Explanation 1 Itis necessary to execute the cutting feed many times at the moment only alter X coordinate value of end point of cutting feed or the increment value compared to the starting point The coordinate position is still on the starting point when the thread cycle ends 2 The command cannot be in the same block with other command 3 G92 recycle consecutive command means the system executes one time the contour in G92 when P E is positive G92 recycle consecutive command is only X U when P CE is negative G92 recycle consecutive command is only Z W 4 The axial thread machining is limited by the diameter difference between the starting point and the end point of the thread in cutting taper thread it is limited by Z coordinate difference between the starting point and end point of the cycle in cutting taper thread 5 Notes are the same those of G33 thread cutting 6 For axial taper thread the pitch P E is the pitch in the thread axis Z for the end face thread it is the pitch in the thread axis X 7 The relationship between R K P and tool path is as follows 193 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System
291. hree gears 0 001mm 0 01mm 0 1mm which can be switched circularly according to the STEP REGULATION preset MPG coordinate axis Press MPG to select MPG coordinate axis to X or Z Y which can be switched circularly The coordinate of the selected coordinate axis is in the high light state When Y Z SWITCH indicator is ON pressing MPG control axis switches X Y mutually Rotate MPG after the required coordinate axis is selected and the selected axis moves according to MPG rotating Rotate CW MPG and the coordinate axis moves positively Rotate CCW MPG and it moves negatively Note 1 The MPG speed of should be lower than 5 rev s otherwise the motor still moves even if the MPG has stopped which causes the moving distance does not correspond with the scale 39 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 2 In MPG mode all the functions related to the axis moving including JOG or STEP movement function zero return incremental absolute movement are invalid but S M T and other auxiliary functions are valid 3 In MPG mode when the relative functions of coordinate axis moving are executed and the relative absolute movement of field is input MPG is forbidden temporarily and at the moment it is invalid its press key is invalid and its LED flashes After the above function is executed MPG function automatically recovers S M T auxiliary function is valid 4 Even if the MPG is shaken the slider does not traverse when t
292. hree working procedure which each of them is moved to different position from start then goes back to start But the three working procedures are not executed by turn they are chosen by press key temporarily according to the pop up window prompt 101 N0000 G00 Z0 X0 N0010 GOO Z100 X100 N0020 r5002 110003 set the line number of the display window N0030 r5002 110016 set the display character number of each line N0200 r5002 1 open an empty display window N0210 r5002 140001 8 16 set the character size 8 16 N0220 r5002 130000 set the character color black 283 CGSR r Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual N0230 r5002 1004 set the 004 character string N0240 r5002 11 set the cursor position the cursor points to the home of next line N0250 r5002 140000 16 16 set the character size 16 16 N0260 r5002 1006 display the 006 character string N0270 r5002 11 change line N0280 r5002 130006 change color blue N0290 r5002 1005 display the 005 character string N0300 r5002 130168 change the color red N0500 r5001 4 Waiting for the keyboard input a character release the key and then execute the next block N0510 when r5001 49 then P1000 When the character 1 is input executes P1000 N0520 when r5001 50 then P2000 When the character 2 is input executes P1000 N0530 when r5001 51 then P3000 When the character 3 is input executes P1000 N0540 when r
293. i Ki ki k kik S03 KiKi KL Kiki ki k S04 kik Ki Kl Ki KL xix Note x in the above table means the output of the corresponding output point is valid 3 Lines controlled by the Actual output of spindle gear is specified by P310 P310 4 actual output controlling points are S01 S02 S03 S04 P310 3 actual output controlling points are S01 S02 S03 releasing S04 as other use P310 2 actual output controlling points are S01 S02 releasing S04 S03 as other use P310 1 actual output controlling points is S01 releasing S04 S03 S02 as other use P310 0 S does not output releasing S04 S03 S02 S01 as other use 4 When the gear controls the signal code output P410_d5 is set to 1 and the controlled lines specified by P310 are less than 4 only the low gear control is valid and the high code control is released and is not controlled by the gear Execution process and signal output time sequence of spindle S gear shifting When the system is turned on it defaults SOO SO1 S04 output are invalid When the system executes any one of S01 S02 S03 S04 the corresponding S signal output is valid and keeps and at the same time the output of other 3 signals is cancelled When the system executes S00 it cancels S01 S04 output and one of SO1 S04 is valid Executing S01 Executing S02 Executing S00 l t1 spindle gear switch interval time P313 Spindle gear shi
294. icator 3 light control green 1 LMP2 Alarm indicator control Applied to three co O lo a signal 2 1 LMP1 Alarm indicator control Applied to three color O 0 signal 1 light control red 1 MDLY Machine electricity O lo B delay Power on control signal 1 M320 Lubricating control Control lubricating switch O 0 pe switch on machine P507 1 TZD Tool post worktable Applied to SWD120 0 0 eee brake output AK31 SBWD 80 tool post P508 1 TFD Tool post worktable Applied to AK31 O 0 pe pregraduation output SBWD 80 tool post P509 1 A001 Reserved o o Ooo 1 A002 Reserved oO lo Oooo 1 SAGT Safety door check Check the machine 0 a safety door state 1 Dalm Feed device alarm Check feed device state 0 pe check in M20 1 M411 Gear shifting Use frequency spindle 0 Zz in position signal in position check signal M41 1 M42 Gear shifting Use frequency spindle 14 0 a in position signal in position check signal M42 1 M431 Gear shifting Use frequency spindle 0 ma in position signal in position check signal M43 1 M441 Gear shifting Use frequency spindle 0 a in position signal in position check signal M44 1 M911 User command input l 0 fs 1 M93I User command input o Oooo 1 RM78 Tailstock forward Use in using hydraulic 0 ed in position check tailstock 1 RM79 Tailstock backward Use in using hydraulic 0 pe in position check tailstock 1 Wsp External MPG Applied
295. ignal line corresponds to one tool number and the valid level of the tool signal is LOW other tool signals are invalid when some tool signal is valid Example P319 4 P320 4 the tool signals are as follows T04 T03 T02 T01 No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Oo 3 oO Oo oO Note 1 in the table stands for HIGH 0 for LOW 326 Parameter setting is as follows Parameter Parameter Remark setting value P318 1 Tool change mode 1 P319 4 4 tool tool post P320 4 4 tool signals P408_d7 0 Bit parameter is set to default mode Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection 3 4 4 2 Table look up mode P408_d7 1 In the table look up mode P319 is not equal to P320 The tool signal is defined by P541 P556 Tool signal definition in table look up is as follows P541 P556 correspond to tool signal code of No 1 16 tool the tool code is expressed with the decimal and the code method is as follows all used tool signals consist of binary codes Tp320 T1 from the high to the low and then the binary code corresponding to each tool number is switched to the decimal to fill the position corresponding to P541 P556 The binary code of the tool signal can be seen in DIAGNOSIS mode Example Hengyuan CLT 63 CLT300 turning machine turret serial 8 tool post uses the 4 tool signal and the corresponding tool codes are as follows
296. in Return to the starting point of cycle after the system executes the cycle If other commands G are contained in the block behind the cycle ones the cycle automatically ends The single canned cycle only uses Z X programming 4 14 1 G90 outer cylinder face turning cycle axial cutting cycle Command format G90 Z W _ XCU _ R_ F__ inner outer cylinder face turning cycle X U _ F G90 cycle consecutive command cycles once G90 contour Field 188 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions X U Z W cylinder taper end point The two axes must be given and the incremental coordinates cannot be zero R diameter difference between the starting point and the end point of cycle It is the axis surface cutting if R is omitted F feedrate Field range X Z U W R 9999 999mm 9999 999mm F 0 001mm min 15000mm min Command execution process mm Cutting feed sseeness Rapid feed Fig 4 18a outer inner cylinder taper face turning cycle Fig 4 18b the system alarms in mistaken programming contour G90 cycle process Fig 4 18a X rapidly moves from A to B The tool cuts at F speed from B to C of X Z X does not move without R The tool cuts at F speed from C to D of X axis Zrapidly moves from D to A Relative parameter In G90 the relative parameter of rapid traverse is referred to GOO the cutting feed is referred to G01 Explanation 1 The directions of inner outer ma
297. in position signal General input interface Ul08 Pin 15 UIO7 T07 No 7 tool in position signal General input interface UI07 Pin 7 UI06 T06 No 6 tool in position signal General input interface UI06 Pin 14 UI05 T05 No 5 tool in position signal General input interface UI05 Pin 12 UI04 T04 No 4 tool in position signal General input interface Ul04 Pin 4 UI03 T03 No 3 tool in position signal General input interface UI03 Pin 11 UI02 T02 No 2 tool in position signal General input interface UI02 Pin 3 UI01 T01 No 1 tool in position signal General input interface UI01 o TZD Tool post worktable brake Optional to SWD120 AK31 SBWD 80 tool post Tool post worktable Optional to AK31 SBWD 80 tool O TFD pre graduation post Pin 1 UO012 TL Tool post CW output As general output interface UO12 Pin 9 UO11 TL Tool post CCW output As general output interface UO11 Pre graduation proximity Optional to AK31 SBWD 80 tool l TFDC 3 switch post Strobe signal Optional to AK31 SBWD 80 tool l TXT post Tool post worktable overheat Optional to AK31 SBWD 80 tool l TGR check post Pin 6 UI09 TCP Tool post clamping signal General input interface UI09 319 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Note AK31 SBWD 80 tool post is referred to the user manuals of Yantai AK31 series tool post Changzhou SBWD 80 series tool post 3 4 2 Signal connection The connection method of general input output UI01 UI09 U011 U012 interface is according
298. in the X direction regularly when the workpiece recorder is the integer double the program will make the tool compensation modification automatically N0010 G00 Z200 X100 N1000 r1 r4001 20 get the remainder of workpiece recorder dividing 20 N1010 when r1 0 then P1030 when the remainder is zero it will be the integer double of 20 N1020 M20 N1030 r6201 r6201 10 No 1 X tool offset reduce one thread N1040 M20 recycle Program Example 2 In the following program it mainly demonstrates the method of temporary press interference and call in 289 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual the program Suppose the pin of UO31 and UO32 control a In the batch cycle machining when the handlers want to make the random sample to the workpiece press G key the loader collects a sample in automatically 104 N0010 GOO Z200 X100 N0020 G00 Z180 X80 N0030 G01 Z100 F200 cut outer circle N1000 when r4009 71 then H2000 When G key is pressed in forestall then call N2000 N1010 G01 X0 F200 cut off N1020 r2031 1 loader returns to original position N1030 r2032 1 N1040 M20 N2000 r2031 0 loader goes forward N2010 r2032 0 N2010 r4009 0 clear G state N2020 M99 Program example 3 In the following program it mainly demonstrates the function operation According to the elliptic parameter equation finger out that the point in ellipse are moving along the ellipse path by short line appr
299. inate axis moves in absolute movement mode relative movement mode yx Create machine coordinate system workpiece coordinate system yx Spindle chuck cooling tool post and other miscellaneous function operation y Toolsetting operation yx Machine real time state display pop up real time alarm JOG window display is as Fig 4 6 36 Operation Chapter Four System Operation n op CREE 0289 850 Left top Z 0104 O6U ZM 0104 060 eee Y 0000 000 YM 90000 000 Left bottom Je Right middle Fig 4 6 JOG working mode window area display content Upper top display manual feed operation mode including JOG STEP X Z Y MPG the system function operation way prompt key Left top display tool nose coordinate and machine coordinate Left bottom MDI input and alarm prompt area Right middle display machine s current state including spindle cooling lubricating tool post chuck tailstock speed cutting speed and so on Pop up window display system s alarm message Miscellaneous function state display 1 miscellaneous function state uses the icon or correspond command symbol display 2 black sign indicates the current state spindle cooling 3 red sign indicates the function is being executed and is not completed 4 red flash indicates the last execution is failure or broken in midcourse reset emergency stop operation and the system takes the corresponding function is in the unconfir
300. inate date including three decimal is get 2 In the command symbol G M T the variable can t be quoted Gr003 can t be used for program 3 The field of program line number i e P Q etc can t quote variable 4 The field L showing times and field H showing location sign can t quote the variable 5 Only the common variable can be quoted by command field otherwise alarm 6 When the program is in AUTO working mode when the variable is used in main program and also the transferred subprogram i e M60 M74 command please pay attention that the variable in the intercross using and changing of main program and subprogram will impact the result of program running The characteristic of common variable When the system executes the program in AUTO working mode the variable value may change along with the program path The common variable has following characteristics 1 The system makes different initiation disposal according to the different variable section number Among them r001 r040 the variable parameter table offers the initial value for it set by the user according to the requirement r041 r099 evaluate the initial value to be zero by pressing CYCLE START key it is executed by cycle without clearing r100 r199 never to clear except the boot strap 277 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 2 In the AUTO working mode before executing the first program and pressing the CYCLE START key the system wi
301. inear a 2 Linear arc Programmed path a 1 v i Fig 5 9a Linear linear movement inner side Programmed path 3 Circular linear Tool nose center path Fig 5 96 Linear linear movement inner side 4 Circular linear a Programmed path I I I C Fig 5 9c Circular linear movement inner side C gt rogrammed path Tool nose center path Fig 5 9d Circular circular movement inner side Cb Tool movement around an outer side of a corner 180 gt az290 1 Linear linear G41 L G41 Programmed path Programmed path in O a gt ace EE EEN r S Tool nose center path S L Tool nose center path P Fig 5 10a arc transition at angle Fig 5 10b linear transition at angle 2 Linear Circular Programmed path Tool nose center path Programmed path Fig 5 11a arc transition at angle 238 Fig 5 11b linear transition at angle Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation G41 G42 3 Circular Linear G41 i Programmed path S Tool nose center path Fig 5 12a arc transition at angle 4 Circular Circular Programmed path Programmed path Tool nose center path i Tool nose center path C Fig 5 13a arc transition at angle Fig 5 13b linear transition at angle c Special cutting Without intersection Bisiconsensation Alarm and stop There is no intersection of 9 P va compensation paths when the Se ee Be tool radius is small no one bie
302. ing feed to linear and arc interpolation G72 Outer roughing cycle The same that of G71 G96 End face roughing cycle G97 Constant surface speed ON P410_d6 P304 P305 G98 Constant surface speed OFF G99 Feed per minute G31 Feed per rev P532 others are referred to G01 Y Additional Y axis P405_d1 P410_d4 229 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation G41 G42 5 1 Application 5 1 1 Overview Part program is compiled generally for one point of tool according to a workpiece contour The point is generally regarded as the tool nose A point in an imaginary state there is no imaginary tool nose point in fact and the tool nose radius can be omitted when using the imaginary tool nose point to program or as the center point of tool nose arc as Fig 5 1 Its nose of turning tool is not the imaginary point but one arc owing to the processing and other requirement in the practical machining There is an error between the actual cutting point and the desired cutting point which will cause the over or under cutting affecting the part precision So a tool nose radius compensation is needed in machining to improve the part precision Fig 5 1 tool B tool compensation is defined that a workpiece contour path is offset one tool nose radius which cause there is excessive cutting at an intersection of two programs because of executing motion path of next after completing the previous blo
303. ing mode NW FERDE REDUCING FEEDATE OVERRIDE Reduce feedrate override in JOG working mode and 7 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual G01 feedrate override in AUTO working mode x 0 X PROGRAM REFERENCE POINT PROGRAM ZERO RETURN It is valid in JOG AUTO working mode program Zero is called program reference point in the user manual ZY PROGRAM 0 Z PROGRAM REFERENCE POINT PROGRAM ZERO RETURN It is valid in JOG AUTO working mode ne in X MACHINE ZERO MACHINE ZERO RETURN It is valid in JOG AUTO working mode machine zero is called machine reference point in the user manual ZN MACHINE zo Z Or Y MACHINE ZERO MACHINE REFERENCE POINT RETURN It is valid in JOG AUTO working mode eK DRY DRY RUN In AUTO working mode whether M S T are valid is determined by the parameter bit parameter P401_d7 each axis coordinates automatically recover to the previous ones before the system enters the DRY RUN working mode Dp SINGLE SINGLE BLOCK A single block runs in AUTO working mode It is hp function in other working modes 3 3 4 Cycle start and cycle pause feed hold key Start and pause programs in AUTO working mode and each key symbol definition is as follows a CYCLE START Start to run programs in AUTO working mode move coordinate axis in JOG working mode hp3 a CYCLE PAUSE FEED HOLD pause the running in JOG or AUTO working mode hp function in other w
304. ing others The tool post actual movement direction is the same with the system defining direction d4__Z drive unit alarm level d3__X drive unit alarm level d2__Y drive unit alarm level 0 HIGH II Drive unit alarms when Z X Y drive unit alarm input signal is HIGH 112 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 1 LOW II Drive unit alarms when Z X Y drive unit alarm input signal is LOW d1__ controllable axis 0 without Y forbid using Y movement command 1 with Y the controllable axis has Y permits Y movement command d0__motor raising speed control 0 linear the motor reducing speed uses the linear control 1 exponential the motor raising speed curve is the exponential curve or the tuned exponential curve 4 6 4 12 Parameters related to other interfaces __ P412 P330 P332 Relative interfaces __ bit parameter P412 password level 2 d7 d6 d5 d4 reserved reserved d1 reserved d7__ external start pause signal 0 none the external start and pause signals are invalid 1 have the external start and pause signals are valid d6__ external feed hold knob 0 none the system external feed spindle hold knob interface is invalid 1 have the system external feed spindle hold knob interface is valid d5__ pressure low check function 0 none 1 have the system has the pressure low check function P412_d4 sets the alarm level d4_ pressure low a
305. ing to the actual mounting position of the tool of the machine that the system controls Note The power supply of the system installed in the cabinet is exclusive to GSK CNC systems Must not take the power supply as other uses otherwise there maybe cause great accidence Chinese version of all technical documents in Chinese and English languages is regarded as final All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice All rights reserved We are full of heartfelt gratitude to you for supporting us in the use of GSK s products Il Suggestions for safety Suggestions for Safety The user must carefully read the suggestions for the system before installing and operating the system The user must follow the suggestions of the system to ensure that the person is not hurt and the equipments are not damaged The user must follow the related suggestions for safety described in the user manual and must not operate it until the manual is read completely The user must follow the suggestions of safety described in the user manual from the machine manufacture The user can operate the machine or compile the program to control the machine after completely reading the manual and the one from the machine manufacturer Il CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual I Graphic symbol Caution Operation against the instructions may cause the operator serious injuries Alarm Wrong oper
306. int r1 to r100 when it s exceeded it will alarm 3 The statement about setting up or changing the pointer variable only can be written in a separate section otherwise alarm the expression in the right side of pointing symbol can be the addition and subtraction operation between two of them 4 The pointer variable only can be used in the numerical value operation can t be quoted by the data field like G etc command such as Ur9000 alarm 5 In the statement of assignment conditional judge to evaluate the pointer variable expresses to evaluate the common variable which is pointed by it however reading the pointer variable expressed to read the value of the common variable which is pointed by it The explanation of pointer variable program demonstration In the following program Z X axis will store the coordinate of the position to the common variable in moving each position it totally has stored 10 set coordinate then take out them one by one and go back to the initial position by the original path The following is come true by the pointer variable N0000 N0010 N0020 N0030 N0040 N1000 N1010 N1020 N1030 N1040 N1050 N1060 N2000 N2010 N2020 N2030 N2040 N2050 N2060 G00 Z200 X200 r9000 gt 1 expression of the r9001 pointer variable pointing to r001 common variable Mg8 L10 P1000 M98 L10 P2000 M02 r9000 r6004 In the first calling store the Z coordinate in this
307. invalid effective or change the program command E620 Illegal use r10xx The input chip pin by variable is Modify P412_d1 to be effective occupied by other function or the or change the variable No program pin parameter forbids to use the input corresponding input chip pin or chip pin statement program change the program command E621 Illegal use r20xx The input chip pin by variable is Modify P412_d1 to be effective occupied by other function or the or change the variable No program pin ere forbids to use the output Caeser ie input chip pin or chip pin statement program or used change the program command the user defined changing tool or modify parameter P318 9 method E622 No traverse command in The parameter setting the M61 Change the position parameter M61 prog program forbids the motion command P404_d2 to be allowed or change the program to don t include motion command E623 Illegal use M47 The switch setting in spindle and Y Modify P404_d4 1 or change axis is not the program command E624 Illegal use M48 The switch setting in spindle and Y Modify P404_d4 1 or change axis is not the program command E625 Illegal use M04 The spindle reversion signal is set to Modify P404_d2 1 or change be without the program command E628 Tool type is 9 T When the tool post type is 9 the T Modify program command need single command doesn t have separate block section E629 Illegal use Y command The control axis is set to
308. ion ssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesceceececeecsococceeeeccoccoeeeeeesocoeeeeeeeese 62 4 4 9 Other option functions PPE ESE EES R A AEE AA A T AA 64 4 4 9 1 Three color indicator control sssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecececececeeecececccceececeeeececeeccecceceeeceeeeeee 64 4 4 9 2 Lubricating L erreesereeeeeeeeerecceececccsecccccncccscccccecccccccsscsecseccnencssssssscscsenssscsssecsseeessssesessses 65 4 4 9 3 Machine electricity delay power on contro eeeeeeeseeseseeereseeeesseeeeseseeessserenseresseseeesesee 65 4 4 9 4 External MPG operation ALILI TITIL II LIIT TITI TITILL TTT ETT 66 4 4 9 5 Safety door check function eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececceccececccecccecccececceccecececeeeeccecceeeececceeeeee 66 4 4 9 6 Pressure low alarm check functijop eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeecoccceceeeecsoocceceeeccooocceeeccoooceeeee 67 4 4 10 Searching run message in JOG working mode seeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 67 4 4 11 Appendix srrerrersessessessesessessessesensensensensnsensensensensnsensensensensnsenscnsensensnssnscnscnsnsnsenscnsensnssasensensens 67 4 4 11 1 MDI input controlling M command table MD eeeeeeeerserereeeeeesececeeeeeeccoccceceeeeccceseeeeeecsceeee 67 4 4 12 Spindle turn function sssseeeseeseseeeeseseeseecseeseesoecsecceecoeesoscoecceesososesosssosocsososessoseseesososeesessssseeseesose 68 4 5 AUTO Working Mode seeeesseeeeeseseecececccsecececcecscscecccccccsceccccoccscecceccccc
309. ion the handlers stand far away the system and can use the exterior press button to come true the start pause function But in the position which is far away the system it s hard to come true single block stop In the following program it will come true the function through the process monitor In the program set the UIOS pin which is quoted by press button signal to system when press the switch UI05 0 when release UI05 1 After opened the monitor this press button can make the cycle switch between single block and continuum execution working mode Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming 106 NO030 r7000 r1005 0 monitor tests the state of input signal r1005 N0040 when r7000 0 then r5008 2 When the signal r1005 is monitored to be zero then pause NO030 r7001 r1005 1 monitor tests the state of input signal r1005 r1006 N0040 when r7001 1 then r7010 2 When the press button is released then open the 0 monitor again NO070 r7011 2 Open the 1 monitor by mode 2 N0070 r7010 2 Open the 0 monitor by mode 2 N0010 GO X100 Z200 N0020 G00 X50 Z190 N0050 G1 X50 Z160 F300 NO060 G2 W 80 R100 N0080 G1 U10 W 20 N0080 G1 W 20 N0080 G1 U10 W 20 N0090 GO X100 Z200 N0160 M02 Program Example 3 The following program introduce the explanation of process monitor In the following program suppose the UI05 UIO6 pin which are quoted by monitor signal to the system output signal UO05 pi
310. ion and modifies the tool nose coordinates it executes the slide movement and makes the too nose coordinate recover move to the position which is the previous and ensure the tool nose coordinates is not changed Move the machine slide 1 Move the slide in JOG working mode to make the tool nose coordinates recover X Y rapidly move simultaneously 2 In AUTO working mode when the T command is an alone block its execution mode is the same that of JOG working mode i e the system executes the slide movement to make the tool nose coordinates recover X Y rapidly move simultaneously 3 In AUTO working mode when T and G00 G01 are the same block the system executes the tool change and then adds the tool compensation value to X Z coordinates of GO0 G01 to complete the movement The system performs the rapid traverse in GOO and cutting speed in G01 3 3 2 Tool offset execution mode modifying coordinates When P403_d6 0 the tool compensation execution is to modify the system coordinates In JOG and AUTO working mode the slide does not move after the system executes the tool compensation and modifies the tool nose coordinates In AUTO working mode after the system executes the tool compensation the workpiece program is in undefined state when the tool nose coordinates are changed and does not be recovered The troubleshooting is the followings when the system appears the different consecutive commands 1 When the consecutive
311. ion command is executed in the common program the M00 command is suggested to use 3 Stopped after the cycle finished it can go on the running by pressing CYCLE START key 4 Start in cycle same to press CYCLE PRESS key it is used in process monitor description in generally 5 Set the single execution it can be resumed by pressing CYCLE START key again 6 set the continual execution Explanation The r5008 assignment displays the working mode of choosing the program break off and start it generally is used with the monitor description please refer the monitor description example Example r5008 1 The program break off immediately it can go on the running through pressing CYCLE START key r5008 3 Break off after the cycle ending stop it after meeting M20 it can go on the running through pressing the CYCLE START key 285 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 9 1 2 9 System special variable set 1 System special variable set 1 read write in the process monitor description statement read only write forbidden Variable teen meaning r6001 Z machine coordinate r6002 X machine coordinate r6003 Y machine coordinate Z tool nose r6004 coordinate r6005 x tool nose coordinate r6006 Y tool nose coordinate r6101 6164 Z tool offset 01 64 r6201 6264 X tool offset 01 64 Explanation For the written variable the
312. ion function reduces speed to the initial speed across the quadrant and then executes the backlash and the machining path transits to the next quadrant raises speed and reduces speed before the machining is completed And the system executes the post acceleration deceleration processing P400_ d2 1 the cutting command executes the continuous and smooth transition the arc command directly executes the post acceleration deceleration processing instead of the front acceleration deceleration processing 2 P401_ d4 1 the cutting command decelerates to zero the post acceleration deceleration function is invalid G01 processing P401_ d5 0 G01 has the front acceleration deceleration function G01 and G01 perform the connection transition with the best speed all G01 moves to the end point of the block and decelerates to zero exactly positions the end point of the block when the cutting speed is high the linearity path is precise and the transition point is smooth At the moment the post acceleration deceleration function does not greatly influence the path precision P401_ d5 1 G01 has the front acceleration deceleration processing decelerates to zero after each cutting command is executed Arc processing P400_ d2 0 the system executes the arc precision process when the arc crosses the high point The arc command has the front acceleration deceleration function reduces speed to the initial speed across the quadrant and then executes the
313. is more than 254 2 There is no part program or the system is not used firstly the system automatically creates and selects 000 program as the current program When there are programs the system sorts the program according to part program quantity and program names in the last power off 3 The system supports many input the leading zero can not be input Example inputting 003 program Press INPUT inputO O 3 alsoinput O 3 orinput 3 4 3 2 1 Selecting and creating a part program The operations to select a part program or create a new program are as follows Press INPUT key in EDIT working mode Input the required program number by the board key or input a program number which is not in the program catalog list as the new program number 3 Press ENTER key Select or create a part program display the content of the part program and the system enters the program edit window Note 1 When a program is selected it is changed by the above steps it cannot be changed once it is confirmed 2 there is no the selected program number in the input part program catalog creating a program is taken as the current program Example Example 1 there is no 20 part program in the part program catalog creating it is as follows Press keys to input INPUT 2 0 ENTER The new program 020 has been 19 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual created and the system enters 020 program edit window Example 2 there is
314. is not pressed Main functions in Edit mode include yx select create rename copy and delete part programs yx input insert modify and delete the content of the selected part program 17 Middle U enter USB communication 020 a R enter RS232 communication CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual yx transmit part programs between U disc and the system by the USB interface yx transmit part program between the external PC and the system by RS232 communication interface yx transmit part program in two systems by RS232 communication interface yx compile and save program program motion path drawing analog yxinput variable and macro character string D Press 0T to enter the EDIT working mode The EDIT working mode includes two main window program catalog search window and program edit window The program catalog search window is as Fig 4 3 EDIT Current program No 020 Program length 1KB hp2 Upper top Name size remark aig 22 remark Middle top 000 1KB G00 Xo 001 1KB Go press key prompt Pop up window 0022 KB G50 0302 KB G50 Middle bottom Program count 45 Program remaining space 792KB Lower bottom Fig 4 3 program catalog search Display content in window area Upper top program number and capacity of current program program length the system function operation method prompt key hp2 Middle top orderly arrange
315. ising reducing speed mode and the system default to zero H_d1 0 in continuous thread cutting between the neighboring two threads the long axis reduces speed from the machining speed to the initial soeed and then raises speed to the thread machining speed The thread pitch length changes in the raising and the reducing speed H_d1 1 in continuous thread cutting between the neighboring two threads the machining speed of the block suddenly skips to the one of the next thread without the process from the thread machining speed reducing speed to the initial soeed and from the initial speed raising speed to the thread machining speed So when the difference between two block thread pitches is great there maybe make the motor step out which does not meet the machining Field range X Z U W 9999 999mm 9999 999mm I 9999 999mm 9999 999mm K 0 9999 998mm P 0 001mm 500 000mm the negative sign can be added to the front of the range The positive value means to the axial thread and the negative value means to the end face thread Q 0 060 25400 000 tooth inch the negative sign can be added to the front of the range The positive value means to the axial thread and the negative value means to the end face thread 0 360 000 H 00000000 11111111 Relative parameters Parameters related to G33 P100 P101 P103 P104 P106 P107 P113 P116 P117 P209 P306 P307 P403_d0 Taking example of axis thread
316. ist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 5 Debugging T Warning e Make sure that the parameters of the system is correct before the system runs eNo parameter is beyond the setting limit in the manual 6 Operation H Caution eOnly qualified operators can operate the system eEnsure the switch is OFF before connecting the power supply T Warning eThe operator can not leave the system to work alone eDo not switch on the system until making sure the connection is correct eThe emergency stop button is able to disconnect all power supplies when the system breaks down Do not switch on off the system frequently H Warning Prevent the system from the environmental interference 7 Troubleshooting T Caution e Unqualified persons cannot repair the system T Warning eAfter alarms do not restart the system until the breakdown is fixed VI Suggestions for safety III Safety suggestions for programming 1 2 3 4 Setting a coordinate system Incorrect coordinate system may cause the machine not to work as expected even if the program is correct which may injure the operator and damage the machine as well as its tool and workpiece Rapid traverse positioning When G00 rapid traverse performs the positioning nonlinear motion to position between its starting point and end point make sure that the path for the tool is safe before programming The positioning is to perform the rapid traverse and when the
317. it alarm or set the machine coordinate machine alarm value P020 zero return again release the alarm E313 Z nose Z negatively moves in JOG working software limit Z tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode or execute the toolsetting program positive limit alarm value P009 reference point return again release the alarm alarh E314 x nose X axis negatively moves in JOG working software limit X tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode or execute the toolsetting program positive limit alarm value P011 reference point return again release the alarm alarm E315 Y nose Y negatively moves in JOG working ftwar limit Y tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode or execute the toolsetting program SOnware positive limit alarm value P013 reference point return again release the alarm alann E316 E316 Z nose Y positively moves in JOG working mode software limit Z tool nose coordinate exceeds the or execute the toolsetting program negative limit alarm value P010 reference point return again release the alarm alarm E317 x nose X positively moves in JOG working mode software limit X tool nose coordinate exceeds the or execute the toolsetting program negative limit alarm value P012 reference point return again release the alarm alan E318 E318 Y nose Y positively moves in JOG working mode sofare limit Y tool nose coordinate exceeds the or execute the toolsetting program negative limit alarm value P014 reference point return again r
318. itor There are following working modes for opening assignment Process mode of matter 0 Close the opened monitor let the inspector in the dormancy state keep its task can open again and go on the monitor Open the monitor in the monitor process make the judgement according to the matter s relation expression when the condition comes into existence the process mode is as following 1 When the inspector execute the assignment on common variable or output variable it won t impact the execution of common program command go on the monitor 2 When the inspector wants to execute the special assignment then close the monitor stop the current motion command immediately wait for the execution ending of all executing MST command execute the special assignment 3 When the inspector want to execute transfer then close the monitor stop the current motion command immediately wait for the execution ending of all executing MST command execute the transfer Open the monitor in the monitor process make the judgement according to the matter s relation expression when the condition comes into existence the process mode is as following 1 When the inspector execute the assignment on common variable or output variable it won t impact the execution of common program command go on the monitor 2 When the inspector wants to execute the special assignment then close the monitor stop the current motion command immediate
319. king mode displays Y operation icon C in the state the system permits Y motion operations forbids the spindle start stop M03 M04 05 is invalid and the system prompts the alarm message When the system executes M48 it outputs APO signal and checks API signal when API level is 1 the system set Y working mode Qn disappears in the state the system forbids Y motion operations permits the spindle start stop Y motion in AUTO working mode causes the alarm The concrete connections of APO and API signals are referred to CONNECTION 4 4 4 Cooling control In JOG working mode directly operate the function on the panel or input M08 MO9 to control the cooling ON OFF 54 Operation Chapter Four System Operation Press a to switch cooling ON OFF the State icon on the screen and LED indicator indicate its corresponding state Input M 8 ENTER cooling ON Input M 9 ENTER cooling OFF 1 In level control mode M8 M9 output time sequence it is used to others when M9 does not output Executing M08 Executing M09 2 In pulse control mode M8 M9 output time sequence Executing M09 t1 in pulse control mode M08 MO9 output hold time is set by P326 Relative parameter P410_d7 P410_d7 1 the system pulse output controls the cooling P410_d7 0 the system level output controls the cooling The bit parameter shares with the spindle controlling output bit parameter 4 4 5 Manual tool change contro
320. l In JOG working mode the operator can directly operate the tool change function key on the operation panel or input T command to execute the tool change control Tool change function operation as Press TANGE Once and the tool post rotates to the next tool number and the system displays the corresponding tool number is set to Confirm and the operator presses ENTER to execute the operation Input format of T command The standard format of the tool function field consists of T 4 digit the first 2 digit is the tool number and the second 2 digit is the tool offset number It is not necessary to input the complete 4 digit or to use the 2 4 digit Format Txx _____ the first 1 digit is the tool number the second 1 digit is the tool offset number Txxx _____ the first 1 digit is the tool number the latter 2 digit is the tool offset number Txxxx the first 2 digit is the tool number and the second 2 digit is the tool offset number 55 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Explanation Tool number range is decided by P319 max tool number 1 16 when P319 is 4 the tool number range is 0 4 The input tool number is 0 which means the system keeps the current tool number The offset number range 0 64 the input tool offset number is 0 which means the system cancels the offset Example Input T 4 6 ENTER _ execute No 4 tool and No 6 offset Input T 3 0 ENTER _ execute No 3 tool and cancel the off
321. l E239 G05 data can not The data by G05 can t form the correct arc Modify source program form arc section E240 Too many prog Excessive nested call in the program Modify source program nested calling layers E241 254 not use 254 program has used motion command Modify command or system traverse com parametef E243 Too many data after The data behind the decimal point At most three data is behind the decimal exceeds the limited range decimal point E244 Too many decimal in Wrong data is input i e 0 343 44 Modify data 267 CGSN I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E245 Lack of data after The decimal point is input but no data Delete the decimal point E246 Not input nega The negative is used in this field Check the notebook modify the negative NO in the data field E247 Too much leading The data like 000033 is used Omit the needless zero in the zero front E248 Not cancel tool Don t cancel the tool nose radius The cancel command G40 is radius compen compensation function before using added in the proper place compound command E249 No change in tip In the state of tool nose radius Delete the radius compensation radius compen compensation there is operation of then change the tool changing tool E250 G00 G01 cancel The command beside G00 G01 is used to Modify source comma
322. l S eth ate ek E E ets when the radius is big and the tool stops at the end point of 7 previous block and the system alarms Programmed path y enter of circular A Center of circular B Fig 5 14 Paths without intersection after offset 5 2 4 Tool movement in OFFSET canceling In compensation mode when the block uses G40 CNC enters the compensation cancel mode and the block operation is called the compensation cancel In C compensation cancel the system cannot use G02 G03 and G05 When there is the arc commands the system alarms and stops running In compensation cancel mode the system controls the block execution and the block which is in the tool nose radius compensation buffer register At the moment the system stops after executing one block in SINGLE working mode Press CYCLE START and the system executes the next block instead 239 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual of reading the next block In the following compensation cancel mode the next block which is to be executed reads to the buffer register and the system does not read the following block to the tool nose radius compensation buffer a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 1 Linear Linear Programmed path Programmed path Steet cocweccoeeed L Fig 5 15a Linear Linear 1 inner side canceling offset 2 Circular Linear Fig 5 15b Linear Linear 2 Cinner side canceling offset Program pa
323. l level d3__ X deceleration signal level d2__ Y deceleration signal level 0 LOW The system reduces speed after it has checked the deceleration signal to be LOW in the coordinate axis zero return 1 HIGH I The system reduces speed after it has checked the deceleration signal to be HIGH in the coordinate axis zero return d1__ after the machine zero return is executed whether the machine coordinates are modified 0 modifying machine coordinates II generally it is set to 0 the system modifies the machine coordinates after it executes the zero return 1 not modifying machine coordinates in debugging zero return function itis set to 1 to learn the zero return precision 95 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 6 4 3 Traverse speed acceleration time parameter _ P100 P108 P112 P118 Regulating P100 P116 to make the system meet the motor with the different type and the machine with the different load to improve the machining efficiency Example regulate the parameter value to the low to avoid the step out when the system uses the stepper motor properly increase the parameter value when the system uses the servo motor The detailed is referred to OPERATION 4 6 5 Appendix the difference between the stepper initial value and servo initial value in the motion parameter list Rapid traverse speed limit of Z X Y __ motion parameter P100 P101 P102 P100 P101 P102 confirm the rapid traverse speed of Z X Y in m
324. l level level Parameter sent by USB and All All All All All RS232 System software update and memory whole update X in the above table means the option uses the privilege the blank means the option has no use privilege 4 6 4 Parameter explanation The parameters are described according to the functions and uses and their detailed definitions are the followings 4 6 4 1 Reference point software limit parameter bit parameter __ POOO P020 The reference point parameters include all important coordinate positions of machine Z X Y and the each axis motion is based on these positions Z XIY program reference point __ reference coordinate parameter P000 P001 P002 It is used to setting the position of the program reference point Return the position after executing program reference point return in JOG AUTO working mode Modify the position of program reference point by input the command JOG working mode or execute G50 AUTO working mode The coordinate value of program reference point is the coordinates of the machine is not influenced by the tool offset value L2 3 program reference point of Z X Y __reference coordinate parameter P003 P004 P005 P006 P007 P008 gi 3 program reference point are similar to the program reference point return to the position after executing G30 in AUTO working mode Positive negative tool nose software limit of Z X Y __ reference coordinate parameter P009 P010 P011 P01
325. l of the target tool in the tool change time upper set by P325 the system alarms Check tool signal overtime 8 WY The system checks the SensorF is valid Sol B is turned off the motor stops rotating and the tool change is completed the system alarms Tool post locked overtime when the system has not checked SensofFF is valid in the time set by P324 Example Example the turret with 8 tool executes the tool change from No 1 to No 4 tool 1 Sol A1 is turned on Sol A2 is turned off and the tool pot is released 2 The system wait the Sensor F is invalid judges the nearby tool change direction Sol B is turned on and motor rotates 3 Check the tool signal Note SensorE creates the valid signal when it is in the No 1 No 2 No 3 tool does not perform the locking operation in the 4 tool when it checks No 3 tool signal it sets SensorE preparatory operation to make that the tool pot is in No 4 tool SolA1 is turned off SolA2 is turned on and the tool pot is locked at the moment SolB still keeps ON and the motor normally rotates once Sensor E is valid 4 When the system has checked Sensor F is valid SolB is turned off the motor stops rotating and the tool changed is performed 3 4 3 5 Tool change mode 4 P318 4 tool post type 4 tool change mode 4 It is applied to the tool post type which executes the nearby tool change CW CCW 323 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Used sig
326. l the alarm is released alarm E N tiv h ay limit X or Z negative limit switch is closed X Or 2 POSINVEIy Moves in JOG working araware m 9 mode till the alarm is released alarm E307 Z machine Z machine coordinate Zm exceeds X or Z positively moves in JOG working software limit the positive software limit alarm value mode or set the machine coordinate to alarm P015 zero again release the alarm E308 X machine X machine coordinate Zm exceeds X negatively moves in JOG working software limit the positive software limit alarm mode or set the machine coordinate to alarm value P017 zero again release the alarm E309 Y machine Y machine coordinate Zm exceeds Y negatively moves in JOG working software limit the positive software limit alarm mode or set the machine coordinate to alarm value P019 zero again release the alarm E310 Z machine X machine coordinate Zm exceeds Z positively moves in JOG working mode software limit the negative software limit alarm or set the machine coordinate to zero alarm value P016 again release the alarm E311 X machine X machine coordinate Zm exceeds X positively moves in JOG working mode software limit the negative software limit alarm or set the machine coordinate to zero alarm value P018 again release the alarm E312 Y machine Y machine coordinate Zm exceeds Y positively moves in JOG working mode software limit the negative software lim
327. laneous parameter P338 The parameter determines the cutting amount of thread finishing Unit mm G76 least cutting amount Qin roughing __ miscellaneous parameter P339 The parameter determines the least cutting amount of thread roughing Unit mm Note 1 When the system executes G76 Q it automatically loads separately the values of P L R Q fields in G76 to P336 P337 P338 P339 because it must need these parameters in executing 2 When some or all of P L R Q in G76 are ignored it executes G76 according to P336 P337 P338 P339 setting values 4 6 5 Appendix parameter list 4 6 5 1 Reference parameter list r O lt Parameter Name Initial Runge Operator No value g backup P000 Z program reference point 200 000 99999 999 P001 X program reference point 150 000 99999 999 P002 Y program reference point 100 000 P003 Z 2 program reference point 210 000 P004 X 2 program reference point 160 000 P005 Y 2 program reference point 110 000 P006 z3 program reference point 220 000 P007 X 3 program reference point 170 000 Y 3 program reference point 120 000 Z tool positive tool nose software limit 8000 000 Z tool negative software limit 8000 000 i sd i iE i i sd hs i er i X tool positive software limit 8000 000 ee i i sd Pe i i i i O i i X tool negative software limit 8000 000 Y tool positiv
328. larm level 0 HIGH it is not connected with OV 1 LOW it is connected with OV when the system pressure low alarm check function is selected the system has checked the pressure low alarm signal PRES is valid and the signal hold time exceeds P332 setting value the system prompts Pressure low alarm at the moment the axis feed pauses the spindle stops and the automatic cycle cannot start d1__ miscellaneous function input pin macro programming 0 donot permit forbid the statement programming to the defined standard input signal pin execute the statement programming to the UI pin displayed in the diagnosis window 1 permit permit executing the statement programming to all input signal pin Automatic lubricating start time s __ miscellaneous parameter P330 The parameter defines the lubricating start time unit s Automatic lubricating interval time s __ miscellaneous parameter P331 The parameter defines the automatic lubricating time interval unit s 113 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Durable pressure low alarm time s __ miscellaneous parameter P332 The parameter defines the hold pressure low alarm time unit s 4 6 4 13 Miscellaneous parameter __ P413 P416 P333 Window language _ bit parameter P413 password level 2 d7 d6 d5 Reserved d3 Reserved Reserved Reserved d7__ window language 0 Chinese II display in Chinese 1 English display
329. late 139 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Chapter Two Program Structure CNC command set edited according to the requirement of machine moving is named as program According to the sequence of command the tool traverses along the straight line and the circular arc or the spindle starts stops cooling is ON OFF The sequence of command is edited according to the technology requirement of workpiece 2 1 Character Character is the basic unit to compose the program The character includes English letters digits and other signs English letters are address character of each command or data D E F G H IJ K L MNPQRSs TUVWXYZer Digit is the specific data of each address character 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Macro If then else and or lt gt If then else select statement example If x gt y then z 0 else z 1 and logic and or logic or gt more than lt less than equalto Sign Ul start sign of program name negative data or reduction addition multiplication or modification decimal point I division in assignment statement block skip sign in others H blank space comment 2 2 Block A word consists of an address character and the following numerical command For example NOOO 12 8 W 23 45 Rules as follows Each word must have an address character English letter and the following number character string The invalid 0 of digital characte
330. lated to some parameter setting are forbidden once the parameter setting makes the command name forbidden conditions are created the system forbids all corresponding commands and functions Parameters which are related to the command forbidden are as follows Command name Command function Note commands are forbidden when the following are valid M41 M44 Automatic spindle gear P410_d6 0 spindle S control gear shifting shifting control S05 S16 Spindle S control P410_d6 0 and P410_d5 0 Only input S00 S04 in spindle gear shifting output M47 M48 P410_d4 0 do not switch the spindle and Y M32 M33 Lubricating function Interface P506 0 M04 Spindle rotation CCW P410_d2 1 do not use the spindle CCW signal output M10 M11 Workpiece clamped P409_d7 1 chuck control function is invalid released M78 M79 Tailstock forward P409_d4 1 tailstock control function is invalid backward Commands related to Y P405_d1 0 without Y Pin programming command r1001 r1032 P412_d1 0 forbid the pin programming in miscellaneous function input 4 6 5 10 Parameter list related to input interface release The parameter setting can ensure the interfaces are not used for the standard signals at the moment the interface release can be used for the general input interface the interface parameters can be defined to the released input interface Parameters related to input interface release are as follows 122 Operation
331. lation MANUAL federate Omm min 1260mm min 16 grade real time regulation or it is defined extemporarily MPG feed 0 001mm 0 01mm 0 1mm Acceleration deceleration cutting feed can select exponential linear acceleration deceleration 32 commands G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G26 G28 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G40 G41 G42 command G50 G51 G71 G72 G73 G74 G75 G76 G90 G92 G94 G96 G97 G98 G99 Tapping metric inch single multiple straight thread taper thread end face thread variable pitch thread Thread thread run out length angle and speed can be set executing the high speed thread run out pitch machining 0 001mm 500mm or 0 06tooth inch 25400tooth inch tapping function Spindle encoder lines can be set 100p r 5000p r Drive ratio between encoder and spindle is 1 1 Backlash compensation 0 mm 10 000mm Pitch error compensation 300 compensation points for each axis use constant distance or inflection a point to create data the system executes the delicate linear compensation Precision 7 z Offset 16 tool selections 64 groups tool length compensation and tool nose radius compensation offset compensation C Toolsetting method fixed point trial cutting Offset executing method traversing tool or modifying coordinate offset MOO M02 M20 M30 M03 M04 M05 M08 MO9 M10 M11 M12 M32 M33 M41 M42 M43 M44 M comma
332. le Note the parameter defines the release to be the name 0 name variable M79 Tailstock UO16 r2016 P409_d4 1 tailstock control function is invalid backward M78 Tailstock UO15 12015 P409_d4 1 tailstock control function is invalid forward M10 Chuck UO14 12014 P409_d7 1 chuck control function is invalid clamping M11 Chuck UO13 12013 P409_d7 1 chuck control function is invalid releasing TL fool post CW UO12 r2012 P318 0 line up tool output P318 9 M60 customizes the command to tool change TL Tool post CCW UO11 r2011 P318 0 line up tool output P318 9 M60 customizes the command to tool change M8 Cooling ON UO10 r2010 M9 Cooling OFF UO09 r2009 P410_d7 0 spindle control level mode MSP Spindle UO08 r2008 P410_d3 1 spindle brake signal output none brake signal M3 Spindle UOO07 r2007 rotation CW M4 Spindle rotation UOO6 r2006 P410_d2 1 spindle CCW rotation signal needless CCW M5 Spindle stop UOO0S r2005 P410_d7 0 spindle control level mode S04 M44 Spindle gear UO04 12004 P310 lt 4 release the signal cover 0 1 2 3 channel output 03 M43 Spindle gear UO03 r2003 P310 lt 3 release the signal cover 0 1 2 channel output 02 M42 Spindle gear UO02 r2002 P310 lt 2 release the signal cover 0 1 channel output S01 M41 Spindle gear UO01 r2001 P310 0 release the signal cover 0 channel output 4 7 OFFSET Working Mode OFFSET working mode the system executes the compensation to the tool offset The syst
333. ling OFF End of program 261 CGSN I Hist Manual GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Chapter Eight Alarm Message All the warning information in this CNC system are simply prompted in the screen by Chinese characters making corresponding disposal according to the prompting content Each alarm meaning is shown in the following table The alarm number starts by uppercase letter E and the following is three numbers The classification is as follows E001 E009 Alarm in PARAMETER OFFSET working mode E100 E199 E200 E299 E600 E699 E300 E399 E400 E499 8 1 Emergency Alarm Alarm in EDIT working mode Alarm in PROGRAM COMMAND Alarm in PROGRAM CHECK Alarm in JOG AUTO working mode executing relative operation Related Alarm in JOG AUTO working mode executing relative statement The stop operation in system emergency please refer the details in OPERATION 4 1 4 3 Emergency Alarm 8 2 Alarm Table in PARAMETER OFFSET Working Mode i e E001 E009 262 Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting No USB device isn t supported by this E001 Not support USB system software Use USB device supported by the system Device is removed suddenly in E002 Remove USB making USB device check Wrong operation forbid this operation suddenly E003 No insert USB Don t insert USB device Insert USB device E004 Fail to find valid
334. ling the tailstock is not influenced by the spindle state d2__tailstock respond signal consecutive check 0 donot alarm 1 alarm the bit means whether the system real time check the tailstock state and alarms when the tailstock releases The control bit is valid when the tailstock has the respond signal d1__ Automatic MPG control 0 invalid using MPG to control rapid federate override is invalid in AUTO working mode 109 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 1 valid using MPG to control rapid federate override is valid in AUTO working mode d0__ Automatic MPG mode 0 modei1 use the mode 1 to control MPG rapid federate override 1 mode 2 use the mode 2 to control MPG rapid federate override Mode 1 and 2 are referred to OPERATION Chapter 4 5 AUTO Working Mode Safety setting 2 __ bit parameter P403 password level 3 d7 d6 d5 d4 Reserved d2 d1 do d7__tool change operation 0 permit I permit tool change in JOG and AUTO working mode 1 forbid II forbid tool change in JOG and AUTO working mode d6__ executing offset 0 modifying coordinates executing the offset is to modify the machine coordinates in JOG working mode 1 tool post movement executing the offset is to move the tool post in JOG working mode d5__ tool change in JOG working mode 0 press key to confirm execute the tool change in JOG working mode and the system prompts Confirm the tool change
335. lity when the spindle starts abnormally When the system stops rotating accidently in cutting feed the system stops the feed interrupts the program execution closes the spindle and alarms When the spindle works in the low speed less than 1 r min the system alarms at the moment the parameter should be set to 1 For the frequency spindle when the programming speed is less than SO the system does not check and alarm d5_ interlock between chuck and spindle 0 interlock when the chuck and the spindle are interlock the spindle stops but the chuck cannot be controlled the chuck releases but the spindle cannot be started 1 releasing interlock when the chuck is not interlock with the spindle starting the spindle is not influenced by the chuck state controlling the chuck is not influenced by the spindle state d4__ chuck respond signal consecutive check 0 donot alarm 1 alarm the bit means whether the system real time check the chuck state and alarms when the chuck releases The control bit is valid when the chuck has the respond signal d3__interlock between tailstock and spindle 0 interlock when the tailstock and the spindle are interlock the spindle stops but the tailstock cannot be controlled the tailstock releases but the spindle cannot be started 1 releasing interlock when the tailstock is not interlock with the spindle starting the spindle is not influenced by the tailstock state control
336. ll put the parameter table P600 P639 into variable rO01 r040 as the initial value in AUTO the variable r041 r099 is cleared 3 After executed M20 in the recycle rO01 r040 are evaluated the initial value by the P600 P639 in parameter table again r041 r099 and r100 r199 are not cleared 4 The initial value of r100 r199 is zero after power on later it won t be cleared by itself But it can change their value in JOG or AUTO working mode immediately Their initial value can be set by the following method using this variable in program when the variable initial value isn t evaluated before using the program won t have the confirmation state suggest the user carefully When the user is using these variable and needs the initial value the initial value of r100 r199 can be set in JOG working mode In the JOG or AUTO working mode and non if running the program press will call the macro variable display window and express all the needed modifying variable press ENTER key to choose the variable and input the data the macro variable in the program press n and will let the pointer pointing then press ENTER key to confirm again The variable value is forbidden to modify in the program running process 9 1 2 2 Pointer variable The variable number range of pointer variable is from 9000 to 9049 total 50 pieces The pointer variable is specially to point the address of a common variable To evaluate it means to evaluate all it poin
337. low alarm signal PRES is valid the durable pressure low alarm time is not more than the half of the set time by P332 the icon is a yellow hollow triangularA when the pressure low durable time exceeds the half the icon is a red hollow triangular A and the system alarms s Pressure low alarm at the moment the axis feed pauses the spindle stops rotating and the automatic cycle cannot start 2 After the system creates Pressure alarm the operator press RESET and system clears out the alarm and counts the time again to check the pressure low alarm signal 3 After the system is turned off the system counts the time to check the pressure low alarm signal 4 4 10 Searching run message in JOG working mode The detailed is referred to OPERATION AUTO working mode 4 5 8 4 4 11 Appendix 4 4 11 1 MDI input controlling M command table MDI Execution M commands in JOG working mode Sort Command Function Remark Spindle control M03 M04 M05 CW CCW stop Cooling ON Mos Mog Cooling ON OFF Function interlock Chuck M10 M11 M12 Clamping releasing canceling State keeping chuck output signal Lubricating M32 M33 Lubricating ON OFF Tailstock M78 M79 M80 Tailstock forward backward Function interlock cancel tailstock output signal state keeping Operator output 1 M21 M22 Function interlock state keeping Operator output 2 M23 M24 Function interlock state keeping Spi
338. ly wait for the execution ending of all executing MST command execute the special assignment 3 When the inspector want to execute transfer then close the monitor stop the current motion command immediately wait for the execution ending of all executing MST command execute the transfer Note In execution when meet the M20 M02 close all the monitor clear the task description Special assignment means to evaluate the program control register r5008 system special variable set 1 and set 2 Example r7010 0 r7016 1 292 when the system writes zero to r7010 then cancel the r7010 monitor open r7016 monitor when the system meets the condition stop the current motion command immediately execute the assignment or transfer Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming r7012 2 open r7012 monitor when the system meets the condition executes the valuation or transfer after executed current motion command Explanation 1 Once opened monitor in the same time of executing the common part program in fact there are two description statements are alternated ceaseless executed circularly in the system inner until they are closed 2 The when statement opens or closes the process monitor are allowed such as when r1 0 then r7010 1 3 It s allowed that one monitor opens another one but won t closed itself such as when r7001 0 then r7010 1 1 monitor when it meets the requirement opens 0 monito
339. m executes the command D are memorized to the system internal and are used in G76 3 The system must firstly execute one G76 command and then can execute one or more G76 commands otherwise it alarms because of lacking some necessary information 218 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions 4 P L R Qcan be omitted all When they are omitted the system runs according to P336 P337 P338 P339 setting values in executing G76 but D cannot be omitted Relative definitions as Fig 4 47 Thread cut depth reference point Z absolute coordinate of the thread cut depth reference point is the same that of E the difference between X absolute coordinate and X absolute coordinate of E is D total cut depth of the thread which is expressed with B B thread cut depth is 0 and is the reference point of the system counting each thread cut depth Thread cut depth the cut depth of each thread cut cycle It is the intersection between the inverse extension line of each thread cut path and the linear BE the difference value no sign between the intersection and X absolute coordinate of B the thread cut depth of each roughing is Vn x n is the current roughing cycle times and is the thread cut depth of the first roughing Thread cut amount the difference between the thread cut depth and the last vn vn 1 xI Cut amount cannot be less than the least cut amount Q Thread cut in point the actual start thread cut p
340. m has no the function specially for 0 360 automatically cycle change of the rotary axis but G52 can clear the integer and leave the remainder of the rotary axis coordinates in JOG AUTO working mode 225 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual In G52 when absolute values of tool nose coordinate of the current Y 2 the rotary angle the system clears the integer coordinate value and leaves the remainder The machine coordinate of Y also clears the corresponding coordinate value Command format G52 Y V _ rotary axis coordinate clearing Field definition Y absolute coordinate of rotary axis V relative movement of rotary axis Field range Y V 9999 999mm 9999 999mm sign of value is meanless Explanation 1 when the system parameter sets Y P405_d1 1 G52 is valid 2 G52 is only in the single block and cannot be in the block with other commands 3 absolute value of the number following Y V means the rotary angle per revolution When it is 0 it defaults to be 360 000 degree 4 there is no data field following G52 the system defaults to be G52 Y360 000 Relative parameter Parameter related to G52 P405_d1 Example G00 Y20 G01 Y136 6 G52 Y100 rotary axis coordinate clearing the integer 100 Y coordinate value is 36 6 4 20 Additional Axis Y Function 4 20 1 Additional axis Y start Whether the additional axis Y function is valid is determined by P405_d1 P405_d1 1 the additional axi
341. m uses the previous workpiece coordinate system and the program reference point in Jog working mode and Auto workpice mode till it is replaced 49 G26 X Z Y Reference Point Return return to the program reference point through the middle point rapidly traverse in GOO Command format G26 ZCW _ XU _ Z Xrapidly moves to the program reference point through the middle point G26 Z W _ Zrapidly moves to the program reference point through the middle point and other axes do not move G26 Y V _ Y rapidly moves to the program reference point through the middle point and other axes 182 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions do not move Field X Z Y absolute coordinates of middle point U W V relative movement from the starting point to middle point Field range X Z U W Y V 9999 999mm 9999 999mm Explanation 1 After the command is executed all specified coordinate axes move to the point defined by G50 they moves the program reference point defined in the Jog working mode without using G50 After the corresponding axes execute the reference point return the fronts of their machine coordinates have the blue icons as the prompts 2 The command and other commands cannot in the same block 3 The execution mode of the command is the same that of G00 Relative parameter is referred to G00 G50 4 ZIXIY can select single axis two axis or three axis simultaneously to execute the program reference point ret
342. mand is employed to simplify the programming The cycle body of part cycle is defined by part programming The coordinates of end point are determined after executing this cycle Command format G22 L_ Cycle body program Gees G80 sea Field G22 defines the starting of cycle body L defines the cycle times range 1 9999 G80 defines the end of cycle body Explanation Command execution process G22 defines the starting of cycle body and L defines the cycle times Execute the cycle body program Cycle times L subtracts 1 when G80 cycle body ends Execute the cycle body program again when L 0 when L 0 the cycle ends and the following program is executed Note 1 G22 and G80 must be used at the same time There is no G22 in the cycle body i e G22 cannot be embedded the single G22 is embedded into G22 G80 cycle body the program is valid but it cannot form the cycle body 2 The subprogram can be called in the loop body It can have M96 and M97 Regarding as the component which shape has already determined and needs to the roughing using G22 and G80 programming is very convenient and can improve the processing efficiency 3 For axis needing creating the cycle offset the program in the cycle body uses the relative programming There is the offset between the exit coordinates and inlet coordinates of the cycle body to get the same cycle program and machining contour and the different machining path every time
343. mat of tool offset data 1 USB interface transmitting offset data U disc root catalogue needs to create the file C928OFT the tool offset file name rule OFT file number 3 digit TXT ten characters The file number cannot be more than 254 otherwise the system does not list it when it reads U disc The tool offset file must be placed in C928OFT file 2 RS232 interface transmitting offset data The system transmits the software by RS232 the detailed is referred to OPERATION Chapter 5 RS232 and USB System Communication 3 Standard format of tool offset file on PC On PC use TXT LST text to edit the offset file but the file name and file content must be 126 Operation Chapter Four System Operation compiled according to the required standard format and then are sent to the system the concrete rules are as follows 1 2 3 4 On PC the offset file name should be named to TXT or LST suffix such for OFT088 TXT it is suggested that the user should use TXT suffix to operate the parameter file on PC The home of the file content must the offset mark CNC_GSK928TEA the item must exist TXT The 2 line is the annotation with before it list orderly the offset number Z offset value X offset value tool radius tool shape toolsetting record The offset content is listed from the 3 line The offset content must be meet the standard format requirements For example T01 00000
344. med state When the tool or chuck is in the unconfirmed state the system cannot start the machining program the system recovers the normal state when it executes successful operation or is switched on again 5 the green sign indicates the check is normal and the yellow sign indicates the check is abnormal 6 the S following the spindle gear indicates the real time checking spindle speed 7 the pressure check icon A it is green when it is normal it is yellow in half when it is low yellow in full when it is too low 8 G96 G97 and S indicate whether the system is in the constant surface speed cutting mode S is the set speed unit m min r min 37 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 9 G98 G99I is the feed rev or feed minute mode F is the set cutting speed 10 F indicates the actual speed of the coordinate axis 4 4 1 Coordinate axis movement Confirm the traverse speed and movement distance before executing the coordinate movement Press the emergency stop button immediately when there is the unexpected accidence 4 4 1 1 JOG movement A Press SEP the system is switched from STEP or MPG mode into JOG mode JOG TRAVERSE is to keep pressing the coordinate axis move key and the machine slider continuously moves release the key and the slider decelerates to stop The traverse speed is executed according to the rapid or feedrate Coordinate axis move key meanings are as follows X X nega
345. ming M customize command CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Chapter Three Operation Panel The turning CNC system system or CNC uses the aluminum alloy three D operation panel and its appearance is as follows A e Semne EREBEGOE n H f J gt Ste ey ets s Sloped St fels al Vpope ey jo Vandi Y or BBoeeoee DRY SINGLE STEP ALTER DELETE INPUT ENTER EOT JOG AUTO PARAMETER OFFSET DIAGNOSS X _ sh OP aD EX EAS forstie sse E sew fe co E io E Rovere f rovennne HI gi aial Ze foe fime COOUNG ices semei T cHANGE MPSS E MOE A Rovere fl Fovernoe 3 1 LCD Display LCD display CNC man machine dialogue interface Resolution 480x234 lattice TFT color LCD display 3 2 LED Status Indicator LED indicates that the current working state of the system There are 16 function keys with LED indicators the function executed by the corresponding key is valid when LED is ON and it is invalid when LED is OFF 3 3 Keyboard Based on GB T 3168 1993 Numerical Control of Machine Symbol the system sets the following symbol function keys which complete the corresponding functions when they are pressed as follows 3 3 1 Character keys Character keys include all required valid digit letter mathematic symbol and logic symbol In EDIT working mode each letter key can switch into 2 or 3 letter keys in other working mode each 6 Operation Chapter Three Sy
346. mmand when the next block is not the single X U instead but other G command the system cancels the cycle when the next block is not the single X U but M S T the system prompts the alarm message When G41 G42 are compiled with G90 in the same block the system executes the tool nose radius compensation in G90 the system automatically executes the compensation according to the motion path which is referred to PROGRAM Chapter 5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation In single block running press CYCLE START to execute one cycle step The single block stops at the end point of each step Besides G41 G42 the command is in the alone block without other commands Explanations of G94 G92 cycle contour are the same those of G90 Relationships between the data behind U W R and the tool path are as follows 1 U lt 0 W lt 0 R lt O 2 U lt 0 W lt 0 R gt O 7 7 Ai i i al i T B c aj a X X from A to B is negative so U lt 0 Z from B to C is negative so W lt 0 X from C to B is positive so R gt 0 3 U gt 0 W lt 0 R lt 0 4 U lt 0 W lt 0 R gt 0 t i g i F yor a Cy T T ge X X from A to B is positive so U gt 0 X from A to B is positive so U gt 0 Fig 4 19 Relationships between signs of U W R and tool path in G90 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Example i ol 1 1 lt qz Tl xy 1 Cutting feed Rapid traverse _ m gt Fig 4 20 G
347. mmand which is formed by statement and block the system will make the special translate and edit in translating and edition 10 2 1 Format and debugging of customization command storeroom the user customized M62 content Format P254 program format N0010 M98 P1000 No 254 program starts execution N0020 M98 P2000 Call M61 command N0030 M98 P3000 Call M62 command N0040 M02 N1000 M60 the start of M60 N1100 M99 the end of M60 N2000 M61 the start of M61 ds the user customized M61 content N2100 M99 the end of M61 N3000 M62 the start of M62 300 N3100 M99 the end of M62 The debugging steps of customization command storeroom is as following 1 Edit the user need customization command according to the above customization command storeroom program format 2 debug the program by single block mode in AUTO working mode 3 After debugged the program harden the program in EDIT mode press the key hp5 5 _ the machine manufacturer confirm if it s allowed to modify the hardened program and harden again it also is to set the position parameter P404_d0 1 4 The system prompts that after the P254 translating and harden succeed press ESC key Programming Chapter Ten Customized Command Programming Explanation After the No 254 translating and harden succeed it also can input the customization command in P254 in JOG working mode and run in order to check the correctness of P254 10 2 2 Explanation
348. mode or pulse control mode by the bit parameter M4 MSP standard signal is set by the parameter to execute the output the time sequence of the signal output is referred to OPERATION JOG Working Mode The output standard signal S01 S02 S03 S04 M41 M42 M43 M44 gear shifting execution process and time sequence of signal output are referred to OPERATION JOG Working Mode Output standard signal TL TL output to control the tool post U01 U02 are the standard undefined output 5 input output signal technical specification e Use photoelectric coupling technology max isolated voltage 2500V rms RMS e Voltage 24V e Max load instant current of output signal is 200mA Note 1 The input signal being valid zero arrival or machine worktable running across the limit switch 2 When the transistor of the electronic switch is connected the output voltage should be within 1V when the transistor is turned off the output voltage should be more than 23V 3 When the input function is valid the input signal is connected with OV when it is invalid the signal is not connect with OV 4 When the output function is valid the signal is connected with OV when it is invalid the signal is turned off T Itis suggested that the input output cable should use the shield cable and the shield layer is connected with the plug metal cover and the machine to improve the anti interference ability 3 3 Machine Zero Return Function and Conne
349. moulding which can improve the machining efficiency Fig 4 42b it can be used to machining the rod 4 17 G98 Feed per Minute feed m G99 Feed per Rev feed r Command format G98 Fux we x xxx feed per minute G99 Fxxx xx xxx feed per rev Field G98 Fxxxxx xxx Funit mm min F define the feedrate of its following interpolation command its unit mm min G99 Fxx xxxx x xxx Funit mm s F define the feedrate of its following interpolation command its unit mm r Field range 223 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual F 0 15000 000mm min 0 15000 000mm r Note 1 G98 G99 must be matched with F word otherwise the system alarms F leaves out information 2 G98 G99 is the modal command and it is valid before being changed The single F can be taken as the new feedrate 3 G98 is the initial state of system and the system automatically sets as G98 mm min 4 F 0 the system alarms and prompts the alarm message when it executes the machining programs 5 In G99 when the spindle speed is 0 the feed automatically pauses and the system displays Pause the spindle speed is 0 keeps the state till CYCLE START is pressed and the system recovers the execution 6 In G99 generally when the spindle is started just now the system should delay time properly to wait the spindle speed stably and executes the cutting otherwise the system has not checked the spindle speed dis
350. mple and convenient and has the high communication efficiency and stability 1 Requirements of PC Hardware general PC with RS232 serial communication cable three line Operation system Microsoft Windows 98 2000 2003 XP 2 GSK928_COM EXE communication software introduction The detailed is referred to communication software GSK928_COM EXE on PC Ready operations before communication 1 Connect the communication cable when PC and CNC are OFF insert DB9 socket into the front cover RS232 communication interface of the CNC and insert another DB9 socket into PC pin 9 serial interface COM1 or COM2 2 PC selects the port and baud rate for communication The communication baud rate is determined by the sender setting GSK928 COM EXE communication software port setting on PC Click Port number by left key to select the communication serial port after the communication software runs GSK928 COM EXE communication software baud setting on PC After the system runs the communication software the user can click the left key to select the Baud rate setting 38200 unit b s 3 The CNC sets P414_d7 P414_d6 communication baud the concrete parameter setting is referred to OPERATION 4 6 PARAMETER Working mode 132 Operation Chapter Five System Communication 5 1 2 Communication between CNC and CNC For being convenient to the user the system permits the mutual data transmission between two CNC systems they are both GSK9
351. n in the machining process when UI05 UIO6 are zero the system is required to output zero from UOO5 pin and output zero in other instance 107 N0010 r7000 r1005 or r1006 0 monitor tests the state of input signal r1005 r1006 N0020 when r7000 0 then r2005 0 When two signals are checked that r1005 is zero in the same time UO05 outputs zero N0030 r7010 1 Opening 0 monitor by mode 1 when it meets the requirement stops the motion immediately and turns P1000 N1000 GOO Z300 X200 Orientate to the initial point N1010 GOO X180 3 N1020 G01 Z90 F500 Cut outer circle N1030 G01 X0 Cut off N1050 G00 Z300 X200 Back to initial point N1060 M97 P1000 N1070 M02 9 3 4 Pulse monitoring r7100 In this system there are other four pulse monitor variable with number O 4 in turn They specially engage the pulse count of input signal Each pulse monitor variable has a monitoring register and a management register separately the corresponding number in turn are as following Pulse monitoring variable number 0 3 number in turn Pulse monitoring register number r7100 r7103 corresponding the monitor variable number in turn Pulse monitoring management register number r7110 r7113 corresponding the monitor variable number in turn What is called pulse monitor it belongs to process monitor too its description mode open close mode all rules are absolutely same to process monitor 295 CGSR I Hist
352. n the filed the system prompts FEEDRATE OVERRIDE O till the federate override is changed into others after is ENTER is pressed 10 Input F field in G98 and the system cannot input G99 Call field execution The system automatically saves the last 8 times executed command record in inputting field moving Press and the system pops up the window list record the operator can input according to the digit serial number to modify or directly execute the operation 4 4 1 7 Drive unit enabling control Set P416_d4 to 1 continuously press DELETE in JOG and AUTO mode and the drive unit is closed and the motor is in free state Press DELETE in the drive unit closing state and the drive unit is started and the motor is in working mode 4 4 1 8 Coordinate axis motion alarm prompt In executing the axis motion when the current motion axis meets the tool nose coordinate software limit points tool nose software limit point the axis cannot continuously move and moves reversely and the system displays the alarm prompt When the axis meets the machine coordinate software limit point it only moves reversely But the manual zero return function is not control by the software limit value range Note In JOG feed mode when the motion axis reaches the software limit point the system prompts the limit alarm message for the single axis motion in STEP feed mode and inputting field move mode 43 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC S
353. n of the thread run out sign is invalid Example G00 Z100 X20 G33 U6 2 W 40 K3 I5 P2 M30 End point Z60 X31 20 175 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 G33 end face straight thread P is negative sign decide the direction of the thread run out when is omitted there is no the thread run out Example G00 Z100 X20 G33 U20 7 K3 11 6 P 2 M30 End point Z101 60 X40 70 5 G33 end face taper thread P is negative W sign decide the direction of the thread run out sign is invalid Example G00 Z100 X20 G33 U20 7 W 8 3 K3 11 6 P 2 M30 End point 290 10 X40 70 Example 1 G33 axial straight thread as Fig 4 9 Z gt Starting point 2 End point Fig 4 9 sign decides the direction of the thread run out there is no the thread run out when is omitted Example GOO X100 2Z100 G33 W 40 K3 I5 P2 end point Z60 X105 M30 2 G33 axial taper thread as Fig 4 10 Starting point End point Fig 4 10 U sign decide the direction of the thread run out sign is invalid 176 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Example GOO Z100 X20 G33 U6 2 W 40 K3 I5 P2 end point Z60 X31 20 M30 3 G33 end face taper thread as Fig 4 11 Starting point P End point we Fig 4 11 P is negative W sign decide the direction of the thread run out sign is invalid Example GOO Z100 X20 G33 U20 7 W 8 3 K3 11 6 P 2 end poin
354. nal 34 PRES UI10 r1010 Pressure LOW check 35 SHL UI11 r1011 Hydraulic chuck pedal switch input 36 TPS Ul12 r1012 Hydraulic tailstock pedal switch input 37 24VGND 1024V earthing 38 24V 24V 39 M5 UO05 12005 Spindle stop 40 M4 UO06 12006 Spindle CCW 41 M3 UO07 12007 Spindle CW 42 MSP UO08 12008 Spindle brake signal 43 M9 UO09 12009 Cooling OFF 44 M8 UO10 12010 Cooling ON 312 Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection 3 2 2 X2 interface signal definition 1 TL 9 TL eee f 5 2 24V I 10 OV oo se ite 12 a 12 T4 5 PCX 13 PCZ 6 TP e e 14 T5 T6 aris 15 T7 X2 input output pin 15 D male In the table when the interface is not used to the standard signal it can be used to the general input output interface at the moment the interface parameter can be defined to the general input output interface Example when the system uses the line up tool post P318 is set to 0 pin 3 4 7 8 11 12 14 15 of X2 are taken as the general input interface and also can be used to other input interfaces Variable name Pin Standard General Variable Standard signal name function explanation name signal name signal name name 1 TL UO12 r2012 Tool post CW output signal 2 24V 3 T1 UI01 r1001 No 1 tool in position signal 4 T3 UI03 r1003 No 3 tool in position signal 5 PCX X zero input signal 6 TCP UI09 r1009 Tool post lock in position si
355. nal definitions as follows CNC signal Signal explanation T1 T8 Start inputting tool signal from T1 in 1 8 TCP Input tool post locking signal TFD P508 Output tool pot locking control signal tool post worktable pre graduation TL Output tool pot rotation CW control signal TL Output tool pot rotation CCW control signal Execution steps as follows 1 After the tool change is executed the system judges whether the target tool number is the current tool check whether the current tool signal is the tool signal of the current tool when the above two conditions meet the current tool is the target the system does not execute the tool change output control and modify the tool offset value otherwise executes the next step 2 Count and display the new tool nose coordinates according to the new tool offset number 3 The system outputs the tool post rotation CW CCW signal TL or TL checks the tool signal of 4 WY 5 WY 6 7 the target tool and close TL output after it checks the signal when the system has not checked the tool signal in the time set by P325 tool change shifting time upper it closes the TL output and alarms Check tool signal overtime After the system has checked the tool in position signal it outputs the tool pot locking control signal TFD to ensure the tool pot is in the locking control state and the tool rotation signal still keeps The following diff
356. nch thread end face thread variable pitch thread continuous thread thread high speed run out Kx Full editing part programs storing 255 machining programs No 253 program up to 4MB Big screen color LCD color configuration is selected by the parameter MSTE state real time display in machining Multi level operation password to conveniently manage devices Parameter backup function Parameter offset data communication function Re OR Re RR Bilateral communication between CNC and CNC between CNC and PC serial upgrade CNC software CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual v Bilateral communication between CNC and USB CNC is upgraded by USB v Installation dimension electric characteristics some interfaces are compatible to GSK928TEa Turning CNC System Operation Chapter Two __ Technical Specifications Chapter Two Technical Specifications 2 1 Technical specifications Motion control Controlled axes X Y Z simultaneous controlled axes interpolation axes 2 X Z Interpolation X Z linear arc interpolation Z Y or X Y linear interpolation Position command range 9999 999 mm 9999 999mm least command unit 0 001mm Command multiplex coefficient 1 99999 command division coefficient 1 99999 Rapid traverse speed up to 30000mm min rapid override F25 50 75 100 real time regulation Cutting federate up to 15000mm min federate override 0 150 16 grades real time regu
357. nd is executed the coordinate axis firstly offsets automatically one offset value to execute the roughing path i e the roughing path creates the whole offset to leave the allowance for the next finishing When is ignored the roughing offset value is WO UO After the roughing the finishing tool can be changed and the command is executed to the finishing 207 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Command format and definition G71 U W_ specify roughing offset value U X offset value U 9999 999mm 9999 999mm W Z offset value W 9999 999mm 9999 999mm Command format and definition G710 X U _ P_ Q_ F_ G710 finishing Or G710 the consecutive word is ignored which means it is consistent with the roughing command X U X coordinate value of starting point in finishing contour P Q line number of block from the initial to the final of finishing contour F finishing cutting speed Explanation 1 In the command the coordinate has no the actual motion the system automatically memorizes the offset value to the internal and is always valid it is defaulted to 0 when it is not specified 2 The offset value in G71 only effects on G71 3 U Win G71 must be specified simultaneously 4 X U P Qin G71 should be the same those of G71 when they are input they must be the whole And the field range must the same that 5 In G71 the command program
358. nd in position signal signal checking alarm function is Control the chuck champing again or open the chuck champing in position resolve the chuck error abnormal signal is invalidation E367 Release When the following chuck respond in position siqnal signal checking alarm function is Control the chuck champing again or p g open the chuck champing in position resolve the chuck error abnormal signal is invalidation E368 When the following tailstock respond Tail stock FW signal checking alarm function is Control the tailstock going forward again signal abnormal open the tailstock going forward or resolve the chuck error in position signal is invalidation E369 Tail stock BK When the following tailstock respond Control the tailstock going backward 273 CGSN I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number signal abnormal signal checking alarm function is again or resolve the chuck error open the tailstock going backward in position signal is invalidation E370 P319 and P320 The parameter setting P319 P320 in Set the parameter P408_d7 0 1 again or tool changing the position parameter are not equal P408 d7 0 let P319 equal to P320 E371 External start The outside starting key always isn t Check the outside startup signal and l l released when the system changes resolve the ence signal abnorma to JOG or AUTO working mode E3
359. nd radius compensation delete the tool nose radius compensation E251 G00 G01 sets radius The command beside G00 G01 is used to Modify source command compensation create the tool nose radius compensation E252 No replacing Used command as Mr11 Modify source command variable in M command E253 No orbit com The command which can produce the Check the block P Q in G71 command in Comparatively moving coordinate is G72 are correct or not G71 G72 cycle lacked in cycle E254 Forbidden M3 M4 The M3 M4 command is used in M47 Using the command after change com in M47 state the state E255 Spindle allows to The spindle don t stop Stop the spindle use M47 E256 Lack of module G When compound command is G command is added command consecutively cancelled the G command is not used E257 No using the type of In the special situation this kind of Modify source command variable variable is used in illegal E258 Beveling data is too So large chamfer data can t be carried in Reduce the chamfer data big this path E259 Editing is cut off Reset key is pressed in program E260 No Y axis traverse in When the Y axis has exchanged the Modify the program according to M48 spindle the moving command can t be the real situation used in Y axis E261 Drawing is cut off The reset key is stopped in the drawing demonstration E262 No chamfering to full Whole circle is used in chamfer Divide into two semi circles circle E263 Use pointer variable Th
360. nd M47 M48 M78 M79 M80 M96 M97 M98 M99 M91 M92 M93 M94 M21 M22 M23 M24 M commands are defined by operator M60 M74 realize the special function control Up to 16 tools T01oo T160o0 setting tool post type parameters to select too change course T command n Tool post type is set to 0 when the line up tool is used Speed switching value control S 4 gear directly controlling output range is SO1 S04 or 16 gear BCD output range is SOO S15 Spindle speed Speed analog voltage control S specifies the spindle speed per minute or the cutting surface speed control constant surface speed outputs 0 10V voltage to spindle converter supports 4 gear spindle speed M41 M44 with stepless shifting gear Support DAPO3 servo spindle speed position control mode switch realize spindle Z or X link function VO I O function diagnosis display function I O interface 23 input 18 output interfaces Statement Assignment statement complete assignment many arithmetic and logic operations programming Conditional statement complete conditional judgement and skip Display window Display 480x234 lattice color LCD LED or CCFL light in poor Display method Chinese or English window set by a parameter displaying machining path of workpiece in real time Program edit Program capacity max 255 programs No 0 252 254 with 800KB No 253 with 4MB FLASH Edit method edit in full screen relative absolute coordinate and compo
361. nd Max speed limit P304 P305 of constant surface speed control Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 The system alarms S value cannot be zero in E272 G50 in programming G50 SO The spindle speed is controlled actually by the constant surface speed control function when the system adopts the spindle controlled by the converter i e P410_d6 1 Do not execute the constant surface speed control in G96 if the system uses the gear shifting spindle The constant surface speed control is executed anytime in G00 G01 G02 G03 G05 G90 G94 G71 G72 the constant surface speed control is invalid in G32 G33 G92 when X coordinate is changed in G50 or executing the tool offset the spindle speed is valid in the next command Min max speed of constant surface speed control is set by P304 P305 The rotary axis in the constant surface speed must be set in Z X 0 of the workpiece coordinate G96 is modal command When G96 is valid the single S command is taken as the new surface speed data In DRY RUN mode the constant surface speed control is valid Whether the single S command renews the previous surface speed is controlled in Dry run by P401_d7 P401_d7 0 renew the previous surface speed P401_d7 1 do not renew the surface speed The constant surface speed control is invalid to get the constant spindle speed in thread cutting In G96 when the system defaults S field the s
362. nd face deep hole machining cycle as Fig 4 34 tool width 5 mm tool infeed 6 mm once tool retraction 2 mm offset 5 mm once F 100 mm min T sL an Fig 4 34 end face deep hole machining cycle example R 0 N0010 GO X0 240 position to the tool infeed point N0020 G74 X22 5 Z20 I6 K2 E5 F100 end face machining cycle The end point of programming is defined that X end point coordinate adds the width of tool N0030 M30 4 14 5 G75 Grooving cycle Command format G75 X U _ ZCW _ L K E F Grooving Cycle Field X U Z W end point coordinate of slot It is the cutoff cycle when Z coordinate is omitted 202 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions X tool infeed once K X tool retraction once E Z offset once F federate Field range X Z U W 9999 999mm 9999 999mm l K E 0 9999 999mm F 0 001mm min 15000mm min Explanation G75 grooving cycle process as Fig 4 35 X feeds the distance at F speed X rapidly retracts the distance K 3 X feeds the distance I K at F speed X feeds to B by repeating the steps 2 3 X rapidly retracts to A Z 0 Z rapidly offsets the distance E Z feeds to C and X to B by repeating the above mentioned 1 4 X rapidly returns to C and Z to A Q The tool still stops the starting point of the cycle after G75 is completed HL d t Cutting feed lp Broken line means to transit to the next step aoe 4 35 G75 grooving cycle
363. ndle automatically shifting to No 1 gear in conversion M42 Spindle automatically shifting to No 2 gear in conversion M43 Spindle automatically shifting to No 3 gear in conversion M44 Spindle automatically shifting to No 4 gear in conversion Explanation M41 M42 M43 M44 can be used when the machine uses the spindle with the conversion See OPERATION 4 4 JOG Working Mode 147 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 1 10 M78 M79 M80 Tailstock going forward and retreating backward cancelling tailstock output signal Command format M78 tailstock going forward M79 tailstock retreating backward M80 cancelling tailstock output signal only some special tailstock device can use M80 Explanation M78 M79 is set by the parameter to be valid or not to respond the check or not to be the pulse control output or level control output They are interlock with the spindle See OPERATION 4 4 JOG Working Mode 3 1 11 M96 Cycle execution call Command format M96 Pxrxxxe Qxexxx Lwxx x call cycle execution Field P inlet block number for calling program The leading zero of the block can be omitted Q call last block number The leading zero can be omitted L call times Omit L or call it one time when L is 1 L value is 1 9999 times Explanation Program group called by M96 can have M96 M98 M99 G22 G80 which can be embedded M96 M97 are embedded to avoid that the program re
364. ndle gear M41 M42 M43 M44 Spindle gear shifting gear 1 2 3 4 Function interlock Operator customized M60 M74 state keeping command Set the spindle working M47 M48 mode Note When the operator inputs M command and the first digit is 0 it can be omitted The command functions are the same those of AUTO Working mode The detailed is referred to PROGRAMMING 67 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 4 12 Spindle turn function Manual tapping function is to manually turn the spindle and the selected coordinate axis links along the spindle to realize the tapping and thread run out when the spindle stops In JOG working mode the spindle stops stably Press and the system enters the spindle turn function state and prompts Inputting tapping axis X Y Z After pressing X Y Z to select the motion axis and pressing ENTER to enter the next operation the system prompts Input tapping pitch mm input the pitch to press ENTER the system enters the manual tapping state At the moment the operator can manually control the spindle rotation and the tapping axis can rotate along the spindle rotation In manual tapping state press ESC to escape the manual tapping state the motion axis decelerates to stop when the tapping axis escapes in the motion state Functional description The function is valid in JOG working mode the tapping in manual tapping state moves along the spindle rotation The axis
365. near to linear CNC alarms when the chamfering linear is too long L1 iis the linear 1 and the length is L4 l2 is the linear 2 its length is 2 the length of the chamfering straight line which is formed by the interpolation connection is L3 CNC alarms when the chamfering straight line length Lis bigger than L3 and other end of L is not in the interpolation linear L2 in the extension line of interpolation line as follows N N L2 CNC alarms when other end of the chamfering straight line is not in the interpolation linear in the extension line of the interpolation linear as follows L _ a a C Linear arc to arc CNC alarms when the chamfering straight line length is too long CNC alarms when the chamfering straight line length is L other end of the caculated chamfering straight line is not in the interpolation line L L q SS NY se Ley A The circular chamfering function is invalid when two interpolation straight lines are in the n B CNC alarms when the chamfering circular radius is too big 2 Circular chamfering same block CNC alarms when the chamfering circular radius is D other end of the caculated chamfering arc is not in the interpolation line or arc as follows 169 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual SA UNS Linear to linear linear to arc arc to arc C The circular chamfering function is invalid when the linear and the circular or the circular and the linear are tangential
366. ng Edit and replace error Check the replacing content again E173 Replace failed no Edit and replace error Check the replacing content again content replace 265 CGSN I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E174 Processing prog Set the bit parameter P416_d0 to Set the bit parameter P416_d0 to locked no rewriting be 1 be 0 i Set the P333 to be non zero value eis ie Bet TG Ane Set the P333 to be 0 the system again num enno arrange compositor again function is invalid again 8 4 Emergency Alarm Program Alarm Table i e E200 E299 E600 E699 The type of alarm in program is divided to Alarm in PROGRAM COMMAND Alarm in PROGRAM CHECK two kinds 8 4 1 Alarm in program command i e E200 299 Alarm in program command means there is wrong command in working program and then alarm it can be eliminated by inputting the correct command and it has little relation to the parameter Alarm List in programming command 266 Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E201 Illegal command The system undefined command Input again according system appears in block command list E202 Command repeat The same command is input repeatedly in Delete the repeated command the program E203 Illegal information The system unidentified command Delete the wrong command ap
367. ng point of machining change No 3 tool to groove approach the workpiece groove 030 retract the tool position to the starting point of chamfer chamfer 1x45 retract the tool rapidly traverse approach the workpiece groove 010 X rapidly retracts the tool return to the starting point of machining change No 4 tool to cut the thread and set to the spindle low speed approach the workpiece execute the thread machining cycle feed 0 8 and execute the 2 tool machining feed 0 5 and execute the 3 tool machining X rapidly retracts the tool return to the starting point of machining change No 1 tool Close the spindle cooling OFF end of program Example 5 Fig 7 6 Rod 50x100 Machining with 3 tools No 1 outer turning tool No 2 pointed tool No 3 grooving tool with 3mm width 259 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual F ot Ich i L i 1 P pH Us 3 1 i iy T x Blank appearance E Fig 7 6 machining example N0010 GOO X100 Z50 set a workpiece coordinate system N0020 M3 S600 Spindle rotates CW with 600 rev min NO030 T11 change No 1 tool and execute its offset N0040 M 8 cooling ON N0050 GOO X50 Z3 approach the workpiece NO060 G71 X0 I3 K2 P0070 Q0100 F50 execute the outer compound cycle N0070 G01 ZO approach the workpiece N0080 X5 turn the end face NO090 G02 X45 Z 20 R20 turn the arc R20 N0100 G01 Z 65 turn the outer
368. nit ms Output voltage in spindle gear shifting mV __ miscellaneous parameter P314 Output voltage in the spindle gear shifting Unit mV Brake delaying time in spindle stop ms __ miscellaneous parameter P315 The parameter defines the delay time from sending the spindle stop signal to the spindle brake signal unit ms Output time in spindle brake ms __ miscellaneous parameter P316 The parameter means the output time of brake signal and the time is set from the spindle motor brake starting to its exact stop Max speed limit of spindle __ miscellaneous parameter P317 The parameter limits max speed of the spindle Pulse time controlled by the spindle ms __ miscellaneous parameter P326 The parameter defines the durable time of the pulse signal when the system executing the spindle M03 M04 M05 and cooling M08 MO9 output are the pulse control mode M respond check time ms __ miscellaneous parameter P329 The parameter defines the upper limit of M respond check time the system alarms when it has not checked the M respond signal in the time unit ms For example execute M10 in JOG working mode to wait P329 time and the system alarms Alarm for chuck clamping responding check overtime when it has not checked the chuck clamping responding signal P409_d5 1 4 6 4 6 Parameters related to tool post __ P318 P325 P408 Tool post setting __ bit parameter bit parameter P408 password level password level 2
369. no 20 part program in the part program catalog creating it is as follows Press keys to input INPUT 1 0 ENTER The new program 001 has been created and the system enters 001 program edit window 4 3 2 2 Delete a part program Delete a part program is as follows Press INPUT key in Edit working mode Input the required program number to delete by the key board 8 Press DELETE key the system prompts Press ENTER to delete the part program which program number is input Press ESC not to execute the deletion operation and return to EDIT working mode Note 1 The system prompts E100 does not exist when there is no the program which is to be deleted 2 When the program which is to delete exists when it is not the current program the system deletes the program from the program list when it is the current program the system deletes the program from the program list and searches the program which program number is the smallest to be the current program when there is no programs the system creates one program number 000 as the current program Example Example delete 003 operation is as follows Input by the press key INPUT 3 DELETE ENTER 4 3 2 3 Deleting all part programs Clear the program area in the program catalog search window and all programs in the system are deleted as follows Press INPUT in the part program catalog search state 0 0 Input a by the key board ae Press D
370. ns the effective outside signal express the pin contacted with OV the high level means ineffective The input interface variable is a set of read variable can t be evaluated input otherwise alarm Through the program read the value of input interface signal r1001 r1032 can know the pin corresponding signal level then it can be a judgement condition for the system to make the program skip It doesn t mean all the input signal pin can be read when the parameter P412_d1 equals to zero it only can make the statement program to pin with UI in the diagnosis interface when it makes program to the defined input signal pin it alarms For example r8 r1002 read Ul02 pin level r8 0 or 1 when r1009 0 then P1600 when the UIO9 pin is read to be low level then go to P1600 r1007 r8 system alarm illegal valuation can t evaluate this variable Output interface variable read write The system has 32 output interface variable each variable is correspond to a output signal pin the variable number 11001 r1032 is correspond to the signal pin number U1001 U1032 in ranking The assignment on output interface variable can change the corresponding pin output state When the system outputs 0 the outside can form the conductive loop When the system output 1 in the high resistance the outside can t form the conductive loop Read the output interface variable the current assignment state of the outp
371. nt surface cutting speed Surface speed spindle speed X t1 1000 X unit mm spindle speed unit r min When X is more than some value and the calculated spindle speed is more than P305 value the spindle speed keeps P305 speed to execute the machining Thread smooth speed borderline _ miscellaneous parameter P306 The system has two method in machining thread high speed and low speed machining P306 is the borderline of the two machining speed unit r min generally P306 should be more than 100 P306 300 before the system executes the thread machining it should judge according to the current actual checked spindle speed When the actual speed is more than 300 the system uses the high speed machining otherwise it uses the low speed machining mode In high speed machining the system has the strongest following to the spindle speed wave but the stability of the motor running reduces when the spindle speed wave is strong there is the wave on the machining surface and the stepper motor causes the step out In low speed machining the system has the poorer following to the spindle speed wave but the stability of the motor running increases when the spindle speed wave is strong the wave on the machining surface is worse and the stepper motor does not cause easily the step out thread spindle wave alarm __ miscellaneous parameter P307 When the spindle speed wave exceeds P307 in thread cutting the system alarms unit r min The param
372. nvalid H_d1 is prior to H_dO Note When the system executes the thread run out according to K and proportion and I K ratio is big the thread run out speed raises rapidly which can cause the stepper motor step out and the alarm of the servo motor Field range X Z U W R 9999 999mm 9999 999mm I 9999 999mm 9999 999mm K 0 9999 998mm P 0 001mm 500 000mm the front of the range can have the negative sign The positive means the axial thread the negative means the end face thread E 0 060 25400 000 tooth inch the front of the range can have the negative sign The positive means the axial thread the negative means the end face thread L 1 99 H 00000000 11111111 Command execution process The execution process of G92 thread cycle is as Fig taking example of axial thread cutting Check the spindle speed count the reference speed of thread machining according to the 192 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions speed and the pitch The system alarms when the value exceeds P113 value max cutting feed speed Before it the user must ensure the spindle speed must be stable otherwise it can cause to be the disorder thread tooth Xrapidly moves from A to B X U R position starting point B of thread 3 X Z execute the thread cutting to C including thread run out the process is the same that of G33 X rapidly returns to D Z rapidly returns to A starting point Multi t
373. o the toolsetting point so it imagines one tool nose which is to move to the toolsetting point The position relationship between the tool nose radius and imaginary tool nose corresponds to the one between the tool nose radius center and the toolsetting point In the actual toolsetting there are 9 kinds of position relationship between the tool nose center and imaginary tool nose and the system uses the imaginary tool nose number 0 8 The tool nose number 0 means the tool nose center is consistent with the imaginary tool nose 234 Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation G41 G42 The following table is the tool nose number 0 8 conditions explaining the position relationship between the tool nose center and imaginary tool nose the arrowhead end point is the imaginary tool nose Explanation 1 Before the ball toolsetting the imaginary tool nose number and the tool nose radius value of each tool must be preset in the tool compensation table In the tool compensation table R is the tool nose radius value and T is the imaginary tool nose number 2 In the ball toolsetting the user should move the imaginary tool nose point to the toolsetting point and then input the actual coordinates of K I toolsetting In executing the program the system automatically executes the tool nose radius compensation according to the preset imaginary tool nose number and the tool nose radius value in advance 3 When the system execut
374. oaching method The parameter equation of ellipse is X 50 sin a Z 100 cos a because the X is diameter program so X 100 sin a 103 N0010 GOO Z0 XO N0020 G00 Z200 X200 N0022 G00 Z190 X110 confirm the start point of G01 path N0030 r1 0000 the initial value of r1 is 0 N0040 r12 100000 sin r1 100000 the angle sine value multiplies 100000 N0050 r13 100000 cos r1 100000 the angle cosine value multiplies 100000 NO060 r12 r12 110000 finger out the relative difference of ellipse start point path and G01 start point N0070 r13 r13 190000 N1000 r2 100000 sin r1 The angel sine value multiply 100000 giving to r2 N1010 r3 100000 cos r1 The angel cosine value multiply 100000 giving to r3 N1020 r2 r2 r12 N1030 r3 r3 113 N1040 G1 Xr2 Zr3 F500 Moving along the ellipse path N1050 when r1 360000 then P1080 When the angel equals to 360 then escape N1060 r1 r1 1000 The value of r1 pluses 1000 angel pluses 1 N1070 M97 P1000 cycle N1080 M02 9 3 Process Monitoring and Execution The common part program is executed according to the designed path one by one in advance it can t make the prompt response for the real time happened matter in the command executive midway In the system there are ten inspector which are numbered according to O to 9 turn called O inspector 1 inspector 9 inspector Their work is called process monitor in the same time of 290 Programming Chapter Nine Statement Prog
375. ocket GSK928TEa Z DA98 drive unit Signal interface Z pulse aa ied Pi fae sa a son re pf ae pe an E Ht feo Metal shell COM 2 Zero pem RSTP 4 DG X2 tool post socket z Ia Metal shell Note T When the stepper motor is used it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405 d 7 d 0 X motion parameter P100 P116 and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation Parameter Working Mode The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system otherwise cause that the motor steps out owing to the external interference CNC system the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing to avoid the motor stepping out because of the external interference 335 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 5 7 Connection layout between CNC and Panasonic drive unit Connection layout between CNC and Panasonic MINAS V serial drive unit X connection layout Less than 15m shield cable GSK928TEa MINAS V i ingle phase 3 Xput PULS1 3 e 11 4 Xu PULSZ 4 Encode feedback signal AC220V 5 Xdirt SIGNI 5 a I 13 Xdir SIGN2 6 PE 7 Xen SRV ON 99 V Motor power supply o L 24V
376. ode In DRY working mode whether M S T is valid is set by the parameter coordinates of each axis automatically recover the previous before the Dry working mode Relative parameters in DRY Run working mode P401_d7 70 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 0 When the system executes the miscellaneous command it must output the signal check the signal which is the same that of the normal machining 1 The system does not output the signal and check the signal when the system executes the miscellaneous command P401_d6 0 The execution speed of feed command is set by the program which is the same that of the normal machining 1 The execution speed of feed command is not set by the program max speed P113 of cutting feed displays the program path Notes 1 The dry run key is valid when the program is executed in the initial state In the course of program execution the key is invalid and cannot be switched when the program does not end and the system has not escaped the execution state 2 P401_d7 0 in DRY RUN working mode all miscellaneous command M S T are executed the system recovers to the previous state when it escapes from the dry run state 3 P401_d7 1 in DRY RUN working mode the system does not output and check the signal when it executes the miscellaneous function when the system executes T function the tool offset number is executed when the previous is T11 it becomes T13 after T33 is executed the
377. of XXX in the first line sent by PC The program number sent by the system USB is CNCxxx TXT xxx digit in C928PRO file in the U disc root catalog Note in USB communication the character string XXX digit of XXX in the first line should be the same that of xxx digit of CNCxxx TXT When they are different the xxx digit of CNCxxx TXT is taken as the standard 3 The blocks start from the second block The block must meet its format Each block cannot exceed 250 characters ends with the ENTER key otherwise the system prompts the error Program line too long in receiving programs 4 The annotation area has Chinese annotation in the block 5 Max TXT file length cannot exceed the program stored space limit of the system Part program communication standard format in PC TXT file format Explanation NO000 G50 X100 Z100 N0010 G00 X20 Z90 G01 X10 Z80 N0250 G02 X30 Z20 R5 arc cutting setting coordinate system rapidly positioning 099 1 linearly cutting 2 There must be program name 099 when the system receives programs the first line must the 3 digit 0 254 N are the blocks with the line number and others are the blocks without the line numbers N0260 T22 tool change 3 The hone of each line must be blank 4 there is a space between the line number No262 M09 d th d for th ith th N0270 G04 D8 an e command for the program wi e line number
378. of customized command storage In the JOG working mode input the customization command directly when it s need to execute the hardened customization command in P254 In editing program the hardened customization command in system P254 can be used the operation is simple and convenient Using customization command format 001 execute the customization command beside the No 254 program N0010 M61 execute M61 command N0020 G04 D3 N0030 M62 execute M62 command N0040 G04 D3 N0050 M02 explanation 1 The M60 M74 can be used in JOG working mode or other program directly only the No 254 program has hardened to FLASH otherwise the system alarm when the corresponding customization command isn t written in No 254 program but it is used in JOG working mode or other program the system alarm too 2 The operation of how to harden the No 254 program to FLASH please refer the No 254 program explanation with the detail in OPERATION 4 3 EDIT working mode in this explanation notebook 3 After the No 254 program is modified it must be hardened to FLASH again otherwise the called M60 M74 command in JOG working mode or other program aren t the latest customization command after modified 4 ln AUTO working mode when the M60 M74 used variable are used in main machining process must pay attention to the impaction of variable cross change to the program 5 M60 M74 command must be used separately such as when
379. of the programming path direction at the moment the tool center is in the left of the programmed path 2 In G42 the tool center cuts one tool nose radius in the right of the programming path direction at the moment the tool center is in the right of the programmed path 231 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Front tool post coordinate Rear tool post coordinate system system 0 Z A _ X TX 0 7 x GI Y 442 w aaa s3 p G42 7 Starting point of 2 G41 Starting point of A compensation A compensation A P Starting point G42 A Starting point G41 r P of compensation a 4 a ea of compensation a T pi G41 a G42 S ai Fig 5 3 compensation direction 5 1 4 Programming rules When the initial state CNC is in the tool nose radius compensation cancel mode the system creates the tool nose radius compensation offset mode in G41 or G42 In the compensation start the system prereads 2 blocks and the next block is saved to the tool nose radius compensation buffer register in executing it In single block running in AUTO working mode the system reads two blocks and stops after executing the end point of the first block In continuous execution in AUTO working mode the system prereads two block i e the system is in the block and its following two blocks which are being executed The programming must follow as follows Programming rules 1 Before creating t
380. of tool post encoder The binary absolute value and strobe signal control together the tool selection number output They can control up to 12 tool selections Tool post overheat check TGR __ interface parameter P530 The parameter checks the temperature control switch signal of tool post When the temperature is more than 120 C the temperature control switch is turned off 4 6 4 7 Parameters related to chuck tailstock __ P327 P328 P409 Chuck control pulse time ms __ miscellaneous parameter P327 When the chuck is pulse control mode the parameter defines the durable time of the chuck execution command M10 M11 outputting pulse signal unit ms Tailstock control pulse time ms __ miscellaneous parameter P328 When the tailstock is the pulse control mode the parameter defines the durable time of tailstock execution command outputting pulse signal unit ms Chuck tailstock __ bit parameter bit parameter P409 password level password level 1 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 d7__chuck control function 0 valid the system has the hydraulic chuck control function 1 invalid the chuck control function is invalid forbids M10 M11 d6__ chuck clamping mode 0 outer the hydraulic chuck is outer mode 1 inner the hydraulic chuck is inner mode Executing M10 M11 is referred to OPERATION JOG Working Mode 104 Operation Chapter Four System Operation d5__ chuck respond check 0 dono
381. og is void No content in program Check and modify the program E113 RS232 fail to receive RS232 failure in communication Check the command control unit prog receiving serial system tool or hardware interface E120 Not support USB The system can t identify this USB Use the USD equipment which can device be identified by the system E121 USB is removed The system is identifying the USB wrong operation forbidden these equipment the equipment is operation moved suddenly E122 Not insert USB Don t insert the USB equipment Insert the USB device E123 Stop opening USB Manual operation press Manual operation stop to open the emergency or reset key USB device E124 Fail to save prog in The USB is failed in saving USB program Check the USB device E126 Surplus space in USB The U disc doesn t have enough Change the bigger U disc or tidy U is not enough rest room disc to release more room E127 Contents fail The U disc creates specified Check the USB device catalogue failure 264 Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E128 Fail to set specified The program in specified Check the USB device or the content catalogue can t be opened program is destroyed and must to be created over again E129 Fail to set prog The U disc is failed in creating Check the
382. oid the error set P200 P201 P202 which make CNC system automatically compensate the error when the machine changes its moving direction Measurement method of mechanically driven backlash taking example of Z Select the proper federate in JOG working mode 2 Install the dial indicator on the proper position of the machine move the tool post to the probe of the dial indicator and set its pointer to zero 3 Select STEP working mode with the step size 1 0 mm 4 Press Z feed key to move the tool post to the dial indicator and make it point to zero when rotating one circle 5 Press Z feed key to move reversely and the pointer of dial indicator turns around The pointer cannot return to zero because of the backlash At the moment D value between the pointed position of pointer and zero is Z backlash value Notes 1 Repeat the above mentioned operations many times to gain the exact measurement value 2 The measurement method of X backlash is the same that of Z but the measured value must multiply 2 to convert to the diameter value 3 Z X Y backlash compensation speed is to compensate with the speed set by P411_d1 Precision compensation __bit parameter P411 password level 2 d7 d6 d5 d4 Reserved Reserved d 1 Reserved d7__ pitch error compensation function 0 invalid II pitch error compensation function is invalid 1 valid II pitch error compensation function is invalid
383. oint in each thread roughing and finishing is expressed with Bn n is the current roughing cycle times B1 is the first thread roughing cut in point Bf is the last thread roughing cut in point Be is the thread finishing cut in point The replacement formula of Bn relative to X Z of B is as follows p _ IZ axis replacement t i 2 IX axis replacement P thread angle Command execution process Rapidly traverse to B from the starting point the first thread cut depth is I P 0 only X moves P 0 X and Z move simultaneously and their movement directions are the same that of A gt C The thread in a parallel with EC cuts to the insect of C D when there is the thread run out there is the thread run out process 3 X rapidly traverses to D Z rapidly traverses to A and the single roughing cycle is completed Rapidly traverse again to Bn nis the current roughing cycle times cut depth Cn xl the bigger value in the last cut depth Q when the cut depth is less than D R the system executes 2 when the cut depth is more than or equal to D R the tool infeed is executed in the cut depth D R to By and the system executes the last thread roughing The thread in a parallel with EC cuts to the insect of C D when there is the thread run out there is the thread run out process X rapidly moves to D Z rapidly moves to A the thread roughing cycle is completed to start the thread finis
384. ol change and execute its tool compensation 255 CGSN I HSZ N0040 N0050 N0060 N0070 N0080 N0090 N0100 N0110 N0120 N0130 N0140 N0150 N0160 N0170 N0180 N0190 N0200 N0220 N0230 N0240 N0250 N0260 N0270 N0280 N0290 N0300 N0310 N0320 N0330 G00 Z0 X35 G01 X0 F60 GOO W2 X24 G01 Z 78 G00 X26 ZO X24 G90 X21 X18 X15 9 G01 X14 X16 W 1 G00 X50 T44 S2 G00 X19 G92 X15 X14 2 X13 8 X13 6 G00 T33 G00 G01 G26 M9 M5 M2 X60 X26 F60 Z 50 F100 ZO Z50 Z2 Z 50 P1 5 K2 Z50 2 78 X0 F50 GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual tool approaches the workpiece cut the end face with 60mm min tool leaves the end face of workpiece tool approaches the workpiece turn outer 24 and reserve the cut width tool leaves the workpiece surface tool approaches the workpiece turn outer 16mm with cylindrical surface cycle command tool infeed 3mm and cycle again tool infeed 2 1mm and cycle again outer is less than 0 4mm tool positions to the starting point of chamfer cut a chamfer retract the tool to safety position change No 4 thread tool set the spindle to high speed the speed is not more than 800n min position to the thread starting point of the first tool machine the thread length of run out of thread 2mm tool infeed 0 8mm to the 2 thread machining tool infeed 0 4mm to the 3 thread machining tool infeed 0 2mm to the 4 thread machining retract
385. ol change reset emergency stop the system confirms the tool is in the unconfirmed position and prompts the tool number flashing in red at the moment the operator cannot start the machining program the system can recover the normal state when it executes one successful tool change operation and it is turned on again 8 WY When the system executes the tool change and the target tool number is the current one the system does not execute the tool change output operation but modifies the offset except for the followings e After the tool change is failure the tool displaying the red flash means that the displayed 56 Operation Chapter Four System Operation tool number is not consistent with the actual tool when the target tool number in next executing the tool change is the current one the system executes one tool change e After the system is turned on and executes the first tool change and when the target tool number is the current one displayed by the system the system executes once tool change Execution process and signal output time sequence of T command The system has many tool change methods and the detail is referred to CONNECTION 3 4 Tool Change Control Function and Connection 4 4 6 Manual toolsetting operation Machining one workpiece needs several different tools Because of the tool installation and tool shape deviation its tool nose position is not complete consistent and has some offset when each tool ro
386. ol post CCW rotation time 12011 0 Close the tool post CCW rotation r4010 100 Tool post CCW rotation in position delayed time when r4010 lt 5 then P330 else P324 Tool post CCW in position delayed time when r1002 0 then P340 else P700 Judge the in position signal M99 Change tool end M63 Start to call M63 start the tool changing T33 Target tool number when r1003 0 then P490 else P380 The current tool is consistent to target tool or not r2011 1 Close the tool post CCW rotation r2012 0 Tool post CW rotation r4010 r39 Set the tool changing time to 30s when r4010 lt 5 then P650 else P420 Judge the tool change time is too long or not when r1003 0 then P430 else P410 Judge the tool position signal r2012 1 Close the CW rotation r4011 50 Set to delay 50ms time when r4011 lt 2 then P440 else P434 Delay 50ms time r2011 0 Tool post CCW rotation r4011 r40 Set the tool post CCW rotation time when r4011 lt 5 then P470 else P460 Check the tool post CCW rotation time r2011 1 Close the tool post CCW rotation r4010 100 Tool post CCW in position delayed time when r4010 lt 5 then P480 else P474 Tool post CCW in position delayed time when r1003 0 then P490 else P700 Judge the in position signal M99 Tool change end M64 Start to call M64 and execute the tool change T44 Target tool number when r1004 0 then P650 else P530 The current tool i
387. on TO T9 imaginary tool nose direction and the motion path deviates the tool nose radius vector and the intersection should be counted in the cycle Programmed path f I st D o Tool center path Fig 5 20a Offset of tool nose radius compensation in G90 Too center path Programmed path Fig 5 20b Offset of tool nose radius compensation in G94 2 Compensation methods of G71 G72 executing the tool nose radius compensation G73 is referred to G71 G72 A Gradually machine the blank and reserve the tool nose radius execute the tool nose radius compensation in the finishing contour B The offset directions in G41 G42 are the same as the following figures C The system executes the compensation based on the imaginary tool nose direction TO T9 imaginary tool nose direction and the motion path deviates the tool nose radius vector and the intersection should be counted in the cycle B C Programmed path We m Da Tool ko a Et A A aS a b Es A AL 1 1 I D E Programmed path 4 i i i i i f I I A Tool center path i i i I f 1 AU l E A 7 d a c Fig 5 21b offset of tool nose radius compensation in G72 243 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Chapter Six Pitch Error Compensation The memory pitch error compensation function is used to compensating the affect on the machine transmission precision caused by the pitch error The system compensates the c
388. on modal G G51 G51 Workpice coordinate system recovery Non modal G G52 652 Y V Rotary axis coordinate clearing Rianemadale integer G31 G01 X U Z W YCV F H single 2 or 3 axis Skip function Non modal G G74 G74 X U ZW K R E F End face drilling cycle G75 G75 X U ZW IKEF Outer inner grooving cycle G90 G90 XU ZW RF Outer inner cylinder face cycle 5 Non modal G G92 G92 X U Z W P E I KRLH Thread cutting cycle G94 G94 X U ZW RF Outer inner taper cycle G22 G22 L Local cycle start Non modal G G80 G80 Local cycle end 4 Non modal G G04 G04 D Dwell 7 G71 U W Outer roughing finishing cycle G71 G71 X U I K F PQ G710 XU PQ F 6 Non modal G G72 U W End face roughing finishing cycle G72 G72 Z W K F P Q G720 Z W PQ FEF 228 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions G73 U W Closed cutting cycle command group G73 G73 X U ZW IKFPQL G730 X U Z WwW PQF G76 G76 D I Q PLR Multi thread cutting cycle command G76 X U Z W P E I K R L H group G96 G96 S Constant surface speed ON Modal G G97 G9 S Constant surface speed OFF j Initial G G98 G98 F Feed per minute 4 Initial G G99 G99 F Feed per rev Modal G Note the system is in G00 G40 G97 G98 when it is switched on and reset 4 22 Appendix G and its Relative Parameter Ex
389. on operation method prompt key Left top display tool nose coordinates and machine coordinates or tool nose path graph or workpiece contour graph Left bottom display machining block pointer points to the current block Right middle display the current state of machine including spindle cooling lubricating tool post chuck tailstock speed cutting speed and so on Pop up window display alarm message of execution program Upper top AUTO Continuous 001 Workpiece count 1 Machining time 00 00 O on MB Pop u A 1290 j ESP alarm gee 0289 850 Mil M78 Z 0104 060 ZM 0104 060 UU 100 Right middle ym 0000 000 MW 100 Y 0000 000 M41 50500 G97 S0200 N0000 GOO Z300 X100 G98 F30 N0010 G01 W 50 000 U20 000 F100 F00100 Fig 4 7 AUTO working mode 69 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 5 1 System working mode in AUTO working mode In AUTO working mode the system is in several mode according to execute workpiece programs when the system is in different states it permits the functions are different there are several states as follows Initial state it is the execution pointer of the program points to the first line but the system has not executed the system is just now switched from other mode to AUTO Working mode to enter the initial state or returns the initial state after the program is executed or the system alarms Run state the system is executing the block and t
390. ond to P336 L times in finishing range 0 99 default correspond to P337 R cutting amount in finishing range 0 99 999 mm default correspond to P338 Command relative definitions D itis the thread tooth height and the thread total cut depth the system alarms when D is not input l itis the first thread cutting depth the system alarms when is not input Q itis the least cutting amount in thread roughing n is the cycle times in the current roughing when Ix vn the last cut depth lt Q Q is taken as the cutting amount of this roughing i e the thread cut depth is the last cut depth Q setting Q is to avoid the small roughing cutting amount and too many roughing times because of thread cutting amount gradually decreasing P it is the angle between neighboring two threads The actual thread angle is determined by the tool angle and so P value should be consistent with the tool angle L Thread finishing times R cutting amount in thread finishing is equal to the difference between the thread finishing cut in point Be and X absolute coordinate of the last thread roughing cut in point B In the thread finishing the first cutting amount is R and the following finishing amount is 0 Command explanation 1 When the system executes the command it loads P L R Q values to their corresponding parameter because the several parameters must be used when the system executes the command 2 When the syste
391. onitor evaluates the r6xxx series monitor variable E410 r711x Invalid Write the undefined value to r711x Modify program put right data series variable E411 r4002 can t be Written operation is made to the Modify program put right read only machining time variable written r4002 E412 The variable The system nonsupported operator Modify program put right doesn t support this is used in the assignment kind of operation statement E413 The unknown The system nonsupported Modify program put right process monitor judgment condition is used in the description statement of process monitor description E414 Unknown pointer The pointer variable points to the Modify program put right variable non common variable or the exceeded range pointer variable is used E415 The variable r4004 Making written operation to reading Modify program put right can t be written variable r4004 E416 The variable r4012 Making written operation to reading Modify program put right can t be written variable r4012 275 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Chapter Nine Statement Programming This system has provided the program method similar to the advance language it can realize the variable assignment arithmetic operation logic judgement and conditional transfer Using the statement and variable program can come true the function which can t be made by the common G and M comman
392. ontrollable axis Z X Y The chapter describes the pitch error measure pitch information description method pitch error compensation method and notes 6 1 Leading Screw Error Curve Measuring the pitch error should be executed after the machine geometrical precision machine horizontal parallel and vertical conditions are regulated to reduce the affect on the positioning precision caused by the geometrical precision Measure the pitch error of the leading screw should use the precise instrument such as laser interferometer take the terminal in the leading screw direction as the measure starting point and measure the leading screw error curve in the positive direction of the axis draft the revised curve according to the error curve select the proper compensation interval to input the compensation value of each point to the pitch compensation parameter table The system revises the compensation according the pitch compensation parameter table in executing the axis motion offset value um pitch compensation position mm Fig 6 4 leading screw error curve As the above figure A is taken as the measure starting point and the measured length of leading screw is 1000 mm When the deviation value is positive the actual measured distance of the leading screw moving to the current point from the measured starting point is more than the theory when the deviation value is negative the actual measured distance of the leading screw m
393. ool and close TL output after it checks the signal when the system has not checked the tool signal in the time set by P325 tool change shifting time upper it closes the TLt output and alarms Check tool signal overtime 3 The system output tool post CCW signal TL after the time set by the delay data parameter P321 t1 4 The followings are executed based on whether P408_d6 has the locking signal TCP eDelay P324 tool post CCW locking time setting time when the locking signal TCP P408_d6 0 is not checked the next step is executed after the time ends eThe system checks TCP in the time set by P324 when the system checks the locking signal TCP P408_d6 1 the system closes TL output and alarms Check locking signal overtime when it has not received TCP the system delays the time set by P322 t2 to execute the next step 5 Close the tool post CCW signal TL and the tool change ends 321 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual T T Tis Ts Ti T8 ti ti TL 1L TCP TCP F322 check TCP locking signal do not check TCP locking signal 3 4 3 4 Tool change mode 3 P318 3 tool post type 3 too change mode 3 is applied to Hengyang CLT 63 CLT300 turning machine tool tower series in Taiwan the system nearby executes the tool change CW CCW In tool change mode 3 max tool quantity P319 and tool signal covering the circuit P320 is set by the corresponding tool post type Used signal de
394. orking modes Note There is hp help at top right on some keys and there are 7 help keys hp0 hp6 hp is valid when the main key is invalid in different working modes 3 3 5 Manual axis control key Manual key symbol definitions in JOG working mode are as follows X X axis moves negatively in JOG working mode X X axis moves positively in JOG working mode Operation Chapter Three System Operation Panel Z Y Z or Y moves negatively in JOG working mode Z Y Z or Y moves positively in JOG working mode Wu RAPIDIFEEO RAPID TRAVERSE FEED Switching rapid traverse and feed in JOG working mode e rps srepwiotH JOG STEP Selecting each step width or MPG feed in STEP MPG Handwheel working mode hp function in other working modes a hp4 me MPG Handwheel MPG control selection and axis selection in JOG working mode hp function in other working modes e hp6 Z Y ciee Z Y selection in JOG working mode hp function in other working modes pot step STEP JOG mode Switch STEP JOG mode in JOG working mode 3 3 6 Manual auxiliary function key The following press keys are used to controlling and completing all miscellaneous function of the machine and each key symbol definition is as follows e h scw Spindle rotation CW Spindle rotates clockwise sho sso Spindle stop Spindle stops 0 sew Spindle rotation CCW Spindle rotates counterclockwise if cooune Cooling control Switch cooling ON OFF Ga SHI
395. ors are start up Description method of process monitor 1 Assignment description What is called assignment description is to designate the monitor object by a assignment statement all assignment statements which aim at monitor register r7000 r7009 are called monitor description statement For example r7000 r1001 or r1002 0 monitor r7000 object are interface input signal UIl01 UI02 r7001 r4003 rotate speed 1 monitor r7001 comes form spindle real time speed 2 Condition description What is called condition description is to designate how to make judgement according to the monitored information The condition description statement and common conditional statement have the unanimous basic form and the program rule is basic same When relation expression then statement 1 else statement 2 Among them in the condition description statement the left of when related expression is monitor register name In the condition description statement the call can t be used in then else only assignment or transfer For example when r7000 1 then P1500 when the input signal can meet the requirement then turns p1500 When r7001 gt 6000 then r3 r3 1 meet the requirement r3 adds 1 Explanation 1 The system regulation all assignment statement of aiming at r7000 r7009 are the description to monitor 0 9 according to the program execution path the latest description is effective 291 CGSN HIS I GSK928TEa Turning CNC
396. ososooososooososososooosososocsososososososososooooo 140 2 2 Block ceccccccccocococccccccscsosososcocsososcscsososcsosososcocsesoscsososososososososcsososcsoscscscscsosososososescsesososesesosesosesososesooeooo 140 2 3 Block Number eeeccccococoocoococococococococococococococococococococococococococooococococococococooocooocococoesoocoosesosoesooooosososoooso 141 2 4 Block R T T 141 2 5 Block Skip Symbol and Comment seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeccceccceececccecececccecececeeececeeeeeese 142 2 6 Program Structure PAE AAEE ARENE AAA E E AAE AA ENAA AREAN ARARE EREA 142 CHAPTER THREE MSTF COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS teereeeereeeeeeeeeeeecccceeeeeeecccocceeeeeccccceeeececccoeceeeeeesoesee 144 3 1 M Miscellaneous Function Command List eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeesssesseeeeeee 144 3 1 1 M00 Pause seseeeseeeseseeseceeseccececcececcececcesecceseccesecceseccesecceseccoseccesescoseccececcesesceseccesescessescesescesese 145 3 1 2 M02 End of Program sssssssssssssssssssssssesssssesssssssssssssssessssecsssssssssecsssssssssssesssssssessesssssnssssssseeses 145 3 1 3 M20 End of Program Cycle Machine eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeecoceeceeeecsococceceeecoceeeeeeeecocoeeeeeeeeee 145 3 1 4 M30 End of Program Spindle OFF Cooling ORE ceeeseseecseccesccncccceccccceccecccncccccscecsceeee 146 3 1 5 M03 M04 M05 Spindle Oi Loe 146 XIV Contents 3 1 6 M08 M09 Cooling control sssssserseeessseesees
397. ost 24V Tool post24V GND No 1 tool T1 No 2 tool T2 A No 3 tool T3 No 4 T4 y y see zero Z zero PCZ Tool post lock in position signal TCP No 5 tool T5 wo e No 6 tool T6 Neat tool T7 No 8 tool T8 X3 motor male X Z drive 5V X enabling XEN Z enabling ZEN Z negative terminal Z positive terminal ZD X negative terminal XD Z pulse negative terminal ZP X positive terminal XD Z pulse positive terminal ZP X pulse negative terminal XP X Z drive 24V GND ov Z drive unit alarm ZALM X pulse positive terminal XP X Z drive 24V X drive unit alarm XALM 307 CGSN r HSZ GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 2 1 2 Interface Cooling ON M8 Cooling OFF M 9 Spindle brake signal M SP Spindle CW M3 layout 2 X1 input output female Spindle analog voltage SVC Spindle analog voltage ground AGND Chuck clamp M 10 Not be defined by standard2 U02 Chuck release M11 Not defined by standard 1 U01 Spindle gear ou tput4 S04 1 0 24V 424V Spindle gear ou tput3 S03 Spindle CCW M4 Tailstock backward M 79 Spindle gear ou tput2 S02 Spindle stop M 5 Tailstock forward M 78 Spindle gear ou tput1 S01 1 0 24V 24V 1 0 24V 24V 170 24V 24V 1
398. output OFF 150 Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions Field D signal hold time unit s 0 9999 999 When D is omitted the output signal is being held Explanation M21 M22 M23 M24 have not the concrete definition specified the system and the user can specify according to the concrete requirements They separately correspond to the output signals defined by the two users and the corresponding commands can change the states of output signals User 1 user 2 output signals are defined in the interface parameter M210 M230 See CONNECTION after the output interfaces are defined Notes 2 M21 M24 can have D when M21 M24 are executed with D the corresponding output is executed the time specified D delays and the previous output is cancelled When the command has no D the output signal is being kept 3 1 15 M91 M92 M93 M94 User input Command format M91 M92 M93 M94 n aa a U Field P block which skips to the target block It does not skip when P is omitted The leading zero of the block specified by P can be omitted Explanation The definitions of input signals which correspond to M91 M92 M93 M94 are not confirmed and are defined by the user according to the requirements They separately correspond to input signals defined by the two user User 1 user 2 input signals are defined in the interface parameter M911 M931 See Connection after the output interfaces are defined
399. ove the cursor to the character following the required insert position Input the required insert content Insert the input content before the character pointed by the cursor Note The CNC system requires there is a blank space between fields in the program line In editing program the system can automatically judge and create a blank space but cannot automatically judge in the insert operation and at the moment the operator should input a blank to get the complete program Example Example insert 1 between X and 0in N0020 GO X0 0 Z0 0 As follows The cursor moves the under 0 following X input 1 displaying N0020 GO X10 0 Z0 0 4 3 4 5 Deleting a character in a block Delete the content which is not needed as follows Move the cursor to the character position which is needed to delete Press DELETE to delete the character 4 3 4 6 Modifying a block content Modify the content of the block into the new which can be complete according the input mode insert alter In INSERT mode use the insert and deletion as follows Move the cursor the character which needs to be modified Input the new content Press DELETE to delete the required content In REWRITE mode directly modify the content as follows Press ALTER the cursor switches into the alter mode the character position pointed by the cursor is high light square Move the cursor to the character which needs to be modified Inp
400. oving to the current point from the measured starting point is less than the theory As the above figure the theory distance from D to the measured starting point is 460mm and the deviation value is 30um the theory distance from H to the measured starting point is 820mm and the deviation value is 10um Relative parameter 1 Whether the pitch error compensation function is valid is set by P411_d7 0 inactive 1 active 244 Programming Chapter Six Pitch Error Compensation 2 Pitch value description method is set by P411_d6 0 inconstant interval 1 constant interval 3 Pitch compensation parameter value P1000 P1905 Note 1 The pitch compensation function should be closed when the system measures the pitch error otherwise the measure is not correct when there is the data in the pitch compensation parameter table 2 The pitch compensation point must be in the positive direction related to the measured starting point in the machine coordinate system 6 2 Constant Interval Description Method The pitch compensation parameter table uses two methods to describe the data i e constant interval and inflection point description method set by P411_d6 In the constant interval description method each axis is up to 300 compensation point the interval between two points is equal which is called the compensation interval The compensation interval is generally referred to max machine travel which is up to 1000mm the comp
401. p number level Running setting 00000000 Efficiency setting 00000000 Safety setting 1 00000000 Safety setting 2 00000001 Debugging setting 00000000 Motor drive 00011100 Zero setting 1 00000000 Zero setting 2 00000000 CisdC isdC s isdC isdC sd idC idC E l Tool post setting 00000000 Oooo CisdC Sa idC sd idC idC 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 Chuck tailstock hydraulic 00000000 20000000 11111111 system Spindle configuration 00000000 Precision compensation 00000000 Other interfaces 00000000 Interface language 00000000 Communication interface 00000000 Display window 10001000 Functional switch 00000000 9 DO DO PO RO gt 4 6 5 6 Variable initial value list Parameter number Parameter Parameter Initial range User level name value 9 backup P600 P639 r001 r040 Jo 99999999 99999999 4 6 5 7 Pitch compensation parameter list Parameter Parameter name constant Parameter name variable Parameter range Parameter range No interval mode interval mode Compensation value um 1000 1000 Z 1 compensation position 0 9999 999 pa point mm Compensation value um 1000 1000 Z 1 point compensation value 1000 1000 P1001 um P1002 Pe ala position point 0 9999 999 Ay Compensation value Cum 1000 1000 O P1299 1000 1000 Z compensation value
402. p button Wsp external MPG emergency stop signal the system should use the normally closed contact the function is equal to the system ESP signal 4 4 9 5 Safety door check function When the system needs the function the operator should define its output pin in the interface parameter and correctly connects with wiring the system output the signal in the corresponding pin P511 SAGT safety door check signal Functional description 1 SAGT is connected with OV CNC confirms that the safety door closes 2 In AUTO Working mode the system alarms Alarm for safety door not be closed when it has checked that the safety door opens 3 In automatic run when the system has checked the safety door has opened the axis feed stops the cooling closes and the system alarms 4 The safety door check function is valid in AUTO working mode 66 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 4 4 9 6 Pressure low alarm check function Relative parameters P412_d5 1 pressure low check function P412_d4 sets pressure low alarm level P412_d4 1 low level alarm P412_d4 0 high level alarm P332 sets the durable pressure low alarm time Functional description 1 When the system selects the pressure low alarm check function it displays the press check icon at right hand side in JOG Working mode and AUTO working mode the icon is green solid triangular A when the pressure is normal Once the system has checked that pressure
403. path of the last roughing l K describe the system firstly offsets IK value and then executes the first roughing i e executes A B C A path L describes the L layers from the first roughing and the system executes the last roughing the cutting amount of each layer should be even i e X is I L Z is K L and the cutting is executed from A B C to ABC The actual cutting times is L 1 Field range X U Z W 9999 999mm 9999 999mm I K 9999 999mm 9999 999mm PQ 1 9999 L 1 9999 F 0 001mm min 15000mm min Execution process as Fig 4 44 Suppose L 2 layers A A rapidly traverse offset K to A1 the first roughing A B C A B rapidly traverse to B4 213 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual B C cutting feed 3 Ci Az2 rapidly traverse the second roughing A2 gt B2 Cz A2 Bz rapidly traverse B2 C2 cutting feed C A rapidly traverse The last roughing A B rapidly traverse B C cutting feed C A rapidly traverse to starting point ane eee we Rapid traverse Cutting feed A Starting point end point A B Roughing contour N wsi Fig 4 44 G73 run path Command explanation 1 In P Q blocks it is different with G71 G72 which cannot ensure X Z dimension data monotonously changes 2 The tool retraction direction is determined by I K signs 3 The tool nose radius compensation usages in G73 command group are different
404. pdate the whole memory When the system executes the data solidifying and draw it must not be turned off and the operator cannot execute the other operations before the operation is performed The data solidifying and draw do not influence the part programs in the system 4 6 3 1 Parameter communication and standard format According to the requirement to select the parameter transmission direction the communication has two kinds parameter sending and receiving The parameter receiving includes PC gt CNC USB gt CNC CNC CNC the parameter sending includes CNC PC CNC USB CNC CNC Parameter sending operation level all level The operator in all level can send the parameter to U or send to PC by RS232 serial Parameter receiving operation level program designer machine manufacturer device administrator machine operator The operator with more than 3 level can receive the parameters from U or PC but he with the corresponding level modifying the parameter is valid The system RS232 transmission software is referred to OPERATION Chapter RS232 and USB System Communication GSK928 COM EXE can realize the sending and receive between PC and CNC which is simple with high communication rate and reliability RS232 and USB interface function realize the parameter data unload Press R to transmit the data by RS232 communication mode 88 Operation Chapter Four System Operation RS232 parameter receiving PC CNC C
405. pears in block Input the correct command E204 Command format The command format is wrong in the Input again according the correct wrong block command format E205 Command isn t Two or more commands incompatibility Delete the unwanted command compatible appear in the same block or line input E206 Lack of information Missed the command needed content in Input the command needed the block content according the correct format E207 Tool tip radius too tool nose radius is too big or path is too Modify program or tool nose much short can t make the tool nose radius radius happen in running compensation E208 Brackets is miss Without brackets in the statement Brackets are added to the source rogram E209 Too many The command character in same block is Modify source program or line characters E210 Surplus characters Unwanted field is input in the block Delete the unwanted field in the block E211 Data exceeding The value in the block is over the Modify the is wrong data again range specified range E212 Errors in data The data don t meet the standard Modify the is wrong data again E213 Single block is too The whole line number of part program is Modify the source program long over the range E214 Use command some commands are in an alone block Modify the source program E215 Lack of line number The specified program line number of Modify the source program input command G71 G72 M96 M97 M98 the correct block line number
406. peed is executed by the selected rapid or feedrate Press continuously the key the machine slider will continuously feed the step width till the key is released and the slider has moved the last step width The step width in the single step movement is displayed in the black background The step width of single step movement is 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 0 10 0 50 0 the system can gradually select them according to STEP REGULATION Note 1 In STEP mode press CYCLE START to stop slider moving When the key is pressed down the slider stops and the unfinished step will not be reserved and then the feed key is pressed to execute the next step feed X step width is the moving distance in diameter 2 When the manual feed key is pressed the external spindle and the feed hold knob are permitted to feed the slider moves When the manual step feed key is pressed the slider does not move in the state of feed hold 3 When the slider is moving and the feed hold knob rotates to the feed hold position the slider will decelerate to stop and the unfinished step width will not be reserved 4 4 1 3 MPG control PN Press Me to switch from MPG mode to JOG or STEP mode and the indicator ON is selected MPG movement the system receives the pulse signal generated by MPG handwheel to control the movement of coordinate axis preset each movement of scale of MPG The MPG dial rotates one case and the coordinate axis moves one step width The step width has t
407. planation Table 4 4 G and it Relative Parameter Table Word Function Relative parameter explanation Remark G40 Cancel tool nose radius compensation G41 Cancel tool nose radius compensation left P411_d4 P411_d5 P413_d5 G42 Cancel tool nose radius compensation right G00 Rapid traverse P100 P108 P112 P114 P400_d3 G01 Linear interpolation P112 P113 P114 P401_d5 P401_d4 G02 clockwise interpolation CCW G03 Counterclockwise interpolation CCW P112 P113 P114 P401_d4 P400_d2 G05 Arc interpolation G32 Tapping cycle P100 P102 P103 P105 P106 P108 P112 P113 P114 G33 Constant thread cutting P100 P101 P103 P104 P106 P107 P113 P116 P117 P209 P306 P307 P403_d0 G34 Variable pitch thread The same that of G33 G26 Program reference point return Refer to G00 and G50 G28 Machine zero return P021 P026 P109 P110 P111 P406 amp P407 others are referred to G00 G30 28 3 program reference point return P003 P008 others are referred to G00 G50 Workpiece coordinate system setting P000 P001 P002 G51 Workpice coordinate system recovery G74 Skip function Refer to G00 and G01 G75 End face drilling cycle The same that of G74 G90 Outer inner grooving cycle Refer to G00 and G01 G92 Outer inner cylinder face cycle Refer to G00 and G33 G94 Thread cutting cycle Refer to G00 and G01 G22 Outer inner taper cycle G80 Local cycle start G04 Local cycle end G71 Dwell Relative parameter of rapid traverse is referred to GOO relative parameter of cutt
408. plays Pause the spindle speed is 0 Example N0100 G98 F800 define the feed per minute F feedrate 800 mm min N0160 F50 F feedrate 50 mm min N0200 G99 F2 1 set the feed per rev F feedrate 2 1 mm rev N0250 F0 56 F feedrate 0 56 mm rev 4 18 G31 Skip The execution of G31 is the same that of G01 and the difference is that G31 constantly check the external input interface signal G311 state When the signal meets the condition the coordinate axis stops the feed and continuously executes the next command otherwise the coordinate axis feeds to the end point Command format G31 Z W _ X U _ YC V _ F_ H_ Z X Y three axis feed simultaneously G31 Z W _ X U _ F H_ Z X two axis feed simultaneously or Z X Z Y X Y two axis feed simultaneously G31 Y V _ F H_ Y single axis feeds Field X Z Y end point coordinates after the command ends U W V incremental value counted by the theory end point 224 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions F feedrate F is modal and can be omitted when it is not changed it is controlled by the feedrate override H command bit parameter H_d7 H_d1 reserved the system defaults it to be O when it defaults H_d0 0 G311 LOW meets the skip condition H_d0 1 G311 HIGH meets the skip condition Field range X Z Y U W V 9999 999 9999 999 mm F 0 001mm min 15000mm min Explanation Z X Y can execute single axis two axis or three axi
409. ppendix 3 the external control connection layout LT LT X Z Y negative limit switch signals Connect X Z positive negative limit signal to the signal Note LT LT connections are referred to OPERATION 4 1 Safety Guard MXZ1 feed hold signal When it is valid i e switch contact ON the feed is locked i e X Z stop MXZ2 spindle feed hold signal When it is valid i e switch contact ON the feed is locked namely X Z stop Note MXZ1 MXZ2 control are referred to OPERATION Auto Working Mode RM10 chuck clamping outer chuck releasing inner chuck in position detection RM11 chuck releasing outer chuck clamping Cinner chuck in position detection Note the hydraulic chuck and tailstock controls are referred to OPERATION JOG Working Mode T1 T8 tool number connecting with the tool post selecting 4 16 tool selection tool post when the tool selection is more than 4 it can input to the CNC system by T1 T TCP tool post lock in position signal connects with tool post 315 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 2 4 Connection method of output signal The output signal CUO01 U0O18 is used to control the relative operations of the machine the signal direction CNC to machine The signal can drive the relay and the indicator at the machine side When the output signal is connected with OV the output function is valid when it is not connected with OV the output function is invalid X1 X2 interfac
410. program name capacity remark Middle display program name capacity and remark Middle bottom operation prompt message Lower bottom display current stored part program quantity up to 255 and surplus stored space Pop up window display operation prompt message Note Press hp2 key and the system prompts Program catalog window message prompt introducing the used press key functions 4 3 1 Part program catalog search Program catalog search window displays the current stored program quantity and all programs sorts as follows 1 name program number from top to bottom from left to right 2 size program stored space from top to bottom form left to right Operation Chapter Four System Operation 3 remark the first 12 characters of the first line of the program from top to bottom from left to right 4 the last input time sequence from top to bottom from left to right 3 a B Press i and i the system searches all part programs displaying 12 program on each window press to the first page of program to the last Press I to sort all programs according to their name size remark and last distribution 4 3 2 Selecting creating deleting renaming and copying a part program Select create delete rename and copy part programs Note 1 The system executes most 000 254 programs 255 program names The system prompts E160 input program error when the executed program name
411. prompts the alarm E174 machining programs are locked and are forbidden to modify when the system edits and modifies the programs P416_d0 should be set to 0 Edit key meanings and use in program edit window D E 1 cursor UP DOWN move key Press the move key every time and the cursor moves up down till the top the bottom line Keep pressing the moving key and the cursor continuously moves up down till the first last line or the move key is releases In the character string search function hp5 the operator can search the required character string up and down 2 2 cursor LEFT RIGHT movement key Press the move key every time and the cursor moves left right one character Keep pressing the moving key and the cursor continuously moves left right till the first last character or the move key is releases amps 3 DRY Home key the cursor rapidly moves to the home or the first field head of the line Press continuously the head key and the cursor switches between the head and the first field of the line The compound of the head key and the deletion key can delete the current line a SEP End key the cursor rapidly moves to the end of the line S 4 AUER _insert alter Changing edit input mode switch the insert and the alter after pressing it once The cursor also changes correspondingly and the insert mode cursor flashes to be one horizontal line and the alter mode cursor flashes to be the
412. put a new one Example Example copy the current program 000 to 005 as follows Press key input INPUT 5 INPUT The copy operation is completed 4 3 3 Part program communication The communication of part programming includes the sending and receiving the part program The sending is divided into the system outputs to PC CNC PC one system outputs to another one CNC CNC and the system outputs to U disc CNC gt USB Press hp6 in the program catalog search window the system prompts the part program communication window 21 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 3 3 1 Sending part programs CNC PC CNC gt USB CNC CNC Method 1 RS232 serial communication 1 Before file transmission the system sets P414_d7 P414_d6 communication baud rate The communication baud rate is determined by the sending setting The setting range 9600 19200 38400 unit bps Setting communication baud rate is referred to OPERATION 4 6 Parameter Working mode 2 Part programs stored in the system are output to another one as follows OO0O Method 2 connect with communication cable in power off press key to input hp6 R gt hp2 select the required program to send according to the system hp2 help message press ENTER to send the external PC or another system are in the receiving mode refer to OPERATION Chapter 5 RS232 and USB System Communication the system outpu
413. r at this time 1 is still open 4 In making program before open the monitor it must make the description to the monitor when it opens a monitor without task which don t have description the system will alarm prompting E400 variable r7xxxx don t be initialized 5 When opened some monitor change its monitor description in the instance of don t meet requirement and don t stop monitor then the new monitor description will change the old description and the monitor will still on the opening state needn t restart But it s very dangerous in this state the monitor must be closed at first then change its monitor description then open it again 6 After meets the monitor requirement when the executed command in monitor condition is skip command Pxxxx close the monitor automatically when the executed command is assignment or calculate command don t close the monitor 7 The monitor management register is the read variable can t be used in read or conditional judge otherwise alarm 8 If the monitor is opened under the PAUSE Block stop Cycle stop state the monitor is still effective its assignment or operation command will be executed after meeting the requirement the skip command can be executed by pressing CYCLE START key 9 Once the monitor is opened in the system inner because its two description statements are alternated ceaseless executed circularly its execution speed is faster than the common
414. r feedrate leads the machine to work wrongly so as to damage the workpiece and the tool as well injure the operator When offset is needed check the direction and the amount of the compensation Improper compensation causes the machine to work wrongly so as to damage the workpiece and the tool as well injure the operator If the machine is to run in JOG working mode check the current position of the tool and the workpiece and correctly specify the moving axis moving direction and the feedrate MPG Handwheel control with great override such as 100 may damage the machine and its tool even injure the operator If the tool is return to the reference point make sure that the machine has been equipped with the device to detect the reference point otherwise the tool can not reach the reference point which may damage the machine and its tool and even injure the operator Suggestions for safety Safety Responsibility Safety responsibility for manufacturer The manufacturer should be responsible for danger from clearing out or controlling design and or structure of the CNC system and its supplied accessories The manufacture should be responsible for safety of the CNC system and its supplied accessories The manufacture should provide the user for use information and suggestion Safety responsibility for user tThe user should learn and master the safety operation content by studying and training the CNC s
415. r ratio is set to 1 1 Sampling point A B C D E are as follows Sampling point A B Cc D E Displayed machine 0 160 580 900 1040 coordinates mm Leading screw theory 0 80 290 450 520 position mm Actual measured data mn 0 80 006 290 015 450 030 520 024 Deviation value um 0 6 15 30 24 leading screw position and deviation value P1300 80 P1301 6 Note compensation value in the interval unit 0 256mm cannot exceed 7um otherwise the system alarms Suppose that X leading screw error curve is as Fig 6 1 X is in diameter programming When the pitch compensation function is valid the system uses the inflection point description method in the pitch compensation parameter the system executes the input according to the the fore data is the theory position value of the measured leading screw the later is the deviation value between the actual and the theory of leading screw 248 P1302 290 P1303 15 P1304 450 P1305 30 Programming Chapter Six Pitch Error Compensation P1306 520 P1307 24 The coordinate axis moves separately from A to B C E and the system sends the actual pulse as follows Theory value to Displayed machine The o tp t p lse leading screw coordinates they are the OMPA R The output pulse quantity ee i quantity when the Deviation measured half of the following setting Vhen the pitch
416. r string can be omitted The leading zero of command can be omitted For example G00 can be written to GO The positive sign must be omitted but the negative sign must not be omitted 140 Programming Chapter Two Program Structure 2 3 Block Number Block number is divided into two formats i e it is with line number and without line number block number is a line number of block number which is automatically created and also manually input and modified A block number consists of the letter N and the following 4 digit integer range 0000 9999 Block sequence can be at will its interval also can be unequal It is suggested that the block number should increase or decrease progressively based on programming sequence in order to conveniently search or analysis programs When manual input is executed block number N is 0 9 is directly input at the beginning of program line When the integer following block number N is modified please refer to the block content modification mode in OPERATION 4 1 Edit Operation Mode to modify the integer of block number When automatically creating a block number is executed and P333 is not set to 0 the line number can automatically create otherwise it cannot create automatically the line number Please refer to OPERATION 4 6 Parameter Operation Mode about parameter setting each program includes many blocks and each block begins with block number N after a new program is created the system
417. r the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point set in JOG working mode 48 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 4 4 3 Spindle control function 4 4 3 1 Spindle starting stopping control Spindle starting stopping as follows In JOG working mode the operator can directly operate the function keys on the panel or input M03 M04 MO5 to control the spindle rotation CW CCW and stop feed spindle hold is invalid in JOG working mode Pal Press S w or input M 3 ENTER the spindle rotates CW The system displays the spindle state and LED lights ho Press 5S0 or input M 5 ENTER the spindle stops rotation Press a or input M 4 ENTER the spindle rotates CCW The system displays the spindle state and LED lights Spindle JOG control The spindle stop key can switch the spindle JOG control state sho In the spindle stop state press 8510 and the Spindle state icon is displayed in the highlight on the ho screen and the system is switched to the spindle JOG control state Press 51 again the system rah fad is switched to the normal regular state In the spindle manual state press Sew or Secw the spindle rotates at the specified speed in the specified time and then stops when the specified time is ho too long the operator can press ss to stop the rotation In the spindle manual state MDI inputting the spindle control command M03 M04 M05 are invalid The spindle manual speed is specifi
418. ram designer can modify the parameter range parameter level gt 0 all parameters 1 level set by the machine manufacturer can modify the parameter range parameter level gt 1 2 level set by the device administrator can modify the parameter range parameter level gt 2 3 level set by the machine operator can modify the parameter range parameter level gt 3 4 level not be input can modify the parameter range parameter level gt 4 The parameter level is referred to the parameter lists in APPENDIX 4 6 1 2 Entering operation level Entering the operation level is as follows 4 6 1 3 Enter the parameter password input window Input the operation password the system adds one when one number is input to the password Press ENTER after the input is completed i e the system enters the operation level corresponding password Parameter management The parameter management includes the parameter display the parameter privilege initializing solidifying draw sending and receiving the parameter according to the privilege Parameter display Parameter color definitions 85 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual The parameter permitted to modify by the system is displayed in yellow and the forbidden is displayed in white in the current privilege In the parameter window some operation option is related to the privilege press hp6 and the forbi
419. rameter working mode 4 6 1 Parameter overview Parameter operation characteristics including 1 Press the parameter password level input by the operator to modify the corresponding level parameter 84 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 2 3 4 5 When the operator directly presses ENTER instead inputting the password the operation level is 4 to enter the parameter window in which the operator only reads but cannot modify the parameter For the parameter input and display format the decimal must has the decimal point and the negative number must has the negative sign the system limits the valid digits to get the convenient operation and using safety The operator can open the prompt message window of parameter data input range The system automatically checks the parameter data after power on and automatically prompts the initialization when it finds out the data in disorder 6 The system set the applicable safety parameters and the operator can reduce the accidences 4 6 1 1 caused by the mistaken operation by the proper parameter setting Parameter privilege The parameter privilege is to modify the parameter password level To get the convenient management the system provides the parameter privilege setting function the current operation level is displayed on the top prompt bar in the parameter window Parameter password level settings from high to low are as follows 0 level set by the prog
420. ramming executing the common part program they specially track with the matters which are real time happened in the part program execution process But the user must describe the task of the inspector and tell them to track what matter how to deal with it after it happen The inspector without task is in dormancy state Each inspector has a monitor register and a monitor management register separately the corresponding turn number is as following Inspector number 0 9 number in turn Monitor register number r7000 r7009 corresponding the inspector number in turn Monitor management register number r7010 r7019 corresponding the inspector number in turn 9 3 1 Process monitor description r7000 Using the process monitor at first must describe the process monitor according to the rule The process monitor description includes a assignment statement and a when condition statement neither of the two can be dispensed the assignment statement indicates the monitor object the when condition statement can make the judgement according to the information by monitor and decide to execute some branch block or not In the machining process if the process monitor is start up then the program status bar will display M n in right side In them M expresses the process monitor n expresses n process monitor started It also can check the system using process monitor status in macro variable window For example M 2 expresses two process monit
421. rately correspond to X Z vector from the starting point as the origin point to the circle center is X vector in diameter K is Z component K is positive when I K directions are the same those of X Z otherwise it is negative Use R programming without using I K programming 162 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions G03 X Z 1 K F G02 X Z 1 K F or Z R F 3 G02 X Z R F Absolute value Center point of Absolute value Diameter programming arc Diameter programming ee Aan P j b gy point of x M Fig 4 4 circle coordinate definition G05 I K specify the coordinates of one point on the arc Three points consist of one circle starting point end point and any one on arc as Fig 4 5 Any one point on arc qd K Starting point Fig 4 5 coordinate definition of one point on arc Related parameters Parameters related to arc interpolation P112 P113 P114 P401_d4 P400_d2 Interpolation movement execution as follows Raising speed stage raises speed at the initial speed of P112 The acceleration time of raising speed stage is P114 at the same time the system checks whether the federate Fx feedrate override exceeds P113 limit if it does the feedrate is P113 P401_d4 P400_d2 set in the cutting machining the system uses continuous smooth transition deceleration to zero front post acceleration deceleration or arc crossing top precision ex
422. reeererseeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeees 46 4 4 2 3 Setting workpiece coordinate system eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 46 4 4 2 4 Setting program reference point PIAA E A 47 4 4 2 5 Program reference point return eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeecccecccececececcccccccccccccceecececccecececceceeeee 48 4 4 2 6 Recovering the workpiece coordinate system and program reference points 48 4 4 3 Spindle control function sseesseessseeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeececcceccsececcceccsecececcccsseccccccccssecccececssssecececcsssececsessse 49 4 4 3 1 Spindle starting stopping O TTT 49 4 4 3 2 Spindle S command _gear shifting a T 50 4 4 3 3 Spindle S_ speed n Ol eeerereeeeseeeeececccccccccceccccccccecccceccsccccccsssscccccecssscssccscscseesscsscescsseecoseee 51 4 4 3 4 Setting spindle working STALE eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeccecceeceeeccccceceecececoceececccccssececcccccsscecceceeoseeeeeecsesseeee 54 4 4 4 Cooling control rssessessesessesessessessessesensensensensesensensensensensnsensensensensnsenscnsensensassnsensensensasensensensens 54 4 4 5 Manual tool change CONtrol ceseseeeeeeeeeeseeeceeccccssececcccccsceececccccseecccccccssececececccseececccecssesecececsssseceese 55 4 4 6 Manual toolsetting operation ATIII ITIITI TTI T IIIT ITTI ITTI TTI TTI IITTI ITIITI LIIT 57 4 4 7 Hydraulic Chuck control functiop seeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeecccecccccccccccecccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeee 60 4 4 8 Hydraulic tailstock control funct
423. resses hp6 and then Z to clear all offset data 127 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 8 Diagnosis Working Mode In DIAGNOSIS working mode the system real time checks and displays the input output interface state spindle speed encoder lines Press hp2 at the top right to learn about the diagnosis operation keys Main functions in DIAGNOSIS working mode include x Auto diagnosis function yx display the external signal states of input output l O interface y Diagnosis of spindle control function input output signal yx Diagnosis of tool post control function input output signal yx Diagnosis of each axis hardware limit signal yx Diagnosis of each machine zero machine reference point signal yx Diagnosis of spindle speed and encode lines Press DOAGNOSISto enter the DIAGNOSIS working mode and the display is as Fig 4 12 DIAGNOSIS INPUT hp2 109 1 1251 Wo3 ae Spindle speed UI10 1 hUI26 1 0000 SHL 1 UI27 1 TPS 1 UI28 1 UI13 1 UI29 1 Encode line UI14 1 UI30 1 0000 UI15 1 LT 1 Ull61 LT 1 AUTO PARA OFT bien Fig 4 12 Diagnosis working mode 4 8 1 Interface signal search Firstly set P415_d3 1 search Chinese concrete content in each I O in DIAGNOSIS working mode according the prompt in diagnosis window when the parameter setting is closed the operator cannot see the concrete Chinese content J a Press to search each I O and the searche
424. ression then statement 1 else statement 2 Its meaning is when the expression is exist execute the statement 1 behind the then otherwise execute the statement 2 behind the else Explanation 1 In the relation expression the relation operation has lt gt less than more than equal to such as rA lt rB rA gt rB rA rB 2 The statement 1 and statement 2 can be transfer statement P calling statement H or assignment statement but only can be one of them 3 The transfer symbol P and calling symbol H 4 The operator in assignment statement only can be addition subtraction such as rN rC rD rN rC rD The basic format and signification of when statement when rA rB then P1 else P2 when rA rB execute P1 otherwise execute P2 when rA rB then P1 else rN rC rD when rA rB execute P1 otherwise execute rN rC rD hen rA rB then rN rC rD else P2 when rA rB execute rN rC rD otherwise execute P2 Among them rN variable name rA rB rC rD variable name constant too P1 P2 transferred block line number H1 H2 The called block line number in the above format the place which is transferred by P also can use call 9 2 3 Statement program example program example 1 In the following program it mainly demonstrates the method of automatically modifying tool compensation in the program In the batch machining suppose each machining 20 piece the tool T11 will fray one thread
425. returns to the starting point and the roughing is completed When the roughing offset value roughing allowance is set in advance before executing the roughing command the system automatically offsets one offset to execute the roughing 2 finishing tool can be used before executing the roughing command Use G720 to execute the finishing G72 command group includes 3 commands G72 U W U W specify roughing offset value G72 Z W K F P Q G72 end face roughing cycle 3 G720 ZW PQF G720 finishing The followings are introduced separately G72 end face roughing cycle G72 is called the axial roughing cycle command to realize the compound cycle roughing of one group of slop command group The system executes the gradual roughing along the axial called sidestep roughing and execute the cutting along the command group path called as contour first turning and at last returns to the initial point and the roughing is completed The chapter describes the execution process of G72 roughing command imagine the offset value of roughing is WO UO Command format G72 Z W __ IL K_ F_ P_ Q_ End Face Roughing Cycle Field Z W gt Z starting point coordinate of finishing Z tool infeed once without sign cannot be 0 K Z tool reaction once without sign P Q line number to describe finishing initial and final path F roughing cutting feedrate Field range Z W 9999 999mm 9999 999mm l 0 00
426. rking mode and the system has checked the zero signal the system takes P021 P022 P023 as the reference and automatically change the machine coordinates of the current position of the system Zero offset value of Z X Y __ reference coordinate parameter P024 P025 P026 When the system uses the servo motor checking the deceleration signal and the zero turn signal of the motor mask are taken the zero return check The deceleration signal installed on the coordinate axis coincides with the zero turn signal which can influence the zero return precision the operator should set the offset value to 2mm and avoid the 2mm to execute the check Zero return low speed of Z X Y __ motion parameter P109 P110 P111 Zero return low speed is the movement speed of coordinate axis when the system checks the zero signal in executing the machine zero return function When the zero return low speed is less than the lowest initial speed there is no raising speed process After the zero return speed is set it cannot be modified randomly otherwise which influences the zero return precision Zero setting 1 _ bit parameter P406 password class 1 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 reserved reserved d7__ Z has or not deceleration signal d6__ X has or not deceleration signal d5__ Y has or not deceleration signal 94 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 0 none it is set to 0 when the deceleration switch and block are not ins
427. rm and then press any keys and the edit cursor automatically points to the mistaken block 4 Executing hp3 compiling the system assumes that the machine coordinate axis takes the current workpice coordinate position as the starting point starts the execution from the first block of the current program So for some special programs each axis stopping position has effect on the compiling it is suggested that each coordinate axis should stop in advance in the starting point of the machining 4 3 6 2 hp3 analog drawing hp3 is firstly is pressed in the program edit window and the current program is not mistaken the user presses it again to execute the analog drawing of the program path When the current program is mistaken the system finds out the mistaken message and pops up a window Program alarm The system draws the current program graph after hp3 is pressed twice when the current program is not mistaken as Fig 4 5 Setting graph display area The system executes the analog drawing the motion path in the range X min coordinate X max coordinate Z min coordinate Z max coordinate Generally the preset range value of the system is the full drawing of program motion path which is not modified ENTER is pressed and the system enters into the program analog execution state Press y to select the required data which is needed to modify directly input data not use ENTER key pressing ENTER meaning all modifications are comple
428. rm information of corresponding axis After the travel limit switch alarms the system can select JOG working mode the manual feed key which is reverse to the limit direction is pressed i e the system escapes the travel limit and the travel limit switch alarm automatically disappears on the screen Explanation 1 X Y Z positive limit check shares one pin LT and their negative limit check shares one pin LT when the positive limit alarms all axes can not move positively but move negatively and vice versa 2 When the travel limit switch runs across the limit block the limit signal appears the valid length of limit block signal is more than 30mm or more to avoid rush out the valid area of the signal 3 When the parameter is set to limit emergency stop mode bit parameter P402_d7 1 and the system runs across the limit block there may be great deviation between the coordinates displayed by the system and the actual position 13 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Relative parameters Bit parameters P402_d7 P404_d6 P404_d1 Bit parameter P402_d7 sets the hardware limit alarm mode Bit parameter P402_d6 sets whether the hardware limit alarm checks Bit parameter P402_d1 sets the hardware limit alarm level of each axis When P404_d1 1 is high level alarm the positive limit switch X Y Z of each axis are normally closed contact are connected to X Z Y positive limit input interface LT th
429. rmat 185 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual G96 S constant surface speed control G97 S cancel constant surface speed control Field S specifies the constant surface speed in G96 unit m min S specifies to cancel the constant surface speed in G97 unit r min Field range S 0 9999 r min 0 9999 m min O0 4 multi gear spindle Explanation G96 G97 are the modal word in the same group but one of them is valid G97 is the initial word and the system defaults G97 is valid when the system is switched on When the machine tool is turning it the workpiece rotates based on the axes of spindle as the center line the cutting point of tool cutting workpiece is a circle motion around the axes and the instantaneous speed in the circle tangent direction is called cutting surface for short surface speed There are different surface speed for the different workpiece and tool with different material When the spindle speed controlled by the analog voltage is valid the constant surface control is valid The spindle speed is changed along with the absolute value of X absolute coordinates of programming path in the constant speed control If the absolute value of X absolute coordinates adds the spindle speed reduces and vice verse which make the cutting surface speed as S command value The constant speed control to cut the workpiece makes sure all smooth finish on the surface of workpiece with diameter changing Surfa
430. rogram set the U105pin which is quoted to the system by the sensor signal when the tool is far away the workpiece UI05 1 when the tool is near the workpiece UI05 0 when the tool is moving to the direction of near workpiece from far away it is stopped at the position UI05 0 and confirm this point to be the machining start point 105 N0010 r7000 r1005 0 monitor tests the state of input signal r1005 it forms the monitor description with nether judgement statement N0020 when r7000 0 then P1000 When the signal r1005 is monitored to be Zero then turn to P1000 program running N0030 GOO Z300 X200 At first orientate to the initial point N0040 GOO X180 N0050 r7010 1 Opening 0 monitor by mode 1 when it meets the requirement stops the motion immediately and turn P1000 NO060 GOO W 100 F1000 The tool is closing the workpiece from far away N0070 r7010 0 When the last command is finished but nothing can be checked then close the 0 monitor Back to initial point N0080 G00 Z300 X200 N0080 M02 N1000 G50 Z200 X180 Set this point to be the machining start point set the workpiece coordinate system again Cut outer circle N1020 G01 Z90 F500 N1030 G01 X0 Cut off N1040 G51 Revert the workpiece coordinate system N1050 GOO Z300 X200 Back to initial point N1060 M02 Program Example 2 The following program introduce the explanation of process monitor The system has exterior cycle start pause funct
431. rol function is valid the external button or pedal switch controls the hydraulic tailstock forward backward which interlocks with the spindle 4 5 5 Speed override tune in AUTO working mode 4 5 5 1 Speed override tune In AUTO working mode the feedrate override and rapid override keys in any state are valid In AUTO working mode the system can set the speed without changing the program and parameter Change the program running speed by changing the speed override e federate override speed word F setting value in tuning the program Actual feedrate speed Fx feedrate The feedrate override has 16 gears 0 150 increment of 10 all commands controlled by the federate is controlled by the federate override e Rapid override G00 rapid traverse command speed in tuning programs Z actual rapid traverse speed P100xrapid override X actual rapid traverse speed P101xrapid override Y actual rapid traverse speed P102xrapid override The rapid traverse override is divided into 25 50 75 100 All rapid feed commands and the operations are controlled by the rapid traverse override Whether programs are running or not pressing rapid override federate override keys can change the speed override The actual traverse speed of the machine slider changes if the speed override is changed when the programs are running In program running the program stops running when the federate override is 0 the system prompts Feedrate overri
432. rom B to C is negative so U lt O X from A to B is negative so W lt 0 X from C to B is positive so R gt 0 4 U gt 0 W lt 0 R lt O U 2 ON mt T R W X from B to C is positive so U gt 0 X from A to B is negative so W lt 0 X from C to B is negative so R lt 0 Fig 4 30 G94 relationship between U W R sign and tool path Example 199 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual _ lt ma Z C2C1C D Se ALa t 1 LZ ir La paeen Net G59 B2 BLBA B BaB3B2BIE xX R a x J b Fig 4 31 G94 cutting example Example 1 Fig 4 31a the first feed 5 mm the second feed 1 5 mm F 80 mm min and its programming as follows N0010 G00 X62 Z45 rapidly position to A point N0020 G94 X25 Z40 F80 the first cycle AB CDA N0030 Z35 tool infeed 5mm the 2 cycle A B1 C1 DA N0040 233 5 tool infeed 1 5m the 3 cycle A B2 C2 DA N0050 M30 Example 2 Fig 4 31b feed R 5 mm once feedrate 100 mm min and its programming as follows N0010 GOO X55 Z5 rapidly position to A point N0020 G94 X30 Z 5 R 5 F100 thefirst cycleAB1CDA N0030 G94 X30 Z 5 R 10 tool infeed 5mm the 2 cycle A B2 CDA N0040 G94 X30 Z 5 R 15 tool infeed 5mm the 3 cycle A B3 CDA N0050 G94 X30 Z 5 R 20 tool infeed 5mm the 4 cycle A B4 CDA NOO60 G94 X30 Z 5 R 25 tool infeed 5mm the 5 cycleABC DA 4 14 4 G74 Deep hole machining cycle on end face Command format G74 X U _ ZCW _ I
433. rsor is to the last character 31 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 3 5 5 Cursor position The system provides the character string search function i e position the content needed by the operator which is convenient for operator to search the required content Press hp5 and the system Ss i prompts E operation functions as follows 1 Press and the cursor positions to the first page of the current program 5 2 press and the cursor positions to the last page of the current program 3 press F input the character which is needed to search of the current program press ENTER the cursor positions the character y 4 press to search the character of current program according to the system prompt The system prompts Searching is completed and there is no character string when there is the character which is needed to search of the current program 4 3 5 6 MPG controlling cursor moving After the system is connected with MPG the operator presses MPG rotates MPG to control the cursor movement when the MPG key LED is light on the operation panel Press MPG repeatedly MPG operation is invalid when MPG key LED is OFF The concrete MPG connection is referred to CONNECTION 4 3 6 Part program compiling The system provides hp3 compiling command key to compile part programs check the syntax error logic error of programs and coordinate data overtravel according to par
434. rst digit is zero in the command Example GOO can be written to GO Programming Chapter Seven General Programming Rules and Examples 7 2 Programming Rules for Commands in One Block Programming rules for commands in one block mean that there are many commands in one block simultaneously but all commands are not in the same block The system executes Programming rule check and the programs meeting the programming rules can pass the compiling the system alarms and prompts Not meet rules in the same block And the rules are as follows 1 commands only in single block G50 G51 G26 G28 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G04 Program lock cycle G22 G80 Single fixed cycle G92 G74 G75 Single fixed cycle G90 G94 can be in the same block with G41 G42 Compound cycle G71 G72 can be in the same block with G41 G42 Moo M02 M20 M30 M96 M97 M98 M99 M21 M22 M23 M24 M91 M92 M93 M94 M47 M48 M60 M74 2 The system cannot judge them when some commands have mutually contradictory operations and the same data To avoid the above M G commands which cannot be in the same block are divided into many groups and the commands in the different group can be in the same block as follows M commands which can be in the same block are divided into many groups as follows Group 1 M03 M04 M05 Group 2 M08 MOQ Group 3 M10 M11 M12 Group 4 M78 M79 M80 Group 5 M32 M33 Group 6 M41 M42 M43 M44 G commands
435. s B El PAGE Display page up down in EDIT PARAMETER OFFSET UP DOWN Special definition in JOG AUTO working mode Operation Chapter Four System Operation Chapter Four System Operation This chapter introduces operations and notes of the system Please read carefully before operation 4 1 System ON OFF Initial State Modal and Safe Protection 4 1 1 Power on There is not a power switch on the operation panel of the system The operator installs it according to the different machine to avoid bad effects to CNC system owing to the impaction of power supply Check before the system is turned on 1 Ensure the machine state is normal 2 Ensure the voltage meets the requirements 3 Ensure the wiring is correct and firm The system is turned on as follows 1 The master power switch of machine is turned on Switch on the power switch of the CNC system and the system displays as Fig 4 1 Press 7 any keys except for A and the system enters into EDIT working mode con I HSI Fig 4 1 System initialization display window 2 The system orderly completes the following work after power on The system controls the program loading The system automatically check itself and executes the initialization The system loads and checks parameters 1 O interface initialization The system loads and checks the operator programs Note 1 Must not press any keys on the system panel when the system is turned on press
436. s In USB communication for transmitting the different data the system requires the USB file names are different and the user creates the file name in the U disc catalog as follows 134 Data Part program Parameter Offset data System software Memory whole categor data upgrade update Name category File name in U disc C928PRO C928PAR C9280FT C928DATA C928MEMO root catalog File name in file CNCxxx TXT PARxxx TXT OFTxxx TXT DATAxxx TXT MEMOxxx TXT xxx range in file 0 254 0 254 0 254 0 254 0 254 name Programming Chapter One Programming Fundamental PROGRAMMING Chapter One Programming Fundamental The automatic machining of CNC machine is the course of edited part programs automatically running The programming is defined that the drawing and the technology of machining workpiece are described with CNC language and are edited to the part programs Here describes the definition of command and the programming mode of CNC part programs Please read carefully these contents before programming 1 1 Coordinate Axis and its Direction This system has defined the controlled axis and its motion according to GB T 19660 2005 ISO 841 2001 Industrial Automation System and Integration Numerical Control of Machines Coordinate System and Motion Nomenclature The two coordinate axes are named with X and Z which are perpendicular each other to form X Z plane rectangular coordinate system as Fig 1 1
437. s 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 74 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 600 The user can select the proper display scale to get the best effect according to the actual condition e Two kinds of selection of graph area customizing and program creation Press or to select them When the system selects the program creation the modified data becomes the changing state and the operator inputs the new data according to the need After rewriting the data press ESC or ENTER and the system returns to AUTO working mode the system updates the displaying range of blank according to the set display data in the graphics display mode When the set display data exceeds the screen displaying range the system prompts X Z loverlimit and the display data must be rewritten again Notes 1 To correctly display the tool path the initial position of the tool should be out of the display range of the workpiece blank otherwise the system cannot correctly display the machining process 2 In program running when the coordinate display is switched to the planar solid the system cannot normally display the workpiece shape until the next cycle start 4 5 3 3 Machining workpiece count and timing Workpiece count when the program being executed once means the program ends M02 M20 M30 the machining quantity count adds 1 and max count range is 99999 and the count becomes 0 when it
438. s Y function is valid Main relative parameters The main relative parameters setting the additional axis P405_d1 P410_d4 4 20 2 Additional axis Y realizing motion 1 realize rapid traverse GOO Y V _ 2 realize feed motion G01 Y V _ F_ 3 realize tapping motion G32 Y V PCE _ H_ 226 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions 4 5 6 7 8 9 program reference point return G26 Y V _ machine zero return G28 Y V _ 2 3 program reference point return of machine G30 P2 3 Y V _ coordinate system set by G50 G50 Y_ realize skip function G31 Y_ H_ realize JOG STEP MPG feed manual program zero return manual machine zero return in JOG working mode Note 1 Absolute coordinate programming of additional axis Y uses Y relative coordinate programming uses V 2 Y and X Z execute the interpolation motion in G01 G31 3 Y V andX U Z W can be in the same block in G00 G01 G31 G26 G30 4 Y and X Z can be in the same block in G50 5 Y V and X U Z W cannot in the same block in G32 G28 otherwise the system alarms 6 Y traverse speed in G01 uses X Z modal F value when it is not specified 4 21 Appendix G function and its Explanation Table Table 4 3 G word list 227 CGSN I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Code Programming forma
439. s consistent with target tool or not r2011 1 Close the tool post CCW rotation r2012 0 Tool post clockwise rotates r4010 r39 Set the change tool time to 30s when r4010 lt 5 then P650 else P570 Judge the change tool time is too long or not 303 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 304 N0570 N0580 N0582 N0584 N0590 N0600 N0610 N0620 N0622 N0624 N0630 N0640 N0650 N0652 N0660 N0670 N0680 N0690 N0692 N0700 N0710 N0720 N0730 N0740 when r1004 0 then P580 else P560 Judge the tool position signal r2012 1 Close the tool post CW rotation r4011 50 Set to delay 50ms when r4011 lt 2 then P590 else P584 Delay 50ms 12011 0 Tool post CCW rotation r4011 r40 Set the tool post CCW rotation time when r4011 lt 5 then P620 else P610 Check the tool post CCW rotation time r2011 1 Close tool post CCW rotation time r4010 100 Tool post CCW rotation in position delayed time when r4010 lt 5 then P630 else P624 Tool post CCW in position delayed when r1004 0 then P640 else P700 Judge the in position signal M99 Tool change end r2012 1 Close the tool post CW rotation M05 Close spindle 00 SE335 Check the tool position signal overtime r5002 1 Open display r5002 1000 Display alarm r5008 1 Motion pause Moo Program pause 01 SE333 Tool selection number alarm r5002 1 Open display r5002 1001 Display alarm r5008 1
440. s do not move Field 184 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions X Z Y absolute coordinates of middle point U W V relative movement from starting point to middle point P2 specifies on program reference point P3 specifies 30 program reference point Field range X Z U W Y V 9999 999mm 9999 999mm P 2or3 Relative parameters Main parameters related to G30 P003 P008 Explanation 1 The execution mode of the command is the same that of G00 Relative parameter is referred to GOO 2 The command and other commands cannot in the same block 3 Z XIY can select single axis two axis or three axis simultaneously to execute 2 3 program reference point return Example G30 P2 Z150 X100 return to 2 program reference point through the middle point Z150 X100 G30 P3 Z150 X100 return to 3 program reference point through the middle point Z150 X100 G30 P3 WO Z rapidly returns to 3 program reference point directly 4 12 G04 Dwell Command format G04 D_ dwell Field D dwell time unit s G04 defines the meantime between two blocks Field range D 0 9999 999 s Explanation 1 The command and other command cannot be in the same block 2 In G04 press CYCLE START and the dwell ends and the system orderly executes the next command Example Example G04 D2 5 dwell 2 5s 4 13 G96 Constant Surface Speed Control G97 Constant Surface Speed Cancel Command fo
441. s feed simultaneously G31 traverse speed is specified by F and controlled by the feedrate override Actual feedrate F x feedrate override G31 is non modal command and can be omitted in the next block when it is the same Note 1 G31 input check function is non standard pin input control when the function is needed the user can define its pin in the interface parameter P5532 G31I and correctly connects with the wirings The concrete interface parameter definitions are referred to OPERATION 4 6 Parameter Working Mode the concrete wiring connection is referred to CONNECTION Chapter 3 CNC Device Connection 2 To get the exact position the run decelerates once the system has checked the external input interface signal change So the actual feedrate in G31 is not too high and it is suggested that it should be less than 1000mm min otherwise G31 cannot realize the skip function because it cannot check the interface signal Relative parameter Interface parameter P532 defines the input interface pin The relative parameter of cutting feed is referred to G01 Example Current X 100 Z 100 G31 Z30 F500 The move distance is Z70 Z moves at 500mm min continuously to Z30 when G31 signal cannot meet the skip condition Z 68 37 G31Il meets the skip condition and Z immediately stops running and the system executes the next command 4 19 G52 rotary axis coordinate clearing integer When Y is used to control the rotary axis the syste
442. s referred to OPERATION Chapter 5 RS232 and USB System Communication When the memory whole update uses USB U disc root catalog needs to create the file C928MEMO the command sending and receiving are executed in the file The file name format MEMO file number 3 digit TXT File number range 0 254 The memory whole update uses RS232 to perform the operation by the communication software GSK928_ COM EXE Note 1 When the system uses USB software upgrade the operator presses ESC or RESET to return 92 Operation Chapter Four System Operation EDIT working mode to edit the current program once after the upgrade is completed successfully otherwise the system alarms 4 6 3 4 Functional command privilege In PARAMETER window some operation functional option is related to the privilege the forbidden operation functional option is displayed in grey The followings are the functional option and password privilege Operation 0 level 1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level privilege Program Machine Device Machine Not input Operation option designer manufacturer administrator operator password Stepper servo parameter initialization Extracting parameter of machine xx manufacturer Executing parameter solidifying xx operation Parameter received by USB and All Based on Based on Based on Based on RS232 parameter parameter parameter parameter level leve
443. s the same with the current value it is displayed in yellow 129 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Note When the diagnosis output interface operation is used in the system debugging the parameter password level is more than 2 to perform the operations 4 8 6 Spindle encoder and spindle speed check The system can check and display the pulse per rev of the spindle encoder and the check result automatically displays the encoder lines The encoder lines mean the pulse per rev of the encoder The spindle speed means the current spindle actual speed unit r min Explanations 1 When the spindle doest not start the spindle speed and encoder lines are displayed to zero 2 When the checked encoder lines are not consistent with the P209 spindle encoder lines the system prompts Diagnosis check prompts the encoder lines are not consistent with the parameter 3 When the spindle encoder rotates synchronously with the spindle i e when the spindle rotates one circle the encoder rotates one circle otherwise the checked spindle speed is not consistent with the actual value 4 8 7 Diagnosis hp6 function Press hp6 in diagnosis window and the displays is as follows Press 1 search the color encoder display 256 kinds of color and codes For example 00 means to be black and FF means to be white Press 2 keyboard test test the keyboard Press 3 search CPLD pulse quantity display X Y Z pulse quantity Pr
444. sccecccceccccesccececeesccecesceccccescees 118 4 6 5 4 Miscellaneous parameter list eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeereeseeeeseeeeseeeesereesereesereeseeeeseeeesereesenereesneeeeeeeess 119 4 6 5 5 Bit parameter eeeeeeeeeereereeeeeereeeeeeesereeseeeeseeeesereesereesereesereeseeeesereeeesreeeereeesreeeeneesereeeneeseeeeseee 119 4 6 5 6 Variable initial value list s s ssreseresescssscsssscssscssscssscsssssssssssssessssessssssssssessssssesssnsenenes 120 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 6 5 7 Pitch compensation parameter LiSt eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecoceeccseecoseeceoececcocecoscecoscecosececoececsssesoseeossosee 120 4 6 5 8 Interface parameter List cccscsccesccccccccsccccccccccccccccesccsccccesccsccccesccesceesccccceescceecccescccesceesccseeee 121 4 6 5 9 Parameter list related to command forbidden ssseseeeeeeeeeseeeesecceseccesecceseccececccosecceseccosecee 122 4 6 5 10 Parameter list related to input interface release sssseseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeceecseeseccoeeseesosesesceeeo 122 4 6 5 11 Parameter list related to output interface release sesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeecesecccceececesecoseccocsecosee 123 4 7 OFFSET Working Mode vsssssssssssssssssesssesseesseessessnsesnnecanecsnecssessssessnncsnsecnscssessanesanessnecsneessessseessees 124 4 7 1 Tool offset value searchyss ssssssescsssscsesscssssssecssscsessocessesssssscsesscssssesasssssscsessesassesccscscsessoeasees 125 4 7 2 Input tool offset data by keyboard key sssssssssssssssssesseesseesnesnnessn
445. secccsesecocssoecceeceseoeeceseoscsescoseoeesesose 305 1 1 Rear Cover Interface Position Layout P OP E EEO EEE EE E E OE 305 1 2 Total Frame sseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeoeeeesooeeesooeeeeeooeeeeooeeeeooeeeeoeeeesoeeeeooeeeeooeereoeeeeooeeeeooeeoeeeeeoeeeeeoeeeesse 306 CHAPTER TWO INTERFACE GRAPH etsssssesseeseeeeeecoeccescoecceccoecoeccescocececcoecoeccoccoccceecoecceeceseocecessoscoescoseoeesessoe 307 CHAPTER THREE CNC DEVICE CONNECTION esseeeeeeeeeecceeccccececoceccoseccocecccoccccoscecoceecoscecocecccoceccoseecoseesooee 309 3 1 Front Cover Communication Interface ssseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeececceecceccescoeececcoecoeecoccsecooseocccesooccoessoseseeeooe 309 3 1 1 USB interface seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceeeeeoeeeeeooeeeoooeeeooeeesooeeesooeeeoooeeeooeeeeooeeeeooeeeooeeeeooereeooreoeeeeoeeees 309 3 1 2 Serial RS232 technical specifications eeeeeereeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesssssssssssseeeee 309 3 1 3 Serial RS232 signal definition OTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTITTTTTITITTTTITTTITTTTTITTITTTTTTTTTITITTTTITITITITTITTTITTITITTITTITTTTT 310 3 1 4 Connecting with external PC by RS232 eesceccccoccoccocsoccococococscesoescoscescesoesoosooscosoosoosoosoecoseosoosoo 310 3 1 5 Connecting with another CNC system by RS232 communication interface communication connections between GSK928TEa ccccccccocococococccoococcocococccccccocosocococooooooococoooooooooooo 310 3 2 X1 X2 Interfacereeeeereereeeerreeereereeeereeeeseereeeereerereereeeerereerereee
446. seeseessseecsssseesccsnnecscssnnecsnsnnsecensanecsesssnnecscsssnececsansecsnsnecsee 130 4 8 8 Machine miscellaneous function control sseseseseeeeeeeeeseeeeseceeseceececceseccececcocoeccececcesecceseccesescesese 130 CHAPTER FIVE RS232 AND USB SYSTEM COMMUNICATION tseeeseeseeeccsecccoececoseecoseeccocecosesecoscecsseecoseeee 132 5S1 RS232 Carmnrpainicatignnnssss seesteterenssenesesescsassesscessssessuscsusssiasssascesesosssesenesssbacsustesscsssseascsesscasesessuststacs 132 544 Cominanication between CNC and PCiccsesesretscsssnsasvssassncnasassavseacasananavavavanternsertusnonsaeseacssetens 132 5 1 2 Communication between CNC and CNC ssssseeeeseeseseececeececeesecceceseececceceseececeocceseeseoceceseesesceces 133 5 2 USB Communication ssss ss ssssssesesecesscescscscsssscsessceassesssesoessscsscsescsesscssssssesssssscessscsscsesssassssscsesasees 133 5 2 1 USB operation sssssssssesseesseesssesssecssecssecsscsnnesanessnecsseessessnnecanessnecsnecssessasesanesnsecsnecsoessnsesnnesssnes 133 5 2 2 USB file catalog requirements s sss ssssssssssssssessesseesssseesssseesssnssssseesssssesssssesssseeesssneosssneesssnesees 134 CHAPTER ONE PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTAL eteeeeeeereeeeeeecceeeeeeeecccceeeeeeeccceeeeeeeeccoceeeeeeecceeceeeeeecoceeeeeee 135 1 1 Coordinate Axis and its Direction ssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecececececcceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 135 1 2 Machine Coordinate System Machine Zero seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeee
447. seesseesnecsnsessseessecssssnnesnnecnsecsncsssesanecsseenseenseees 146 3 1 7 M10 M11 M12 clamping releasing workpiece cancelling chuck output signal 147 3 1 8 M32 M33 Lubricating ON OFF ssssssssssssesssesseesseessnessnecnnecsncsnsesaneessecnnecsseesanesaneenseesseees 147 3 1 9 M41 M42 M44 M43 Spindle Automatic Gear Shifting Control seeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseee 147 3 1 10 M78 M79 M80 Tailstock going forward and retreating backward cancelling tailstock output signa seeeeeeeeeeeeereeeereeeereeeereeeereeeereeeseeeesereesereeseeeeseneeseneeseeeesereeseeeesereeseeeesereessreesereesereeseeeeseeeeseee 148 3 1 11 M96 Cycle execution cal seeeeeeeeeeeeerereerereeeereeeeeeeseeeeseeeesereeseeneeeereesereeeeneeseneeseneeeeneesereesenees 148 3 1 12 M97 Program transfer s eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeereeeseeeenneeenseeeeseneeserens 149 3 1 13 M98 M99 Subprogram call and subprogram return eeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeereeeeeee 149 3 1 14 M21 M22 M23 M24 User Output Control seeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeese 150 3 1 15 M91 M92 M93 M94 User input eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeresesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesesssssesssseseeee 151 3 1 16 M47 M48 Setting spindle working state seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesessessssssseeeee 152 3 1 17 M60 M74 Customized commandgs s s seeeeseseseeeeseseeseseseeecseseseoececseseseeecseseses
448. seseeesee 104 4 6 4 8 Run and efficiency bit parameter in P400 P4O eereeeeseesesesseeccecceecocescoceseccoscoesooseseesosss 105 4 6 4 9 Relationship between path and run efficiency parameter sseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeee 107 4 6 4 10 Safety and debugging bit parameter _ P402 P4O4 eeeeeeeeseseecccccscccseececccccssccceccccccsseee 108 4 6 4 11 Motor drive bit parameter __P405ereeeeeeeeeeereeereereeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 112 4 6 4 12 Parameters related to other interfaces __ P412 P330 P332 eeeeereererererererereeesesee 113 4 6 4 13 Miscellaneous parameter a P413 P416 P333 eee eee 114 4 6 4 14 Interface parameter _P500 P556 eeeeeeerereeeereeeeeereeeeeereeeeeereeeseereeeeeereeeeeereeeseeeeeeeeenee 116 4 6 4 15 Variable initial value _P600 P639 seeereeeerereeeereeeeereeeeeereeeeeereeeeeereeeeeereeeseereeeseereeeeeeeee 116 4 6 4 16 Related parameter of G76 _P336 P339 srrseerssersseesseeeseersccrsccenscensecssecssscsnssensccnsscsneses 117 4 6 5 Appendix parameter List cccccesesccesccccccccccccsccscccccsccncccescceccccesecescceccceesccccccesccesceececeescceeescescees 117 4 6 5 1 Reference parameter List cccrccccsccescccccccccccccsccscccccsccsccccesccecccceccccesccsccccesccesccecccecesccceccceces cess 117 4 6 5 2 Motion parameter Listecssrccsseecesccccccccscccccccescccccccescctcscceccccescceccccesccnccceeccceescccecceecccesccesceeees 118 4 6 5 3 Transmission parameter LiSt cecescceseccccccccccccccceccccesccsccccesccccccce
449. set Input T O 6 ENTER keep the current tool and execute No 6 offset Input T 8 12 ENTER execute No 8 tool and No 12 offset Input T 4 0 5 ENTER _ _ execute No 4 tool and No 5 offset Input T 0 6 0 8 ENTER _ execute No 6 tool and No 8 offset Input T 0 O ENTER do not execute the tool exchange and cancel the offset Input T O 4 O ENTER keep the current tool and execute No 40 offset Note 1 Example inputting T400 means the system executes No 4 tool change and cancels the offset note cannot input T040 2 wt When the electromotive tool post is failure the system displays Check tool signal overtime which means the system cannot find the corresponding tool number in the specified time 3 VY The system uses the absolute too change mode each position on the tool post is fixed when the system uses the electromotive tool post the operator confirms the tool number on the tool post to be consistent with the one displayed on the screen 4 Set P318 to 0 and there is no tool change signal output in selecting the line up tool post 5 krd There are two methods to execute the offset move the machine slider or modify the system coordinate which is selected by P403_d6 6 Set P403_d6 to 1 move the machine slider but do not change the coordinates in executing the offset Set P403_d6 to 0 modify the coordinate display instead of moving machine slider 7 4 When the tool change is failure or is broken in the to
450. shensiavekeuseupiavens 338 3 6 4 Connection layout of converter analog voltage aeceessscdecedecctecesescceceeescsesedesesccetosseeccsescoccessseecs 339 3 6 5 Encoder interface method sseeeessseeeeeeeeeseeeeceeceeeceecccecccccseececcoccssececececcssesceccoccssccccecccosssececsecssseee 339 3 6 6 Encode interface connection layout aasesecesececececcsvessescctscsuctsescsasccecsceccucecececuscesossssesusceucesesesuscs 339 3 6 7 Connection between CNC system Y and AC Servo drive unit seeeseeseeeeeseeeseesseesseeeeeseeeseeeseee 340 3 6 8 Connection between CNC system Y and DAPO3 spindle drive unitseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 341 3 7 X5 MPG Interfacersrsssressssscssssecsssecececscssssccecscsscsesccesscsessecsssesesssscsscscssssescsesscssssesacsessssesesessesesecssseses 342 3 7 1 Signal definition rssrseserseserseseosessesessosensnsenensensonsnessnsensnsensosensnessnssnsnssnsnssnsnssssneensnesssneees 342 3 7 2 Interface method PPPTTTTTTTTTTTLITITITITITTTTTTTITTTTTTTTiTiTiTrrrrerrrrrrrrirrrrrrreerrerrrrerirririrerrrrerreeTrireeetTt reer 342 3 7 3 Connection layout SO SCOC ECOL ECCOECLDLCLET CED ECLCTCLDL E CET CLDLECETCLOLELETCLOLCELECLOLT LET CLOLECLLCLEL ELT CLCT CLE CECE CTC 342 CHAPTER 4 USER USE AND MAINTENANCE tteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecececccecececececececccccececececccecececececececececececececececcceeeeee 343 4 1 Environmental Conditiop ssseeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeccecseeceecccccsceececccosseeceeccccosececececcsseccecccscssececececssssccseeeeeee 343 4 2
451. spindle s brake is installed or not 3 The system forbids executing G32 when the system is in DRY RUN mode 4 The other cautions are the same those of G33 Example YX Fig 4 15 tapping Example Single thread with 1 5 mm lead N0010 GOO X0 Z20 rapidly positioning the starting point of workpiece N0020 M3 S01 spindle CW N0030 G01 Z2 F500 Z approaches the workpiece N0040 G32 Z 30 P1 5 Z infeed tool tapping N0050 G00 Z20 leave the workpiece and return to program starting point N0060 M02 end of program 4 7 G50 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System The system directly modifies the current tool nose coordinates into the coordinate values set by G50 in G50 and sets the current machine coordinates to the program reference point After the system executes G50 the front of the machine coordinates of the corresponding axis has green icon K which is taken as the program reference point return prompt The coordinate system created by G50 is taken as the workpiece coordinate system After the coordinate system is created the position of absolute coordinate in the following command is the coordinate values in the coordinate system Z of the workpiece coordinate system is defined in the rotary center of the workpiece when the system creates the workpiece coordinate system X is defined in the end face of the chuck or the workpiece Command format G50 Z X_ Y_ three axis workpiece coordinate system settin
452. spindle gear shifting 1 99999 time 1 ms Frequency spindle gear shifting 1 99999 time 2 ms P313 2 Spindle gear switch interval ms 100 1 99999 time ms P314 2 Output voltage in spindle gear mV 0 0 10000 shifting mV P315 2 Spindle stop brake delay time ms 100 1 99999 ms P316 2 Spindle brake output time ms ms 1000 1 99999 P317 2 Spindle max speed limit r min 8000 1 99999 P318 1 Tool post type 0__9 0 0 9 P319 1 Max tool number 4 1 16 P320 1 Covered line quantity of tool 4 1 8 signal P321 2 Too change T1 time ms ms 100 1 99999 P322 2 Too change T2 time ms ms 100 1 99999 2 Too change T3 time ms 1 99999 2 Tool post CCW locking time 1 99999 ms Tool change indexing time 1 99999 upper ms Spindle controlling pulse time 1 99999 ms Chuck controlling pulse time 1 99999 ms Tailstock controlling pulse time 1 99999 ms M respond check time ms 1 99999 Automatic lubricating start time 0 99999 999 s Automatic lubricating interval 0 99999 999 time s Durable pressure low alarm 0 001 time s 99999 999 Program line number automatic 0 100 interval Reserved 4 6 5 5 Bit parameter Set the corresponding bit to O or 1 to realize the different control functions and to meet all kinds of 119 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual requirements of different machines Parameter Parameter og lla Parameter name Initial value Range User backu
453. sseecceceecseecceeceesseeeececeeosceseeessessseee 68 4 5 1 System working mode in AUTO working modeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeoseeeseeese 70 4 5 2 Function key operation in AUTO working modesssesseeeeseeeeeeeseseeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceseeeeseeeeeeee 70 4 5 2 1 SINGLE execution and CONTINUOUS execution switcheeseeseesseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 70 4 5 2 2 Dry run and machining run switch eee 70 4 5 2 3 Switch between coordinate system and graph displayeeeseeseeeeseeeeseeeereeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesee 71 4 5 2 4 Running a part program from the first block sseeeseeeeeereeseeseseeseeeeseeeeeeeseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeee 71 4 5 2 5 Running a part program from a specified bloCkeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesoeeeesoeeeeooeeeesoeeeeooesoeeeesoeee 72 4 5 3 Displaying ina part program running Siswetdececussdvesdesesestcvcsdscecestesescccssesesssdsecescsescecessssctescscecteus 72 XII Contents 4 5 3 1 Graphic display data definitioneeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeereeeeereeeereeeeeereeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeseeeeseee 73 4 5 3 2 Inputting data of graph displayseeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeereeereeereeereeeeeeeeeeecoseeeoeecoeeeeereeereeereseeeeeeeeeeesee 74 4 5 3 3 Machining workpiece count and timing ceseeccececcsoooscecosososeocoosooosocosososeccoososseecosoosseccossosseoo 75 4 5 4 Manual operation of miscellaneous function ssessesseeseeseeeeseseeeeseecoecceccoecoeccoscocccecooccsecooesseeseesoe 75 4 5 5 Speed override tune in AUTO working Mo
454. stant surface speed Data parameter P300 P303 max speed of spindle in the spindle gear 1 4 corresponding to M41 M44 153 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 See OPERATION 4 4 JOG Working Mode 3 3 T function Tool Function Machining one workpiece needs several different tools The motor tool post with 4 8 tool selections can be controlled by the system To avoid the error caused by the installation or the wear and tear each tool is placed in the different position when it is cutting the workpiece the tool change and the tool compensation are employed in the programming Toolsetting operation is executed before machining receives the position offset data of each tool called as tool offset T command is executed in program running the system automatically executes the tool offset So each tool in programming according to the workpiece drawing dimension is compiled instead of considering the position among each tool in the machine coordinate system The deviation of machining dimension caused by tool wear can be changed according to the dimension deviation to modify the tool deviation Command format Txx _____ the first 1 digit is the tool number the second is the tool offset number Txxx _____ the first 1 digit is the tool number the following 2 digit is the tool offset number Txxxx ____ the first 2 digit is tool number and the second 2 digit is tool offset number Field Tool number r it is d
455. starting point and end point in R programming 8 G02 G03 G05 must not be with T in one block The system alarms E205 is incompatible 9 The arc cannot be more than 180 in R programming Example 1 Z A 1 Draw the full circle along the arc direction to judge whether the machining arc is CCW or CW interpolation When it is CW the system executes G03 when it is CCW the system does G02 Fig 4 6 arc interpolation Clockwise interpolation from A to B at feedrate 100mm min as Fig 4 6 N0100 G00 N0110 G03 N0110 G03 or N0110 G03 N0110 G03 X20 X60 X60 U40 U40 rapidly position to machining starting point 10 K 20 F100 Circle center programming Z40 R20 F100 Radius programming W 20 10 K 200 F100 W 20 R20 F100 Counterclockwise interpolation from A to B at feedrate 100mm min N0100 G00 N0110 G02 N0110 G02 or N0110 G02 N0110 G02 Example 2 164 X20 X60 X60 U40 U40 rapidly position to machining starting point of arc 140 KO F100 Circle center programming Z40 R20 F100 Radius programming W 20 140 KO F100 W 20 R20 F100 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions A N Absolute programming N0000 GO X18 ZO b N0010 G02 X30 Z 15 R20 F100 i VA N0020 M30 Relative programming N0000 GO X18 ZO N0010 G02 U12 W 15 R20 F100 N0020 M30 Fig 4 7 circular interpolation 4 4 Chamfering Function Chamfering function is to ins
456. stem Operation Panel letter key only expresses one letter key For example and are on one key the operator directly press the key when I or P is required and the system automatically indentifies other letters Digit key input all kind of data O 9 Letter key input field address English letter Symbol key minus sign decimal and so on Logic key gt lt and or and soon 3 3 2 Working mode selection key Marking with the symbols and characters the working mode selection keys are pressed to complete the corresponding function and their definitions are as follows ee ET select EDIT working mode pon J6 select JOG working mode mo AUTO select AUTO working mode mo PARAVETER Select PARAMETER working mode Di OFFSET select OFFSET working mode pacnoss select DIAGNOSIS working mode 3 3 3 Function keys Press function keys with the visualization symbol and letter to complete the corresponding functions and each symbol definition is as follows Wu R overRIE INCREASING RAPID OVERRIDE Increase rapid traverse override in JOG working mode and GOO rapid traverse override in AUTO working mode Wu RERE REDUCING RAPID OVERRIDE Reduce rapid traverse override in JOG working mode and GOO rapid traverse override in AUTO working mode WW FeR INCREASING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE Increase feedrate override in JOG working mode and G01 feedrate override in AUTO work
457. stem defaults the tailstock backward after power on the first control input of chuck is valid and the system outputs the signal of tailstock forward 2 When it is the interlock protection between the tailstock and the spindle in the spindle running the system forbids operating the tailstock otherwise it alarms 3 WY In automatic continuous run the tailstock control input is invalid no matter what the spindle rotates 4 When the tailstock operation is failure or interrupted reset emergency stop the system takes the tailstock is in the unconfirmed position prompts the tailstock flashing in red M78 or M79 at the moment the system cannot start the machining programs the system recovers the normal state when the tailstock operation is executed once again or the system is turned on again 5 WY The tailstock respond signal consecutive check is to continuously check whether the tailstock abnormally releases in the normal or machining state If the above is set the alarm P402_d2 1 the system stops the program machining and closes the spindle when the chuck releases in machining When the tailstock signal cancels M80 the tailstock state M78 or M79 is displayed with the underline i e M78 or M79 __ 6 WY 4 4 9 Other option functions Option function is the non standard pin input output control When the system needs some function the operator defines its pin in the interface parameter and correctly connects with t
458. stent with the input Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after inputting offset 58 Operation Chapter Four System Operation number The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it to the specified offset number Trial cutting toolsetting method method 2 Operation step as follows 1 X toolsetting 1 2 WY 3 WY 4 WY 5 Ww Install the trial workpiece reliably on the machine and select a tool usually select the first one used in machining Select the proper spindle speed and then start the spindle Traverse the tool in JOG Working mode and cut a small sidestep of the workpiece X does not move the operator presses and the system automatically memorizes the tool nose position and displays the toolsetting icon q flashing and then X moves out the safe position and the spindle stops rotating Measure the diameter of the cut sidestep Press and the system display Toolsetting X to input the measured data and press ENTER The system prompts Confirm tool offset number XX it automatically presets one offset_number and the operator directly presses ENTER when the offset number is consistent with the input Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after inputting offset number The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it to the specified offset number the system automatically cancel the toolsetting icon 2 Z toolsetting 1
459. stock control M78 M79 When the system executes these commands it has not checked the corresponding valid input signals and has not completed the command operations in the limit time the system prompts whether the operator tries again The system is in pause state when it prompts the trial message at the moment the operator should check the relative input signal and execute the troubleshooting After the failure is resolved the operator presses R key execute again the command which is just now failure After the re execution is completed the system is in pause state and the operator presses CYCLE START to continuously the machine When the re execution is not correction the operator should press ESC to escape the machining program d0__wait for stable speed before machining the thread 0 donot wait whether the system checks the spindle speed is stable in machining thread 1 wait the system automatically checks whether the spindle speed is stable in machining thread and waits the stable speed to machine thread The parameter is valid to G33 G92 G32 G34 II The system checks the spindle speed instantaneously when the spindle raises speed or reduces speed the system waits for the process to end and then machines the thread When the system executes immediately the thread command after changing the speed maybe the checking spindle speed function is invalid Example in S1000 stable state the system executes S20
460. supplies 16 steps for spindle override 0 150 increment of 10 The feed override key on the machine panel can regulate real time the actual feedrate override steps can be regulated in 0 150 and is reserved even if the system is switched off The cutting feedrate override 156 Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions regulation is referred to OPERATION 4 4 JOG Working Mode Relative parameters 1 System parameter P112 the initial speed in cutting feed 2 System parameter P113 max speed limit of cutting feed 3 System parameter P114 linear acceleration deceleration of cutting feed 4 System parameter P115 exponential acceleration deceleration of cutting feed 5 System parameter P118 G99 initial lines Note Note There is the uneven cutting feedrate when the spindle speed is lower than 1 r min in G99 there is the follow error in the actual cutting feedrate when there is the swing in the spindle speed To gain the high machining quality it is recommended that the selected spindle speed should be not lower than min speed of the spindle servo or the converter 157 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Here describes the functions and the explanations of all G commands of the system 4 1 G00 Rapid Traverse Positioning The tool rapidly traverses to the specified position in GOO Command format GOO ZCW X CU Y CV _ three axes rapidl
461. switches into the low speed state the speed indicator is OFF the federate override is the current gear 3 The system uses the embedded speed to feed when the input F is 03 42 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 4 JOG movement and STEP movement operations are controlled by F when the speed indicator is OFF 5 When the indicator is OFF the low speed feed speed is limited by P113 max cutting feed speed When the input F is more than 9113 it takes P113 as the standard 6 When the indicator is OFF in the two axis speed feed the traverse mode is the same that of G01 in AUTO working mode i e interpolation move mode the two axes simultaneously move at their proportion and simultaneously end F is the combined speed of the two axes 7 When the indicator is ON in the single axis rapid traverse the speed is determined by P100 P102 8 When the indicators is ON in the two axis rapid traverse the traverse mode is determined by P400_d3 and is the same that of GOO P400_d3 0 it is the separately traverse mode each axis rapidly moves the system displays the combined speed more than rapid traverse speed of each axis P400_d3 1 it is the interpolation traverse mode two axes simultaneously move rapidly at their proportion and simultaneously end and the system is related to the motion parameter of two axes and the slope of move block 9 When the federate override is 0 and the system is in the low speed feed state or there is F i
462. system recovers to the previous after it escapes from the DRY RUN working mode 4 In DRY RUN working state all macro command and M60 M74 are normally executed after the system modifies the offset and the system escapes from the DRY RUN working mode the tool nose coordinates of corresponding tool offset number are changed 5 The workpiece counter does not automatically add 1 in DRY RUN working mode 4 5 2 3 Switch between coordinate system and graph display The function is valid in any states in AUTO working mode The system enters AUTO working mode after it is turned on firstly and it automatically selects the coordinate display In AUTO working mode press T to switch coordinate display and graph display In graph display mode press Z to switch tool path display and workpice solid graph display 4 5 2 4 Running a part program from the first block After entering AUTO working mode the system enters the initial state and the program pointer points to the first block of the current program and CYCLE START key is pressed to start the program to automatically run The being executed block displays and flashes in poor color the first line is the executed block and the 3 line is to be executed when the machining program is the conditional command the skip or call target is not well defined and the 3 line may not be displayed 71 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 5 2 5 Running a part program from a specifie
463. system the customizing the length the offset and the proportion can be modified when the system selects the program creation they cannot be modified at the moment the area range preset by the system is the full 73 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual graph of program motion path the length the offset and the proportion cannot be modified and the system enters the program setting execution state Example Example part blank length 100mm end face 2 is intersection of Z and X In the customizing mode the set Z length is 100 X length is 40 Z offset is 100 X offset is 0 proportion is 10 End face 2 4 5 3 2 Inputting data of graph display In AUTO working mode without motion press and the graph display data is as follows Press or to select the graph area to be Custom press tt or y to select the required modifying data The system displays the previous defined displayed data is the following figure and the cursor points to the required data to be modify Press to delete the previous data and input the data to modify 200 Fig 4 9 graph data display e Input data without decimal point and press to delete the previous data and then input the new data Press continuously and the graph data displays the window cycle e Scale modification When the cursor points to scale press or to make the Scale to circularly reduce or enlarge The system decided scale ha
464. system will automatically escapes from the auto initial state after ESC or RESET is pressed in the course of the feed hold and the spindle stopping The previous state of spindle and the unfinished commands cannot be reserved Programs are restarted if the machining is executed continuously 4 5 6 3 External start and pause signal External start pause signal is valid in AUTO working mode Whether the external start pause signal is valid is controlled by P412_7 P412_d7 1 the system external start pause signal is valid the input signal is received by ST SP 79 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual pin P412_d7 0 the system external feed hold knob is invalid the pin of input signal can be used as others The external pause operation key signal SP has the same function with that of the feed hold key cycle pause key on the machine panel the external cycle start key signal ST has the same function with that of the cycle start key on the machine panel SP ST are input to the system from the machine and they are valid when the low level is connected Before the system is switched from other working mode to AUTO working mode External start button is released power off otherwise the system alarms The detailed circuit connection method is referred to CONNECTION Chapter 3 CNC Device Connection 4 5 6 4 Feed device alarm function When the system needs the function the input pin is defined in the interface p
465. t 290 10 X40 70 M30 4 G33 end face straight thread as Fig 4 12 Starting point End point Fig 4 12 P is negative sign decide the direction of the thread run out there is no the thread run out when is omitted Example GOO Z100 X20 G33 U20 7 K3 11 6 P 2 end point 2101 60 X40 70 M30 5 Comprehensive example as Fig 4 13 177 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Fig 4 13 thread cutting Example thread lead 2mm cutting depth 2 5mm diameter value cutting twice as Fig 4 13 N0000 GOO X25 Z5 approach workpiece N0010 G01 X23 5 F100 tool infeed 1 5 mm diameter programming N0020 G33 2 50 P2 K2 5 15 0 the first thread cutting N0030 G00 X26 N0040 Z5 return to the starting point N0050 G01 X22 5 the second tool infeeding 1 mm NOO60 G33 2 50 P2 K2 5 15 0 the second thread cutting N0070 GOO X26 N0080 Z5 z returns to starting point N0090 M30 4 5 2 G34 variable pitch thread cutting Command format G34 XU ZCW _ PCE _ K IL Q_ R_ H_ variable pitch thread cutting G34 Z W _ PCE _ K_ L Q_ R_ H_ variable pitch axial straight thread cutting G34 X U _ PCE _ K IL Q_ R_ H_ variable pitch end face straight thread cutting Field P metric thread lead E inch thread lead When P E is the positive it means the axial thread and Z is the thread axis it is the negative it means the end face thread and X is the thread axis X U Z W
466. t and explanation Function Group Remark G40 i G40 Cancel tool nose radius Initial G compensation G41 Cancel tool nose radius 4 compensation left Modal G G42 G42 Cancel tool nose radius compensation right i axi Rapid t G00 G00 X U Z W YW single 2 or 3 axis apid traverse Initial G three axis G01 G01 X U Z W YCV F single 2 or 3 axis f F 0 001 mm min 15000mm min Linear interpolation G02 X U ZW RF G02 G02 X U ZW I K F F 0 001 mm min 15000mm min Interpolation CW 2 R 1000000 000mm Modal G G03 X U ZW RF G03 X U ZW IKF Interpolation CCW S03 F 0 001 mm min 15000mm min R 1000000 000mm G05 G05 XU Z W K F I K along the arc Arc interpolation G32 G32 Z W P E H G32 Y V P E H Tapping cycle G33 X U Z W PCE I K QH E 0 060 tooth inch 25400 000 tooth inch Non modal G33 P 0 001mm 500 000mm Constant thread cutting G Q initial angel range O 360000 unit 0 001 Q is 0 when it is not specified G34 G34 X U Z W P I K Q R H Variable pitch thread G26 X U Z W C single 2 or 3 axis j None G26 Cross the middle point and return to the program Program reference point return 3 None reference point rapid traverse in G00 None G28 G28 X U orG28 Z W or G28 Y V Machine zero return G30 P2 X U Z W C single 2 or 3 axis rr G30 G39 P3 x CU Z W 2 3 program reference point return G50 G50 X Z Y single 2 or 3 axis Workpiece coordinate system setting N
467. t between CNC and AC servo drive unit Connection layout between CNC and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit X connection layout GSK928TEa Metal shell 3 11 10 Less than 15m shield cable Xpu Xpu Xdirt Xdir Xen 24V _ Xalm OV XO Z connection layout 334 GSK928TEa 4 12 6 1 d 15 2 9 10 Metal shell x2 13 GSKDA98 drive PULS PULS SIG SIGN SON COM AIM co co RSTP DG DG FSTP Zero 18 6 19 7 21 8 15 2 oO 17 22 Metal shell 2 Less than 15m shield cable Zput PULS Zpu PULS Edict SIGN Ldir SIGN Zen SON 24V COM Zalm AIM COM OV COM RSTP DG DG FSTP ZO Zero 10 4 17 22 Metal shell 2 GSKDA98 drive lt Li Single phase N o Encode feedback signal AC220V PE U V y Motor power supp ly P aa D AC servo motor Single phase o Encoder feedback signal AC220V Motor anal supply AC servo motor Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection Connection layout between CNC and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit GSK928TEa X DA98 drive unit Signal interface X pulse xe En ee ee eee Ete enote Pp aw a ee ee alm Metal shell X2 tool post s
468. t check 1 check when the system needs the respond check input interface RM10 and RM11 are separately taken the clamping and releasing in position signal input d4_tailstock control function 0 valid the system has the hydraulic tailstock control function 1 invalid the system forbids M78 M79 without the hydraulic tailstock control function d3__ chuck control output 0 level control M10 M11 output in level mode 1 pulse the hold time of M10 M11 in pulse control mode is determined by P327 d2__tailstock control output 0 level control M78 M79 output in level mode 1 pulse the hold time of M78 M79 in pulse control mode is determined by P328 d1__ hydraulic chuck pedal switch input 0 do besides using the command to control the hydraulic chuck the operator can use the external pedal switch to control the hydraulic chuck 1 donot d0_ hydraulic tailstock pedal switch input 0 do II besides using the command to control the hydraulic chuck the operator can use the external pedal switch to control the hydraulic chuck 1 do not 4 6 4 8 Run and efficiency bit parameter __ P400 P401 run setting __bit parameter P400 password level 3 reserved d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 Reserved d6___spindle gear memory 0 invalid the spindle gear M41 M44 cannot be memorized in JOG and AUTO working mode it is M41 after power on again 1 valid the spindle gear M41 M44 can b
469. t has been installed in the machine execute the tool change mode 1 or 2 P318 3 applied to Hengyang turning CLT 63 CLT300 series 8 tool selection tool post in Taiwan execute the tool change mode 3 P318 4 applied to near positive and negative tool change type execute the tool change mode 4 P318 9 use M60 customized command tool change refer to examples in CONNECTION 3 4 Tool Change Function and Connection When P318 is not the above digit the system executes the tool change based on the tool change mode 1 Max tool selection number __ miscellaneous parameter P319 The parameter defines max tool selection number of the tool post The standard configuration of the system CNC is 8 tool selection electronic tool post The tool selection signal can extend to 12 16 tool selections tool post according to the special encode input Refer to CONNECTION 3 4 Tool Change Control Function and Connection Line quantity covered by tool selection signal __ miscellaneous parameter P320 Tool change T1 T2 T3time ms __ miscellaneous parameter P321 P322 P323 In T1__ tool change after the tool post has CW checked the tool selection signal the delay time from stopping CW rotation to starting CCW rotation unit ms After T2___ CW rotation stopping the tool selection lock signal check time unit ms T3__ delay time from locking proximity switch signal to motor stopping brake unit ms Tool post CCW rotation lock signal ms __ miscellaneo
470. t is according to the used control line quantity the controlled total gear quantity is oe max setting 4 channel control line output is taken as the gear control signal d4__ switching the spindle and Y 0 donot switch the spindle does not work in the position control mode forbid M47 M48 1 switch the spindle switches between the position control mode and the speed control mode use M47 M48 d3__ spindle brake signal output 0 use output the brake signal MSP in executing M5 1 donot use do not output the brake signal MSP in executing M5 MSP signal interface is used to other interfaces control d2__ spindle CCW signal output 0 use output the spindle rotation CCW signal M04 1 donot use II forbid outputting the spindle CCW signal M04 When the spindle configuration is set to the frequency M41 M42 M43 M44 execute the gear shifting The system does not execute the gear shifting when the specified gear is consistent with the current gear The system executes the gear shifting when the specified gear is not consistent with the current gear Executing M41 outputs the analog voltage according to the parameter value after delaying frequency spindle gear shifting time 1 parameter P311 close the previous gear output signal and output the new gear shifting signal execute the next block after the system has checked the gear shifting in position signal delaying frequency spindle gear shifting time 2 P312 output the
471. t line of the selected workpiece program and gradually executes till the program ends The system combines the operator parameter table offset value to analyze and precheck the part 68 Operation Chapter Four System Operation programs When the system prechecks the problem executing the machining program causes the serious result and the system closes the Cycle start key In the condition pressing CYCLE START key is invalid and the system refuses to execute the program the system can execute after the program or the parameter is modified according to the alarm message The system provides many part program execution modes and the operator must set before running to get the safety of machining process Main functions in AUTO Working mode 1 Set SINGLE CONTINUOUS run program 2 Set DRY RUN without output check run and the system accelerates to execute the program in DRY RUN mode 3 Precheck the software limit alarm before running programs 4 Set blocks and execute the middle of the program 5 Spindle cooling press key control 6 Execute machining programs by pause block stop end stop cycle stop 7 Tune cutting speed override proportion 8 Correct offset in execution process 9 Real time state display of machine pop up window real time alarm display content on screen as Fig 4 7 Upper Top display the execution mode SINGLE CONTINUOUS DRY RUN current program number workpice count machining time system functi
472. t program execution path to reduce the alarm error in Auto mode and improve the safety of executing part programs Press compiling command key and the system orderly checks and compiles part programs from the first line block and creates convenient target command according to the execution path When the system finds out the mistaken operator programs it stops the compiling displaying the mistaken field position and number in the line of the source program prompting the operator to modify till the mistaken is corrected 4 3 6 1 hp3 compiling command In program edit window press hp3 and the system orderly compile the current program The system pops up a window Program alarm when it finds out a mistaken message The system displays Current edited program compiling is completed successfully when all command compiling are correct 32 Operation Chapter Four System Operation Program alarm message includes as follows Error mistaken command refer to PROGRAMMING Chapter 8 Alarm Message according to the commands Line line where the mistaken block is in the program Program content of mistaken block Position mistaken letter or field of mistaken block Explanation 1 Program which is compiled successfully by hp3 can run in AUTO working mode 2 The system automatically completes the compile when it switches from EDIT working mode to other working modes 3 Press hp3 to complete compile to appear Program ala
473. t up 3 steps to execute tool nose radius compensation tool compensation creation tool compensation execution and tool compensation canceling Tool traverse is called tool compensation creation starting tool from offset canceling to G41 or G42 execution Note 1 The tool nose transition method is set by P411_d4 Note 2 Meanings of S L C in the following figures are as follows S Stop point of single block L linear C circular a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 1 Linear linear 2 Linear circular a Programmed path Programmed path Tool nose center path Fig 5 6a Linear linear start up inner side Fig 5 6b Linear circular start up inner side Cb Tool movement around an outer side of a corner 180 gt a20 1 Linear Linear Programmed path L Tool nose center path Fig 5 7a start up outer side arc transition at angle 2 Linear gt Circular Tool nose center path Tool nose center path Programmed path Fig 5 8a start up outer side arc transition at angle Fig 5 8b start up outer side linear transition at 237 CGSN I HSU GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 5 2 3 Tool movement in OFFSET mode Offset mode is called to ones after creating tool nose radius compensation and before canceling it The offset path of the tool nose radius compensation is as follows a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 1 Linear l
474. talled on the machine 1 have itis set to 1 when the deceleration switch and block are installed on the machine d4__ Z has or not zero signal d3__ X has or not zero signal d2__ Y has or not zero signal 0 none it is set to 0 when the machine zero switch and block are not installed on the machine 1 have itis set to 1 when the machine zero switch and block are installed on the machine The system has four kinds of zero return method and the detailed connection methods are referred to CONNECTION as follows Zero return Deceleration Zero signal Remark method signal 1 Have Have Use the deceleration signal and zero return signal to return the zero coordinates of machine zero 2 Have None Use the deceleration signal to return to machine zero 3 None Have Use zero signal to return machine zero 4 None None Return to zero coordinates set by the parameter no machine zero zero setting 2 bit parameter P407 password class 1 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 reserved d7__ Z zero return direction d6___ X zero return direction d5___Y zero return direction 0 positive when the deceleration switch is installed on the positive end of the coordinate axis it is set to 0 and the system positively moves the check zero 1 negative when the deceleration switch is installed on the negative end of the coordinate axis it is set to 0 and the system negatively moves the check zero d4__ Z deceleration signa
475. tates to the cutting position Toolsetting is called that the system automatically memorizes the Offset to the specified tool Offset number After the toolsetting the operator is only based on the part drawing and machining technology to compile the workpiece program without considering the tool deviation and only specifies the corresponding Offset number in the tool change in machining program The offset table can record 64 groups of tool offset each tool offset number corresponds to one group from 1 64 Each group separately records Z offset X offset tool radius imagery tool nose number and toolsetting record refer to offset working mode Modify the specified Z offset X offset and toolsetting in the toolsetting operation Fill in advance the tool radius imaginary tool nose number because the system must refer to them in toolsetting otherwise which causes the unexpected result when the system uses the ball tool tool radius imaginary tool nose number should be set to 0 Refer to OFFSET working mode Toolsetting record is the system executes the toolsetting of the_Offset_number it automatically records the current Tool number For the safety the system scans the workpice by the toolsetting record Example the toolsetting is T0409 and the workpice program has T0309 which is not consistent with the Toolsetting record and which is danger and the system pops up the alarm message Notes before toolsetting 1 According to th
476. te software limit exceeding range In executing programs the system displays the program compound check prompt when the tool nose software limit and machine coordinate software limit exceeds the setting range set by the parameter from EDIT working mode to AUTO working mode 2 do not correspond to toolsetting record In executing programs the system displays the program compound check prompt when the toolsetting record does not correspond to the command from EDIT working mode to AUTO working mode Example Program compound check prompt example It is T0408 in toolsetting T0308 in editing programs which does not correspond to the toolsetting record when P403_d4 is set to 1 the system is switched from EDIT working mode to AUTO working mode and pops up the warning message T0308 does not correspond to the toolsetting record T0408 35 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 4 4 JOG Working Mode In JOG working mode the operator can directly press the function key to execute some operation and also press the letter key execute the some setting or execute some operation the system provides the corresponding prompt message for each operation The relative setting or operation input format and example are as follows the required function key is expressed with icon the required input letter or digit key is expressed with the underline the system prompt is expressed with the frame Press to clear the mist
477. te system is defined that some point on the workpiece is considered as the coordinate origin to create the coordinate system Its axes are separately parallel with X Z axis in the same direction After the workpiece coordinates is created all absolute coordinate values in programming are the position values in the workpiece coordinate system Generally Z workpiece coordinate system is set on the rotary center of workpiece According to the actual condition in programming define the workpiece coordinate origin i e the 136 Programming Chapter One Programming Fundamental programming origin in the workpiece drawing and the coordinate origin of CNC system command The workpiece coordinate system is created by setting a workpiece coordinate 1 6 Programming Coordinate Programming coordinate is for workpiece coordinate system GSK928TEa programming uses absolute coordinates X Z incremental relative coordinates CU W gt or compound coordinates X W U Z 1 6 1 Absolute Coordinate Values The absolute coordinate value is the distance to the coordinate origin i e the coordinate position of the tool traversing to the end point as Fig 1 3 Fig 1 3 absolute coordinate value Tool traversing from A to B uses B coordinate values as follows X 50 Z 70 1 6 2 Incremental Relative Coordinate Values The incremental coordinate value is the distance from the previous position to the next one i e the actual traversing dist
478. ted The system automatically arranges the execution sequence for M with the interlock relationship d2__rapid skip block execution function 0 close 1 open P401_d3 1 P401_d2 1 is valid P401_d2 1 the system permits the skip block execution In the mode after the axis motion command of current block is executed the system does not wait for M S T having been done it rapidly skip to the next block to execute 4 6 4 9 Relationship between path and run efficiency parameter 1 P401_ d4 0 the cutting command executes the continuous and smooth transition and the post acceleration deceleration function is valid G01 processing P401_ d5 0 G01 has the front acceleration deceleration function G01 and G01 perform the connection transition with the best speed and the system executes the post acceleration deceleration processing when the cutting speed is high the linearity path is precise and the transition point is smooth At the moment the post acceleration deceleration function does not greatly influence the path precision 107 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual P401_ d5 1 G01 does not use the high speed connection and execute the front acceleration deceleration processing and directly executes the post acceleration deceleration processing Arc processing P400_ d2 0 the system executes the arc precision process when the arc crosses the high point The arc command has the front acceleration decelerat
479. ted and the system enters the program analog execution state Motion path drawing The program analog execution is divided into single mode continuous mode execution and it is single block in the initial state press SINGLE and the two mode are switched each other Press ENTER once to execute one block in single mode press ENTER to automatically execute the whole program in continuous mode 33 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Motion path graph color explanation Workpiece programming path green Tool center path white in rapid traverse yellow in feed cutting Tool contour path brown in rapid traverse red in feed cutting Current tool center position dot in grey Last tool center position dot in blue Z X coordinate line white Horizontal scroll bar under graph blue Vertical scroll bar right to graph blue graph motion path zoom out in Press to zoom out or zoom in graph The operator can see the local area after it is zoomed out The position and length of scroll bar indicate the position and the covered proportion of E gt visual area in the full graph Press tt f y to move the scroll bar and see other areas Current Z Set Graphic Area X min 210 Zmin 210 X max 360 Z max 460 Fig 4 5 program graph display Note The program analog drawing function only executes the analog to program run path instead of fully display the actual cutting path
480. ted common variable and using its value means to use all it pointed common variable s value The pointer variable can participate the operation or reading judgement The method of creating and changing pointer The pointer must be created correctly and points to a certain given common variable before using e ce the pointer variable The pointing sign are and gt and a blank is allowed between them The variable format of creating and changing pointer Pointer variable name gt expression Such as r 9001 gt 1 expression of the r9001 pointer variable pointing to r001 common variable 278 r 9002 gt 199 expression of the r9002 pointer variable pointing to r199 common variable r 9003 gt r400 when r100 equals to five it s the expression of r9003 pointing to r005 common variable r 9003 gt r 9003 1 expression of r9003 pointing to next common variable when it points r5 at first then now it points to r6 r 9003 gt r 9003 1 expression of r9003 pointing to previous common variable when it points r6 at first then now it points to r5 The characteristic of pointer variable 1 At first set up the pointer variable and let it point to a certain specified common variable then Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming make the read written operation to it or use for judgement otherwise alarm 2 In setting up the pointer variable the value range of is from 1 to 199 it is to say it can po
481. tem has checked the zero signal to decelerate to stop moving Step 5 the above operations have completed the zero return motion and check processes at last the system automatically modifies the current machine coordinate into the Zero coordinate set by the parameter Zero return mode 2 when there is the only deceleration signal without the zero signal the system executes the zero return mode 2 Because there is no zero signal the system reduces the above the Step 3 and Step 4 compared to the zero return mode 1 the system only executes the above Step 1 Step 2 and Step 5 to complete the zero return process which zero return precision is worse than the zero return mode 1 Zero return mode 3 when there is the zero signal without the deceleration signal the system execute the zero return mode 3 Because there is no deceleration signal the system reduces the above the Step 1 Step 2 and Step 3 compared to the zero return mode 1 the system only executes the above Step 4 and Step 5 to complete the zero return process In the mode the manual operation moves the coordinate axis to a special position and then the system executes the zero return otherwise the result is not correct Zero return mode 4 the system executes the zero return mode 4 when there is no deceleration and zero signal When there is no machine zero check device installed on the machine the relative parameters are set to 0 at the moment when the system executes t
482. tem has provided fifteen customization commands from M60 to M74 how many is need exactly is edited by the machine manufacturer The customization command must be edited in 254 program at first debug 245 program successfully in AUTO working mode then harden the program in EDIT working mode after the program is hardened successfully the hardened customization command can be used in AUTO mode or other program i e 000 253 otherwise the system will alarm that there is no customization command This chapter will express the written customization command method from example Program example It is supposed that the manufacturer install a loader in the machine UO31 output pin controls the forward and back of the loader when it is input O the loader goes ahead when it is output 1 the loader will go back checking the loader forward and back is in the place or not by UI05 UI06 inputting pin when the system has checked the UI05 is 0 the loader is in the forward place when the system has checked the UI06 is 0 the loader is in the back place in the example M61 command is used for controlling the loader forward an check if it is in position M62 command is used for controlling the loader backing and check if it is in the back place 254 N0010 M98 P1000 No 245 program starts execution call the M61 command at first N0020 G04 D3 N0030 M98 P2000 CII M62 command N0040 G04 D3 N0050 M02 N1000 M61 Th
483. tem outputs 2 pulses when its moves 0 001mm every time in radius programming the system outputs 1 pulse when its moves 0 001mm every time in diameter programming 3 Ratio between multiplication coefficient and division coefficient is 1 1 as follows Z Y the system outputs the pulse in movement of 0 001mm multiplication division X the system outputs the pulse in movement of 0 001mm multiplication 2 division in 97 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual radius programming the system outputs the pulse in movement of 0 001mm multiplication division in diameter programming 4 When the system max pulse output frequency is 511pps ms the frequency cannot exceed the value otherwise the system alarms in movement i e POO max traverse speed x multiplication division should not be more than 30000mm min Spindle encoder lines __ transmission parameter P209 The parameter defines the spindle encoder lines it setting range 100 5000 when the setting value is not consistent with the spindle encoder lines the diagnosis prompts in DIAGNOSIS working mode Encoder lines are not consistent with the parameter Unit line r Z XIY backlash value __ transmission parameter P200 P201 P202 The parameter defines the backlash value of Z X Y mechanical transmission Unit mm There are backlash clearances in the lead screw the decelerator and other driving device which cause the error in the repeated motion of tool post To av
484. tepper initialization value are referred to the motion parameter list in the appendix The initial parameter does not meet all machine and the machine manufacturer should modify the spindle the tool post and other parameters according to the detailed configuration of the machine To avoid the parameter loss the system should execute the solidifying command i e the modified parameter is solidified to the system FLASH storage to backup the FLASH storage without the battery has the permanent save function When the current parameter loses the system extracts the solidified parameter to recover it The system pops up the dialog box of relative operations about the parameter draw solidifying and the operator executes the option operation according to the corresponding dialog box The parameter 91 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual draw command includes stepper parameter initialization servo parameter initialization and machine manufacturer parameter draw Explanation 1 Before executing the parameter solidifying operation the system should check the corresponding parameter and the system prompts the alarm message to require the operator to modify the corresponding parameter when the system find the parameter problem exists after the parameter passes the check it is saved to the system FLSAH to solidify 2 The parameter solidifying operation must be executed before the solidified parameter draw 4 6 3 3 System
485. terminal Press Emergency stop button and the system enters the emergency stop state The system stops all feed the spindle the cooling switching output is valid and the system displays Emergency stop alarm After the emergency stop condition is released the operator should rotate the emergency stop button clockwise based on the up arrow the button automatically releases to cancel the emergency stop signal When the system is in the emergency stop alarm state and the external emergency stop signal is cancelled the RESET key is pressed to escape the emergency stop state to return the previous working mode When the system is in the emergency stop alarm state and the external emergency stop signal is not cancelled the operation is forbidden in JOG AUTO and DIAGNOSIS working mode is permitted in EDIT PARAMETER OFFSET working mode Press RESET to clear the emergency stop alarm window in EDIT PARAMETER and OFFSET working mode and the system permits the operation There is the Emergency stop in the movement there may be great deviation between the coordinates displayed the system and the actual position and the operator must correct the machine coordinates When the emergency stop button is pressed and the emergency stop alarm is released the system state is as follows 1 When the system is in DRY RUN state in Auto working mode it escapes the state 2 When the system is in rapid state in JOG working mode the system automatically s
486. th Tool center path L DER Fia 5 15c Circular Linear 1 inner side cancelina offset b Tool movement around an outer side of a corner 180 gt a20 1 Linear Linear Tool nose center path L Tool nose center path L Fig 5 16a acute angle outer side canceling offset arc Fig 5 16b acute angle outer side canceling offset linear transition at angle transition at angle 2 Circular Linear a i nee r A I C Tool nose center path i a C Tool nose center path Programmed path Programmed path Fig 5 17a acute angle outer side canceling offset arc Fig 5 17b acute angle outer side canceling offset transition at angle linear transition at angle 240 Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation G41 G42 5 2 5 Tool interference check Interference is defined that the tool cuts workpiece excessively and it can find out excessive cutting in advance the interference check is executed even if the excessive cutting is not created but the system cannot find out all tool interferences A Fundamental conditions 1 The tool path direction is different that of program path angle is 90 270 2 There is a big difference a gt 180 for two angles between starting point and end point of tool nose center path and between starting point and end point of program path Example linear machining Tool nose center path Programmed path Directions of two pa
487. the consecutive command is relative to the cycle starting point For example after the system redefines Z end point coordinate Z W it executes the cycle process repeatedly according to the new Z W coordinates The consecutive command cycle contour must be consistent with that of G94 otherwise the system alarms 2 There is the alone Z W in the cycle consecutive command the next block of the consecutive command can follow the consecutive command when the next block is not the alone Z W but other G command the cycle is cancelled when it is not the alone Z W but M S T the system prompts the alarm message 3 When G41 G42 and G94 are compiled in the same block the system executes the tool nose radius compensation in G94 the system automatically compensates according to the motion path which is referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter 5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation 4 G94 is in the alone block except for G41 G42 without other commands 5 Other explanations of G94 are the same those of G90 6 Relationships between the data behind U W R and the tool path are as follows Z Z m U 2 U 2 Yd I N 5 i R W R W _ _ X oy X y X from B to C is negative so U lt 0 X from A to B is negative so W lt 0 X from C to B is negative so R lt 0 3 U gt 0 W lt 0 R gt O X from B to C is positive so U gt 0 X from A to B is negative so W lt 0 X from C to B is positive so R gt 0 X f
488. the graph is the path 6 Tool nose radius RS0 001mm the tool radius compensation function is invalid 5 1 2 Command format G40 G00 x Z G41 B G01 G42 Command Function explanation compensation direction is referred to the next chapter G40 Cancel tool nose radius G41 G41 specifies left tool compensation in rear tool post coordinate system G41 specifies right tool compensation in front tool post coordinate system G42 G42 specifies right tool compensation in rear tool post coordinate system G42 specifies left tool compensation in front tool post coordinate system 5 1 3 Compensation direction The tool radius compensation application must determines the compensation direction according to the relative position between the tool nose and the workpiece as Fig 5 3 The tool nose radius compensation is created by the first movement command following G41 G42 observe from the starting point to the programming path of the command as follows In front tool post coordinate system 1 In G41 the tool center cuts one tool nose radius in the right of the programming path direction at the moment the tool center is in the right of the programmed path 2 In G42 the tool center cuts one tool nose radius in the left of the programming path direction at the moment the tool center is in the left of the programmed path In rear tool post coordinate system 1 In G41 the tool center cuts one tool nose radius in the left
489. the system displays SETTING and press X and the system displays the operator inputs measured diameter value input the radius for the radius programming press ENTER and the system automatically set X workpiece coordinate system 2 Setting Z workpiece coordinate 46 1 Start the spindle traverse the tool to cut a little sidestep on the workpiece X does not move 2 The tool in Z direction moves to the safe position the spindle stops rotating Operation Chapter Four System Operation Select a point as the reference point the point is a fixed point on the machine such as chuck end face or reference face of frock to be convenient to the created workpiece coordinate system to be consistent with the previous workpiece coordinate system after the previous is damaged Measure the distance between the cut end face to the selected reference point 3 Press INPUT and the system displays SETTING press Z and the system displays SETTING WORKPICE COORDINATE SYSTEM Z input the measured data and press ENTER the system automatically set Z workpiece coordinate Note The system workpiece coordinate system completed Explanation has been created after the above operations are 1 Setting the workpice coordinate system operation only modifies the tool nose coordinates of current point without changing the offset and the machine coordinates The operation result is that the offset between th
490. those of the last automatic executing program or manual operation Operation Chapter Four System Operation G modal is always valid till it is changed by other modal commands in the same group after the word is set After the modal meaning is set the G command may not be input again when the same function is used in the later block There are four groups of G command with modal characteristics and there is only one command in the modal state Group 1 G00 G01 G02 G03 G05 Cinitial mode GOO Group 2 G40 G41 G42 Cinitial mode G40 Group 3 G96 G97 Cinitial mode G97 Group 4 G98 G99 Cinitial mode G98 F30 The command without modal characteristics has effect in the block and must be defined to use every time Note In AUTO working mode the system automatically recovers to the program initial mode when it executes the first command of workpiece program or executes the first block command after M20 or selects the middle block as the first command 4 1 4 Safe protection The CNC system set a perfect protection measure to prevent the operator from danger and the machine from being damaged 4 1 4 1 Hardware limit protection The system can check the travel limit switch installed on the machined When the machine slide moves to press the travel limit switch the system stops feeding instead of closing other miscellaneous functions and the program stops running and the system displays the hardware limit ala
491. ths 180 Programmed path Directions of two paths 180 Fia 5 18b machinina interference 2 B Executing it without actual interference 1 Concave groove less than compensation value Tool nose center path Programmed path Fig 5 19a Special execution conditions in interference 1 Directions of block B and tool nose radius compensation path are opposite without the actual interference the tools stops and the system alarms 241 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 2 Concave channel less than compensation value Programmed Tool nose center path path f Fig 5 19b Special execution conditions in interference 2 Directions of block B and tool nose radius compensation path are opposite without the actual interference the tools stops and the system alarms 5 2 6 Particulars 1 Inner side chamfer machining less than tool nose radius At the moment the tool inner side offset causes an excessive cutting The tool stops and the system alarms P S41 when starting the previous block or chamfer moving But the tool stops the end point of previous block when SINGLE is ON 2 Machining concave less than tool nose diameter There is an excessive cutting when the tool nose center path is opposite to program path caused by tool nose radius compensation At the moment the tool stops and the system alarms when starting the previous block or chamfer moving 3 Machining sidestep less than tool
492. ting Tool change sequence as follows 1 After the tool change is executed the system judges whether the target tool number is the current tool check whether the current tool signal is the tool signal of the current tool when the above 322 Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection two conditions meet the current tool is the target the system does not execute the tool change output control and modify the tool offset value otherwise executes the next step 2 Modify the tool offset value 3 Sol A1 is turned on Sol A2 is turned off and the tool pot is released 4 When Sensor F is valid the tool post is released The system alarm Tool post released overtime when the system has not checked SensorFF is valid in the time set by P325 5 Control the tool post to rotate CW CCW to execute nearby the tool change according to the current tool number and the target tool number to judge the tool change direction 6 After the SensorE drop edge which has checkes the tool post rotating to the tool signal before the target tool number appears the system executes the next step 7 WY After the SensorE drop edge which has checks the tool post rotating to the tool signal before the target tool number appear SolA1 is turned off SolA2 is turned on the tool pot is locked at the moment Sol B still keeps ON the motor normally rotates when the system has not checked the tool signal before the target tool number or the tool signa
493. tion The tool nose software limit safe protection is to limit tool nose coordinate motion range to avoid the tool nose to exceed the motion range The tool nose software limit alarms when the machine position tool nose coordinates exceeds the range Releasing overtravel alarm methods reversely movement in JOG working mode negatively moves for positive overtravel positively moves for negative overtravel Operation Chapter Four System Operation Explanation 1 The coordinate axis decelerates to stop when the coordinates exceed the software limit range during the motion Relative parameters P009 P010 max travel of Z positive negative tool nose software limit P011 P012 max travel of X positive negative tool nose software limit P013 P014 max travel of Y positive negative too nose software limit P015 P016 max travel of Z positive negative mechanical software limit P009 P010 max travel of Z positive negative mechanical software limit POO9 P010 max travel of Y positive negative mechanical software limit Bit parameter P404_d4 P404_d3 separately sets whether the mechanical tool nose software limit alarm are valid 4 1 4 3 Emergency stop alarm emergently stopping the system When there is the external emergency stop input terminal ESP in the system input interface the operator should connect the emergency stop button Normally closed contact on the machine panel with the emergency stop input
494. tion method between Y and other drive units is referred to that between Z X and other drive units Note T When the stepper motor is used it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405 d 7 d 0 X motion parameter P100 P116 and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation Parameter Working Mode 340 Connection Chapter Three _CNC Device Connection 3 6 8 Connection between CNC system Y and DAPO3 spindle drive unit motor steps out owing to the external interference Less than 15m shield cable GSK928TEa DAPO3 9 Yput PULS L 49 9 PULS 1 9g Encoder feedback signal 4 d Ydir SIGN 33 p n 5 Ydir SIGN 34 A 9 ven zo 24 Motor power supply 23 Yalm AlM 5 1 OV z0uT a3 AC servo motor odia com d 3g T g SVC VCMD 14 g om DA ig Spindle Metal shell Metal shell encoder 20 APO VP 12 25 API VPO 44 ae ZOUT jp 4 M3 SFR 9 a XI god M4 SW L g Connection table between CNC system and DAPO3 spindle drive unit GSK928TEa Y DAPO3 drive unit Signal interface Y pulse r ae eo ae O r _ a fon ow eae The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system otherwise cause that the CNC system the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing to avoid the motor stepping out because of the e
495. tive move key X X positive move key 2 bps Z Y ZIY ZIY negative move key it is Y when c indicator is ON bps Z Y Z positive move key it is Y when mee indicator is ON ZN coordinate axis switch Press_Z Y SWITCH to the cycle switch of Z or Y operation Z Y SWITCH INDICATOR ON indicates Y operation When the machine is switched into Y operation the program reference point return and the machine zero return are valid in Y axis Note 1 When the external spindle and the feed hold button are in the permissive feed state and the manual feed key is pressed the machine slider can move when they are in the feed hold state the feed hold button introduction is referred to OPERATION 4 5 6 2 2 When the motor rotates with high speed and the feed key is released the machine slider continuously moves and does not stop immediately because of the automatic acceleration deceleration The movement length is determined by the max motor speed the acceleration deceleration time and the feed override The longer the acceleration deceleration time and the motor decelerating movement distance are the higher the speed is on the contrary the shorter the movement is 38 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 4 4 1 2 Step movement mo Press STEP and the system is switched from JOG or MPG to STEP mode STEP TRAVERSE press the coordinate axis move key and the machine slier moves the preset step width The traverse s
496. to execute the other commands following G99 When the parameter setting value is 0 the system does not check the encoder lines till it executes other commands following G99 The lines checked by the system is quadruplication of the spindle encoder Example when the encoder lines are 1200 the lines checked by the system circularly changes in 0 4800 and the parameter setting is in 0 4800 otherwise G99 always waits 4 6 4 4 Parameters related to transmission and compensation P200 P209 P411 P1000 P1905 Z X Y command pulse multiplication ratio __ transmission parameter P203 P205 P207 Z X Y command pulse division coefficient __ transmission parameter P204 P206 P208 P203 Z multiplication Z electronic gear numerator range 1 99999 P204 Z division Z electronic gear denominator range 1 99999 P205 X multiplication X electronic gear numerator range 1 99999 P206 X division X electronic gear denominator range 1 99999 P207 Y multiplication Y electronic gear numerator range 1 99999 P208 Y division Y electronic gear denominator range 1 99999 Notes 1 In setting the related parameters of the transmission the ratio between the multiplication coefficient and division coefficient is 1 128 128 otherwise the system alarms 2 Ratio between the multiplication coefficient and division coefficient is 1 1 as follows ZIY the system outputs 1 pulse when it moves 0 001mm every time X the sys
497. to external MPG I 0 a emergency stop P522 1 WsY External MPG axis Applied to external MPG 0 i selection Y P523 1 WsX External MPG axis Applied to external MPG 0 i selection X P524 1 WsZ External MPG axis Applied to external MPG 0 pe selection Z P525 1 Wbk2 External MPG override Applied to external MPG 0 2 121 CGSN I HSZ GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual P526 1 Wbk1 External MPG override Applied to external MPG 0 1 P527 Reserved P528 1 TFDC Pre graduation Applied to AK31 I 0 in position check SBWD 80 tool post P529 1 TXT Tool selection strobe Applied to AK31 I 0 signal SBWD 80 tool post P530 1 TGR Tool post overheat Applied to AK31 I 0 check SBWD 80 tool post P531 B001 Reserved P532 1 G311 G31 input check Define G31 input 0 interface G31 function is valid P533 1 B003 Reserved l 0 P540 B010 P541 1 No 1 16 tool Used for multi tool l 0 o aa selection check signal selection signal encode 255 P556 Notes 1 Bit parameter P409_d4 1 when the tailstock control function is valid the tailstock forward in position check RM78 RM79 interface are invalid 2 Bit parameter P410_d6 0 when spindle S gear shifting controls gear shifting in position signal M411 M421 M431 M441 interfaces are invalid 4 6 5 9 Parameter list related to command forbidden Some command names re
498. to the reference point execute Fixed point toolsetting press ENTER i e the system completes the toolsetting operation of the current tool and automatically creates the tool offset Note 1 When the system uses the optical toolsetting instrument it must not start the spindle to place the toolsetting point to the intersection of toolsetting instrument other operations are the same 2 The system automatically creates the tool offset which can be displayed and modified in OFFSET working mode Refer to OFFSET working mode 3 When the system uses the line up toolsetting and the tool is at the side of one workpiece the input X measured value should be negative in trial cutting toolsetting 4 4 7 Hydraulic chuck control function Chuck operation In JOG working mode input M10 M11 to control the chuck clamping releasing Input M 0 ENTER chuck clamps The system displays the spindle state Input M 1 ENTER chuck releases 60 Operation Chapter Four System Operation Input M 1 2 ENTER cancel the chuck control signal use M12 for special chuck device Relative parameters P409_d7 0 the system has the hydraulic chuck control function P402_d5 0 interlock between the hydraulic chuck control and the spindle control P402_d4 0 the consecutive check of the chuck respond signal is close P402_d4 1 the consecutive check of the chuck respond signal is open P409_d6 0 the hydraulic chuck is outer
499. tool and the workpiece are interfered the tool the machine and the workpiece may be damaged and even the operator injured Applicability of user manual The manual introduces in detail all functions of the system including optional functions and max controllable ranges which are subject to change with the machine If there is any doubt please read the instruction for the machine Functions of CNC system and machine CNC machines depend on CNC systems but also power voltage cabinets servo systems CNC and the operator panels It is hard to explain all the integrated functions programming and operation Do not use integrated instructions not included in the manual until they have been tested successfully VII CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual IV Notes and Safety Suggestions for Operating Machine VII 1 y g Test the machine without workpieces or tools Make sure that the machine runs well before it starts to work Check the input data of the system carefully before operating the machine Incorrect input data may cause the machine to work improperly so as to damage the workpiece and the tool as well injure the operator Make sure that the input feedrate of the system is suitable for the expected operation Feedrate has a maximum for each machine and the amount of the feed rate is subject to change with operation Choose the maximum according to the instructions of the machine Imprope
500. tool post CCW rotation r4011 r40 Set the tool post CCW rotation time when r4011 lt 5 then P170 else P160 Check the tool post CCW rotation time 12011 1 Close the tool post CCW rotation r4010 100 Tool post CCW rotation in position delayed time when r4010 lt 5 then P180 else P174 Tool post CCW rotation in position delayed when r1001 0 then P190 else P700 Judge the in position signal M99 Tool change end M62 Start to call M62 start the tool change T22 Target tool number i f r1002 0 then P340 else P230 The current tool is consistent to target tool or not r2011 1 Close tool post CCW rotation r2012 0 Tool post CW rotation r4010 r39 Set the tool change time 30 seconds when r4010 lt 5 then P650 else P270 Judge the tool change time is too long or not when r1002 0 then P280 else P260 Judge the tool position signal 12012 1 Close the tool post CW rotation r4011 50 Set to delay 50ms time Programming Chapter Ten Customized Command Programming N0284 N0290 N0300 N0310 N0320 N0322 N0324 N0330 N0340 N0350 N0360 N0370 N0380 N0390 N0400 N0410 N0420 N0430 N0432 N0434 N0440 N0450 N0460 N0470 N0472 N0474 N0480 N0490 N0500 N0510 N0520 N0530 N0540 N0550 N0560 when r4011 lt 2 then P290 else P284 Delay 50ms r2011 0 Tool post CCW rotation r4011 r40 Set the tool postt CCW rotation time when r4011 lt 5 then P320 else P310 Check the to
501. tool rapidly traverses to the workpiece turn 045mm with cylindrical surface cycle command tool infeed 4mm and cycle again tool infeed 4mm and cycle again tool infeed 3mm and cycle again Programming N0155 N0160 N0170 N0180 N0190 N0200 N0210 N0220 N0230 N0240 N0250 N0260 N0270 N0280 N0290 N0300 N0310 N0320 N0330 N0340 GOO X45 5 G90 X40 5 Z65 X35 5 X30 5 GOO X100 2150 T22 S2 GOO Z103 X32 G01 X27 X30 Z101 5 F60 Z65 X45 Z35 X60 Zo GOO X100 2150 M5 M9 M2 7 4 2 Thread machining example Chapter Seven General Programming Rules and Examples X rapidly traverses the starting point of next cycle turn 30mm with cylindrical surface cycle command tool infeed 5mm and cycle again tool infeed 5mm and cycle again retract tool to safety position execute No 2 tool change set to the spindle high speed tool approaches the workpiece tool infeed to starting point of chamfer finish chamfer 1 5mm finish outer 30mm finish outer 045mm finish outer P60mm tool returns the origin point close the spindle cooling OFF end of program Example 2 as Fig 34 Rod 30x100 mm No 1 is roughing tool No 3 is parting tool No 4 for 60 N0000 N0010 N0020 N0030 threading tool GOO X50 211 M3 S2 M8 T11 LL 1 Te ri X1 Fig 7 3 thread machining example set a workpiece coordinate system start the spindle set the spindle speed to No 2 gear cooling ON execute No 1 to
502. ts The command only in an alone block it waits to execute it after the previous is executed and it executes the next block after The command only in an alone block is executed 3 When the user needs to execute the next after the previous all commands are executed he needs to insert one G04 DO command 253 CGSN I HIS i 7 4 Programming Example GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual The following programming example uses the tool as Fig 7 1 nA KA 7 4 1 No 1 tool No 2 tool No 3 tool No 4 tool Fig 7 1 Programming example tool shape Outer machining example Example 1 workpiece in Fig 7 2 Rod 64x105 mm No 1 tool is used for roughing No 2 for finishing N0000 N0010 N0020 N0030 N0040 N0050 N0060 N0070 N0080 N0090 N0100 N0110 N0120 N0130 N0140 N0150 254 CG90 inner outer cylindrical surface turning cycle dy GOO X100 2150 M3 S1 M8 T11 GOO Z103 X65 G01 X0 F60 GOO Z105 X60 5 G01 ZO F60 GOO X62 Z105 X60 5 G90 X56 5 Z35 F100 X52 5 X48 5 X45 5 Fig 7 2 outer machining example set a the workpiece coordinate system start the spindle and set to the spindle speed gear 1 cooling ON execute NO 1 tool change and execute its compensation tool rapidly approaches the workpiece cut the end face with 60mm min tool leaves the end face of workpiece position the tool with the allowance 0 5mm turn outer 060 5 tool leaves the surface of workpiece
503. ts the selected programs and displays the sending process till the sending is completed when the selected programs are so many the system sends the programs from the small to the big of their program number till the sending is completed press ESC to interrupt the sending in the course of sending USB communication 1 After entering USB communication mode the system firstly checks whether U disc has inserted if not it displays the prompt box Have not inserted USB If the disc has inserted it ha s C928PRO file and USB file catalog lists CNCxxx TXT when U disc has C928PRO where has no CNCxxx TXT USB catalog box displays the blank When U disc has no C 928PRO USB file catalog box is not displayed 2 Output the part program stored the system to U disc as follows 0000 9 insert U disc in the system USB the system automatically open U file catalog create a file in the U disc C928PRO file format CNCxxx TXT The system creates C928PRO when there is no C928PRO in the U disc root catalog Press key to input hp6 gt U Select the required programs to send according to the system _hp2 help message Press ENTER to send and the system prompts to select the sending mode the system outputs the selected programs based on the selected sending mode and displays the sending process till the sending is completed select ESC to escape U disc 4 3 3 2 Recei
504. turns to M96 to again run one time after M96 is executed Example Method 1 Method 2 N0010 G00 X100 Z100 N0010 G00 X100 Z100 N0020 M96 P70 Q80 L3 N0020 M96 P40 Q50 L3 N0030 G01 W 5 N0030 M97 P0060 N0040 U5 W 5 N0040 G02 U5 W 5 R5 F300 N0050 W 5 N0050 G03 U5 W 5 R5 N0060 M30 N0060 G01 W 5 N0070 G02 U5 W 5 R5 F300 N0070 U5 W 5 N0080 G03 U5 W 5 R5 N0080 W 5 N0090 M30 Method 1 after M96 specifies the call specified program three times the cursor returns to N0030 and continuously runs till the program ends Method 2 after M96 specifies the call specified program three times the cursor returns to N0030 and then the system uses M97 to continuously runs till the program ends The results of method 1 and method 2 are the same 148 Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions 3 1 12 M97 Program transfer Command format M97 P program transfer Field P transfer to block number The leading zero of the block number can be omitted Explanation M97 commands the program to transfer from the block to the program specified by P Block number specified by P appears in the block otherwise the program alarms E215 line number miss The block number specified by P is M97 block Generally the death cycle must not be created in M97 Example N0030 G00 X100 N0040 M98 P0060 N0050 M97 P0090 No060 G01 U2 N0070 W 5 N0080 M99 NO090 M02 Execute N0050 to directly do N0090 instead of N0
505. tween CNC and U disc by USB interface 5 2 1 USB operation For the USB operation the user directly inserts the U disc into the USB interface of the system panel and the system automatically identifies and opens the U disc when the U disc requires to create the file and the file name in the root catalog according to the system file catalog At the same time the system window displays USB icon 133 CGSN I HSZ Notes GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 1 After the U disc is used the user must firstly press ESC to close the U disc before pulling out it at the moment the system displaying USB icon disappears and then the user can pull out the U disc from USB interface otherwise the mistaken operation damages the system hardware and the U disc 2 Must not pull out the U disc when its indicator flashes because it is reading or writing the data otherwise it can damage the system hardware and data 3 The U disc has the write protect switch and the user switches it before inserting the U disc and cannot do it when the U disc is working 4 The user should reduce the storage content in the U disc otherwise it influences the communication speed between the system and the U disc It is suggested the user should not use the USB interface or big movement storage 5 When the U disc operation is fail the user should press RESET and insert the U disc to operate it again 5 2 2 USB file catalog requirement
506. uck Modify parameter P409_d7 E341 Spindle doesn t When the spindle and chuck are Stop the spindle the operate the tailstock il locking each other don t operate the stop no tai tailstock without stopped the spindle E342 Forbid function The parameter has set to forbid of tail stock control the tailstock Modify the parameter P409_d4 E343 The system cannot check the valid f M10 no respond chuck champing selection signal ia la clamp selection signalis RM11 in controlling chuck champing E344 The system cannot check the valid Check the chuck releasing selection M11 no respond chuck releasing selection signal lt D signal is in normal or not RM11 in controlling chuck releasing E345 the system cannot check the valid tailstock going forward in position Check the tailstock signal is in normal or M78 no respond signal RM78 in controlling tailstock not going forward E346 The system cannot check the valid tailstock going backward in position Check the tailstock going backward signal M79 no respond R aoe 9 9 TSSP9 signal alarm 79 in controlling tailstock is in normal or not going backward E347 The non frequency The system cant execute the spindle constant surface speed command Modify the spindle collocated parameter G96 or gear shifting command P410_d6 M41 M44 in non frequency spindle 272 Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message program is forbi
507. ulse monitoring r7100 eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesreeeeeeeeeeseeseeereeeeeeeeeeeeee 295 9 3 5 Pulse monitoring program exampleseeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeseesseseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesee 296 9 3 6 Variable transfer register r7900 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseeeeee 297 9 4 Attached Listseeeseseesesessesesseseseeeeeeesoccesescsseecsseecsseccecesescssecoseeecssescsesoseescssesosoesesossesossesosseseseeseseesesese 298 9 4 1 ASCII A E E E E 298 9 4 2 Often used color and code value corresponding List eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeccceeccoceecoseecocceccoccecoscesososee 298 CHAPTER TEN CUSTOMIZATION COMMAND PROGRAM sssssssesseeesesceeccseccoscoecceccoecceecoceoeccescoscoeccoseoeeseseoe 299 LOL Cu st miati n Command is ieie Enne seite esea n ar rasi EO ES EEKE SENEE TN EEEE NEET 299 10 1 1 Customization command program format ssesseseeeeeeseseeeeeesecceccsecoeecoccsecocsoocesesoosesecsososeeseseoe 299 10 2 Customization Command Store P254 ssssssesseeeeeeseeeececccoseecccccccooeeccecccosseecccccossoesceececsseesseese 300 10 2 1 Format and debugging of customization command storeroom sseesseseseeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 300 10 2 2 Explanation of customized command storage PEPPER FPE POEP EO PI E PPE T 301 10 2 3 Customized command machining example PPE A AEE E AA AEE ES 301 CHAPTER ONE INTERFACE ttsesseeeeeeeeecsecceeccecceccoecoecocccoccceccocesecceseoccceccocc
508. un K yur yun 5 Al rp anq OANA e 5 V O p35 ms aPOW JOULUOD aUO 4323S Las O b uoD Cc Q O Cc oc g x lt Lona aie W gS1 ZEZSA DAN Sx bsod Oe oe anduisyndyno rx aous rx c Q Y X N 9 o fa D S Q e Q oO lt x 349 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Appendix 5 CNC system appearance installation dimension 241 1 25 Br User installation dimension drawing 261 E INPUT ENTER e SZ AJER DELETE i HA s t al Pups Vue Vue ROVERRIDE F3 Mi x mN sow Par 0 sso Anannanannannnnannanannan AWUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU OER CNC oera 350
509. und program call subprogram multi level embedding Program drawing check Communication USB RS232 interface bidirectionally transmitting programs parameters and offset between CNC and USB CNC and PC CNC and CNC Supporting software RS232 USB to download and upgrade Optional drive unit DA98 Series Digital AC Servo or DY3 Series Stepper Drive unit with pulse direction signal input CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 2 2 Functional difference between 928TEa and 928TCa turning CNC system The manual is applied to two types of system 928TEa 928TCa Functions of 928TCa turning CNC system are less than those of 928TEa as follows Functional 928TEa 928TCa Remark difference item Controllable axis X Y Z X Z Rapid traverse Max 30000 mm min Max 15000 mm min speed Cutting speed 0 001 15000 mm min 0 001 4000 mm min Max radius of arc Max machining 1000m Max machining 100m Tool nose radius C tool radius compensation PROGRAMMING No the function compensation Chapter 5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Fine linear pitch error compensation Pitch error PROGRAMMING Chapter 6 Pitch Error No the function compensation Compensation Automatic chamfer function Automatic chamfer function PROGRAMMING Chapter 4 4 Chamfer Function No the function Variable pitch thread Variable pitch thread G34 PROGRAMMING
510. urn Example G26 Z150 X100 Y100 return to program reference point through the middle point Z150 X100 Y100 G26 U0 X directly returns to program reference point and other axes do not move 4 10 G28 Return to Machine Zero Machine Reference Point Command format G28 Z W _ Zrapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move G28 X U _ X rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move G28 Y V ___ Y rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move Field X Z Y absolute coordinates of middle point U W V relative movement from starting point to middle point Field range X Z U W Y V 9999 999mm 9999 999mm Relative parameter 183 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Main parameters related to G28 PO021 P026 P109 P110 P111 P406 and P407 Explanation 1 When the machine zero check devices zero switch and deceleration switch are not installed on the corresponding coordinate axis P406 corresponding bit parameter is set to 0 in executing G28 the system does not check the Zero signal and deceleration signal and the axis moves the middle point and returns to its zero coordinate position 2 When the machine zero check devices zero switch and deceleration switch are installed on the corresponding coordinate axis P406 corresponding bit parameter is set to 1 in executing G
511. us parameter P324 The parameter defines the durable time of tool post motor CCW rotation signal in the electronic tool post executing the tool change unit ms Note P324 value should be debugged to the proper value with the different electronic tool post When the parameter value is too big the tool post motor becomes hot to be damaged When the parameter value is too small the tool post cannot be locked so use the different value in debugging to select the proper parameter value 103 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Time upper limit of tool change indexing ms __ miscellaneous parameter P325 The parameter defines max durable time in the electronic or line up tool post executing the tool change unit ms Interface parameter related to tool post Tool post worktable output TZD __ interface parameter P507 The parameter controls the motor brake device the brake coil voltage is DC 24V it is open in power on and closed in power off When it is turned off when the motor runs it brakes in power on when the motor is turned off Tool post worktable pregraduation output TFD __ interface parameter P508 The parameter controls the pregraduation proximity switch Pregraduation in position check TFDC __ interface parameter P528 The parameter checks the pregraduation proximity switch in position signal Tool selection strobe signal TXT __ interface parameter P529 The parameter is the strobe signal
512. ut along the command group path and at last returns to the starting point and the roughing is completed When the roughing offset value roughing allowance is set in advance before executing the roughing command the system automatically offsets one offset to execute the roughing The finishing tool can be used before executing the roughing command Use G710 to execute the finishing G71 includes the following 3 commands G71 U W use U W to specify roughing offset value G71 XUI K F P Q G71 axial roughing cycle 204 Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions G710 X U PQF G710 finishing The following introduces separately the above 3 commands G71 axial roughing cycle G71 is called the axial roughing cycle command to realize the compound cycle roughing of one group of slop command group The system executes the gradual roughing along the axial called sidestep roughing and execute the cutting along the command group path called as contour first turning and at last returns to the initial point and the roughing is completed The chapter describes the execution process of G71 roughing command imagine the offset value of roughing is WO UO Command format G71 X U _ I K_ F P_ Q_ Inner outer roughing compound cycle Field X U X coordinate value of finishing contour starting point X tool infeed once without sign cannot be 0 K X tool retraction once without sign P Q finishing
513. ut interface can be get For example R2002 0 expression of outputting 1 to UO02 pin the outside can form the conductive loop R2016 1 expression of output 0 to UO16 pin in the high resistance the outside can t form the conductive loop r2007 r8 confirm the UOO7 output state by the content of r8 zero or non zero when r2016 1 then P0100 when the output of current UO16 is read to be 1 it will go to P0100 Explanation 1 Only the output pin which is released by the standard function definition allows to the variable assignment output because of the system limitation otherwise alarm it only can make the statement program to pin with UO in the diagnosis interface when it makes program to the defined input signal pin it alarms 2 In the system boot strap and power on beginning the system will set r2001 r2032 to be 1 the outside can t form the conductive loop 280 Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming 9 1 2 4 Keyboard scan register R5001 Keyboard scan register r5001 value range 32 digit without sign The different numerical value which is written by register has different meanings the system executes the relative command according to the written numerical value Please refer the below table The gathered table of r5001 executing keyboard scan commands the system forbids to use this variable in the process monitor description sentence
514. ut is cancelled and the cooling is OFF MOQ has no corresponding output signal and the system releases M08 output interface when 146 Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions MO9 is executed M08 signal output is closed when the system appears emergency stop In Jog Auto or Diagnosis mode the COOLING key on the operation panel can control cooling ON OFF see OPERATION 4 4 JOG Working Mode 3 1 7 M10 M11 M12 clamping releasing workpiece cancelling chuck output signal Command format M10 clamping workpiece M11 releasing workpiece M12 cancelling chuck output signal only some special check device can use M12 Explanation M11 is valid and M10 output is invalid when the system is turned on The parameter can set M10 M11 to be valid invalid to be checked or not to be pulse or level control output and to be inner or outer control mode Interlock between M10 M11 and spindle is decided by P402_d5 P402_d5 0 they are interlocked P402_d5 1 their interlock is released See OPERATION 4 4 JOG Working Mode 3 1 8 M32 M33 Lubricating ON OFF Command format M32 lubricating ON M33 lubricating OFF Explanation After the system is turned on M33 is valid and M32 output is invalid Parameter P330 sets whether the system automatically controls lubricating See OPERATION 4 4 JOG Working Mode 3 1 9 M41 M42 M44 M43 Spindle Automatic Gear Shifting Control Command format M41 Spi
515. ut the new content The cursor points the next character 28 Operation Chapter Four System Operation Example Example alter Xin N0020 GO X0 0 Z0 0into U as follows Switch the input mode into ALTER mode move the cursor to the down of X and input U Alter to N0020 GO U0 0 ZO0 0 4 3 4 7 Inserting a macro character string Insert macro character string content in program edit window as follows press hp6 and the system displays macro character string list select the required input content according to the press key list the front of the colon is the press key value the following is the inserted character string content Example Example press_hp6 and then _G the program content input r r r r the cursor stops the following of r Note Concrete variable and statement programming are referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter 9 Statement Programming 4 3 4 8 Program stored space For No 0 252 No 254 program the system provides 800K stored space and so the single program can be up to 800K For No 253 program the system provides 4m FLASH stored space Explanation 1 The system displays the program leftover space and prompts the leftover stored space size 2 When the current edit No O 252 No 254 program size are more than all stored space max 800K the programs cannot be saved and the system prompts the storage space has full Overflow in edit areal Delete the old programs when the leftover space is not enoug
516. uto lubricating P330 is set to 0 non automatic lubricating is controlled by the command about the lubricating ON OFF In JOG AUTO working mode input lubricating ON OFF M32 M33 is valid After M32 is executed lubricating outputs after M33 is executed the lubricating output is cancelled 2 Automatic lubricating It is the automatic lubricating at regular time when P330 is set to other except for 0 The system can set Lubricating starting time and Lubricating interval time After the system is turned on it executes the lubricating in the time set by P330 then stops the output executes the cycle lubricating after the set time is performed In automatic lubricating M32 M33 are invalid Note When the system starts the automatic lubricating function P330 and P331 values are more than 1s when they are less than 1s the system takes them as 1s 4 4 9 3 Machine electricity delay power on control When the system needs the function the operator should define its output pin in the interface parameter and correctly connects with wiring the system output the signal in the corresponding pin P505 MDLY machine electricity delay power on control signal Functional description When the system defines the machine electricity delay power on control signal in the interface parameter and the system is turned on within 3s it outputs the customized pin to the machine 65 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual electricity
517. valid the display is 1 The input interface signal diagnosis is executed circularly the system anytime displays the current signal state Input interface signal definition is defined by the parameter changing corresponding setting of the parameter can change the input interface signal definition Example When the standard configuration of the electronic tool post is 4 tool selections When the system allocates the electronic tool post with 4 tool selections the diagnosis message is as follows P320 is set to 4 P319issetto4 P318 is set 1 electronic tool post The top left displays T1 T4 diagnosis message in the diagnosis input interface window 4 8 4 Output interface diagnosis explanation Each bit display is 0 in the output interface diagnosis the corresponding bit output is valid When the display is 1 the corresponding bit output is invalid The output interface diagnosis display is the current each output big hold state When the signal is pulse the bit is still 1 although the output is valid Output interface signal definition is defined by the parameter and changing the corresponding setting of the parameter can change the definition of output interface signal 4 8 5 Output interface operation function Move the cursor by the direction key to the required writing output signal press 1 or O to change the output signal value where the cursor is when it is different with the current value it is displayed in red and it i
518. valid invalid P409_d4 is effective or change the program command 269 CGSN I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting number E612 Illegal use M41 The function of M41 is set to be Modify P410_d6 1 frequency invalid conversion or Command invalid Sarr eed level or change the program command E613 Illegal use M42 The function of M42 is set to be Modify P410_d6 1 frequency invalid conversion or Command invalid P410_d7 0 electrical level or change the program command E614 Illegal use M43 The M43 function is set to be invalid Modify P410_d6 1 frequency conversion or Command invalid Se a are level or change the program command E615 Illegal use M44 The M44 function is set to be invalid Modify P410_d6 1 frequency conversion or Command invalid Sr aaa level or change the program command E616 Illegal use M32 The M32 function is not expanded to Set P506 1 or change the Command invalid be effective program command E617 Illegal use M33 The M33 function is not expanded to Set P506 1 or change the Command invalid be effective program command E618 Illegal use M10 The M10 function is set to be invalid Modify P409_d7 to be Command invalid effective or change the program command E619 Illegal use M11 The M10 function is set to be invalid Modify P409_d7 to be Command
519. ve to the finishing path Command format and definition G730 X U _ Z W _ P Q_ F_ G730 finishing Or G730 ignoring it means to be consistent with the roughing command X U X coordinate value of contour starting point in finishing Z W Z coordinate value of contour starting point in finishing P Q line number of the block from the initial to the final in finishing contour F finishing cutting feedrate Explanation 1 G730 other explanations are same those of G71 G72 roughing offset commands and G710 G720 finishing commands 2 When the system executes G730 it cuts along the command group path and returns to the starting point the finishing is completed 3 G73 command group finishing positioning point is different with the roughing positioning point the tool movement path automatically coincides 4 Coordinate offset direction in left roughing allowance I K U W express the coordinate offset and cut in direction in roughing and finishing generally K and W signs are consistent each other and there are four kinds of composition as Fig 4 45 215 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Ais start up tool point B C is the workpiece contour B gt C is the roughing contour and B C is the finishing path 1 K0 U lt 0 K gt 0 W gt 0 2 I gt 0 U gt 0 K gt 0 W gt 0 Pea i 3 I lt 0 U lt 0 K lt 0 W lt 0 4 b0 U gt 0 K lt 0 W lt Example 200
520. ve terminal CNC Drive unit 5 XD 6 ZD Z positive terminal CNC Drive unit 6 13 XD 7 XEN X enabling or amplifier r CNC Drive unit i 14 ZD 8 5V X Z drive power supply T XEN 5V 8 45V 15 ZEN 9 ZALM Z drive unit alarm input Drive unit CNC i terminal x3 tor DB15 l 10 OV 24V earthing motor male 11 XP X pulse negative terminal CNC Drive unit 12 ZP Z pulse negative terminal CNC Drive unit 13 XD X negative terminal CNC Drive unit 14 ZD Z negative terminal CNC Drive unit 15 ZEN Z enabling amplifier CNC Drive unit 3 5 2 3 5 3 3 5 3 1 Technical specifications e Max pulse output frequency 250kHZ e Pulse width 2us Equivalent circuit P405_d4 P405_d3 P405_d2 set the drive unit alarm level is LOW or HIGH The drive unit must use Drive unit alarm signal XALM ZALM YALM the following methods to provide the signals 328 Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection Alarm signal CNC side Drive unit side 3 5 3 2 Enabling signal XEN ZEN When the CNC operates normally the enabling signal output is valid the enabling signal is connected with OV When the drive unit alarms and the emergency stop alarms CNC closes the enabling signal output enabling signal is not connected with OV and the circuit layout is as follow TLP181 TLP181 CNC side Drive unit side 3 5 3 3 Pulse signal and direction signal XP XP
521. ved reserved reserved d3 reserved reserved reserved d7__ parameter window prompt range 0 close close the parameter value range prompt 1 open open the parameter value range prompt 114 Operation Chapter Four System Operation d3__diagnosis window prompt 0 close II close the prompt message in DIAGNOSIS working mode 1 open open the prompt message in DIAGNOSIS working mode Communication interface __ bit parameter P414 password level 2 d7 d6 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved d0 d7__baud rate selection P414_d6 0 valid 0 9600 Bit selection Baud rate 4 19200 d7 0 d6 0 9600 d6__ baud rate selection prior ene ees bee d7 0 d6 1 38400 0 itis determined by d7 d7 1 d6 1 1 38400 d0__ debugging function bit 0 normal state the user is generally set to the normal state 1 debugging state use in debugging software Function switch __ bit parameter P416 password level 3 d7 d6 d5 d4 reserved reserved reserved d0 d7__memorize current password level 0 donot memorize do not memorize the password level the system displays Please input user password when the system enters the parameter password input window 1 memorize memorize the parameter password level enter the previous memorized parameter setting window d6__ delete all pro
522. ving part programs PC CNC USB CNC CNC gt CNC Method 1 RS232 serial communication 1 Set the communication software baud and communication terminals Setting communication 22 Operation Chapter Four System Operation b aud rate is referred to OPERATION 4 6 Parameter Working mode 2 input the part program stored in the external PC to the system or transmit part programs CROC OMS Method 2 between two systems as follows connect with communication cable in power off press key to input hp6 R edit select the receiving mode according to the system prompt programs in the external PC or another system are input to the CNC system the system selects the receiving mode and inputs the programs displays the receiving process till the receiving is completed press ESC to interrupt the receiving in the course of receiving USB communication 1 After entering USB communication mode the system firstly checks U disc and opens C 928PRO existed in the U disc and lists CNCxxx TXT file 2 Output part program stored in U disc to the CNC system as follows eOeblH0O Note insert U disc in the system USB interface press key to input hp6 U EDIT the system automatically opens U disc file catalog select the required programs to receive according to the system hp2 help message press ENTER to receive and select the sending mode according to the system prompt input t
523. w coordinate value Input INPUT V NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER The current Y machine coordinate is modified into the new coordinate value Input INPUT W NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER The current Z machine coordinate is modified into the new coordinate value 4 4 2 3 Setting workpiece coordinate system The system uses the floating workpiece coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system is the reference to toolsetting and relative dimension After the machine coordinate system is confirmed the workpiece coordinate system should be set Format Input INPUT X NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER The current X tool nose coordinate is modified into the new coordinate value Input INPUT Y NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER The current Y tool nose coordinate is modified into the new coordinate value Input INPUT Z NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER The current Z tool nose coordinate is modified into the new coordinate value Actual operation steps of setting workpice coordinate system are as follows Install the trial cutting workpiece on the machine and select any one tool generally use the first tool in the machining 1 Setting X workpiece coordinate 1 Select the proper spindle speed and start the spindle 2 Traverse the tool to cut a little sidestep on the workpiece and X does not move 3 The tool in Z direction moves to the safe position the spindle stops rotating The system measures the diameter of cut sidestep 4 Press INPUT and
524. whether M function output is valid is set by P403_d2 4 The automatic run ends the modal function and state keep Relative parameters P403_d2 0 the system closes M03 M04 M08 M32 output signals when the reset key is pressed P403_d2 1 the system does not close M03 M04 M08 M32 output signals when the reset key is pressed 4 2 CNC Working Mode Selection The system uses the working mode key to directly select the all working modes All working modes can direct switch to get the simple and convenient operations The display is as Fig 4 1 after the system is turned on and the display state keeps till the other key is pressed to enter the EDIT working mode 4 3 EDIT Working Mode EDIT working mode it is the working mode to execute the part program by the operation panel There is the corresponding intelligent prompt message for each operation At the same time the operator can press the prompt key hp2 at the top right to learn the operation key list in EDIT working mode The relative setting or operation key format and sample descriptions in the user manual are as follows meanings and uses of all required functions are described at the beginning of the corresponding chapter all required letter and digit keys are expressed with underlines the system prompt messages are expressed with borders In executing some setting or input or man machine dialogue press ESC key to escape the current ESC operation before key
525. witches into the feed state 15 CGSR P Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 The interface output signals of the chuck tailstock and machine in the electricity power on delay do not change the system sets the internal memory state to M11 M79 After the emergency stop is released the system chuck and tailstock state is separate M10 M78 after the chuck or the tailstock pedal switch is pressed firstly 4 Besides the above functions other function states are initial mode the system stops all feed the spindle the cooling and other switching controls set the output to be invalid Relative parameters The external emergency stop signal function is valid when P404_d7 is set to 0 The external emergency stop signal function is invalid when P404_d7 is set to 1 The parameter is for debugging the system and must be set to valid in the power on state otherwise it cannot have the protective effect 4 1 4 4 Drive unit alarm When the system is connected with the alarm output signal of a drive unit and appears Drive unit alarms the system automatically closes all feed and prompts Z X Y drive unit alarms All axes immediately stop motion and the program stops running At the moment check the drive unit and relative device to troubleshooting and the system is turned on again When there is the alarm in the course of motion there may be great deviation between the coordinates displayed the system and the actual
526. xternal interference Single phase three phase AC220V 341 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 3 7 X5 MPG Interface The CNC system can be externally connected with MPG by the MPG interface X5 MPG can control the coordinate axis move When the MPG connection line is less than 1m it can use the single terminal connection when it is more than 1 5m it can use the difference connection to improve the anti interference ability The input pins are not connected when the MPG has no MA MB 3 7 1 Signal definition Standard Pin Pin function signal name 1 5V O a 6 OV 1 Gd 2 MAt g 2 MA MPG A pulse i T MB 3 MA MPG A pulse 3 M 8 MB 4 Empty 5 Empty 6 OV 7 MB MPG B pulse 8 MB MPG B pulse X5 MPG 9 Empty 3 7 2 Interface method When MA MA and MB MB are taken as the difference 26LS31 output it is suggested that the system uses 26LS32 to receive the signals and the circuit method is as follows 3 7 3 Connection layout Less than 15m cable MPG CNC side When the axis moving is controlled by V V MPG the moving direction of MPG lt q 1 ov ov le cannot be changed quickly otherwise At MA 9 the moving distance does not coincide B MB Lo with the MPG dial A gt va d g Y it should adopt the shield cable B MB 5g between the system and MPG When the MPG output signal is not in the difference output mode MA is not
527. y after this operation 2 In waiting for pressing when the ESC is pressed it will cancel the press key input and executes the next statement 3 The acceptable key symbol is as the below table the other key input is ineffective Notes The input value is the corresponding ASCII value of this key symbol The r5001 acceptable key symbol and the input value corresponding table Dee alli Gaai lidpe E E e 6 7 8 9 ENTER ESC symbol input 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 45 46 13 01 value Input E OES e OR T EE Input 74 77 88 90 83 84 85 87 70 73 75 68 82 value 281 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual 9 1 2 5 Display window register r5002 Display window register r5002 the system forbids to use this variable in the process monitor description statement Through the operation to the display window register the system can construct a window in the display screen and used to prompt the program execution step alarm etc information The different value is written in the register has different meanings the system executes the relative command according to the written value Please refer the following table The r5002 execution command table Command meaning the user information only can be displayed in the display window number 0 close the display win
528. y catalog The relative settings operation input formats and example descriptions are as follows all required function keys are expressed with icons all input letter keys or digit keys are expressed with underline the system prompting message is expressed with frame Press to cancel the mistaken input when the input letter or digit is wrong ESC Press to escape the current operation before confirmation when the operator executes some setting or some operation or man machine dialog Note before the operator modifies the parameter all parameter setting values in the system must be saved save them to personal PC Once the parameter is changed by mistake or the system the system can recover by the saved data The system classifies the parameters reference point coordinate parameter motion parameter transmission parameter miscellaneous function parameter interface parameter variable initial value parameter and pitch parameter 0O Press AER to enter PARAMETER working mode the system pops up the window to require inputting the password the operator inputs the password or directly presses ENTER to enter the parameter window a _____ Z reference point 303 698 X Move Para X reference point 203 698 Y reference point 0 00 Z 2 ref point 200 X 2 ref point 200 5 Y 2 ref point 200 td W Varaible U A Keta DMOdmt KS reis poimi F Thread para EDIT AUTO Fig 4 10 pa
529. y including the system command help relative parameter help for arc line number sort character string replacing cursor positioning and MPG controlling cursor moving and so on When the current program is No 253 or No 254 hp5 help key adds its operation prompt 4 3 5 1 Part program command help the function can search all commands of the system including G M S T F as follows In program edit window press hp5 1_ the system prompts Command help introduction window 1 G M S 1T E separately introduces G M S T F command 2 press INPUT and input the command number to search the system displays the definition the function the format and the explanation of the command number Example Example search G05 command help Press ho 5 1 INPUT G 05 ENTRE the system displays G05 definition function format and explanation 4 3 5 2 Relative parameter help for arc Press hp5 2 in the program edit window the system prompts Input relative arc parameters window the function can search arc parameters Input starting point coordinates end point coordinates circle radius the system automatically counts the relative parameters of arc Example Starting point A coordinates 60 10 end point B coordinates 40 30 as follows 30 Operation Chapter Four System Operation NI Input relative arc parameters Starting point coordinates Z 60 X 10 End point coordinates Z 40 X 30 Circle ra
530. y move GOO Z CW X U _ two axes rapidly move i e Z X ZIY X Y G00 Z W _ Z alone rapidly moves or Z X Y alone moves G00 Y V _ Y alone rapidly moves Y Field X Z Y absolute coordinates of end point U W V relative movement from starting point to end point Use relative or absolute coordinates omit the coordinates which are not moved with G00 and coordinate field Field range X Z Y U W V 9999 999 9999 999 mm X Z Y U W V 9999 999 9999 999 mm Explanation One both or all of Z X Y move simultaneously When the tool change is executed the tool compensation command and G00 are the same block adding the tool compensation value to G00 movement value are executed to improve the work efficiency so the tool change tool compensation and GOO should be in the same one block GOO actual run speed is controlled by the rapid override For example when GOO rapidly traverses in the alone movement mode the actual speed is set by P100 P101 P102 Z actual rapid speed P100 x rapid override X actual rapid speed P101 xrapid override Y actual rapid speed P102 xrapid override The actual max speed of the machine is defined by its actual condition and matched motor For particular parameters please see the manual from machine manufacture GOO is the modal command and can be omitted in the next same block GOO can be omitted to GO and GO and G00 are equivalent Relative parameters Parameters relat
531. yed in highlight state Efficiency setting __bit parameter P401 password level 3 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 reserved reserved d7__ TMS command in DRY RUN working mode 0 Execution in DRY RUN working mode output and check the signal in executing the miscellaneous command which is the same in the normal machining 1 skip in DRY RUN working mode do not output and check the signal in executing the miscellaneous command d6__ feed command in DRY RUN 0 constant speed in DRY RUN working mode the execution speed of feed command is set by the program which is the same in the normal machining 1 acceleration in DRY RUN working mode the execution speed of feed command is not controlled by the program and the max speed P113 of cutting feed demonstrates the program path d5_ short linear high speed 0 high speed connection the short linear connection transition uses the high speed connection 1 do not use the short linear connection transition does not use the high speed connection I P401_d5 0 for the short movement the continuous short linearity without blank line annotation line or other block between blocks with rapid execution CNC uses the prospective control mode to realize the best speed connection transition max preread blocks reach 80 d4__ cutting command 106 Operation Chapter Four System Operation 0 continuous smooth transition 1 decelerate to zero
532. ystem User Manual when the incremental value becomes big the motion stops when it reaches the software limit point and the system prompts the limit alarm message In the inputting field move mode to input command to execute Z X link when the specified value exceeds the range the system prompts the limit alarm message and refuses the execution Whether the machine and tool software limit alarm are valid is set by P404_d4 P404_d3 4 4 2 Creating coordinate system 4 4 2 1 Creating machine coordinate system_machine zero return machine reference point return Machine zero Machine coordinate system fixed on the machine is the reference coordinate system for CNC counting the coordinate position After the system is installed the operator should firstly create the machine coordinate system The reference point of the machine coordinate system is called machine zero or machine reference point or machine zero Some fixed point on each machine is taken as the machine reference point and the system firstly returns to the machine zero and then returns to the machining starting point to eliminate the machine coordinate system deviation caused by the power off and step out executing the zero return instead of toolsetting again after power off accidentally can find the machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system to continuously machine the workpiece In most conditions the system looks for the machine reference point by the deceleration
533. ystem automatically counts the surface speed as S value according to the current spindle speed the last speed is taken as the current speed when the spindle does not start the spindle initial speed is taken as the current speed when the system is switched on just now and X absolute coordinate value of tool nose The system automatically count the speed as S value according to the current constant surface cutting speed and X absolute value of tool nose when the system defaults S field in G97 In AUTO working mode and the initial state of the program execution in G96 the system automatically changes G96 into G97 after CYCLE START key is pressed the constant surface cutting is valid in machining the arc and the straight line in the course of machining In Jog working mode move X coordinate in feed state rapid feed indicator OFF in G96 G96 is valid the spindle speed changes along X coordinate value and is invalid in rapidly feed state rapid feed indicator ON S value of G96 is limited by S value of G50 Sxxxx and P304 P305 S initialization of G50 is P305 their limit relationship is as follows eG50 Sxxx lt P304 G50 Sxxx is invalid the spindle speed is regulated in G50 Sxxx lt P304 in G96 G50 Sxxx gt P304 G50 Sxxx is valid min spindle speed range is limited by P304 and max speed range is limited by the smaller between G50 Sxxx and P305 187 CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Example P304 value is
534. ystem safety operation tThe user should be responsible for own adding changing or modifying the previous CNC system and accessories tThe user should be responsible for the danger caused by the operation regulation maintenance installation and storage and delivery which are not performed according to the user manual CGSR I Hist GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual Contents CONTENTS CHAPTER ONE OVERVIEW cveescrsseseesesceesecccscccsccccscceccccescccccccesccsccccecccteccceccceesccceceesceesccesccesccececeesccececceseeeeees 1 CHAPTER TWO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS esseeeeeeeeeeeceeecccscecoceeccocecocecccoccecoccecooecccoccccoscecoseecosceccoseecoseeeoe 3 2 1 Technical specifications eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeereeeereeeereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereeseeeesereesereeeereesereesereeseee 3 2 2 Functional difference between 928TEa and 928TCa turning CNC systemeesererererereeeerererereeereeee 4 CHAPTER THREE OPERATION PANEL esseeseeeeeeeeeeceeceecoeccoecoecceccoecoeecoscoeccoseocecescoscoeccsscoeecessoeecessosccseecossoceseesoe 6 3 1 LCD Displayseeeeeeeereereeeereeeereeeereeeeseesereeeereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereesereeseneesereesereesereeseeeesene 6 3 2 LED Status Indicator esseeeseesseeeseesseeeseeeseeseeesoecsocescessoessoeesoesseseseesseesseesoeesoeesosesoeesoesesesesessoeesesesesesesee 6 3 3 Keyboardseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee

This user manual describes all items concerning the operation of the

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents